diff options
| author | Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz> | 2013-12-19 15:08:03 +0100 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz> | 2013-12-19 15:08:32 +0100 |
| commit | e23c34bb41da65f354fb7eee04300c56ee48f60c (patch) | |
| tree | 549fbe449d55273b81ef104a9755109bf4ae7817 /Documentation | |
| parent | staging: usbip: Remove double initialization of msg_namelen variable (diff) | |
| parent | Linux 3.13-rc4 (diff) | |
| download | linux-e23c34bb41da65f354fb7eee04300c56ee48f60c.tar.xz linux-e23c34bb41da65f354fb7eee04300c56ee48f60c.zip | |
Merge branch 'master' into for-next
Sync with Linus' tree to be able to apply fixes on top of newer things
in tree (efi-stub).
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
346 files changed, 15384 insertions, 2475 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/README b/Documentation/ABI/README index 10069828568b..1fafc4b0753b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/README +++ b/Documentation/ABI/README @@ -72,3 +72,16 @@ kernel tree without going through the obsolete state first. It's up to the developer to place their interfaces in the category they wish for it to start out in. + + +Notable bits of non-ABI, which should not under any circumstances be considered +stable: + +- Kconfig. Userspace should not rely on the presence or absence of any + particular Kconfig symbol, in /proc/config.gz, in the copy of .config + commonly installed to /boot, or in any invocation of the kernel build + process. + +- Kernel-internal symbols. Do not rely on the presence, absence, location, or + type of any kernel symbol, either in System.map files or the kernel binary + itself. See Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb index 2be603c52a24..a6b685724740 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ Description: that the USB device has been connected to the machine. This file is read-only. Users: - PowerTOP <power@bughost.org> - http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/ + PowerTOP <powertop@lists.01.org> + https://01.org/powertop/ What: /sys/bus/usb/device/.../power/active_duration Date: January 2008 @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ Description: will give an integer percentage. Note that this does not account for counter wrap. Users: - PowerTOP <power@bughost.org> - http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/ + PowerTOP <powertop@lists.01.org> + https://01.org/powertop/ What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<port[.port]>...:<config num>-<interface num>/supports_autosuspend Date: January 2008 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp index 5c53d28f775c..b9688de8455b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp @@ -61,6 +61,12 @@ Description: Interface for making ib_srp connect to a new target. interrupt is handled by a different CPU then the comp_vector parameter can be used to spread the SRP completion workload over multiple CPU's. + * tl_retry_count, a number in the range 2..7 specifying the + IB RC retry count. + * queue_size, the maximum number of commands that the + initiator is allowed to queue per SCSI host. The default + value for this parameter is 62. The lowest supported value + is 2. What: /sys/class/infiniband_srp/srp-<hca>-<port_number>/ibdev Date: January 2, 2006 @@ -153,6 +159,13 @@ Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org Description: InfiniBand service ID used for establishing communication with the SRP target. +What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/sgid +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: InfiniBand GID of the source port used for communication with + the SRP target. + What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/zero_req_lim Date: September 20, 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.18 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp index b36fb0dc13c8..ec7af69fea0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-transport-srp @@ -5,6 +5,24 @@ Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org Description: Instructs an SRP initiator to disconnect from a target and to remove all LUNs imported from that target. +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/dev_loss_tmo +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a transport + layer error has been observed before removing a target port. + Zero means immediate removal. Setting this attribute to "off" + will disable the dev_loss timer. + +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/fast_io_fail_tmo +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a transport + layer error has been observed before failing I/O. Zero means + failing I/O immediately. Setting this attribute to "off" will + disable the fast_io_fail timer. + What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/port_id Date: June 27, 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.24 @@ -12,8 +30,29 @@ Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org Description: 16-byte local SRP port identifier in hexadecimal format. An example: 4c:49:4e:55:58:20:56:49:4f:00:00:00:00:00:00:00. +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/reconnect_delay +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of seconds the SCSI layer will wait after a reconnect + attempt failed before retrying. Setting this attribute to + "off" will disable time-based reconnecting. + What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/roles Date: June 27, 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.24 Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org Description: Role of the remote port. Either "SRP Initiator" or "SRP Target". + +What: /sys/class/srp_remote_ports/port-<h>:<n>/state +Date: February 1, 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org, linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: State of the transport layer used for communication with the + remote port. "running" if the transport layer is operational; + "blocked" if a transport layer error has been encountered but + the fast_io_fail_tmo timer has not yet fired; "fail-fast" + after the fast_io_fail_tmo timer has fired and before the + "dev_loss_tmo" timer has fired; "lost" after the + "dev_loss_tmo" timer has fired and before the port is finally + removed. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-mass-storage b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-mass-storage new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad72a37ee9ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-mass-storage @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/mass_storage.name +Date: Oct 2013 +KenelVersion: 3.13 +Description: + The attributes: + + stall - Set to permit function to halt bulk endpoints. + Disabled on some USB devices known not to work + correctly. You should set it to true. + num_buffers - Number of pipeline buffers. Valid numbers + are 2..4. Available only if + CONFIG_USB_GADGET_DEBUG_FILES is set. + +What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/mass_storage.name/lun.name +Date: Oct 2013 +KenelVersion: 3.13 +Description: + The attributes: + + file - The path to the backing file for the LUN. + Required if LUN is not marked as removable. + ro - Flag specifying access to the LUN shall be + read-only. This is implied if CD-ROM emulation + is enabled as well as when it was impossible + to open "filename" in R/W mode. + removable - Flag specifying that LUN shall be indicated as + being removable. + cdrom - Flag specifying that LUN shall be reported as + being a CD-ROM. + nofua - Flag specifying that FUA flag + in SCSI WRITE(10,12) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index 39c8de0e53d0..b20e829d350f 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description: correspond to externally available input one of the named versions may be used. The number must always be specified and unique to allow association with event codes. Units after - application of scale and offset are microvolts. + application of scale and offset are millivolts. What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_voltageY-voltageZ_raw KernelVersion: 2.6.35 @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Description: physically equivalent inputs when non differential readings are separately available. In differential only parts, then all that is required is a consistent labeling. Units after application - of scale and offset are microvolts. + of scale and offset are millivolts. What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_capacitanceY_raw KernelVersion: 3.2 @@ -537,6 +537,62 @@ Description: value is in raw device units or in processed units (as _raw and _input do on sysfs direct channel read attributes). +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_z_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_z_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_z_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_x_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_x_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_x_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_y_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_y_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_y_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_z_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_z_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_z_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_x_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_x_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_x_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_y_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_y_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_y_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_z_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_z_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_z_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_voltageY_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_voltageY_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_voltageY_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_tempY_thresh_rising_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_tempY_thresh_falling_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_tempY_thresh_either_hysteresis +What: /sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_falling_hysteresis +what: /sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_rising_hysteresis +what: /sys/.../events/in_illuminance0_thresh_either_hysteresis +what: /sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_falling_hysteresis +what: /sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_rising_hysteresis +what: /sys/.../events/in_proximity0_thresh_either_hysteresis +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Specifies the hysteresis of threshold that the device is comparing + against for the events enabled by + <type>Y[_name]_thresh[_(rising|falling)]_hysteresis. + If separate attributes exist for the two directions, but + direction is not specified for this attribute, then a single + hysteresis value applies to both directions. + For falling events the hysteresis is added to the _value attribute for + this event to get the upper threshold for when the event goes back to + normal, for rising events the hysteresis is subtracted from the _value + attribute. E.g. if in_voltage0_raw_thresh_rising_value is set to 1200 + and in_voltage0_raw_thresh_rising_hysteresis is set to 50. The event + will get activated once in_voltage0_raw goes above 1200 and will become + deactived again once the value falls below 1150. + What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_roc_rising_value What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_roc_falling_value What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_raw_roc_rising_value @@ -811,3 +867,14 @@ Description: Writing '1' stores the current device configuration into on-chip EEPROM. After power-up or chip reset the device will automatically load the saved configuration. + +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_red_integration_time +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_green_integration_time +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_blue_integration_time +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensity_clear_integration_time +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_integration_time +KernelVersion: 3.12 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This attribute is used to get/set the integration time in + seconds. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..13f48afc534f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +What: /sys/class/mic/ +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + The mic class directory belongs to Intel MIC devices and + provides information per MIC device. An Intel MIC device is a + PCIe form factor add-in Coprocessor card based on the Intel Many + Integrated Core (MIC) architecture that runs a Linux OS. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x) +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + The directories /sys/class/mic/mic0, /sys/class/mic/mic1 etc., + represent MIC devices (0,1,..etc). Each directory has + information specific to that MIC device. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/family +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + Provides information about the Coprocessor family for an Intel + MIC device. For example - "x100" + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/stepping +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + Provides information about the silicon stepping for an Intel + MIC device. For example - "A0" or "B0" + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/state +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + When read, this entry provides the current state of an Intel + MIC device in the context of the card OS. Possible values that + will be read are: + "offline" - The MIC device is ready to boot the card OS. On + reading this entry after an OSPM resume, a "boot" has to be + written to this entry if the card was previously shutdown + during OSPM suspend. + "online" - The MIC device has initiated booting a card OS. + "shutting_down" - The card OS is shutting down. + "reset_failed" - The MIC device has failed to reset. + "suspending" - The MIC device is currently being prepared for + suspend. On reading this entry, a "suspend" has to be written + to the state sysfs entry to ensure the card is shutdown during + OSPM suspend. + "suspended" - The MIC device has been suspended. + + When written, this sysfs entry triggers different state change + operations depending upon the current state of the card OS. + Acceptable values are: + "boot" - Boot the card OS image specified by the combination + of firmware, ramdisk, cmdline and bootmode + sysfs entries. + "reset" - Initiates device reset. + "shutdown" - Initiates card OS shutdown. + "suspend" - Initiates card OS shutdown and also marks the card + as suspended. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/shutdown_status +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + An Intel MIC device runs a Linux OS during its operation. This + OS can shutdown because of various reasons. When read, this + entry provides the status on why the card OS was shutdown. + Possible values are: + "nop" - shutdown status is not applicable, when the card OS is + "online" + "crashed" - Shutdown because of a HW or SW crash. + "halted" - Shutdown because of a halt command. + "poweroff" - Shutdown because of a poweroff command. + "restart" - Shutdown because of a restart command. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/cmdline +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + An Intel MIC device runs a Linux OS during its operation. Before + booting this card OS, it is possible to pass kernel command line + options to configure various features in it, similar to + self-bootable machines. When read, this entry provides + information about the current kernel command line options set to + boot the card OS. This entry can be written to change the + existing kernel command line options. Typically, the user would + want to read the current command line options, append new ones + or modify existing ones and then write the whole kernel command + line back to this entry. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/firmware +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + When read, this sysfs entry provides the path name under + /lib/firmware/ where the firmware image to be booted on the + card can be found. The entry can be written to change the + firmware image location under /lib/firmware/. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/ramdisk +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + When read, this sysfs entry provides the path name under + /lib/firmware/ where the ramdisk image to be used during card + OS boot can be found. The entry can be written to change + the ramdisk image location under /lib/firmware/. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/bootmode +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + When read, this sysfs entry provides the current bootmode for + the card. This sysfs entry can be written with the following + valid strings: + a) linux - Boot a Linux image. + b) elf - Boot an elf image for flash updates. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/log_buf_addr +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + An Intel MIC device runs a Linux OS during its operation. For + debugging purpose and early kernel boot messages, the user can + access the card OS log buffer via debugfs. When read, this entry + provides the kernel virtual address of the buffer where the card + OS log buffer can be read. This entry is written by the host + configuration daemon to set the log buffer address. The correct + log buffer address to be written can be found in the System.map + file of the card OS. + +What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/log_buf_len +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: Sudeep Dutt <sudeep.dutt@intel.com> +Description: + An Intel MIC device runs a Linux OS during its operation. For + debugging purpose and early kernel boot messages, the user can + access the card OS log buffer via debugfs. When read, this entry + provides the kernel virtual address where the card OS log buffer + length can be read. This entry is written by host configuration + daemon to set the log buffer length address. The correct log + buffer length address to be written can be found in the + System.map file of the card OS. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd index 3105644b3bfc..1399bb2da3eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Description: One of the following ASCII strings, representing the device type: - absent, ram, rom, nor, nand, dataflash, ubi, unknown + absent, ram, rom, nor, nand, mlc-nand, dataflash, ubi, unknown What: /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/writesize Date: April 2009 @@ -128,9 +128,8 @@ KernelVersion: 3.4 Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org Description: Maximum number of bit errors that the device is capable of - correcting within each region covering an ecc step. This will - always be a non-negative integer. Note that some devices will - have multiple ecc steps within each writesize region. + correcting within each region covering an ECC step (see + ecc_step_size). This will always be a non-negative integer. In the case of devices lacking any ECC capability, it is 0. @@ -173,3 +172,15 @@ Description: This is generally applicable only to NAND flash devices with ECC capability. It is ignored on devices lacking ECC capability; i.e., devices for which ecc_strength is zero. + +What: /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/ecc_step_size +Date: May 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.10 +Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org +Description: + The size of a single region covered by ECC, known as the ECC + step. Devices may have several equally sized ECC steps within + each writesize region. + + It will always be a non-negative integer. In the case of + devices lacking any ECC capability, it is 0. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv index bdc00707c751..7f34a95bb963 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status Date: May 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman. What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface Date: May 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: The /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface file displays the batman mesh interface this <iface> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh index bdcd8b4e38f2..0baa657b18c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -1,22 +1,23 @@ What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms Date: May 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not. -What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/ap_isolation +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/<vlan_subdir>/ap_isolation Date: May 2011 -Contact: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> +Contact: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@meshcoding.com> Description: Indicates whether the data traffic going from a wireless client to another wireless client will be - silently dropped. + silently dropped. <vlan_subdir> is empty when referring + to the untagged lan. What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding Date: June 2010 -Contact: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Contact: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de> Description: Indicates whether the data traffic going through the mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the @@ -24,7 +25,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bridge_loop_avoidance Date: November 2011 -Contact: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Contact: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de> Description: Indicates whether the bridge loop avoidance feature is enabled. This feature detects and avoids loops @@ -41,21 +42,21 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth Date: October 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Defines the bandwidth which is propagated by this node if gw_mode was set to 'server'. What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_mode Date: October 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Defines the state of the gateway features. Can be either 'off', 'client' or 'server'. What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_sel_class Date: October 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Defines the selection criteria this node will use to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'. @@ -77,25 +78,14 @@ Description: What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval Date: May 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman sends its protocol messages. What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/routing_algo Date: Dec 2011 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Contact: Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> Description: Defines the routing procotol this mesh instance uses to find the optimal paths through the mesh. - -What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode -Date: May 2010 -Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> -Description: - Each batman node only maintains information about its - own local neighborhood, therefore generating graphs - showing the topology of the entire mesh is not easily - feasible without having a central instance to collect - the local topologies from all nodes. This file allows - to activate the collecting (server) mode. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-powercap b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-powercap new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..db3b3ff70d84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-powercap @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +What: /sys/class/powercap/ +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + The powercap/ class sub directory belongs to the power cap + subsystem. Refer to + Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt for details. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type> +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + A <control type> is a unique name under /sys/class/powercap. + Here <control type> determines how the power is going to be + controlled. A <control type> can contain multiple power zones. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type>/enabled +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This allows to enable/disable power capping for a "control type". + This status affects every power zone using this "control_type. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type>/<power zone> +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + A power zone is a single or a collection of devices, which can + be independently monitored and controlled. A power zone sysfs + entry is qualified with the name of the <control type>. + E.g. intel-rapl:0:1:1. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type>/<power zone>/<child power zone> +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Power zones may be organized in a hierarchy in which child + power zones provide monitoring and control for a subset of + devices under the parent. For example, if there is a parent + power zone for a whole CPU package, each CPU core in it can + be a child power zone. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/name +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Specifies the name of this power zone. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/energy_uj +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Current energy counter in micro-joules. Write "0" to reset. + If the counter can not be reset, then this attribute is + read-only. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/max_energy_range_uj +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Range of the above energy counter in micro-joules. + + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/power_uw +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Current power in micro-watts. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/max_power_range_uw +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Range of the above power value in micro-watts. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/constraint_X_name +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Each power zone can define one or more constraints. Each + constraint can have an optional name. Here "X" can have values + from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/constraint_X_power_limit_uw +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Power limit in micro-watts should be applicable for + the time window specified by "constraint_X_time_window_us". + Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/constraint_X_time_window_us +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Time window in micro seconds. This is used along with + constraint_X_power_limit_uw to define a power constraint. + Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type>/.../constraint_X_max_power_uw +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Maximum allowed power in micro watts for this constraint. + Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/<control type>/.../constraint_X_min_power_uw +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Minimum allowed power in micro watts for this constraint. + Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/constraint_X_max_time_window_us +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Maximum allowed time window in micro seconds for this + constraint. Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/constraint_X_min_time_window_us +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Minimum allowed time window in micro seconds for this + constraint. Here "X" can have values from 0 to max integer. + +What: /sys/class/powercap/.../<power zone>/enabled +Date: September 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org +Description + This allows to enable/disable power capping at power zone level. + This applies to current power zone and its children. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power index 9d43e7670841..efe449bdf811 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/devices/.../power/ Date: January 2009 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power directory contains attributes allowing the user space to check and modify some power @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup Date: January 2009 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup attribute allows the user space to check if the device is enabled to wake up the system @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/control Date: January 2009 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power/control attribute allows the user space to control the run-time power management of the device. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/async Date: January 2009 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../async attribute allows the user space to enable or diasble the device's suspend and resume callbacks to @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_count Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active_count attribute contains the number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_abort_count Date: February 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_abort_count attribute contains the number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_expire_count Date: February 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_expire_count attribute contains the number of times a wakeup event associated with the device has @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active attribute contains either 1, or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_total_time_ms attribute contains the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_max_time_ms attribute contains the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms Date: September 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_last_time_ms attribute contains the value of the monotonic clock corresponding to the time of @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_prevent_sleep_time_ms Date: February 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_prevent_sleep_time_ms attribute contains the total time the device has been preventing @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_latency_us Date: March 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_resume_latency_us attribute contains the PM QoS resume latency limit for the given device, @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_no_power_off Date: September 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_no_power_off attribute is used for manipulating the PM QoS "no power off" flag. If @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_remote_wakeup Date: September 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/devices/.../power/pm_qos_remote_wakeup attribute is used for manipulating the PM QoS "remote wakeup required" diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1d6a8cf9dc0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-ryos @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/control +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one select which data from which + profile will be read next. The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/profile +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. profile holds index of actual profile. + This value is persistent, so its value determines the profile + that's active when the device is powered on next time. + When written, the device activates the set profile immediately. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + The device will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_primary +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the default of all keys for + a specific profile. Profile index is included in written data. + The data has to be 125 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_function +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + function keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 95 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the macro + keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included in + written data. The data has to be 35 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_thumbster +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + thumbster keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 23 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_extra +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + capslock and function keys for a specific profile. Profile index + is included in written data. The data has to be 8 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/keys_easyzone +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the function of the + easyzone keys for a specific profile. Profile index is included + in written data. The data has to be 294 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/key_mask +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one deactivate certain keys like + windows and application keys, to prevent accidental presses. + Profile index for which this settings occur is included in + written data. The data has to be 6 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the backlight intensity for + a specific profile. Profile index is included in written data. + This attribute is only valid for the glow and pro variant. + The data has to be 16 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one store macros with max 480 + keystrokes for a specific button for a specific profile. + Button and profile indexes are included in written data. + The data has to be 2002 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile and key to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/info +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns general data like firmware version. + The data is 8 bytes long. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/reset +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one reset the device. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/talk +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one trigger easyshift functionality + from the host. + The data has to be 16 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light_control +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one switch between stored and custom + light settings. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 8 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/stored_lights +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set per-key lighting for different + layers. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 1382 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/custom_lights +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set the actual per-key lighting. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 20 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/ryos/roccatryos<minor>/light_macro +Date: October 2013 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written, this file lets one set a light macro that is looped + whenever the device gets in dimness mode. + This attribute is only valid for the pro variant. + The data has to be 2002 bytes long. + Before reading this file, control has to be written to select + which profile to read. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote index ed5dd567d397..39dfa5cb1cc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-wiimote @@ -57,3 +57,21 @@ Description: This attribute is only provided if the device was detected as a Calibration data is already applied by the kernel to all input values but may be used by user-space to perform other transformations. + +What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/wiimote/<dev>/pro_calib +Date: October 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.13 +Contact: David Herrmann <dh.herrmann@gmail.com> +Description: This attribute is only provided if the device was detected as a + pro-controller. It provides a single line with 4 calibration + values for all 4 analog sticks. Format is: "x1:y1 x2:y2". Data + is prefixed with a +/-. Each value is a signed 16bit number. + Data is encoded as decimal numbers and specifies the offsets of + the analog sticks of the pro-controller. + Calibration data is already applied by the kernel to all input + values but may be used by user-space to perform other + transformations. + Calibration data is detected by the kernel during device setup. + You can write "scan\n" into this file to re-trigger calibration. + You can also write data directly in the form "x1:y1 x2:y2" to + set the calibration values manually. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-sunxi-sid b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-sunxi-sid new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ffb9536f6ecc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-sunxi-sid @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /sys/devices/*/<our-device>/eeprom +Date: August 2013 +Contact: Oliver Schinagl <oliver@schinagl.nl> +Description: read-only access to the SID (Security-ID) on current + A-series SoC's from Allwinner. Currently supports A10, A10s, A13 + and A20 CPU's. The earlier A1x series of SoCs exports 16 bytes, + whereas the newer A20 SoC exposes 512 bytes split into sections. + Besides the 16 bytes of SID, there's also an SJTAG area, + HDMI-HDCP key and some custom keys. Below a quick overview, for + details see the user manual: + 0x000 128 bit root-key (sun[457]i) + 0x010 128 bit boot-key (sun7i) + 0x020 64 bit security-jtag-key (sun7i) + 0x028 16 bit key configuration (sun7i) + 0x02b 16 bit custom-vendor-key (sun7i) + 0x02c 320 bit low general key (sun7i) + 0x040 32 bit read-control access (sun7i) + 0x064 224 bit low general key (sun7i) + 0x080 2304 bit HDCP-key (sun7i) + 0x1a0 768 bit high general key (sun7i) +Users: any user space application which wants to read the SID on + Allwinner's A-series of CPU's. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 217772615d02..205a73878441 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/power/ Date: August 2006 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power directory will contain files that will provide a unified interface to the power management @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/state Date: August 2006 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/state file controls the system power state. Reading from this file returns what states are supported, @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/disk Date: September 2006 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/disk file controls the operating mode of the suspend-to-disk mechanism. Reading from this file returns @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/image_size Date: August 2006 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/image_size file controls the size of the image created by the suspend-to-disk mechanism. It can be written a @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/pm_trace Date: August 2006 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/pm_trace file controls the code which saves the last PM event point in the RTC across reboots, so that you can @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/pm_async Date: January 2009 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/pm_async file controls the switch allowing the user space to enable or disable asynchronous suspend and resume @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/wakeup_count Date: July 2010 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/wakeup_count file allows user space to put the system into a sleep state while taking into account the @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/reserved_size Date: May 2011 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/reserved_size file allows user space to control the amount of memory reserved for allocations made by device @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/autosleep Date: April 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/autosleep file can be written one of the strings returned by reads from /sys/power/state. If that happens, a @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/wake_lock Date: February 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/wake_lock file allows user space to create wakeup source objects and activate them on demand (if one of @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/power/wake_unlock Date: February 2012 -Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net> Description: The /sys/power/wake_unlock file allows user space to deactivate wakeup sources created with the help of /sys/power/wake_lock. diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index b17580885273..07c75d18154e 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -196,13 +196,6 @@ chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode as root before you can use this. You'll probably also want to get the user-space microcode_ctl utility to use with this. -Powertweak ----------- - -If you are running v0.1.17 or earlier, you should upgrade to -version v0.99.0 or higher. Running old versions may cause problems -with programs using shared memory. - udev ---- udev is a userspace application for populating /dev dynamically with @@ -366,10 +359,6 @@ Intel P6 microcode ------------------ o <http://www.urbanmyth.org/microcode/> -Powertweak ----------- -o <http://powertweak.sourceforge.net/> - udev ---- o <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/hotplug/udev.html> diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt index 14129f149a75..5e983031cc11 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt @@ -101,14 +101,23 @@ style to do this even if your device holds the default setting, because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your device. -The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask(): +The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent(): - int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); + int dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask); -The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call to -dma_set_coherent_mask(): +which will query the mask for both streaming and coherent APIs together. +If you have some special requirements, then the following two separate +queries can be used instead: - int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); + The query for streaming mappings is performed via a call to + dma_set_mask(): + + int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); + + The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call + to dma_set_coherent_mask(): + + int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask); Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask is a bit mask describing which bits of an address your device @@ -137,7 +146,7 @@ exactly why. The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this: - if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { + if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { printk(KERN_WARNING "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n"); goto ignore_this_device; @@ -171,22 +180,20 @@ the case would look like this: int using_dac, consistent_using_dac; - if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { + if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) { using_dac = 1; consistent_using_dac = 1; - dma_set_coherent_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64)); - } else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { + } else if (!dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) { using_dac = 0; consistent_using_dac = 0; - dma_set_coherent_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32)); } else { printk(KERN_WARNING "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n"); goto ignore_this_device; } -dma_set_coherent_mask() will always be able to set the same or a -smaller mask as dma_set_mask(). However for the rare case that a +The coherent coherent mask will always be able to set the same or a +smaller mask as the streaming mask. However for the rare case that a device driver only uses consistent allocations, one would have to check the return value from dma_set_coherent_mask(). @@ -199,9 +206,9 @@ address you might do something like: goto ignore_this_device; } -When dma_set_mask() is successful, and returns zero, the kernel saves -away this mask you have provided. The kernel will use this -information later when you make DMA mappings. +When dma_set_mask() or dma_set_mask_and_coherent() is successful, and +returns zero, the kernel saves away this mask you have provided. The +kernel will use this information later when you make DMA mappings. There is a case which we are aware of at this time, which is worth mentioning in this documentation. If your device supports multiple diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index 78a6c569d204..e865279cec58 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -142,6 +142,14 @@ internal API for use by the platform than an external API for use by driver writers. int +dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask) + +Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device +streaming and coherent DMA mask parameters if it is. + +Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not. + +int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask) Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index f403ec3c5c9a..46ad6faee9ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_request !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_done !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_bss -!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_frame -!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width_frame +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_width !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_unlink_bss !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_find_ie !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_bss_get_ie diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index fe397f90a34f..f5170082bdb3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ </sect1> <sect1><title>Wait queues and Wake events</title> !Iinclude/linux/wait.h -!Ekernel/wait.c +!Ekernel/sched/wait.c </sect1> <sect1><title>High-resolution timers</title> !Iinclude/linux/ktime.h @@ -87,7 +87,10 @@ X!Iinclude/linux/kobject.h !Ekernel/printk/printk.c !Ekernel/panic.c !Ekernel/sys.c -!Ekernel/rcupdate.c +!Ekernel/rcu/srcu.c +!Ekernel/rcu/tree.c +!Ekernel/rcu/tree_plugin.h +!Ekernel/rcu/update.c </sect1> <sect1><title>Device Resource Management</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl index 25b58efd955d..4f676838da06 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl @@ -91,7 +91,6 @@ <title>The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects</title> !Efs/sysfs/file.c !Efs/sysfs/symlink.c -!Efs/sysfs/bin.c </chapter> <chapter id="debugfs"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl index d16d21b7a3b7..46347f603353 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ <chapter id="rationale"> <title>Rationale</title> <para> - The original implementation of interrupt handling in Linux is using + The original implementation of interrupt handling in Linux uses the __do_IRQ() super-handler, which is able to deal with every type of interrupt logic. </para> @@ -111,19 +111,19 @@ </itemizedlist> </para> <para> - This split implementation of highlevel IRQ handlers allows us to + This split implementation of high-level IRQ handlers allows us to optimize the flow of the interrupt handling for each specific - interrupt type. This reduces complexity in that particular codepath + interrupt type. This reduces complexity in that particular code path and allows the optimized handling of a given type. </para> <para> The original general IRQ implementation used hw_interrupt_type structures and their ->ack(), ->end() [etc.] callbacks to differentiate the flow control in the super-handler. This leads to - a mix of flow logic and lowlevel hardware logic, and it also leads - to unnecessary code duplication: for example in i386, there is a - ioapic_level_irq and a ioapic_edge_irq irq-type which share many - of the lowlevel details but have different flow handling. + a mix of flow logic and low-level hardware logic, and it also leads + to unnecessary code duplication: for example in i386, there is an + ioapic_level_irq and an ioapic_edge_irq IRQ-type which share many + of the low-level details but have different flow handling. </para> <para> A more natural abstraction is the clean separation of the @@ -132,23 +132,23 @@ <para> Analysing a couple of architecture's IRQ subsystem implementations reveals that most of them can use a generic set of 'irq flow' - methods and only need to add the chip level specific code. + methods and only need to add the chip-level specific code. The separation is also valuable for (sub)architectures - which need specific quirks in the irq flow itself but not in the - chip-details - and thus provides a more transparent IRQ subsystem + which need specific quirks in the IRQ flow itself but not in the + chip details - and thus provides a more transparent IRQ subsystem design. </para> <para> - Each interrupt descriptor is assigned its own highlevel flow + Each interrupt descriptor is assigned its own high-level flow handler, which is normally one of the generic - implementations. (This highlevel flow handler implementation also + implementations. (This high-level flow handler implementation also makes it simple to provide demultiplexing handlers which can be found in embedded platforms on various architectures.) </para> <para> The separation makes the generic interrupt handling layer more flexible and extensible. For example, an (sub)architecture can - use a generic irq-flow implementation for 'level type' interrupts + use a generic IRQ-flow implementation for 'level type' interrupts and add a (sub)architecture specific 'edge type' implementation. </para> <para> @@ -172,9 +172,9 @@ <para> There are three main levels of abstraction in the interrupt code: <orderedlist> - <listitem><para>Highlevel driver API</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>Highlevel IRQ flow handlers</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>Chiplevel hardware encapsulation</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>High-level driver API</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>High-level IRQ flow handlers</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>Chip-level hardware encapsulation</para></listitem> </orderedlist> </para> <sect1 id="Interrupt_control_flow"> @@ -189,16 +189,16 @@ which are assigned to this interrupt. </para> <para> - Whenever an interrupt triggers, the lowlevel arch code calls into - the generic interrupt code by calling desc->handle_irq(). - This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->irq_data.chip + Whenever an interrupt triggers, the low-level architecture code calls + into the generic interrupt code by calling desc->handle_irq(). + This high-level IRQ handling function only uses desc->irq_data.chip primitives referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure. </para> </sect1> <sect1 id="Highlevel_Driver_API"> - <title>Highlevel Driver API</title> + <title>High-level Driver API</title> <para> - The highlevel Driver API consists of following functions: + The high-level Driver API consists of following functions: <itemizedlist> <listitem><para>request_irq()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>free_irq()</para></listitem> @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ </para> </sect1> <sect1 id="Highlevel_IRQ_flow_handlers"> - <title>Highlevel IRQ flow handlers</title> + <title>High-level IRQ flow handlers</title> <para> The generic layer provides a set of pre-defined irq-flow methods: <itemizedlist> @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ <listitem><para>handle_edge_eoi_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_bad_irq</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> - The interrupt flow handlers (either predefined or architecture + The interrupt flow handlers (either pre-defined or architecture specific) are assigned to specific interrupts by the architecture either during bootup or during device initialization. </para> @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(); <para> handle_fasteoi_irq provides a generic implementation for interrupts, which only need an EOI at the end of - the handler + the handler. </para> <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) The generic functions are intended for 'clean' architectures and chips, which have no platform-specific IRQ handling quirks. If an architecture needs to implement quirks on the 'flow' level then it can do so by - overriding the highlevel irq-flow handler. + overriding the high-level irq-flow handler. </para> </sect2> <sect2 id="Delayed_interrupt_disable"> @@ -419,9 +419,9 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) </sect2> </sect1> <sect1 id="Chiplevel_hardware_encapsulation"> - <title>Chiplevel hardware encapsulation</title> + <title>Chip-level hardware encapsulation</title> <para> - The chip level hardware descriptor structure irq_chip + The chip-level hardware descriptor structure irq_chip contains all the direct chip relevant functions, which can be utilized by the irq flow implementations. <itemizedlist> @@ -429,14 +429,14 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) <listitem><para>irq_mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_mask()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_unmask()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>irq_eoi() - Optional, required for eoi flow handlers</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_eoi() - Optional, required for EOI flow handlers</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_type() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> These primitives are strictly intended to mean what they say: ack means ACK, masking means masking of an IRQ line, etc. It is up to the flow - handler(s) to use these basic units of lowlevel functionality. + handler(s) to use these basic units of low-level functionality. </para> </sect1> </chapter> @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) <title>__do_IRQ entry point</title> <para> The original implementation __do_IRQ() was an alternative entry - point for all types of interrupts. It not longer exists. + point for all types of interrupts. It no longer exists. </para> <para> This handler turned out to be not suitable for all @@ -468,11 +468,11 @@ if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) <chapter id="genericchip"> <title>Generic interrupt chip</title> <para> - To avoid copies of identical implementations of irq chips the + To avoid copies of identical implementations of IRQ chips the core provides a configurable generic interrupt chip implementation. Developers should check carefuly whether the generic chip fits their needs before implementing the same - functionality slightly different themself. + functionality slightly differently themselves. </para> !Ekernel/irq/generic-chip.c </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl index 09e884e5b9f5..19f2a5a5a5b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl @@ -1958,7 +1958,7 @@ machines due to caching. <chapter id="apiref-mutex"> <title>Mutex API reference</title> !Iinclude/linux/mutex.h -!Ekernel/mutex.c +!Ekernel/locking/mutex.c </chapter> <chapter id="apiref-futex"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml index e287c8fc803b..4165e7bfa4ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-expbuf.xml @@ -73,7 +73,8 @@ range from zero to the maximal number of valid planes for the currently active format. For the single-planar API, applications must set <structfield> plane </structfield> to zero. Additional flags may be posted in the <structfield> flags </structfield> field. Refer to a manual for open() for details. -Currently only O_CLOEXEC is supported. All other fields must be set to zero. +Currently only O_CLOEXEC, O_RDONLY, O_WRONLY, and O_RDWR are supported. All +other fields must be set to zero. In the case of multi-planar API, every plane is exported separately using multiple <constant> VIDIOC_EXPBUF </constant> calls. </para> @@ -170,8 +171,9 @@ multi-planar API. Otherwise this value must be set to zero. </entry> <entry>__u32</entry> <entry><structfield>flags</structfield></entry> <entry>Flags for the newly created file, currently only <constant> -O_CLOEXEC </constant> is supported, refer to the manual of open() for more -details.</entry> +O_CLOEXEC </constant>, <constant>O_RDONLY</constant>, <constant>O_WRONLY +</constant>, and <constant>O_RDWR</constant> are supported, refer to the manual +of open() for more details.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__s32</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index fe122d6e686f..cd11926e07c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -1222,10 +1222,6 @@ in this page</entry> #define NAND_BBT_VERSION 0x00000100 /* Create a bbt if none axists */ #define NAND_BBT_CREATE 0x00000200 -/* Search good / bad pattern through all pages of a block */ -#define NAND_BBT_SCANALLPAGES 0x00000400 -/* Scan block empty during good / bad block scan */ -#define NAND_BBT_SCANEMPTY 0x00000800 /* Write bbt if neccecary */ #define NAND_BBT_WRITE 0x00001000 /* Read and write back block contents when writing bbt */ diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt index bccf602a87f5..6f458564d625 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt @@ -525,8 +525,9 @@ corresponding register block for you. 6. Other interesting functions ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -pci_find_slot() Find pci_dev corresponding to given bus and - slot numbers. +pci_get_domain_bus_and_slot() Find pci_dev corresponding to given domain, + bus and slot and number. If the device is + found, its reference count is increased. pci_set_power_state() Set PCI Power Management state (0=D0 ... 3=D3) pci_find_capability() Find specified capability in device's capability list. @@ -582,7 +583,8 @@ having sane locking. pci_find_device() Superseded by pci_get_device() pci_find_subsys() Superseded by pci_get_subsys() -pci_find_slot() Superseded by pci_get_slot() +pci_find_slot() Superseded by pci_get_domain_bus_and_slot() +pci_get_slot() Superseded by pci_get_domain_bus_and_slot() The alternative is the traditional PCI device driver that walks PCI diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index 7703ec73a9bb..91266193b8f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! updater uses call_rcu_sched() or synchronize_sched(), then the corresponding readers must disable preemption, possibly by calling rcu_read_lock_sched() and rcu_read_unlock_sched(). - If the updater uses synchronize_srcu() or call_srcu(), - the the corresponding readers must use srcu_read_lock() and + If the updater uses synchronize_srcu() or call_srcu(), then + the corresponding readers must use srcu_read_lock() and srcu_read_unlock(), and with the same srcu_struct. The rules for the expedited primitives are the same as for their non-expedited counterparts. Mixing things up will result in confusion and diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 8e9359de1d28..6f3a0057548e 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@ CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_TIMEOUT This kernel configuration parameter defines the period of time that RCU will wait from the beginning of a grace period until it issues an RCU CPU stall warning. This time period is normally - sixty seconds. + 21 seconds. This configuration parameter may be changed at runtime via the /sys/module/rcutree/parameters/rcu_cpu_stall_timeout, however this parameter is checked only at the beginning of a cycle. - So if you are 30 seconds into a 70-second stall, setting this + So if you are 10 seconds into a 40-second stall, setting this sysfs parameter to (say) five will shorten the timeout for the -next- stall, or the following warning for the current stall (assuming the stall lasts long enough). It will not affect the @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_VERBOSE also dump the stacks of any tasks that are blocking the current RCU-preempt grace period. -RCU_CPU_STALL_INFO +CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_INFO This kernel configuration parameter causes the stall warning to print out additional per-CPU diagnostic information, including @@ -43,7 +43,8 @@ RCU_STALL_DELAY_DELTA Although the lockdep facility is extremely useful, it does add some overhead. Therefore, under CONFIG_PROVE_RCU, the RCU_STALL_DELAY_DELTA macro allows five extra seconds before - giving an RCU CPU stall warning message. + giving an RCU CPU stall warning message. (This is a cpp + macro, not a kernel configuration parameter.) RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY @@ -52,7 +53,8 @@ RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY However, if the offending CPU does not detect its own stall in the number of jiffies specified by RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY, then some other CPU will complain. This delay is normally set to - two jiffies. + two jiffies. (This is a cpp macro, not a kernel configuration + parameter.) When a CPU detects that it is stalling, it will print a message similar to the following: @@ -86,7 +88,12 @@ printing, there will be a spurious stall-warning message: INFO: rcu_bh_state detected stalls on CPUs/tasks: { } (detected by 4, 2502 jiffies) -This is rare, but does happen from time to time in real life. +This is rare, but does happen from time to time in real life. It is also +possible for a zero-jiffy stall to be flagged in this case, depending +on how the stall warning and the grace-period initialization happen to +interact. Please note that it is not possible to entirely eliminate this +sort of false positive without resorting to things like stop_machine(), +which is overkill for this sort of problem. If the CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_INFO kernel configuration parameter is set, more information is printed with the stall-warning message, for example: @@ -216,4 +223,5 @@ that portion of the stack which remains the same from trace to trace. If you can reliably trigger the stall, ftrace can be quite helpful. RCU bugs can often be debugged with the help of CONFIG_RCU_TRACE -and with RCU's event tracing. +and with RCU's event tracing. For information on RCU's event tracing, +see include/trace/events/rcu.h. diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt index febbb1ba4d23..784841caa6e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt @@ -4,4 +4,4 @@ CONFIG_ACPI_CUSTOM_DSDT builds the image into the kernel. When to use this method is described in detail on the Linux/ACPI home page: -http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/acpi/overridingDSDT.php +https://01.org/linux-acpi/documentation/overriding-dsdt diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt index aca4e69121b7..b994bcb32b92 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt @@ -295,10 +295,6 @@ These GPIO numbers are controller relative and path "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0" specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux we need to translate them to the Linux GPIO numbers. -The driver can do this by including <linux/acpi_gpio.h> and then calling -acpi_get_gpio(path, gpio). This will return the Linux GPIO number or -negative errno if there was no translation found. - In a simple case of just getting the Linux GPIO number from device resources one can use acpi_get_gpio_by_index() helper function. It takes pointer to the device and index of the GpioIo/GpioInt descriptor in the @@ -322,3 +318,25 @@ suitable to the gpiolib before passing them. In case of GpioInt resource an additional call to gpio_to_irq() must be done before calling request_irq(). + +Note that the above API is ACPI specific and not recommended for drivers +that need to support non-ACPI systems. The recommended way is to use +the descriptor based GPIO interfaces. The above example looks like this +when converted to the GPIO desc: + + #include <linux/gpio/consumer.h> + ... + + struct gpio_desc *irq_desc, *power_desc; + + irq_desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, 1); + if (IS_ERR(irq_desc)) + /* handle error */ + + power_desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, 0); + if (IS_ERR(power_desc)) + /* handle error */ + + /* Now we can use the GPIO descriptors */ + +See also Documentation/gpio.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt index 8686e789542e..1f06daf03f5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt +++ b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt @@ -23,4 +23,4 @@ SUBSYSTEM=="aoe", KERNEL=="revalidate", NAME="etherd/%k", GROUP="disk", MODE="02 SUBSYSTEM=="aoe", KERNEL=="flush", NAME="etherd/%k", GROUP="disk", MODE="0220" # aoe block devices -KERNEL=="etherd*", NAME="%k", GROUP="disk" +KERNEL=="etherd*", GROUP="disk" diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README index 8f08a86e03b7..da0151db9964 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README @@ -88,6 +88,7 @@ EBU Armada family MV78230 MV78260 MV78460 + NOTE: not to be confused with the non-SMP 78xx0 SoCs Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf No public datasheet available. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README index e3f93fb9224e..7945238453ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ SunXi family Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-sunxi Flavors: + * ARM926 based SoCs + - Allwinner F20 (sun3i) + + Not Supported + * ARM Cortex-A8 based SoCs - Allwinner A10 (sun4i) + Datasheet @@ -25,4 +29,24 @@ SunXi family + Datasheet http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.12%20%282012-03-29%29.pdf + User Manual - http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-08-08%29.pdf + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-01-08%29.pdf + + * Dual ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs + - Allwinner A20 (sun7i) + + User Manual + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A20/A20%20User%20Manual%202013-03-22.pdf + + - Allwinner A23 + + Not Supported + + * Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs + - Allwinner A31 (sun6i) + + Datasheet + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A31%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.00%20(2012-12-24).pdf + + - Allwinner A31s (sun6i) + + Not Supported + + * Quad ARM Cortex-A15, Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs + - Allwinner A80 + + Not Supported
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt index 9c4d388daddc..a9691cc48fe3 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt @@ -45,9 +45,9 @@ sees fit.) Requirement: MANDATORY -The device tree blob (dtb) must be no bigger than 2 megabytes in size -and placed at a 2-megabyte boundary within the first 512 megabytes from -the start of the kernel image. This is to allow the kernel to map the +The device tree blob (dtb) must be placed on an 8-byte boundary within +the first 512 megabytes from the start of the kernel image and must not +cross a 2-megabyte boundary. This is to allow the kernel to map the blob using a single section mapping in the initial page tables. @@ -68,13 +68,23 @@ Image target is available instead. Requirement: MANDATORY -The decompressed kernel image contains a 32-byte header as follows: +The decompressed kernel image contains a 64-byte header as follows: - u32 magic = 0x14000008; /* branch to stext, little-endian */ - u32 res0 = 0; /* reserved */ + u32 code0; /* Executable code */ + u32 code1; /* Executable code */ u64 text_offset; /* Image load offset */ + u64 res0 = 0; /* reserved */ u64 res1 = 0; /* reserved */ u64 res2 = 0; /* reserved */ + u64 res3 = 0; /* reserved */ + u64 res4 = 0; /* reserved */ + u32 magic = 0x644d5241; /* Magic number, little endian, "ARM\x64" */ + u32 res5 = 0; /* reserved */ + + +Header notes: + +- code0/code1 are responsible for branching to stext. The image must be placed at the specified offset (currently 0x80000) from the start of the system RAM and called there. The start of the @@ -105,9 +115,10 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met: External caches (if present) must be configured and disabled. - Architected timers - CNTFRQ must be programmed with the timer frequency. - If entering the kernel at EL1, CNTHCTL_EL2 must have EL1PCTEN (bit 0) - set where available. + CNTFRQ must be programmed with the timer frequency and CNTVOFF must + be programmed with a consistent value on all CPUs. If entering the + kernel at EL1, CNTHCTL_EL2 must have EL1PCTEN (bit 0) set where + available. - Coherency All CPUs to be booted by the kernel must be part of the same coherency @@ -120,30 +131,46 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met: the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state. +The requirements described above for CPU mode, caches, MMUs, architected +timers, coherency and system registers apply to all CPUs. All CPUs must +enter the kernel in the same exception level. + The boot loader is expected to enter the kernel on each CPU in the following manner: - The primary CPU must jump directly to the first instruction of the kernel image. The device tree blob passed by this CPU must contain - for each CPU node: - - 1. An 'enable-method' property. Currently, the only supported value - for this field is the string "spin-table". - - 2. A 'cpu-release-addr' property identifying a 64-bit, - zero-initialised memory location. + an 'enable-method' property for each cpu node. The supported + enable-methods are described below. It is expected that the bootloader will generate these device tree properties and insert them into the blob prior to kernel entry. -- Any secondary CPUs must spin outside of the kernel in a reserved area - of memory (communicated to the kernel by a /memreserve/ region in the +- CPUs with a "spin-table" enable-method must have a 'cpu-release-addr' + property in their cpu node. This property identifies a + naturally-aligned 64-bit zero-initalised memory location. + + These CPUs should spin outside of the kernel in a reserved area of + memory (communicated to the kernel by a /memreserve/ region in the device tree) polling their cpu-release-addr location, which must be contained in the reserved region. A wfe instruction may be inserted to reduce the overhead of the busy-loop and a sev will be issued by the primary CPU. When a read of the location pointed to by the - cpu-release-addr returns a non-zero value, the CPU must jump directly - to this value. + cpu-release-addr returns a non-zero value, the CPU must jump to this + value. The value will be written as a single 64-bit little-endian + value, so CPUs must convert the read value to their native endianness + before jumping to it. + +- CPUs with a "psci" enable method should remain outside of + the kernel (i.e. outside of the regions of memory described to the + kernel in the memory node, or in a reserved area of memory described + to the kernel by a /memreserve/ region in the device tree). The + kernel will issue CPU_ON calls as described in ARM document number ARM + DEN 0022A ("Power State Coordination Interface System Software on ARM + processors") to bring CPUs into the kernel. + + The device tree should contain a 'psci' node, as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/psci.txt. - Secondary CPU general-purpose register settings x0 = 0 (reserved for future use) diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt index 78a377124ef0..5e054bfe4dde 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ The swapper_pgd_dir address is written to TTBR1 and never written to TTBR0. -AArch64 Linux memory layout: +AArch64 Linux memory layout with 4KB pages: Start End Size Use ----------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -39,13 +39,38 @@ ffffffbffbc00000 ffffffbffbdfffff 2MB earlyprintk device ffffffbffbe00000 ffffffbffbe0ffff 64KB PCI I/O space -ffffffbbffff0000 ffffffbcffffffff ~2MB [guard] +ffffffbffbe10000 ffffffbcffffffff ~2MB [guard] ffffffbffc000000 ffffffbfffffffff 64MB modules ffffffc000000000 ffffffffffffffff 256GB kernel logical memory map +AArch64 Linux memory layout with 64KB pages: + +Start End Size Use +----------------------------------------------------------------------- +0000000000000000 000003ffffffffff 4TB user + +fffffc0000000000 fffffdfbfffeffff ~2TB vmalloc + +fffffdfbffff0000 fffffdfbffffffff 64KB [guard page] + +fffffdfc00000000 fffffdfdffffffff 8GB vmemmap + +fffffdfe00000000 fffffdfffbbfffff ~8GB [guard, future vmmemap] + +fffffdfffbc00000 fffffdfffbdfffff 2MB earlyprintk device + +fffffdfffbe00000 fffffdfffbe0ffff 64KB PCI I/O space + +fffffdfffbe10000 fffffdfffbffffff ~2MB [guard] + +fffffdfffc000000 fffffdffffffffff 64MB modules + +fffffe0000000000 ffffffffffffffff 2TB kernel logical memory map + + Translation table lookup with 4KB pages: +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+ diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d9995f1f51b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + Tagged virtual addresses in AArch64 Linux + ========================================= + +Author: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> +Date : 12 June 2013 + +This document briefly describes the provision of tagged virtual +addresses in the AArch64 translation system and their potential uses +in AArch64 Linux. + +The kernel configures the translation tables so that translations made +via TTBR0 (i.e. userspace mappings) have the top byte (bits 63:56) of +the virtual address ignored by the translation hardware. This frees up +this byte for application use, with the following caveats: + + (1) The kernel requires that all user addresses passed to EL1 + are tagged with tag 0x00. This means that any syscall + parameters containing user virtual addresses *must* have + their top byte cleared before trapping to the kernel. + + (2) Non-zero tags are not preserved when delivering signals. + This means that signal handlers in applications making use + of tags cannot rely on the tag information for user virtual + addresses being maintained for fields inside siginfo_t. + One exception to this rule is for signals raised in response + to watchpoint debug exceptions, where the tag information + will be preserved. + + (3) Special care should be taken when using tagged pointers, + since it is likely that C compilers will not hazard two + virtual addresses differing only in the upper byte. + +The architecture prevents the use of a tagged PC, so the upper byte will +be set to a sign-extension of bit 55 on exception return. diff --git a/Documentation/assoc_array.txt b/Documentation/assoc_array.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2f2c6cdd73c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/assoc_array.txt @@ -0,0 +1,574 @@ + ======================================== + GENERIC ASSOCIATIVE ARRAY IMPLEMENTATION + ======================================== + +Contents: + + - Overview. + + - The public API. + - Edit script. + - Operations table. + - Manipulation functions. + - Access functions. + - Index key form. + + - Internal workings. + - Basic internal tree layout. + - Shortcuts. + - Splitting and collapsing nodes. + - Non-recursive iteration. + - Simultaneous alteration and iteration. + + +======== +OVERVIEW +======== + +This associative array implementation is an object container with the following +properties: + + (1) Objects are opaque pointers. The implementation does not care where they + point (if anywhere) or what they point to (if anything). + + [!] NOTE: Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit. + + (2) Objects do not need to contain linkage blocks for use by the array. This + permits an object to be located in multiple arrays simultaneously. + Rather, the array is made up of metadata blocks that point to objects. + + (3) Objects require index keys to locate them within the array. + + (4) Index keys must be unique. Inserting an object with the same key as one + already in the array will replace the old object. + + (5) Index keys can be of any length and can be of different lengths. + + (6) Index keys should encode the length early on, before any variation due to + length is seen. + + (7) Index keys can include a hash to scatter objects throughout the array. + + (8) The array can iterated over. The objects will not necessarily come out in + key order. + + (9) The array can be iterated over whilst it is being modified, provided the + RCU readlock is being held by the iterator. Note, however, under these + circumstances, some objects may be seen more than once. If this is a + problem, the iterator should lock against modification. Objects will not + be missed, however, unless deleted. + +(10) Objects in the array can be looked up by means of their index key. + +(11) Objects can be looked up whilst the array is being modified, provided the + RCU readlock is being held by the thread doing the look up. + +The implementation uses a tree of 16-pointer nodes internally that are indexed +on each level by nibbles from the index key in the same manner as in a radix +tree. To improve memory efficiency, shortcuts can be emplaced to skip over +what would otherwise be a series of single-occupancy nodes. Further, nodes +pack leaf object pointers into spare space in the node rather than making an +extra branch until as such time an object needs to be added to a full node. + + +============== +THE PUBLIC API +============== + +The public API can be found in <linux/assoc_array.h>. The associative array is +rooted on the following structure: + + struct assoc_array { + ... + }; + +The code is selected by enabling CONFIG_ASSOCIATIVE_ARRAY. + + +EDIT SCRIPT +----------- + +The insertion and deletion functions produce an 'edit script' that can later be +applied to effect the changes without risking ENOMEM. This retains the +preallocated metadata blocks that will be installed in the internal tree and +keeps track of the metadata blocks that will be removed from the tree when the +script is applied. + +This is also used to keep track of dead blocks and dead objects after the +script has been applied so that they can be freed later. The freeing is done +after an RCU grace period has passed - thus allowing access functions to +proceed under the RCU read lock. + +The script appears as outside of the API as a pointer of the type: + + struct assoc_array_edit; + +There are two functions for dealing with the script: + + (1) Apply an edit script. + + void assoc_array_apply_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit); + + This will perform the edit functions, interpolating various write barriers + to permit accesses under the RCU read lock to continue. The edit script + will then be passed to call_rcu() to free it and any dead stuff it points + to. + + (2) Cancel an edit script. + + void assoc_array_cancel_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit); + + This frees the edit script and all preallocated memory immediately. If + this was for insertion, the new object is _not_ released by this function, + but must rather be released by the caller. + +These functions are guaranteed not to fail. + + +OPERATIONS TABLE +---------------- + +Various functions take a table of operations: + + struct assoc_array_ops { + ... + }; + +This points to a number of methods, all of which need to be provided: + + (1) Get a chunk of index key from caller data: + + unsigned long (*get_key_chunk)(const void *index_key, int level); + + This should return a chunk of caller-supplied index key starting at the + *bit* position given by the level argument. The level argument will be a + multiple of ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE and the function should return + ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE bits. No error is possible. + + + (2) Get a chunk of an object's index key. + + unsigned long (*get_object_key_chunk)(const void *object, int level); + + As the previous function, but gets its data from an object in the array + rather than from a caller-supplied index key. + + + (3) See if this is the object we're looking for. + + bool (*compare_object)(const void *object, const void *index_key); + + Compare the object against an index key and return true if it matches and + false if it doesn't. + + + (4) Diff the index keys of two objects. + + int (*diff_objects)(const void *object, const void *index_key); + + Return the bit position at which the index key of the specified object + differs from the given index key or -1 if they are the same. + + + (5) Free an object. + + void (*free_object)(void *object); + + Free the specified object. Note that this may be called an RCU grace + period after assoc_array_apply_edit() was called, so synchronize_rcu() may + be necessary on module unloading. + + +MANIPULATION FUNCTIONS +---------------------- + +There are a number of functions for manipulating an associative array: + + (1) Initialise an associative array. + + void assoc_array_init(struct assoc_array *array); + + This initialises the base structure for an associative array. It can't + fail. + + + (2) Insert/replace an object in an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_insert(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key, + void *object); + + This inserts the given object into the array. Note that the least + significant bit of the pointer must be zero as it's used to type-mark + pointers internally. + + If an object already exists for that key then it will be replaced with the + new object and the old one will be freed automatically. + + The index_key argument should hold index key information and is + passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (3) Delete an object from an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_delete(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key); + + This deletes an object that matches the specified data from the array. + + The index_key argument should hold index key information and is + passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. NULL will be returned if the specified object is + not found within the array. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (4) Delete all objects from an associative array. + + struct assoc_array_edit * + assoc_array_clear(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops); + + This deletes all the objects from an associative array and leaves it + completely empty. + + This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns + an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of + an out-of-memory error. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + + (5) Destroy an associative array, deleting all objects. + + void assoc_array_destroy(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops); + + This destroys the contents of the associative array and leaves it + completely empty. It is not permitted for another thread to be traversing + the array under the RCU read lock at the same time as this function is + destroying it as no RCU deferral is performed on memory release - + something that would require memory to be allocated. + + The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers and accessors + of the array. + + + (6) Garbage collect an associative array. + + int assoc_array_gc(struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + bool (*iterator)(void *object, void *iterator_data), + void *iterator_data); + + This iterates over the objects in an associative array and passes each one + to iterator(). If iterator() returns true, the object is kept. If it + returns false, the object will be freed. If the iterator() function + returns true, it must perform any appropriate refcount incrementing on the + object before returning. + + The internal tree will be packed down if possible as part of the iteration + to reduce the number of nodes in it. + + The iterator_data is passed directly to iterator() and is otherwise + ignored by the function. + + The function will return 0 if successful and -ENOMEM if there wasn't + enough memory. + + It is possible for other threads to iterate over or search the array under + the RCU read lock whilst this function is in progress. The caller should + lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array. + + +ACCESS FUNCTIONS +---------------- + +There are two functions for accessing an associative array: + + (1) Iterate over all the objects in an associative array. + + int assoc_array_iterate(const struct assoc_array *array, + int (*iterator)(const void *object, + void *iterator_data), + void *iterator_data); + + This passes each object in the array to the iterator callback function. + iterator_data is private data for that function. + + This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being + modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. Under such circumstances, + it is possible for the iteration function to see some objects twice. If + this is a problem, then modification should be locked against. The + iteration algorithm should not, however, miss any objects. + + The function will return 0 if no objects were in the array or else it will + return the result of the last iterator function called. Iteration stops + immediately if any call to the iteration function results in a non-zero + return. + + + (2) Find an object in an associative array. + + void *assoc_array_find(const struct assoc_array *array, + const struct assoc_array_ops *ops, + const void *index_key); + + This walks through the array's internal tree directly to the object + specified by the index key.. + + This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being + modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. + + The function will return the object if found (and set *_type to the object + type) or will return NULL if the object was not found. + + +INDEX KEY FORM +-------------- + +The index key can be of any form, but since the algorithms aren't told how long +the key is, it is strongly recommended that the index key includes its length +very early on before any variation due to the length would have an effect on +comparisons. + +This will cause leaves with different length keys to scatter away from each +other - and those with the same length keys to cluster together. + +It is also recommended that the index key begin with a hash of the rest of the +key to maximise scattering throughout keyspace. + +The better the scattering, the wider and lower the internal tree will be. + +Poor scattering isn't too much of a problem as there are shortcuts and nodes +can contain mixtures of leaves and metadata pointers. + +The index key is read in chunks of machine word. Each chunk is subdivided into +one nibble (4 bits) per level, so on a 32-bit CPU this is good for 8 levels and +on a 64-bit CPU, 16 levels. Unless the scattering is really poor, it is +unlikely that more than one word of any particular index key will have to be +used. + + +================= +INTERNAL WORKINGS +================= + +The associative array data structure has an internal tree. This tree is +constructed of two types of metadata blocks: nodes and shortcuts. + +A node is an array of slots. Each slot can contain one of four things: + + (*) A NULL pointer, indicating that the slot is empty. + + (*) A pointer to an object (a leaf). + + (*) A pointer to a node at the next level. + + (*) A pointer to a shortcut. + + +BASIC INTERNAL TREE LAYOUT +-------------------------- + +Ignoring shortcuts for the moment, the nodes form a multilevel tree. The index +key space is strictly subdivided by the nodes in the tree and nodes occur on +fixed levels. For example: + + Level: 0 1 2 3 + =============== =============== =============== =============== + NODE D + NODE B NODE C +------>+---+ + +------>+---+ +------>+---+ | | 0 | + NODE A | | 0 | | | 0 | | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ | +---+ | : : + | 0 | | : : | : : | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ | +---+ | | f | + | 1 |---+ | 3 |---+ | 7 |---+ +---+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ + : : : : | 8 |---+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ | NODE E + | e |---+ | f | : : +------>+---+ + +---+ | +---+ +---+ | 0 | + | f | | | f | +---+ + +---+ | +---+ : : + | NODE F +---+ + +------>+---+ | f | + | 0 | NODE G +---+ + +---+ +------>+---+ + : : | | 0 | + +---+ | +---+ + | 6 |---+ : : + +---+ +---+ + : : | f | + +---+ +---+ + | f | + +---+ + +In the above example, there are 7 nodes (A-G), each with 16 slots (0-f). +Assuming no other meta data nodes in the tree, the key space is divided thusly: + + KEY PREFIX NODE + ========== ==== + 137* D + 138* E + 13[0-69-f]* C + 1[0-24-f]* B + e6* G + e[0-57-f]* F + [02-df]* A + +So, for instance, keys with the following example index keys will be found in +the appropriate nodes: + + INDEX KEY PREFIX NODE + =============== ======= ==== + 13694892892489 13 C + 13795289025897 137 D + 13889dde88793 138 E + 138bbb89003093 138 E + 1394879524789 12 C + 1458952489 1 B + 9431809de993ba - A + b4542910809cd - A + e5284310def98 e F + e68428974237 e6 G + e7fffcbd443 e F + f3842239082 - A + +To save memory, if a node can hold all the leaves in its portion of keyspace, +then the node will have all those leaves in it and will not have any metadata +pointers - even if some of those leaves would like to be in the same slot. + +A node can contain a heterogeneous mix of leaves and metadata pointers. +Metadata pointers must be in the slots that match their subdivisions of key +space. The leaves can be in any slot not occupied by a metadata pointer. It +is guaranteed that none of the leaves in a node will match a slot occupied by a +metadata pointer. If the metadata pointer is there, any leaf whose key matches +the metadata key prefix must be in the subtree that the metadata pointer points +to. + +In the above example list of index keys, node A will contain: + + SLOT CONTENT INDEX KEY (PREFIX) + ==== =============== ================== + 1 PTR TO NODE B 1* + any LEAF 9431809de993ba + any LEAF b4542910809cd + e PTR TO NODE F e* + any LEAF f3842239082 + +and node B: + + 3 PTR TO NODE C 13* + any LEAF 1458952489 + + +SHORTCUTS +--------- + +Shortcuts are metadata records that jump over a piece of keyspace. A shortcut +is a replacement for a series of single-occupancy nodes ascending through the +levels. Shortcuts exist to save memory and to speed up traversal. + +It is possible for the root of the tree to be a shortcut - say, for example, +the tree contains at least 17 nodes all with key prefix '1111'. The insertion +algorithm will insert a shortcut to skip over the '1111' keyspace in a single +bound and get to the fourth level where these actually become different. + + +SPLITTING AND COLLAPSING NODES +------------------------------ + +Each node has a maximum capacity of 16 leaves and metadata pointers. If the +insertion algorithm finds that it is trying to insert a 17th object into a +node, that node will be split such that at least two leaves that have a common +key segment at that level end up in a separate node rooted on that slot for +that common key segment. + +If the leaves in a full node and the leaf that is being inserted are +sufficiently similar, then a shortcut will be inserted into the tree. + +When the number of objects in the subtree rooted at a node falls to 16 or +fewer, then the subtree will be collapsed down to a single node - and this will +ripple towards the root if possible. + + +NON-RECURSIVE ITERATION +----------------------- + +Each node and shortcut contains a back pointer to its parent and the number of +slot in that parent that points to it. None-recursive iteration uses these to +proceed rootwards through the tree, going to the parent node, slot N + 1 to +make sure progress is made without the need for a stack. + +The backpointers, however, make simultaneous alteration and iteration tricky. + + +SIMULTANEOUS ALTERATION AND ITERATION +------------------------------------- + +There are a number of cases to consider: + + (1) Simple insert/replace. This involves simply replacing a NULL or old + matching leaf pointer with the pointer to the new leaf after a barrier. + The metadata blocks don't change otherwise. An old leaf won't be freed + until after the RCU grace period. + + (2) Simple delete. This involves just clearing an old matching leaf. The + metadata blocks don't change otherwise. The old leaf won't be freed until + after the RCU grace period. + + (3) Insertion replacing part of a subtree that we haven't yet entered. This + may involve replacement of part of that subtree - but that won't affect + the iteration as we won't have reached the pointer to it yet and the + ancestry blocks are not replaced (the layout of those does not change). + + (4) Insertion replacing nodes that we're actively processing. This isn't a + problem as we've passed the anchoring pointer and won't switch onto the + new layout until we follow the back pointers - at which point we've + already examined the leaves in the replaced node (we iterate over all the + leaves in a node before following any of its metadata pointers). + + We might, however, re-see some leaves that have been split out into a new + branch that's in a slot further along than we were at. + + (5) Insertion replacing nodes that we're processing a dependent branch of. + This won't affect us until we follow the back pointers. Similar to (4). + + (6) Deletion collapsing a branch under us. This doesn't affect us because the + back pointers will get us back to the parent of the new node before we + could see the new node. The entire collapsed subtree is thrown away + unchanged - and will still be rooted on the same slot, so we shouldn't + process it a second time as we'll go back to slot + 1. + +Note: + + (*) Under some circumstances, we need to simultaneously change the parent + pointer and the parent slot pointer on a node (say, for example, we + inserted another node before it and moved it up a level). We cannot do + this without locking against a read - so we have to replace that node too. + + However, when we're changing a shortcut into a node this isn't a problem + as shortcuts only have one slot and so the parent slot number isn't used + when traversing backwards over one. This means that it's okay to change + the slot number first - provided suitable barriers are used to make sure + the parent slot number is read after the back pointer. + +Obsolete blocks and leaves are freed up after an RCU grace period has passed, +so as long as anyone doing walking or iteration holds the RCU read lock, the +old superstructure should not go away on them. diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt index 1c732f0c6758..01bce243d3d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt @@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Kernel driver lp855x Backlight driver for LP855x ICs Supported chips: - Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8556 and LP8557 + Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and + LP8557 Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com> @@ -24,7 +25,7 @@ Value : pwm based or register based 2) chip_id The lp855x chip id. -Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8556/lp8557 +Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557 Platform data for lp855x ------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX index d18ecd827c40..929d9904f74b 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ capability.txt - Generic Block Device Capability (/sys/block/<device>/capability) cfq-iosched.txt - CFQ IO scheduler tunables +cmdline-partition.txt + - how to specify block device partitions on kernel command line data-integrity.txt - Block data integrity deadline-iosched.txt diff --git a/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt b/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..525b9f6d7fb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +Embedded device command line partition parsing +===================================================================== + +Support for reading the block device partition table from the command line. +It is typically used for fixed block (eMMC) embedded devices. +It has no MBR, so saves storage space. Bootloader can be easily accessed +by absolute address of data on the block device. +Users can easily change the partition. + +The format for the command line is just like mtdparts: + +blkdevparts=<blkdev-def>[;<blkdev-def>] + <blkdev-def> := <blkdev-id>:<partdef>[,<partdef>] + <partdef> := <size>[@<offset>](part-name) + +<blkdev-id> + block device disk name, embedded device used fixed block device, + it's disk name also fixed. such as: mmcblk0, mmcblk1, mmcblk0boot0. + +<size> + partition size, in bytes, such as: 512, 1m, 1G. + +<offset> + partition start address, in bytes. + +(part-name) + partition name, kernel send uevent with "PARTNAME". application can create + a link to block device partition with the name "PARTNAME". + user space application can access partition by partition name. + +Example: + eMMC disk name is "mmcblk0" and "mmcblk0boot0" + + bootargs: + 'blkdevparts=mmcblk0:1G(data0),1G(data1),-;mmcblk0boot0:1m(boot),-(kernel)' + + dmesg: + mmcblk0: p1(data0) p2(data1) p3() + mmcblk0boot0: p1(boot) p2(kernel) diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt index 470fe4b5e379..e2240f5ab64d 100644 --- a/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt @@ -39,15 +39,15 @@ Module configuration options ============================ If you use the floppy driver as a module, use the following syntax: -modprobe floppy <options> +modprobe floppy floppy="<options>" Example: - modprobe floppy omnibook messages + modprobe floppy floppy="omnibook messages" If you need certain options enabled every time you load the floppy driver, you can put: - options floppy omnibook messages + options floppy floppy="omnibook messages" in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 2a3330696372..e2bc132608fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -490,6 +490,8 @@ pgpgin - # of charging events to the memory cgroup. The charging pgpgout - # of uncharging events to the memory cgroup. The uncharging event happens each time a page is unaccounted from the cgroup. swap - # of bytes of swap usage +writeback - # of bytes of file/anon cache that are queued for syncing to + disk. inactive_anon - # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on inactive LRU list. active_anon - # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on active @@ -571,15 +573,19 @@ an memcg since the pages are allowed to be allocated from any physical node. One of the use cases is evaluating application performance by combining this information with the application's CPU allocation. -We export "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable" pages per-node for -each memcg. The ouput format of memory.numa_stat is: +Each memcg's numa_stat file includes "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable" +per-node page counts including "hierarchical_<counter>" which sums up all +hierarchical children's values in addition to the memcg's own value. + +The ouput format of memory.numa_stat is: total=<total pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... file=<total file pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... anon=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... unevictable=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... +hierarchical_<counter>=<counter pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ... -And we have total = file + anon + unevictable. +The "total" count is sum of file + anon + unevictable. 6. Hierarchy support diff --git a/Documentation/clk.txt b/Documentation/clk.txt index 6f68ba0d1e01..3aeb5c440442 100644 --- a/Documentation/clk.txt +++ b/Documentation/clk.txt @@ -70,6 +70,10 @@ the operations defined in clk.h: unsigned long parent_rate); long (*round_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw, unsigned long, unsigned long *); + long (*determine_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw, + unsigned long rate, + unsigned long *best_parent_rate, + struct clk **best_parent_clk); int (*set_parent)(struct clk_hw *hw, u8 index); u8 (*get_parent)(struct clk_hw *hw); int (*set_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw, unsigned long); @@ -179,26 +183,28 @@ mandatory, a cell marked as "n" implies that either including that callback is invalid or otherwise unnecessary. Empty cells are either optional or must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. - clock hardware characteristics - ----------------------------------------------------------- - | gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root | - |------|-------------|---------------|-------------|------| -.prepare | | | | | | -.unprepare | | | | | | - | | | | | | -.enable | y | | | | | -.disable | y | | | | | -.is_enabled | y | | | | | - | | | | | | -.recalc_rate | | y | | | | -.round_rate | | y | | | | -.set_rate | | y | | | | - | | | | | | -.set_parent | | | n | y | n | -.get_parent | | | n | y | n | - | | | | | | -.init | | | | | | - ----------------------------------------------------------- + clock hardware characteristics + ----------------------------------------------------------- + | gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root | + |------|-------------|---------------|-------------|------| +.prepare | | | | | | +.unprepare | | | | | | + | | | | | | +.enable | y | | | | | +.disable | y | | | | | +.is_enabled | y | | | | | + | | | | | | +.recalc_rate | | y | | | | +.round_rate | | y [1] | | | | +.determine_rate | | y [1] | | | | +.set_rate | | y | | | | + | | | | | | +.set_parent | | | n | y | n | +.get_parent | | | n | y | n | + | | | | | | +.init | | | | | | + ----------------------------------------------------------- +[1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required. Finally, register your clock at run-time with a hardware-specific registration function. This function simply populates struct clk_foo's diff --git a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c index 4848db8c71ff..8a4da64e02a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c +++ b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ static int netlink_send(int s, struct cn_msg *msg) nlh->nlmsg_seq = seq++; nlh->nlmsg_pid = getpid(); nlh->nlmsg_type = NLMSG_DONE; - nlh->nlmsg_len = NLMSG_LENGTH(size - sizeof(*nlh)); + nlh->nlmsg_len = size; nlh->nlmsg_flags = 0; m = NLMSG_DATA(nlh); diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt index 40282e617913..8b1a4451422e 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt @@ -23,8 +23,8 @@ Contents: 1.1 Initialization 1.2 Per-CPU Initialization 1.3 verify -1.4 target or setpolicy? -1.5 target +1.4 target/target_index or setpolicy? +1.5 target/target_index 1.6 setpolicy 2. Frequency Table Helpers @@ -56,7 +56,8 @@ cpufreq_driver.init - A pointer to the per-CPU initialization cpufreq_driver.verify - A pointer to a "verification" function. cpufreq_driver.setpolicy _or_ -cpufreq_driver.target - See below on the differences. +cpufreq_driver.target/ +target_index - See below on the differences. And optionally @@ -66,7 +67,7 @@ cpufreq_driver.resume - A pointer to a per-CPU resume function which is called with interrupts disabled and _before_ the pre-suspend frequency and/or policy is restored by a call to - ->target or ->setpolicy. + ->target/target_index or ->setpolicy. cpufreq_driver.attr - A pointer to a NULL-terminated list of "struct freq_attr" which allow to @@ -103,8 +104,8 @@ policy->governor must contain the "default policy" for this CPU. A few moments later, cpufreq_driver.verify and either cpufreq_driver.setpolicy or - cpufreq_driver.target is called with - these values. + cpufreq_driver.target/target_index is called + with these values. For setting some of these values (cpuinfo.min[max]_freq, policy->min[max]), the frequency table helpers might be helpful. See the section 2 for more information @@ -133,20 +134,28 @@ range) is within policy->min and policy->max. If necessary, increase policy->max first, and only if this is no solution, decrease policy->min. -1.4 target or setpolicy? +1.4 target/target_index or setpolicy? ---------------------------- Most cpufreq drivers or even most cpu frequency scaling algorithms only allow the CPU to be set to one frequency. For these, you use the -->target call. +->target/target_index call. Some cpufreq-capable processors switch the frequency between certain limits on their own. These shall use the ->setpolicy call -1.4. target +1.4. target/target_index ------------- +The target_index call has two arguments: struct cpufreq_policy *policy, +and unsigned int index (into the exposed frequency table). + +The CPUfreq driver must set the new frequency when called here. The +actual frequency must be determined by freq_table[index].frequency. + +Deprecated: +---------- The target call has three arguments: struct cpufreq_policy *policy, unsigned int target_frequency, unsigned int relation. diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index 219970ba54b7..77ec21574fb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Most cpufreq drivers (in fact, all except one, longrun) or even most cpu frequency scaling algorithms only offer the CPU to be set to one frequency. In order to offer dynamic frequency scaling, the cpufreq core must be able to tell these drivers of a "target frequency". So -these specific drivers will be transformed to offer a "->target" +these specific drivers will be transformed to offer a "->target/target_index" call instead of the existing "->setpolicy" call. For "longrun", all stays the same, though. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ CPU can be set to switch independently | CPU can only be set / the limits of policy->{min,max} / \ / \ - Using the ->setpolicy call, Using the ->target call, + Using the ->setpolicy call, Using the ->target/target_index call, the limits and the the frequency closest "policy" is set. to target_freq is set. It is assured that it diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index 786dc82f98ce..8cb9938cc47e 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Rusty Russell <rusty@rustcorp.com.au> Srivatsa Vaddagiri <vatsa@in.ibm.com> i386: - Zwane Mwaikambo <zwane@arm.linux.org.uk> + Zwane Mwaikambo <zwanem@gmail.com> ppc64: Nathan Lynch <nathanl@austin.ibm.com> Joel Schopp <jschopp@austin.ibm.com> diff --git a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt b/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt index 12c6bd50c9f6..d9020f5e847b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpuidle/governor.txt @@ -25,5 +25,4 @@ kernel configuration and platform will be selected by cpuidle. Interfaces: extern int cpuidle_register_governor(struct cpuidle_governor *gov); -extern void cpuidle_unregister_governor(struct cpuidle_governor *gov); struct cpuidle_governor diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt index d7c440b444cc..df52a849957f 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt @@ -30,8 +30,10 @@ multiqueue This policy is the default. -The multiqueue policy has two sets of 16 queues: one set for entries -waiting for the cache and another one for those in the cache. +The multiqueue policy has three sets of 16 queues: one set for entries +waiting for the cache and another two for those in the cache (a set for +clean entries and a set for dirty entries). + Cache entries in the queues are aged based on logical time. Entry into the cache is based on variable thresholds and queue selection is based on hit count on entry. The policy aims to take different cache miss diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt index e8cdf7241b66..719320b5ed3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt @@ -50,14 +50,16 @@ other parameters detailed later): which are dirty, and extra hints for use by the policy object. This information could be put on the cache device, but having it separate allows the volume manager to configure it differently, - e.g. as a mirror for extra robustness. + e.g. as a mirror for extra robustness. This metadata device may only + be used by a single cache device. Fixed block size ---------------- The origin is divided up into blocks of a fixed size. This block size is configurable when you first create the cache. Typically we've been -using block sizes of 256k - 1024k. +using block sizes of 256KB - 1024KB. The block size must be between 64 +(32KB) and 2097152 (1GB) and a multiple of 64 (32KB). Having a fixed block size simplifies the target a lot. But it is something of a compromise. For instance, a small part of a block may be @@ -66,10 +68,11 @@ So large block sizes are bad because they waste cache space. And small block sizes are bad because they increase the amount of metadata (both in core and on disk). -Writeback/writethrough ----------------------- +Cache operating modes +--------------------- -The cache has two modes, writeback and writethrough. +The cache has three operating modes: writeback, writethrough and +passthrough. If writeback, the default, is selected then a write to a block that is cached will go only to the cache and the block will be marked dirty in @@ -79,8 +82,31 @@ If writethrough is selected then a write to a cached block will not complete until it has hit both the origin and cache devices. Clean blocks should remain clean. +If passthrough is selected, useful when the cache contents are not known +to be coherent with the origin device, then all reads are served from +the origin device (all reads miss the cache) and all writes are +forwarded to the origin device; additionally, write hits cause cache +block invalidates. To enable passthrough mode the cache must be clean. +Passthrough mode allows a cache device to be activated without having to +worry about coherency. Coherency that exists is maintained, although +the cache will gradually cool as writes take place. If the coherency of +the cache can later be verified, or established through use of the +"invalidate_cblocks" message, the cache device can be transitioned to +writethrough or writeback mode while still warm. Otherwise, the cache +contents can be discarded prior to transitioning to the desired +operating mode. + A simple cleaner policy is provided, which will clean (write back) all -dirty blocks in a cache. Useful for decommissioning a cache. +dirty blocks in a cache. Useful for decommissioning a cache or when +shrinking a cache. Shrinking the cache's fast device requires all cache +blocks, in the area of the cache being removed, to be clean. If the +area being removed from the cache still contains dirty blocks the resize +will fail. Care must be taken to never reduce the volume used for the +cache's fast device until the cache is clean. This is of particular +importance if writeback mode is used. Writethrough and passthrough +modes already maintain a clean cache. Future support to partially clean +the cache, above a specified threshold, will allow for keeping the cache +warm and in writeback mode during resize. Migration throttling -------------------- @@ -159,7 +185,7 @@ Constructor block size : cache unit size in sectors #feature args : number of feature arguments passed - feature args : writethrough. (The default is writeback.) + feature args : writethrough or passthrough (The default is writeback.) policy : the replacement policy to use #policy args : an even number of arguments corresponding to @@ -175,6 +201,13 @@ Optional feature arguments are: back cache block contents later for performance reasons, so they may differ from the corresponding origin blocks. + passthrough : a degraded mode useful for various cache coherency + situations (e.g., rolling back snapshots of + underlying storage). Reads and writes always go to + the origin. If a write goes to a cached origin + block, then the cache block is invalidated. + To enable passthrough mode the cache must be clean. + A policy called 'default' is always registered. This is an alias for the policy we currently think is giving best all round performance. @@ -229,12 +262,28 @@ The message format is: E.g. dmsetup message my_cache 0 sequential_threshold 1024 + +Invalidation is removing an entry from the cache without writing it +back. Cache blocks can be invalidated via the invalidate_cblocks +message, which takes an arbitrary number of cblock ranges. Each cblock +range's end value is "one past the end", meaning 5-10 expresses a range +of values from 5 to 9. Each cblock must be expressed as a decimal +value, in the future a variant message that takes cblock ranges +expressed in hexidecimal may be needed to better support efficient +invalidation of larger caches. The cache must be in passthrough mode +when invalidate_cblocks is used. + + invalidate_cblocks [<cblock>|<cblock begin>-<cblock end>]* + +E.g. + dmsetup message my_cache 0 invalidate_cblocks 2345 3456-4567 5678-6789 + Examples ======== The test suite can be found here: -https://github.com/jthornber/thinp-test-suite +https://github.com/jthornber/device-mapper-test-suite dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \ /dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 512 1 writeback default 0' diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt index 2c656ae43ba7..c81839b52c4d 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt @@ -4,12 +4,15 @@ dm-crypt Device-Mapper's "crypt" target provides transparent encryption of block devices using the kernel crypto API. +For a more detailed description of supported parameters see: +http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/wiki/DMCrypt + Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \ <offset> [<#opt_params> <opt_params>] <cipher> Encryption cipher and an optional IV generation mode. - (In format cipher[:keycount]-chainmode-ivopts:ivmode). + (In format cipher[:keycount]-chainmode-ivmode[:ivopts]). Examples: des aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 @@ -19,7 +22,11 @@ Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \ <key> Key used for encryption. It is encoded as a hexadecimal number. - You can only use key sizes that are valid for the selected cipher. + You can only use key sizes that are valid for the selected cipher + in combination with the selected iv mode. + Note that for some iv modes the key string can contain additional + keys (for example IV seed) so the key contains more parts concatenated + into a single string. <keycount> Multi-key compatibility mode. You can define <keycount> keys and diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2a1673adc200 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ +DM statistics +============= + +Device Mapper supports the collection of I/O statistics on user-defined +regions of a DM device. If no regions are defined no statistics are +collected so there isn't any performance impact. Only bio-based DM +devices are currently supported. + +Each user-defined region specifies a starting sector, length and step. +Individual statistics will be collected for each step-sized area within +the range specified. + +The I/O statistics counters for each step-sized area of a region are +in the same format as /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats (see: +Documentation/iostats.txt). But two extra counters (12 and 13) are +provided: total time spent reading and writing in milliseconds. All +these counters may be accessed by sending the @stats_print message to +the appropriate DM device via dmsetup. + +Each region has a corresponding unique identifier, which we call a +region_id, that is assigned when the region is created. The region_id +must be supplied when querying statistics about the region, deleting the +region, etc. Unique region_ids enable multiple userspace programs to +request and process statistics for the same DM device without stepping +on each other's data. + +The creation of DM statistics will allocate memory via kmalloc or +fallback to using vmalloc space. At most, 1/4 of the overall system +memory may be allocated by DM statistics. The admin can see how much +memory is used by reading +/sys/module/dm_mod/parameters/stats_current_allocated_bytes + +Messages +======== + + @stats_create <range> <step> [<program_id> [<aux_data>]] + + Create a new region and return the region_id. + + <range> + "-" - whole device + "<start_sector>+<length>" - a range of <length> 512-byte sectors + starting with <start_sector>. + + <step> + "<area_size>" - the range is subdivided into areas each containing + <area_size> sectors. + "/<number_of_areas>" - the range is subdivided into the specified + number of areas. + + <program_id> + An optional parameter. A name that uniquely identifies + the userspace owner of the range. This groups ranges together + so that userspace programs can identify the ranges they + created and ignore those created by others. + The kernel returns this string back in the output of + @stats_list message, but it doesn't use it for anything else. + + <aux_data> + An optional parameter. A word that provides auxiliary data + that is useful to the client program that created the range. + The kernel returns this string back in the output of + @stats_list message, but it doesn't use this value for anything. + + @stats_delete <region_id> + + Delete the region with the specified id. + + <region_id> + region_id returned from @stats_create + + @stats_clear <region_id> + + Clear all the counters except the in-flight i/o counters. + + <region_id> + region_id returned from @stats_create + + @stats_list [<program_id>] + + List all regions registered with @stats_create. + + <program_id> + An optional parameter. + If this parameter is specified, only matching regions + are returned. + If it is not specified, all regions are returned. + + Output format: + <region_id>: <start_sector>+<length> <step> <program_id> <aux_data> + + @stats_print <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>] + + Print counters for each step-sized area of a region. + + <region_id> + region_id returned from @stats_create + + <starting_line> + The index of the starting line in the output. + If omitted, all lines are returned. + + <number_of_lines> + The number of lines to include in the output. + If omitted, all lines are returned. + + Output format for each step-sized area of a region: + + <start_sector>+<length> counters + + The first 11 counters have the same meaning as + /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats. + + Please refer to Documentation/iostats.txt for details. + + 1. the number of reads completed + 2. the number of reads merged + 3. the number of sectors read + 4. the number of milliseconds spent reading + 5. the number of writes completed + 6. the number of writes merged + 7. the number of sectors written + 8. the number of milliseconds spent writing + 9. the number of I/Os currently in progress + 10. the number of milliseconds spent doing I/Os + 11. the weighted number of milliseconds spent doing I/Os + + Additional counters: + 12. the total time spent reading in milliseconds + 13. the total time spent writing in milliseconds + + @stats_print_clear <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>] + + Atomically print and then clear all the counters except the + in-flight i/o counters. Useful when the client consuming the + statistics does not want to lose any statistics (those updated + between printing and clearing). + + <region_id> + region_id returned from @stats_create + + <starting_line> + The index of the starting line in the output. + If omitted, all lines are printed and then cleared. + + <number_of_lines> + The number of lines to process. + If omitted, all lines are printed and then cleared. + + @stats_set_aux <region_id> <aux_data> + + Store auxiliary data aux_data for the specified region. + + <region_id> + region_id returned from @stats_create + + <aux_data> + The string that identifies data which is useful to the client + program that created the range. The kernel returns this + string back in the output of @stats_list message, but it + doesn't use this value for anything. + +Examples +======== + +Subdivide the DM device 'vol' into 100 pieces and start collecting +statistics on them: + + dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_create - /100 + +Set the auxillary data string to "foo bar baz" (the escape for each +space must also be escaped, otherwise the shell will consume them): + + dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_set_aux 0 foo\\ bar\\ baz + +List the statistics: + + dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_list + +Print the statistics: + + dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_print 0 + +Delete the statistics: + + dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_delete 0 diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt index 30b8b83bd333..50c44cf79b0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt @@ -99,13 +99,14 @@ Using an existing pool device $data_block_size $low_water_mark" $data_block_size gives the smallest unit of disk space that can be -allocated at a time expressed in units of 512-byte sectors. People -primarily interested in thin provisioning may want to use a value such -as 1024 (512KB). People doing lots of snapshotting may want a smaller value -such as 128 (64KB). If you are not zeroing newly-allocated data, -a larger $data_block_size in the region of 256000 (128MB) is suggested. -$data_block_size must be the same for the lifetime of the -metadata device. +allocated at a time expressed in units of 512-byte sectors. +$data_block_size must be between 128 (64KB) and 2097152 (1GB) and a +multiple of 128 (64KB). $data_block_size cannot be changed after the +thin-pool is created. People primarily interested in thin provisioning +may want to use a value such as 1024 (512KB). People doing lots of +snapshotting may want a smaller value such as 128 (64KB). If you are +not zeroing newly-allocated data, a larger $data_block_size in the +region of 256000 (128MB) is suggested. $low_water_mark is expressed in blocks of size $data_block_size. If free space on the data device drops below this level then a dm event diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index 23721d3be3e6..80b72419ffd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -414,6 +414,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 200 = /dev/net/tun TAP/TUN network device 201 = /dev/button/gulpb Transmeta GULP-B buttons 202 = /dev/emd/ctl Enhanced Metadisk RAID (EMD) control + 203 = /dev/cuse Cuse (character device in user-space) 204 = /dev/video/em8300 EM8300 DVD decoder control 205 = /dev/video/em8300_mv EM8300 DVD decoder video 206 = /dev/video/em8300_ma EM8300 DVD decoder audio diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..49d517340de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arc/pmu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +* ARC Performance Monitor Unit + +The ARC 700 can be configured with a pipeline performance monitor for counting +CPU and cache events like cache misses and hits. + +Note that: + * ARC 700 refers to a family of ARC processor cores; + - There is only one type of PMU available for the whole family; + - The PMU may support different sets of events; supported events are probed + at boot time, as required by the reference manual. + + * The ARC 700 PMU does not support interrupts; although HW events may be + counted, the HW events themselves cannot serve as a trigger for a sample. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should contain + "snps,arc700-pmu" + +Example: + +pmu { + compatible = "snps,arc700-pmu"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards index db5858e32d3f..5fac246a9530 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards @@ -9,9 +9,53 @@ Required properties (in root node): FPGA type interrupt controllers, see the versatile-fpga-irq binding doc. -In the root node the Integrator/CP must have a /cpcon node pointing -to the CP control registers, and the Integrator/AP must have a -/syscon node pointing to the Integrator/AP system controller. +Required nodes: + +- core-module: the root node to the Integrator platforms must have + a core-module with regs and the compatible string + "arm,core-module-integrator" + + Required properties for the core module: + - regs: the location and size of the core module registers, one + range of 0x200 bytes. + +- syscon: the root node of the Integrator platforms must have a + system controller node pointong to the control registers, + with the compatible string + "arm,integrator-ap-syscon" + "arm,integrator-cp-syscon" + respectively. + + Required properties for the system controller: + - regs: the location and size of the system controller registers, + one range of 0x100 bytes. + + Required properties for the AP system controller: + - interrupts: the AP syscon node must include the logical module + interrupts, stated in order of module instance <module 0>, + <module 1>, <module 2> ... for the CP system controller this + is not required not of any use. + +/dts-v1/; +/include/ "integrator.dtsi" + +/ { + model = "ARM Integrator/AP"; + compatible = "arm,integrator-ap"; + + core-module@10000000 { + compatible = "arm,core-module-integrator"; + reg = <0x10000000 0x200>; + }; + + syscon { + compatible = "arm,integrator-ap-syscon"; + reg = <0x11000000 0x100>; + interrupt-parent = <&pic>; + /* These are the logic module IRQs */ + interrupts = <9>, <10>, <11>, <12>; + }; +}; ARM Versatile Application and Platform Baseboards diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt index 61df564c0d23..d74091a8a3bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/armada-370-xp-mpic.txt @@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Interrupt Controller Required properties: - compatible: Should be "marvell,mpic" - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. +- msi-controller: Identifies the node as an PCI Message Signaled + Interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. Should be 1. The cell is the IRQ number @@ -24,6 +26,7 @@ Example: #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; interrupt-controller; + msi-controller; reg = <0xd0020a00 0x1d0>, <0xd0021070 0x58>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt index 723c205cb10d..d1061469f63d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-adc.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: Should contain the IRQ line for the ADC - atmel,adc-channels-used: Bitmask of the channels muxed and enable for this device - - atmel,adc-num-channels: Number of channels available in the ADC - atmel,adc-startup-time: Startup Time of the ADC in microseconds as defined in the datasheet - atmel,adc-vref: Reference voltage in millivolts for the conversions @@ -24,6 +23,13 @@ Optional properties: resolution will be used. - atmel,adc-sleep-mode: Boolean to enable sleep mode when no conversion - atmel,adc-sample-hold-time: Sample and Hold Time in microseconds + - atmel,adc-ts-wires: Number of touch screen wires. Should be 4 or 5. If this + value is set, then adc driver will enable touch screen + support. + NOTE: when adc touch screen enabled, the adc hardware trigger will be + disabled. Since touch screen will occupied the trigger register. + - atmel,adc-ts-pressure-threshold: a pressure threshold for touchscreen. It + make touch detect more precision. Optional trigger Nodes: - Required properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt index fb7b5cd2652f..0ff6560e6094 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm11351.txt @@ -6,4 +6,5 @@ bcm11351, bcm28145, bcm28155 SoCs) shall have the following properties: Required root node property: -compatible = "bcm,bcm11351"; +compatible = "brcm,bcm11351"; +DEPRECATED: compatible = "bcm,bcm11351"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm,kona-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-timer.txt index 59fa6e68d4f6..17d88b233d1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/bcm,kona-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-timer.txt @@ -4,14 +4,15 @@ This timer is used in the following Broadcom SoCs: BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, BCM28155 Required properties: -- compatible : "bcm,kona-timer" +- compatible : "brcm,kona-timer" +- DEPRECATED: compatible : "bcm,kona-timer" - reg : Register range for the timer - interrupts : interrupt for the timer - clock-frequency: frequency that the clock operates Example: timer@35006000 { - compatible = "bcm,kona-timer"; + compatible = "brcm,kona-timer"; reg = <0x35006000 0x1000>; interrupts = <0x0 7 0x4>; clock-frequency = <32768>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b86a00e351d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/kona-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +Broadcom Kona Family Watchdog Timer +----------------------------------- + +This watchdog timer is used in the following Broadcom SoCs: + BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, BCM28155 + +Required properties: + - compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-wdt", "brcm,kona-wdt"; + - reg: memory address & range + +Example: + watchdog@35002f40 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-wdt", "brcm,kona-wdt"; + reg = <0x35002f40 0x6c>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt index f770ac0893d4..049675944b78 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda/mem-ctrlr.txt @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@ Calxeda DDR memory controller Properties: -- compatible : Should be "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl" +- compatible : Should be: + - "calxeda,hb-ddr-ctrl" for ECX-1000 + - "calxeda,ecx-2000-ddr-ctrl" for ECX-2000 - reg : Address and size for DDR controller registers. - interrupts : Interrupt for DDR controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt index 92d36e2aa877..f28d82bbbc56 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cci.txt @@ -36,14 +36,18 @@ specific to ARM. - reg Usage: required - Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Value type: Integer cells. A register entry, expressed as a pair + of cells, containing base and size. Definition: A standard property. Specifies base physical address of CCI control registers common to all interfaces. - ranges: Usage: required - Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Value type: Integer cells. An array of range entries, expressed + as a tuple of cells, containing child address, + parent address and the size of the region in the + child address space. Definition: A standard property. Follow rules in the ePAPR for hierarchical bus addressing. CCI interfaces addresses refer to the parent node addressing @@ -74,11 +78,49 @@ specific to ARM. - reg: Usage: required - Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Value type: Integer cells. A register entry, expressed + as a pair of cells, containing base and + size. Definition: the base address and size of the corresponding interface programming registers. + - CCI PMU node + + Parent node must be CCI interconnect node. + + A CCI pmu node must contain the following properties: + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: must be "arm,cci-400-pmu" + + - reg: + Usage: required + Value type: Integer cells. A register entry, expressed + as a pair of cells, containing base and + size. + Definition: the base address and size of the + corresponding interface programming + registers. + + - interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: Integer cells. Array of interrupt specifier + entries, as defined in + ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. + Definition: list of counter overflow interrupts, one per + counter. The interrupts must be specified + starting with the cycle counter overflow + interrupt, followed by counter0 overflow + interrupt, counter1 overflow interrupt,... + ,counterN overflow interrupt. + + The CCI PMU has an interrupt signal for each + counter. The number of interrupts must be + equal to the number of counters. + * CCI interconnect bus masters Description: masters in the device tree connected to a CCI port @@ -144,7 +186,7 @@ Example: #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; reg = <0x0 0x2c090000 0 0x1000>; - ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x2c090000 0x6000>; + ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x2c090000 0x10000>; cci_control0: slave-if@1000 { compatible = "arm,cci-400-ctrl-if"; @@ -163,6 +205,16 @@ Example: interface-type = "ace"; reg = <0x5000 0x1000>; }; + + pmu@9000 { + compatible = "arm,cci-400-pmu"; + reg = <0x9000 0x5000>; + interrupts = <0 101 4>, + <0 102 4>, + <0 103 4>, + <0 104 4>, + <0 105 4>; + }; }; This CCI node corresponds to a CCI component whose control registers sits diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt index f32494dbfe19..91304353eea4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt @@ -1,77 +1,384 @@ -* ARM CPUs binding description +================= +ARM CPUs bindings +================= The device tree allows to describe the layout of CPUs in a system through the "cpus" node, which in turn contains a number of subnodes (ie "cpu") defining properties for every cpu. -Bindings for CPU nodes follow the ePAPR standard, available from: - -http://devicetree.org - -For the ARM architecture every CPU node must contain the following properties: - -- device_type: must be "cpu" -- reg: property matching the CPU MPIDR[23:0] register bits - reg[31:24] bits must be set to 0 -- compatible: should be one of: - "arm,arm1020" - "arm,arm1020e" - "arm,arm1022" - "arm,arm1026" - "arm,arm720" - "arm,arm740" - "arm,arm7tdmi" - "arm,arm920" - "arm,arm922" - "arm,arm925" - "arm,arm926" - "arm,arm940" - "arm,arm946" - "arm,arm9tdmi" - "arm,cortex-a5" - "arm,cortex-a7" - "arm,cortex-a8" - "arm,cortex-a9" - "arm,cortex-a15" - "arm,arm1136" - "arm,arm1156" - "arm,arm1176" - "arm,arm11mpcore" - "faraday,fa526" - "intel,sa110" - "intel,sa1100" - "marvell,feroceon" - "marvell,mohawk" - "marvell,xsc3" - "marvell,xscale" - -Example: +Bindings for CPU nodes follow the ePAPR v1.1 standard, available from: + +https://www.power.org/documentation/epapr-version-1-1/ + +with updates for 32-bit and 64-bit ARM systems provided in this document. + +================================ +Convention used in this document +================================ + +This document follows the conventions described in the ePAPR v1.1, with +the addition: + +- square brackets define bitfields, eg reg[7:0] value of the bitfield in + the reg property contained in bits 7 down to 0 + +===================================== +cpus and cpu node bindings definition +===================================== + +The ARM architecture, in accordance with the ePAPR, requires the cpus and cpu +nodes to be present and contain the properties described below. + +- cpus node + + Description: Container of cpu nodes + + The node name must be "cpus". + + A cpus node must define the following properties: + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + + Definition depends on ARM architecture version and + configuration: + + # On uniprocessor ARM architectures previous to v7 + value must be 1, to enable a simple enumeration + scheme for processors that do not have a HW CPU + identification register. + # On 32-bit ARM 11 MPcore, ARM v7 or later systems + value must be 1, that corresponds to CPUID/MPIDR + registers sizes. + # On ARM v8 64-bit systems value should be set to 2, + that corresponds to the MPIDR_EL1 register size. + If MPIDR_EL1[63:32] value is equal to 0 on all CPUs + in the system, #address-cells can be set to 1, since + MPIDR_EL1[63:32] bits are not used for CPUs + identification. + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: must be set to 0 + +- cpu node + + Description: Describes a CPU in an ARM based system + + PROPERTIES + + - device_type + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: must be "cpu" + - reg + Usage and definition depend on ARM architecture version and + configuration: + + # On uniprocessor ARM architectures previous to v7 + this property is required and must be set to 0. + + # On ARM 11 MPcore based systems this property is + required and matches the CPUID[11:0] register bits. + + Bits [11:0] in the reg cell must be set to + bits [11:0] in CPU ID register. + + All other bits in the reg cell must be set to 0. + + # On 32-bit ARM v7 or later systems this property is + required and matches the CPU MPIDR[23:0] register + bits. + + Bits [23:0] in the reg cell must be set to + bits [23:0] in MPIDR. + + All other bits in the reg cell must be set to 0. + + # On ARM v8 64-bit systems this property is required + and matches the MPIDR_EL1 register affinity bits. + + * If cpus node's #address-cells property is set to 2 + + The first reg cell bits [7:0] must be set to + bits [39:32] of MPIDR_EL1. + + The second reg cell bits [23:0] must be set to + bits [23:0] of MPIDR_EL1. + + * If cpus node's #address-cells property is set to 1 + + The reg cell bits [23:0] must be set to bits [23:0] + of MPIDR_EL1. + + All other bits in the reg cells must be set to 0. + + - compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: should be one of: + "arm,arm710t" + "arm,arm720t" + "arm,arm740t" + "arm,arm7ej-s" + "arm,arm7tdmi" + "arm,arm7tdmi-s" + "arm,arm9es" + "arm,arm9ej-s" + "arm,arm920t" + "arm,arm922t" + "arm,arm925" + "arm,arm926e-s" + "arm,arm926ej-s" + "arm,arm940t" + "arm,arm946e-s" + "arm,arm966e-s" + "arm,arm968e-s" + "arm,arm9tdmi" + "arm,arm1020e" + "arm,arm1020t" + "arm,arm1022e" + "arm,arm1026ej-s" + "arm,arm1136j-s" + "arm,arm1136jf-s" + "arm,arm1156t2-s" + "arm,arm1156t2f-s" + "arm,arm1176jzf" + "arm,arm1176jz-s" + "arm,arm1176jzf-s" + "arm,arm11mpcore" + "arm,cortex-a5" + "arm,cortex-a7" + "arm,cortex-a8" + "arm,cortex-a9" + "arm,cortex-a15" + "arm,cortex-a53" + "arm,cortex-a57" + "arm,cortex-m0" + "arm,cortex-m0+" + "arm,cortex-m1" + "arm,cortex-m3" + "arm,cortex-m4" + "arm,cortex-r4" + "arm,cortex-r5" + "arm,cortex-r7" + "faraday,fa526" + "intel,sa110" + "intel,sa1100" + "marvell,feroceon" + "marvell,mohawk" + "marvell,pj4a" + "marvell,pj4b" + "marvell,sheeva-v5" + "qcom,krait" + "qcom,scorpion" + - enable-method + Value type: <stringlist> + Usage and definition depend on ARM architecture version. + # On ARM v8 64-bit this property is required and must + be one of: + "spin-table" + "psci" + # On ARM 32-bit systems this property is optional. + + - cpu-release-addr + Usage: required for systems that have an "enable-method" + property value of "spin-table". + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: + # On ARM v8 64-bit systems must be a two cell + property identifying a 64-bit zero-initialised + memory location. + +Example 1 (dual-cluster big.LITTLE system 32-bit): cpus { #size-cells = <0>; #address-cells = <1>; - CPU0: cpu@0 { + cpu@0 { device_type = "cpu"; compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; reg = <0x0>; }; - CPU1: cpu@1 { + cpu@1 { device_type = "cpu"; compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; reg = <0x1>; }; - CPU2: cpu@100 { + cpu@100 { device_type = "cpu"; compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; reg = <0x100>; }; - CPU3: cpu@101 { + cpu@101 { device_type = "cpu"; compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; reg = <0x101>; }; }; + +Example 2 (Cortex-A8 uniprocessor 32-bit system): + + cpus { + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + + cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a8"; + reg = <0x0>; + }; + }; + +Example 3 (ARM 926EJ-S uniprocessor 32-bit system): + + cpus { + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + + cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,arm926ej-s"; + reg = <0x0>; + }; + }; + +Example 4 (ARM Cortex-A57 64-bit system): + +cpus { + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <2>; + + cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x0>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@1 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x1>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@10000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10000>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@10001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10001>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@10100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@10101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100000000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x0>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100000001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x1>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100000100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100000101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100010000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10000>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100010001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10001>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100010100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + cpu@100010101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt index 1a5a42ce21bb..83f405bde138 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt @@ -7,10 +7,18 @@ The MPU contain CPUs, GIC, L2 cache and a local PRCM. Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-mpu" for OMAP3 Should be "ti,omap4-mpu" for OMAP4 + Should be "ti,omap5-mpu" for OMAP5 - ti,hwmods: "mpu" Examples: +- For an OMAP5 SMP system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap5-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu" +}; + - For an OMAP4 SMP system: mpu { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt index 6d498c758b45..808c1543b0f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt @@ -21,7 +21,8 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - ti,no_idle_on_suspend: When present, it prevents the PM to idle the module during suspend. - +- ti,no-reset-on-init: When present, the module should not be reset at init +- ti,no-idle-on-init: When present, the module should not be idled at init Example: @@ -59,3 +60,6 @@ Boards: - AM43x EPOS EVM compatible = "ti,am43x-epos-evm", "ti,am4372", "ti,am43" + +- DRA7 EVM: Software Developement Board for DRA7XX + compatible = "ti,dra7-evm", "ti,dra7" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt index 343781b9f246..3e1e498fea96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/pmu.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ representation in the device tree should be done as under:- Required properties: - compatible : should be one of + "arm,armv8-pmuv3" "arm,cortex-a15-pmu" "arm,cortex-a9-pmu" "arm,cortex-a8-pmu" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt index 47ada1dff216..5d49f2b37f68 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/exynos-adc.txt @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ adc@12D10000 { /* NTC thermistor is a hwmon device */ ncp15wb473@0 { compatible = "ntc,ncp15wb473"; - pullup-uV = <1800000>; + pullup-uv = <1800000>; pullup-ohm = <47000>; pulldown-ohm = <0>; io-channels = <&adc 4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/topology.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/topology.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4aa20e7a424e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/topology.txt @@ -0,0 +1,474 @@ +=========================================== +ARM topology binding description +=========================================== + +=========================================== +1 - Introduction +=========================================== + +In an ARM system, the hierarchy of CPUs is defined through three entities that +are used to describe the layout of physical CPUs in the system: + +- cluster +- core +- thread + +The cpu nodes (bindings defined in [1]) represent the devices that +correspond to physical CPUs and are to be mapped to the hierarchy levels. + +The bottom hierarchy level sits at core or thread level depending on whether +symmetric multi-threading (SMT) is supported or not. + +For instance in a system where CPUs support SMT, "cpu" nodes represent all +threads existing in the system and map to the hierarchy level "thread" above. +In systems where SMT is not supported "cpu" nodes represent all cores present +in the system and map to the hierarchy level "core" above. + +ARM topology bindings allow one to associate cpu nodes with hierarchical groups +corresponding to the system hierarchy; syntactically they are defined as device +tree nodes. + +The remainder of this document provides the topology bindings for ARM, based +on the ePAPR standard, available from: + +http://www.power.org/documentation/epapr-version-1-1/ + +If not stated otherwise, whenever a reference to a cpu node phandle is made its +value must point to a cpu node compliant with the cpu node bindings as +documented in [1]. +A topology description containing phandles to cpu nodes that are not compliant +with bindings standardized in [1] is therefore considered invalid. + +=========================================== +2 - cpu-map node +=========================================== + +The ARM CPU topology is defined within the cpu-map node, which is a direct +child of the cpus node and provides a container where the actual topology +nodes are listed. + +- cpu-map node + + Usage: Optional - On ARM SMP systems provide CPUs topology to the OS. + ARM uniprocessor systems do not require a topology + description and therefore should not define a + cpu-map node. + + Description: The cpu-map node is just a container node where its + subnodes describe the CPU topology. + + Node name must be "cpu-map". + + The cpu-map node's parent node must be the cpus node. + + The cpu-map node's child nodes can be: + + - one or more cluster nodes + + Any other configuration is considered invalid. + +The cpu-map node can only contain three types of child nodes: + +- cluster node +- core node +- thread node + +whose bindings are described in paragraph 3. + +The nodes describing the CPU topology (cluster/core/thread) can only be +defined within the cpu-map node. +Any other configuration is consider invalid and therefore must be ignored. + +=========================================== +2.1 - cpu-map child nodes naming convention +=========================================== + +cpu-map child nodes must follow a naming convention where the node name +must be "clusterN", "coreN", "threadN" depending on the node type (ie +cluster/core/thread) (where N = {0, 1, ...} is the node number; nodes which +are siblings within a single common parent node must be given a unique and +sequential N value, starting from 0). +cpu-map child nodes which do not share a common parent node can have the same +name (ie same number N as other cpu-map child nodes at different device tree +levels) since name uniqueness will be guaranteed by the device tree hierarchy. + +=========================================== +3 - cluster/core/thread node bindings +=========================================== + +Bindings for cluster/cpu/thread nodes are defined as follows: + +- cluster node + + Description: must be declared within a cpu-map node, one node + per cluster. A system can contain several layers of + clustering and cluster nodes can be contained in parent + cluster nodes. + + The cluster node name must be "clusterN" as described in 2.1 above. + A cluster node can not be a leaf node. + + A cluster node's child nodes must be: + + - one or more cluster nodes; or + - one or more core nodes + + Any other configuration is considered invalid. + +- core node + + Description: must be declared in a cluster node, one node per core in + the cluster. If the system does not support SMT, core + nodes are leaf nodes, otherwise they become containers of + thread nodes. + + The core node name must be "coreN" as described in 2.1 above. + + A core node must be a leaf node if SMT is not supported. + + Properties for core nodes that are leaf nodes: + + - cpu + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: a phandle to the cpu node that corresponds to the + core node. + + If a core node is not a leaf node (CPUs supporting SMT) a core node's + child nodes can be: + + - one or more thread nodes + + Any other configuration is considered invalid. + +- thread node + + Description: must be declared in a core node, one node per thread + in the core if the system supports SMT. Thread nodes are + always leaf nodes in the device tree. + + The thread node name must be "threadN" as described in 2.1 above. + + A thread node must be a leaf node. + + A thread node must contain the following property: + + - cpu + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: a phandle to the cpu node that corresponds to + the thread node. + +=========================================== +4 - Example dts +=========================================== + +Example 1 (ARM 64-bit, 16-cpu system, two clusters of clusters): + +cpus { + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <2>; + + cpu-map { + cluster0 { + cluster0 { + core0 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU0>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU1>; + }; + }; + + core1 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU2>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU3>; + }; + }; + }; + + cluster1 { + core0 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU4>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU5>; + }; + }; + + core1 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU6>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU7>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + + cluster1 { + cluster0 { + core0 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU8>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU9>; + }; + }; + core1 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU10>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU11>; + }; + }; + }; + + cluster1 { + core0 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU12>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU13>; + }; + }; + core1 { + thread0 { + cpu = <&CPU14>; + }; + thread1 { + cpu = <&CPU15>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + }; + + CPU0: cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x0>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU1: cpu@1 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x1>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU2: cpu@100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU3: cpu@101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU4: cpu@10000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10000>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU5: cpu@10001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10001>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU6: cpu@10100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU7: cpu@10101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x0 0x10101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU8: cpu@100000000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x0>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU9: cpu@100000001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x1>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU10: cpu@100000100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU11: cpu@100000101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU12: cpu@100010000 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10000>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU13: cpu@100010001 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10001>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU14: cpu@100010100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10100>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; + + CPU15: cpu@100010101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a57"; + reg = <0x1 0x10101>; + enable-method = "spin-table"; + cpu-release-addr = <0 0x20000000>; + }; +}; + +Example 2 (ARM 32-bit, dual-cluster, 8-cpu system, no SMT): + +cpus { + #size-cells = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + + cpu-map { + cluster0 { + core0 { + cpu = <&CPU0>; + }; + core1 { + cpu = <&CPU1>; + }; + core2 { + cpu = <&CPU2>; + }; + core3 { + cpu = <&CPU3>; + }; + }; + + cluster1 { + core0 { + cpu = <&CPU4>; + }; + core1 { + cpu = <&CPU5>; + }; + core2 { + cpu = <&CPU6>; + }; + core3 { + cpu = <&CPU7>; + }; + }; + }; + + CPU0: cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; + reg = <0x0>; + }; + + CPU1: cpu@1 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; + reg = <0x1>; + }; + + CPU2: cpu@2 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; + reg = <0x2>; + }; + + CPU3: cpu@3 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a15"; + reg = <0x3>; + }; + + CPU4: cpu@100 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; + reg = <0x100>; + }; + + CPU5: cpu@101 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; + reg = <0x101>; + }; + + CPU6: cpu@102 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; + reg = <0x102>; + }; + + CPU7: cpu@103 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "arm,cortex-a7"; + reg = <0x103>; + }; +}; + +=============================================================================== +[1] ARM Linux kernel documentation + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ae5043e42e5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vexpress-scc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +ARM Versatile Express Serial Configuration Controller +----------------------------------------------------- + +Test chips for ARM Versatile Express platform implement SCC (Serial +Configuration Controller) interface, used to set initial conditions +for the test chip. + +In some cases its registers are also mapped in normal address space +and can be used to obtain runtime information about the chip internals +(like silicon temperature sensors) and as interface to other subsystems +like platform configuration control and power management. + +Required properties: + +- compatible value: "arm,vexpress-scc,<model>", "arm,vexpress-scc"; + where <model> is the full tile model name (as used + in the tile's Technical Reference Manual), + eg. for Coretile Express A15x2 A7x3 (V2P-CA15_A7): + compatible = "arm,vexpress-scc,v2p-ca15_a7", "arm,vexpress-scc"; + +Optional properties: + +- reg: when the SCC is memory mapped, physical address and size of the + registers window +- interrupts: when the SCC can generate a system-level interrupt + +Example: + + scc@7fff0000 { + compatible = "arm,vexpress-scc,v2p-ca15_a7", "arm,vexpress-scc"; + reg = <0 0x7fff0000 0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 95 4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vic.txt index 266716b23437..dd527216c5fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/vic.txt @@ -18,6 +18,15 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupts : Interrupt source for parent controllers if the VIC is nested. +- valid-mask : A one cell big bit mask of valid interrupt sources. Each bit + represents single interrupt source, starting from source 0 at LSb and ending + at source 31 at MSb. A bit that is set means that the source is wired and + clear means otherwise. If unspecified, defaults to all valid. +- valid-wakeup-mask : A one cell big bit mask of interrupt sources that can be + configured as wake up source for the system. Order of bits is the same as for + valid-mask property. A set bit means that this interrupt source can be + configured as a wake up source for the system. If unspecied, defaults to all + interrupt sources configurable as wake up sources. Example: @@ -26,4 +35,7 @@ Example: interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <1>; reg = <0x60000 0x1000>; + + valid-mask = <0xffffff7f>; + valid-wakeup-mask = <0x0000ff7f>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt index cedc2a9c4785..0fd76c405208 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/imx-weim.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ The actual devices are instantiated from the child nodes of a WEIM node. Required properties: - - compatible: Should be set to "fsl,imx6q-weim" + - compatible: Should be set to "fsl,<soc>-weim" - reg: A resource specifier for the register space (see the example below) - clocks: the clock, see the example below. @@ -21,11 +21,18 @@ Required properties: Timing property for child nodes. It is mandatory, not optional. - - fsl,weim-cs-timing: The timing array, contains 6 timing values for the + - fsl,weim-cs-timing: The timing array, contains timing values for the child node. We can get the CS index from the child - node's "reg" property. This property contains the values - for the registers EIM_CSnGCR1, EIM_CSnGCR2, EIM_CSnRCR1, - EIM_CSnRCR2, EIM_CSnWCR1, EIM_CSnWCR2 in this order. + node's "reg" property. The number of registers depends + on the selected chip. + For i.MX1, i.MX21 ("fsl,imx1-weim") there are two + registers: CSxU, CSxL. + For i.MX25, i.MX27, i.MX31 and i.MX35 ("fsl,imx27-weim") + there are three registers: CSCRxU, CSCRxL, CSCRxA. + For i.MX50, i.MX53 ("fsl,imx50-weim"), + i.MX51 ("fsl,imx51-weim") and i.MX6Q ("fsl,imx6q-weim") + there are six registers: CSxGCR1, CSxGCR2, CSxRCR1, + CSxRCR2, CSxWCR1, CSxWCR2. Example for an imx6q-sabreauto board, the NOR flash connected to the WEIM: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7586fb68c072 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt @@ -0,0 +1,276 @@ + +* Marvell MBus + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be set to one of the following: + marvell,armada370-mbus + marvell,armadaxp-mbus + marvell,armada370-mbus + marvell,armadaxp-mbus + marvell,kirkwood-mbus + marvell,dove-mbus + marvell,orion5x-88f5281-mbus + marvell,orion5x-88f5182-mbus + marvell,orion5x-88f5181-mbus + marvell,orion5x-88f6183-mbus + marvell,mv78xx0-mbus + +- address-cells: Must be '2'. The first cell for the MBus ID encoding, + the second cell for the address offset within the window. + +- size-cells: Must be '1'. + +- ranges: Must be set up to provide a proper translation for each child. + See the examples below. + +- controller: Contains a single phandle referring to the MBus controller + node. This allows to specify the node that contains the + registers that control the MBus, which is typically contained + within the internal register window (see below). + +Optional properties: + +- pcie-mem-aperture: This optional property contains the aperture for + the memory region of the PCIe driver. + If it's defined, it must encode the base address and + size for the address decoding windows allocated for + the PCIe memory region. + +- pcie-io-aperture: Just as explained for the above property, this + optional property contains the aperture for the + I/O region of the PCIe driver. + +* Marvell MBus controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Should be set to "marvell,mbus-controller". + +- reg: Device's register space. + Two entries are expected (see the examples below): + the first one controls the devices decoding window and + the second one controls the SDRAM decoding window. + +Example: + + soc { + compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + controller = <&mbusc>; + pcie-mem-aperture = <0xe0000000 0x8000000>; + pcie-io-aperture = <0xe8000000 0x100000>; + + internal-regs { + compatible = "simple-bus"; + + mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { + compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + }; + + /* more children ...*/ + }; + }; + +** MBus address decoding window specification + +The MBus children address space is comprised of two cells: the first one for +the window ID and the second one for the offset within the window. +In order to allow to describe valid and non-valid window entries, the +following encoding is used: + + 0xSIAA0000 0x00oooooo + +Where: + + S = 0x0 for a MBus valid window + S = 0xf for a non-valid window (see below) + +If S = 0x0, then: + + I = 4-bit window target ID + AA = windpw attribute + +If S = 0xf, then: + + I = don't care + AA = 1 for internal register + +Following the above encoding, for each ranges entry for a MBus valid window +(S = 0x0), an address decoding window is allocated. On the other side, +entries for translation that do not correspond to valid windows (S = 0xf) +are skipped. + + soc { + compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + controller = <&mbusc>; + + ranges = <0xf0010000 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000 + 0x01e00000 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000>; + + bootrom { + compatible = "marvell,bootrom"; + reg = <0x01e00000 0 0x100000>; + }; + + /* other children */ + ... + + internal-regs { + compatible = "simple-bus"; + ranges = <0 0xf0010000 0 0x100000>; + + mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { + compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + }; + + /* more children ...*/ + }; + }; + +In the shown example, the translation entry in the 'ranges' property is what +makes the MBus driver create a static decoding window for the corresponding +given child device. Note that the binding does not require child nodes to be +present. Of course, child nodes are needed to probe the devices. + +Since each window is identified by its target ID and attribute ID there's +a special macro that can be use to simplify the translation entries: + +#define MBUS_ID(target,attributes) (((target) << 24) | ((attributes) << 16)) + +Using this macro, the above example would be: + + soc { + compatible = "marvell,armada370-mbus", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + controller = <&mbusc>; + + ranges = < MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000 + MBUS_ID(0x01, 0xe0) 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000>; + + bootrom { + compatible = "marvell,bootrom"; + reg = <MBUS_ID(0x01, 0xe0) 0 0x100000>; + }; + + /* other children */ + ... + + internal-regs { + compatible = "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0x100000>; + + mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { + compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + }; + + /* other children */ + ... + }; + }; + + +** About the window base address + +Remember the MBus controller allows a great deal of flexibility for choosing +the decoding window base address. When planning the device tree layout it's +possible to choose any address as the base address, provided of course there's +a region large enough available, and with the required alignment. + +Yet in other words: there's nothing preventing us from setting a base address +of 0xf0000000, or 0xd0000000 for the NOR device shown above, if such region is +unused. + +** Window allocation policy + +The mbus-node ranges property defines a set of mbus windows that are expected +to be set by the operating system and that are guaranteed to be free of overlaps +with one another or with the system memory ranges. + +Each entry in the property refers to exactly one window. If the operating system +choses to use a different set of mbus windows, it must ensure that any address +translations performed from downstream devices are adapted accordingly. + +The operating system may insert additional mbus windows that do not conflict +with the ones listed in the ranges, e.g. for mapping PCIe devices. +As a special case, the internal register window must be set up by the boot +loader at the address listed in the ranges property, since access to that region +is needed to set up the other windows. + +** Example + +See the example below, where a more complete device tree is shown: + + soc { + compatible = "marvell,armadaxp-mbus", "simple-bus"; + controller = <&mbusc>; + + ranges = <MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0 0xd0000000 0x100000 /* internal-regs */ + MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x1d) 0 0 0xfff00000 0x100000 + MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x2f) 0 0 0xf0000000 0x8000000>; + + bootrom { + compatible = "marvell,bootrom"; + reg = <MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x1d) 0 0x100000>; + }; + + devbus-bootcs { + status = "okay"; + ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0x01, 0x2f) 0 0x8000000>; + + /* NOR */ + nor { + compatible = "cfi-flash"; + reg = <0 0x8000000>; + bank-width = <2>; + }; + }; + + pcie-controller { + compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-pcie"; + status = "okay"; + device_type = "pci"; + + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + ranges = + <0x82000000 0 0x40000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x40000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x42000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x42000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 2.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x44000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x44000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.1 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x48000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x48000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.2 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x4c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x4c000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.3 registers */ + 0x82000800 0 0xe0000000 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe8) 0xe0000000 0 0x08000000 /* Port 0.0 MEM */ + 0x81000800 0 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe0) 0xe8000000 0 0x00100000 /* Port 0.0 IO */>; + + + pcie@1,0 { + /* Port 0, Lane 0 */ + status = "okay"; + }; + }; + + internal-regs { + compatible = "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0x100000>; + + mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + }; + + interrupt-controller@20000 { + reg = <0x20a00 0x2d0>, <0x21070 0x58>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/efm32-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/efm32-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..263d293f6a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/efm32-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +* Clock bindings for Energy Micro efm32 Giant Gecko's Clock Management Unit + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "efm32gg,cmu" +- reg: Base address and length of the register set +- interrupts: Interrupt used by the CMU +- #clock-cells: Should be <1> + +The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock ID in +its "clocks" phandle cell. The header efm32-clk.h contains a list of available +IDs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt index 14d5c2af26f4..a2ac2d9ac71a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos4-clock.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ SoC's in the Exynos4 family. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos4210-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4210 SoC. - "samsung,exynos4412-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos4412 SoC. @@ -236,6 +236,7 @@ Exynos4 SoC and this is specified where applicable. spi0_isp_sclk 380 Exynos4x12 spi1_isp_sclk 381 Exynos4x12 uart_isp_sclk 382 Exynos4x12 + tmu_apbif 383 [Mux Clocks] diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt index 781a6276adf7..46f5c791ea0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5250-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5250 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos5250-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5250 SoC. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped @@ -59,6 +59,9 @@ clock which they consume. sclk_spi0 154 sclk_spi1 155 sclk_spi2 156 + div_i2s1 157 + div_i2s2 158 + sclk_hdmiphy 159 [Peripheral Clock Gates] @@ -154,7 +157,16 @@ clock which they consume. dsim0 341 dp 342 mixer 343 - hdmi 345 + hdmi 344 + g2d 345 + + + [Clock Muxes] + + Clock ID + ---------------------------- + mout_hdmi 1024 + Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt index 9bcc4b1bff51..458f34789e5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5420-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5420 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be one of the following. +- compatible: should be one of the following. - "samsung,exynos5420-clock" - controller compatible with Exynos5420 SoC. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped @@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ clock which they consume. sclk_pwm 155 sclk_gscl_wa 156 sclk_gscl_wb 157 + sclk_hdmiphy 158 [Peripheral Clock Gates] @@ -179,6 +180,17 @@ clock which they consume. fimc_lite3 495 aclk_g3d 500 g3d 501 + smmu_mixer 502 + + Mux ID + ---------------------------- + + mout_hdmi 640 + + Divider ID + ---------------------------- + + dout_pixel 768 Example 1: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt index 4499e9966bc9..9955dc9c7d96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ controllers within the Exynos5440 SoC. Required Properties: -- comptible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock". +- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock". - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt index f46f5625d8ad..4c029a8739d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx5-clock.txt @@ -197,6 +197,7 @@ clocks and IDs. spdif0_gate 183 spdif1_gate 184 spdif_ipg_gate 185 + ocram 186 Examples (for mx53): diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt index a0e104f0527e..6aab72bf67ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/imx6q-clock.txt @@ -209,6 +209,17 @@ clocks and IDs. pll5_post_div 194 pll5_video_div 195 eim_slow 196 + spdif 197 + cko2_sel 198 + cko2_podf 199 + cko2 200 + cko 201 + vdoa 202 + pll4_audio_div 203 + lvds1_sel 204 + lvds2_sel 205 + lvds1_gate 206 + lvds2_gate 207 Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-gate.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-gate.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c5aa187026e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-gate.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Status: Unstable - ABI compatibility may be broken in the future + +Binding for Keystone gate control driver which uses PSC controller IP. + +This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +Required properties: +- compatible : shall be "ti,keystone,psc-clock". +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- clocks : parent clock phandle +- reg : psc control and domain address address space +- reg-names : psc control and domain registers +- domain-id : psc domain id needed to check the transition state register + +Optional properties: +- clock-output-names : From common clock binding to override the + default output clock name +Example: + clkusb: clkusb { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "ti,keystone,psc-clock"; + clocks = <&chipclk16>; + clock-output-names = "usb"; + reg = <0x02350008 0xb00>, <0x02350000 0x400>; + reg-names = "control", "domain"; + domain-id = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-pll.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-pll.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..12bd72605a31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/keystone-pll.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Status: Unstable - ABI compatibility may be broken in the future + +Binding for keystone PLLs. The main PLL IP typically has a multiplier, +a divider and a post divider. The additional PLL IPs like ARMPLL, DDRPLL +and PAPLL are controlled by the memory mapped register where as the Main +PLL is controlled by a PLL controller registers along with memory mapped +registers. + +This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +Required properties: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- compatible : shall be "ti,keystone,main-pll-clock" or "ti,keystone,pll-clock" +- clocks : parent clock phandle +- reg - pll control0 and pll multipler registers +- reg-names : control and multiplier. The multiplier is applicable only for + main pll clock +- fixed-postdiv : fixed post divider value + +Example: + mainpllclk: mainpllclk@2310110 { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "ti,keystone,main-pll-clock"; + clocks = <&refclkmain>; + reg = <0x02620350 4>, <0x02310110 4>; + reg-names = "control", "multiplier"; + fixed-postdiv = <2>; + }; + + papllclk: papllclk@2620358 { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "ti,keystone,pll-clock"; + clocks = <&refclkmain>; + clock-output-names = "pa-pll-clk"; + reg = <0x02620358 4>; + reg-names = "control"; + fixed-postdiv = <6>; + }; + +Required properties: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- compatible : shall be "ti,keystone,pll-mux-clock" +- clocks : link phandles of parent clocks +- reg - pll mux register +- bit-shift : number of bits to shift the bit-mask +- bit-mask : arbitrary bitmask for programming the mux + +Optional properties: +- clock-output-names : From common clock binding. + +Example: + mainmuxclk: mainmuxclk@2310108 { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "ti,keystone,pll-mux-clock"; + clocks = <&mainpllclk>, <&refclkmain>; + reg = <0x02310108 4>; + bit-shift = <23>; + bit-mask = <1>; + clock-output-names = "mainmuxclk"; + }; + +Required properties: +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. +- compatible : shall be "ti,keystone,pll-divider-clock" +- clocks : parent clock phandle +- reg - pll mux register +- bit-shift : number of bits to shift the bit-mask +- bit-mask : arbitrary bitmask for programming the divider + +Optional properties: +- clock-output-names : From common clock binding. + +Example: + gemtraceclk: gemtraceclk@2310120 { + #clock-cells = <0>; + compatible = "ti,keystone,pll-divider-clock"; + clocks = <&mainmuxclk>; + reg = <0x02310120 4>; + bit-shift = <0>; + bit-mask = <8>; + clock-output-names = "gemtraceclk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-corediv-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-corediv-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c62391fc0e39 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-corediv-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* Core Divider Clock bindings for Marvell MVEBU SoCs + +The following is a list of provided IDs and clock names on Armada 370/XP: + 0 = nand (NAND clock) + +Required properties: +- compatible : must be "marvell,armada-370-corediv-clock" +- reg : must be the register address of Core Divider control register +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 1 +- clocks : must be set to the parent's phandle + +Example: + +corediv_clk: corediv-clocks@18740 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-370-corediv-clock"; + reg = <0x18740 0xc>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&pll>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt index cffc93d97f54..fc2910fa7e45 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/mvebu-gated-clock.txt @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -* Gated Clock bindings for Marvell Orion SoCs +* Gated Clock bindings for Marvell EBU SoCs -Marvell Dove and Kirkwood allow some peripheral clocks to be gated to save -some power. The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having -the clock ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. The clock ID is directly mapped to -the corresponding clock gating control bit in HW to ease manual clock lookup -in datasheet. +Marvell Armada 370/XP, Dove and Kirkwood allow some peripheral clocks to be +gated to save some power. The clock consumer should specify the desired clock +by having the clock ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. The clock ID is directly +mapped to the corresponding clock gating control bit in HW to ease manual clock +lookup in datasheet. The following is a list of provided IDs for Armada 370: ID Clock Peripheral @@ -94,6 +94,8 @@ ID Clock Peripheral Required properties: - compatible : shall be one of the following: + "marvell,armada-370-gating-clock" - for Armada 370 SoC clock gating + "marvell,armada-xp-gating-clock" - for Armada XP SoC clock gating "marvell,dove-gating-clock" - for Dove SoC clock gating "marvell,kirkwood-gating-clock" - for Kirkwood SoC clock gating - reg : shall be the register address of the Clock Gating Control register diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fa171dc4bd3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +* Samsung S3C64xx Clock Controller + +The S3C64xx clock controller generates and supplies clock to various controllers +within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to all SoCs in +the S3C64xx family. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: should be one of the following. + - "samsung,s3c6400-clock" - controller compatible with S3C6400 SoC. + - "samsung,s3c6410-clock" - controller compatible with S3C6410 SoC. + +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + +- #clock-cells: should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. Some of the clocks are available only +on a particular S3C64xx SoC and this is specified where applicable. + +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in +dt-bindings/clock/samsung,s3c64xx-clock.h header and can be used in device +tree sources. + +External clocks: + +There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It is expected +that they are defined using standard clock bindings with following +clock-output-names: + - "fin_pll" - PLL input clock (xtal/extclk) - required, + - "xusbxti" - USB xtal - required, + - "iiscdclk0" - I2S0 codec clock - optional, + - "iiscdclk1" - I2S1 codec clock - optional, + - "iiscdclk2" - I2S2 codec clock - optional, + - "pcmcdclk0" - PCM0 codec clock - optional, + - "pcmcdclk1" - PCM1 codec clock - optional, only S3C6410. + +Example: Clock controller node: + + clock: clock-controller@7e00f000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c6410-clock"; + reg = <0x7e00f000 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example: Required external clocks: + + fin_pll: clock-fin-pll { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + clock-output-names = "fin_pll"; + clock-frequency = <12000000>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + }; + + xusbxti: clock-xusbxti { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + clock-output-names = "xusbxti"; + clock-frequency = <48000000>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + }; + +Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller (refer to the standard clock bindings for information about + "clocks" and "clock-names" properties): + + uart0: serial@7f005000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c6400-uart"; + reg = <0x7f005000 0x100>; + interrupt-parent = <&vic1>; + interrupts = <5>; + clock-names = "uart", "clk_uart_baud2", + "clk_uart_baud3"; + clocks = <&clock PCLK_UART0>, <&clocks PCLK_UART0>, + <&clock SCLK_UART>; + status = "disabled"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt index d495521a79d2..91a748fed13d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi.txt @@ -8,19 +8,31 @@ Required properties: - compatible : shall be one of the following: "allwinner,sun4i-osc-clk" - for a gatable oscillator "allwinner,sun4i-pll1-clk" - for the main PLL clock + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-pll1-clk" - for the main PLL clock on A31 "allwinner,sun4i-cpu-clk" - for the CPU multiplexer clock "allwinner,sun4i-axi-clk" - for the AXI clock "allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk" - for the AXI gates "allwinner,sun4i-ahb-clk" - for the AHB clock "allwinner,sun4i-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A10 "allwinner,sun5i-a13-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A13 + "allwinner,sun5i-a10s-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A10s + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-ahb-gates-clk" - for the AHB gates on A20 + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-mux-clk" - for the AHB1 multiplexer on A31 + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-ahb1-gates-clk" - for the AHB1 gates on A31 "allwinner,sun4i-apb0-clk" - for the APB0 clock "allwinner,sun4i-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A10 "allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A13 + "allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A10s + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb0-gates-clk" - for the APB0 gates on A20 "allwinner,sun4i-apb1-clk" - for the APB1 clock "allwinner,sun4i-apb1-mux-clk" - for the APB1 clock muxing "allwinner,sun4i-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A10 "allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A13 + "allwinner,sun5i-a10s-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A10s + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A31 + "allwinner,sun7i-a20-apb1-gates-clk" - for the APB1 gates on A20 + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb2-div-clk" - for the APB2 gates on A31 + "allwinner,sun6i-a31-apb2-gates-clk" - for the APB2 gates on A31 Required properties for all clocks: - reg : shall be the control register address for the clock. @@ -33,8 +45,8 @@ Additionally, "allwinner,*-gates-clk" clocks require: Clock consumers should specify the desired clocks they use with a "clocks" phandle cell. Consumers that are using a gated clock should -provide an additional ID in their clock property. The values of this -ID are documented in sunxi/<soc>-gates.txt. +provide an additional ID in their clock property. This ID is the +offset of the bit controlling this particular gate in the register. For example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6a03475bbfe2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun4i-a10-gates.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -Gate clock outputs ------------------- - - * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk") - - DRAM 0 - - * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun4i-ahb-gates-clk") - - USB0 0 - EHCI0 1 - OHCI0 2* - EHCI1 3 - OHCI1 4* - SS 5 - DMA 6 - BIST 7 - MMC0 8 - MMC1 9 - MMC2 10 - MMC3 11 - MS 12** - NAND 13 - SDRAM 14 - - ACE 16 - EMAC 17 - TS 18 - - SPI0 20 - SPI1 21 - SPI2 22 - SPI3 23 - PATA 24 - SATA 25** - GPS 26* - - VE 32 - TVD 33 - TVE0 34 - TVE1 35 - LCD0 36 - LCD1 37 - - CSI0 40 - CSI1 41 - - HDMI 43 - DE_BE0 44 - DE_BE1 45 - DE_FE1 46 - DE_FE1 47 - - MP 50 - - MALI400 52 - - * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun4i-apb0-gates-clk") - - CODEC 0 - SPDIF 1* - AC97 2 - IIS 3 - - PIO 5 - IR0 6 - IR1 7 - - KEYPAD 10 - - * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun4i-apb1-gates-clk") - - I2C0 0 - I2C1 1 - I2C2 2 - - CAN 4 - SCR 5 - PS20 6 - PS21 7 - - UART0 16 - UART1 17 - UART2 18 - UART3 19 - UART4 20 - UART5 21 - UART6 22 - UART7 23 - -Notation: - [*]: The datasheet didn't mention these, but they are present on AW code - [**]: The datasheet had this marked as "NC" but they are used on AW code diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 006b6dfc4703..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sunxi/sun5i-a13-gates.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -Gate clock outputs ------------------- - - * AXI gates ("allwinner,sun4i-axi-gates-clk") - - DRAM 0 - - * AHB gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-ahb-gates-clk") - - USBOTG 0 - EHCI 1 - OHCI 2 - - SS 5 - DMA 6 - BIST 7 - MMC0 8 - MMC1 9 - MMC2 10 - - NAND 13 - SDRAM 14 - - SPI0 20 - SPI1 21 - SPI2 22 - - STIMER 28 - - VE 32 - - LCD 36 - - CSI 40 - - DE_BE 44 - - DE_FE 46 - - IEP 51 - MALI400 52 - - * APB0 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb0-gates-clk") - - CODEC 0 - - PIO 5 - IR 6 - - * APB1 gates ("allwinner,sun5i-a13-apb1-gates-clk") - - I2C0 0 - I2C1 1 - I2C2 2 - - UART1 17 - - UART3 19 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xgene.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xgene.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1c4ef773feea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/xgene.txt @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +Device Tree Clock bindings for APM X-Gene + +This binding uses the common clock binding[1]. + +[1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +Required properties: +- compatible : shall be one of the following: + "apm,xgene-socpll-clock" - for a X-Gene SoC PLL clock + "apm,xgene-pcppll-clock" - for a X-Gene PCP PLL clock + "apm,xgene-device-clock" - for a X-Gene device clock + +Required properties for SoC or PCP PLL clocks: +- reg : shall be the physical PLL register address for the pll clock. +- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. This should + be the reference clock. +- #clock-cells : shall be set to 1. +- clock-output-names : shall be the name of the PLL referenced by derive + clock. +Optional properties for PLL clocks: +- clock-names : shall be the name of the PLL. If missing, use the device name. + +Required properties for device clocks: +- reg : shall be a list of address and length pairs describing the CSR + reset and/or the divider. Either may be omitted, but at least + one must be present. + - reg-names : shall be a string list describing the reg resource. This + may include "csr-reg" and/or "div-reg". If this property + is not present, the reg property is assumed to describe + only "csr-reg". +- clocks : shall be the input parent clock phandle for the clock. +- #clock-cells : shall be set to 1. +- clock-output-names : shall be the name of the device referenced. +Optional properties for device clocks: +- clock-names : shall be the name of the device clock. If missing, use the + device name. +- csr-offset : Offset to the CSR reset register from the reset address base. + Default is 0. +- csr-mask : CSR reset mask bit. Default is 0xF. +- enable-offset : Offset to the enable register from the reset address base. + Default is 0x8. +- enable-mask : CSR enable mask bit. Default is 0xF. +- divider-offset : Offset to the divider CSR register from the divider base. + Default is 0x0. +- divider-width : Width of the divider register. Default is 0. +- divider-shift : Bit shift of the divider register. Default is 0. + +For example: + + pcppll: pcppll@17000100 { + compatible = "apm,xgene-pcppll-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&refclk 0>; + clock-names = "pcppll"; + reg = <0x0 0x17000100 0x0 0x1000>; + clock-output-names = "pcppll"; + type = <0>; + }; + + socpll: socpll@17000120 { + compatible = "apm,xgene-socpll-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&refclk 0>; + clock-names = "socpll"; + reg = <0x0 0x17000120 0x0 0x1000>; + clock-output-names = "socpll"; + type = <1>; + }; + + qmlclk: qmlclk { + compatible = "apm,xgene-device-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&socplldiv2 0>; + clock-names = "qmlclk"; + reg = <0x0 0x1703C000 0x0 0x1000>; + reg-name = "csr-reg"; + clock-output-names = "qmlclk"; + }; + + ethclk: ethclk { + compatible = "apm,xgene-device-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&socplldiv2 0>; + clock-names = "ethclk"; + reg = <0x0 0x17000000 0x0 0x1000>; + reg-names = "div-reg"; + divider-offset = <0x238>; + divider-width = <0x9>; + divider-shift = <0x0>; + clock-output-names = "ethclk"; + }; + + apbclk: apbclk { + compatible = "apm,xgene-device-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&ahbclk 0>; + clock-names = "apbclk"; + reg = <0x0 0x1F2AC000 0x0 0x1000 + 0x0 0x1F2AC000 0x0 0x1000>; + reg-names = "csr-reg", "div-reg"; + csr-offset = <0x0>; + csr-mask = <0x200>; + enable-offset = <0x8>; + enable-mask = <0x200>; + divider-offset = <0x10>; + divider-width = <0x2>; + divider-shift = <0x0>; + flags = <0x8>; + clock-output-names = "apbclk"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c0a20cd972e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec6.txt @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +SEC 6 is as Freescale's Cryptographic Accelerator and Assurance Module (CAAM). +Currently Freescale powerpc chip C29X is embeded with SEC 6. +SEC 6 device tree binding include: + -SEC 6 Node + -Job Ring Node + -Full Example + +===================================================================== +SEC 6 Node + +Description + + Node defines the base address of the SEC 6 block. + This block specifies the address range of all global + configuration registers for the SEC 6 block. + For example, In C293, we could see three SEC 6 node. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v6.0". + + - fsl,sec-era + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Define the 'ERA' of the SEC + device. + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing physical addresses in child nodes. + + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing the size of physical addresses in + child nodes. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + address and length of the SEC 6 configuration registers. + + - ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + range of the SEC 6.0 register space (-SNVS not included). A + triplet that includes the child address, parent address, & + length. + + Note: All other standard properties (see the ePAPR) are allowed + but are optional. + +EXAMPLE + crypto@a0000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0"; + fsl,sec-era = <6>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0xa0000 0x20000>; + ranges = <0 0xa0000 0x20000>; + }; + +===================================================================== +Job Ring (JR) Node + + Child of the crypto node defines data processing interface to SEC 6 + across the peripheral bus for purposes of processing + cryptographic descriptors. The specified address + range can be made visible to one (or more) cores. + The interrupt defined for this node is controlled within + the address range of this node. + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies a two JR parameters: an offset from + the parent physical address and the length the JR registers. + + - interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop_encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies the interrupts generated by this + device. The value of the interrupts property + consists of one interrupt specifier. The format + of the specifier is defined by the binding document + describing the node's interrupt parent. + +EXAMPLE + jr@1000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x1000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <49 2 0 0>; + }; + +=================================================================== +Full Example + +Since some chips may contain more than one SEC, the dtsi contains +only the node contents, not the node itself. A chip using the SEC +should include the dtsi inside each SEC node. Example: + +In qoriq-sec6.0.dtsi: + + compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0"; + fsl,sec-era = <6>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + jr@1000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v5.2-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v5.0-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v4.4-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x1000 0x1000>; + }; + + jr@2000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v6.0-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v5.2-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v5.0-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v4.4-job-ring", + "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x2000 0x1000>; + }; + +In the C293 device tree, we add the include of public property: + + crypto@a0000 { + /include/ "qoriq-sec6.0.dtsi" + } + + crypto@a0000 { + reg = <0xa0000 0x20000>; + ranges = <0 0xa0000 0x20000>; + + jr@1000 { + interrupts = <49 2 0 0>; + }; + + jr@2000 { + interrupts = <50 2 0 0>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-aes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-aes.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fd9717653cbb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-aes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +OMAP SoC AES crypto Module + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain entries for this and backward compatible + AES versions: + - "ti,omap2-aes" for OMAP2. + - "ti,omap3-aes" for OMAP3. + - "ti,omap4-aes" for OMAP4 and AM33XX. + Note that the OMAP2 and 3 versions are compatible (OMAP3 supports + more algorithms) but they are incompatible with OMAP4. +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the AES module +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : the interrupt-specifier for the AES module. + +Optional properties: +- dmas: DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +- dma-names: DMA request names should include "tx" and "rx" if present. + +Example: + /* AM335x */ + aes: aes@53500000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-aes"; + ti,hwmods = "aes"; + reg = <0x53500000 0xa0>; + interrupts = <102>; + dmas = <&edma 6>, + <&edma 5>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8c63bf2e16d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-des.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +OMAP SoC DES crypto Module + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain "ti,omap4-des" +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the DES module +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : the interrupt-specifier for the DES module +- clocks : A phandle to the functional clock node of the DES module + corresponding to each entry in clock-names +- clock-names : Name of the functional clock, should be "fck" + +Optional properties: +- dmas: DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt + Each entry corresponds to an entry in dma-names +- dma-names: DMA request names should include "tx" and "rx" if present + +Example: + /* DRA7xx SoC */ + des: des@480a5000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-des"; + ti,hwmods = "des"; + reg = <0x480a5000 0xa0>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 82 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + dmas = <&sdma 117>, <&sdma 116>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + clocks = <&l3_iclk_div>; + clock-names = "fck"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad9115569611 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/omap-sham.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +OMAP SoC SHA crypto Module + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain entries for this and backward compatible + SHAM versions: + - "ti,omap2-sham" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. + - "ti,omap4-sham" for OMAP4 and AM33XX. + - "ti,omap5-sham" for OMAP5, DRA7 and AM43XX. +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the SHAM module +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : the interrupt-specifier for the SHAM module. + +Optional properties: +- dmas: DMA specifiers for the rx dma. See the DMA client binding, + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +- dma-names: DMA request name. Should be "rx" if a dma is present. + +Example: + /* AM335x */ + sham: sham@53100000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-sham"; + ti,hwmods = "sham"; + reg = <0x53100000 0x200>; + interrupts = <109>; + dmas = <&edma 36>; + dma-names = "rx"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt index e1f343c7a34b..f69bcf5a6343 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-dma.txt @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ The three cells in order are: dependent: - bit 7-0: peripheral identifier for the hardware handshaking interface. The identifier can be different for tx and rx. - - bit 11-8: FIFO configuration. 0 for half FIFO, 1 for ALAP, 1 for ASAP. + - bit 11-8: FIFO configuration. 0 for half FIFO, 1 for ALAP, 2 for ASAP. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt index 68cee4f5539f..4fa814d38321 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt @@ -1,7 +1,12 @@ * Freescale Smart Direct Memory Access (SDMA) Controller for i.MX Required properties: -- compatible : Should be "fsl,<chip>-sdma" +- compatible : Should be "fsl,imx31-sdma", "fsl,imx31-to1-sdma", + "fsl,imx31-to2-sdma", "fsl,imx35-sdma", "fsl,imx35-to1-sdma", + "fsl,imx35-to2-sdma", "fsl,imx51-sdma", "fsl,imx53-sdma" or + "fsl,imx6q-sdma". The -to variants should be preferred since they + allow to determnine the correct ROM script addresses needed for + the driver to work without additional firmware. - reg : Should contain SDMA registers location and length - interrupts : Should contain SDMA interrupt - #dma-cells : Must be <3>. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..23f8d712c3ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/k3dma.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +* Hisilicon K3 DMA controller + +See dma.txt first + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0" +- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. +- interrupts: Should contain one interrupt shared by all channel +- #dma-cells: see dma.txt, should be 1, para number +- dma-channels: physical channels supported +- dma-requests: virtual channels supported, each virtual channel + have specific request line +- clocks: clock required + +Example: + +Controller: + dma0: dma@fcd02000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,k3-dma-1.0"; + reg = <0xfcd02000 0x1000>; + #dma-cells = <1>; + dma-channels = <16>; + dma-requests = <27>; + interrupts = <0 12 4>; + clocks = <&pclk>; + status = "disable"; + }; + +Client: +Use specific request line passing from dmax +For example, i2c0 read channel request line is 18, while write channel use 19 + + i2c0: i2c@fcb08000 { + compatible = "snps,designware-i2c"; + dmas = <&dma0 18 /* read channel */ + &dma0 19>; /* write channel */ + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + }; + + i2c1: i2c@fcb09000 { + compatible = "snps,designware-i2c"; + dmas = <&dma0 20 /* read channel */ + &dma0 21>; /* write channel */ + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt index c15994aa1939..2a3f3b8946b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/shdma.txt @@ -22,42 +22,51 @@ Optional properties (currently unused): * DMA controller Required properties: -- compatible: should be "renesas,shdma" +- compatible: should be of the form "renesas,shdma-<soc>", where <soc> should + be replaced with the desired SoC model, e.g. + "renesas,shdma-r8a73a4" for the system DMAC on r8a73a4 SoC Example: - dmac: dma-mux0 { + dmac: dma-multiplexer@0 { compatible = "renesas,shdma-mux"; #dma-cells = <1>; - dma-channels = <6>; + dma-channels = <20>; dma-requests = <256>; - reg = <0 0>; /* Needed for AUXDATA */ - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <1>; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; ranges; - dma0: shdma@fe008020 { - compatible = "renesas,shdma"; - reg = <0xfe008020 0x270>, - <0xfe009000 0xc>; + dma0: dma-controller@e6700020 { + compatible = "renesas,shdma-r8a73a4"; + reg = <0 0xe6700020 0 0x89e0>; interrupt-parent = <&gic>; - interrupts = <0 34 4 - 0 28 4 - 0 29 4 - 0 30 4 - 0 31 4 - 0 32 4 - 0 33 4>; + interrupts = <0 220 4 + 0 200 4 + 0 201 4 + 0 202 4 + 0 203 4 + 0 204 4 + 0 205 4 + 0 206 4 + 0 207 4 + 0 208 4 + 0 209 4 + 0 210 4 + 0 211 4 + 0 212 4 + 0 213 4 + 0 214 4 + 0 215 4 + 0 216 4 + 0 217 4 + 0 218 4 + 0 219 4>; interrupt-names = "error", "ch0", "ch1", "ch2", "ch3", - "ch4", "ch5"; - }; - - dma1: shdma@fe018020 { - ... - }; - - dma2: shdma@fe028020 { - ... + "ch4", "ch5", "ch6", "ch7", + "ch8", "ch9", "ch10", "ch11", + "ch12", "ch13", "ch14", "ch15", + "ch16", "ch17", "ch18", "ch19"; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt index b0019eb5330e..798cfc9d3839 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt @@ -5,16 +5,42 @@ This is for the non-QE/CPM/GUTs GPIO controllers as found on Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined, this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers. +See bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for details of how to specify GPIO +information for devices. + +The GPIO module usually is connected to the SoC's internal interrupt +controller, see bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt (the +interrupt client nodes section) for details how to specify this GPIO +module's interrupt. + +The GPIO module may serve as another interrupt controller (cascaded to +the SoC's internal interrupt controller). See the interrupt controller +nodes section in bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +details. Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,<CHIP>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" for - 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx and "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx. -- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused). - - interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. -- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller. +- compatible: "fsl,<chip>-gpio" followed by "fsl,mpc8349-gpio" + for 83xx, "fsl,mpc8572-gpio" for 85xx, or + "fsl,mpc8610-gpio" for 86xx. +- #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number + and the second cell is used to specify optional + parameters (currently unused). +- interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. +- interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. +- gpio-controller: Marks the port as GPIO controller. + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-controller: Empty boolean property which marks the GPIO + module as an IRQ controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be two. Defines the number of integer + cells required to specify an interrupt within + this interrupt controller. The first cell + defines the pin number, the second cell + defines additional flags (trigger type, + trigger polarity). Note that the available + set of trigger conditions supported by the + GPIO module depends on the actual SoC. Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC: @@ -22,39 +48,27 @@ Example of gpio-controller nodes for a MPC8347 SoC: #gpio-cells = <2>; compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; reg = <0xc00 0x100>; - interrupts = <74 0x8>; interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + interrupts = <74 0x8>; gpio-controller; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; }; gpio2: gpio-controller@d00 { #gpio-cells = <2>; compatible = "fsl,mpc8347-gpio", "fsl,mpc8349-gpio"; reg = <0xd00 0x100>; - interrupts = <75 0x8>; interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; + interrupts = <75 0x8>; gpio-controller; }; -See booting-without-of.txt for details of how to specify GPIO -information for devices. - -To use GPIO pins as interrupt sources for peripherals, specify the -GPIO controller as the interrupt parent and define GPIO number + -trigger mode using the interrupts property, which is defined like -this: - -interrupts = <number trigger>, where: - - number: GPIO pin (0..31) - - trigger: trigger mode: - 2 = trigger on falling edge - 3 = trigger on both edges - -Example of device using this is: +Example of a peripheral using the GPIO module as an IRQ controller: funkyfpga@0 { compatible = "funky-fpga"; ... - interrupts = <4 3>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <4 3>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..00611aceed3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +* Abilis TB10x GPIO controller + +Required Properties: +- compatible: Should be "abilis,tb10x-gpio" +- reg: Address and length of the register set for the device +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller. +- #gpio-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the pin number and the + second cell is used to specify optional parameters: + - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted). +- abilis,ngpio: the number of GPIO pins this driver controls. + +Optional Properties: +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be <1>. Interrupts are triggered on both edges. +- interrupts: Defines the interrupt line connecting this GPIO controller to + its parent interrupt controller. +- interrupt-parent: Defines the parent interrupt controller. + +GPIO ranges are specified as described in +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt + +Example: + + gpioa: gpio@FF140000 { + compatible = "abilis,tb10x-gpio"; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-parent = <&tb10x_ictl>; + interrupts = <27 2>; + reg = <0xFF140000 0x1000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + abilis,ngpio = <3>; + gpio-ranges = <&iomux 0 0 0>; + gpio-ranges-group-names = "gpioa_pins"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-bcm-kona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-bcm-kona.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4a63bc96b687 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-bcm-kona.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +Broadcom Kona Family GPIO +========================= + +This GPIO driver is used in the following Broadcom SoCs: + BCM11130, BCM11140, BCM11351, BCM28145, BCM28155 + +The Broadcom GPIO Controller IP can be configured prior to synthesis to +support up to 8 banks of 32 GPIOs where each bank has its own IRQ. The +GPIO controller only supports edge, not level, triggering of interrupts. + +Required properties +------------------- + +- compatible: "brcm,bcm11351-gpio", "brcm,kona-gpio" +- reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers. +- interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller. There is one GPIO + interrupt per GPIO bank. The number of interrupts listed depends on the + number of GPIO banks on the SoC. The interrupts must be ordered by bank, + starting with bank 0. There is always a 1:1 mapping between banks and + IRQs. +- #gpio-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the pin number, the second + cell is used to specify optional parameters: + - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted) + See also "gpio-specifier" in .../devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the GPIO number. The + second cell is used to specify flags. The following subset of flags is + supported: + - trigger type (bits[1:0]): + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered. + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered. + 3 = low-to-high or high-to-low edge triggered + Valid values are 1, 2, 3 + See also .../devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. + +Example: + gpio: gpio@35003000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-gpio", "brcm,kona-gpio"; + reg = <0x35003000 0x800>; + interrupts = + <GIC_SPI 106 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + GIC_SPI 115 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + GIC_SPI 114 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + GIC_SPI 113 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + GIC_SPI 112 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + GIC_SPI 111 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + gpio-controller; + interrupt-controller; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt index 629d0ef17308..daa30174bcc1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-mcp23s08.txt @@ -3,10 +3,17 @@ Microchip MCP2308/MCP23S08/MCP23017/MCP23S17 driver for Required properties: - compatible : Should be - - "mcp,mcp23s08" for 8 GPIO SPI version - - "mcp,mcp23s17" for 16 GPIO SPI version - - "mcp,mcp23008" for 8 GPIO I2C version or - - "mcp,mcp23017" for 16 GPIO I2C version of the chip + - "mcp,mcp23s08" (DEPRECATED) for 8 GPIO SPI version + - "mcp,mcp23s17" (DEPRECATED) for 16 GPIO SPI version + - "mcp,mcp23008" (DEPRECATED) for 8 GPIO I2C version or + - "mcp,mcp23017" (DEPRECATED) for 16 GPIO I2C version of the chip + + - "microchip,mcp23s08" for 8 GPIO SPI version + - "microchip,mcp23s17" for 16 GPIO SPI version + - "microchip,mcp23008" for 8 GPIO I2C version or + - "microchip,mcp23017" for 16 GPIO I2C version of the chip + NOTE: Do not use the old mcp prefix any more. It is deprecated and will be + removed. - #gpio-cells : Should be two. - first cell is the pin number - second cell is used to specify flags. Flags are currently unused. @@ -15,10 +22,11 @@ Required properties: SPI uses this to specify the chipselect line which the chip is connected to. The driver and the SPI variant of the chip support multiple chips on the same chipselect. Have a look at - mcp,spi-present-mask below. + microchip,spi-present-mask below. Required device specific properties (only for SPI chips): -- mcp,spi-present-mask : This is a present flag, that makes only sense for SPI +- mcp,spi-present-mask (DEPRECATED) +- microchip,spi-present-mask : This is a present flag, that makes only sense for SPI chips - as the name suggests. Multiple SPI chips can share the same SPI chipselect. Set a bit in bit0-7 in this mask to 1 if there is a chip connected with the corresponding spi address set. For example if @@ -26,11 +34,13 @@ Required device specific properties (only for SPI chips): which is 0x08. mcp23s08 chip variant only supports bits 0-3. It is not possible to mix mcp23s08 and mcp23s17 on the same chipselect. Set at least one bit to 1 for SPI chips. + NOTE: Do not use the old mcp prefix any more. It is deprecated and will be + removed. - spi-max-frequency = The maximum frequency this chip is able to handle Example I2C: gpiom1: gpio@20 { - compatible = "mcp,mcp23017"; + compatible = "microchip,mcp23017"; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; reg = <0x20>; @@ -38,7 +48,7 @@ gpiom1: gpio@20 { Example SPI: gpiom1: gpio@0 { - compatible = "mcp,mcp23s17"; + compatible = "microchip,mcp23s17"; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; spi-present-mask = <0x01>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..08b5b52a3ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-palmas.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Palmas GPIO controller bindings + +Required properties: +- compatible: + - "ti,palams-gpio" for palma series of the GPIO controller + - "ti,tps80036-gpio" for Palma series device TPS80036. + - "ti,tps65913-gpio" for palma series device TPS65913. + - "ti,tps65914-gpio" for palma series device TPS65914. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. + - first cell is the gpio pin number + - second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity: + 0 = active high + 1 = active low +- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. + +Note: This gpio node will be sub node of palmas node. + +Example: + palmas: tps65913@58 { + ::::::::::: + palmas_gpio: palmas_gpio { + compatible = "ti,palmas-gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + ::::::::::: + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d63194a2c848 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +* PCF857x-compatible I/O expanders + +The PCF857x-compatible chips have "quasi-bidirectional" I/O lines that can be +driven high by a pull-up current source or driven low to ground. This combines +the direction and output level into a single bit per line, which can't be read +back. We can't actually know at initialization time whether a line is configured +(a) as output and driving the signal low/high, or (b) as input and reporting a +low/high value, without knowing the last value written since the chip came out +of reset (if any). The only reliable solution for setting up line direction is +thus to do it explicitly. + +Required Properties: + + - compatible: should be one of the following. + - "maxim,max7328": For the Maxim MAX7378 + - "maxim,max7329": For the Maxim MAX7329 + - "nxp,pca8574": For the NXP PCA8574 + - "nxp,pca8575": For the NXP PCA8575 + - "nxp,pca9670": For the NXP PCA9670 + - "nxp,pca9671": For the NXP PCA9671 + - "nxp,pca9672": For the NXP PCA9672 + - "nxp,pca9673": For the NXP PCA9673 + - "nxp,pca9674": For the NXP PCA9674 + - "nxp,pca9675": For the NXP PCA9675 + - "nxp,pcf8574": For the NXP PCF8574 + - "nxp,pcf8574a": For the NXP PCF8574A + - "nxp,pcf8575": For the NXP PCF8575 + - "ti,tca9554": For the TI TCA9554 + + - reg: I2C slave address. + + - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller. + - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number and the second + cell specifies GPIO flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. Only the + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH and GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flags are supported. + +Optional Properties: + + - lines-initial-states: Bitmask that specifies the initial state of each + line. When a bit is set to zero, the corresponding line will be initialized to + the input (pulled-up) state. When the bit is set to one, the line will be + initialized the the low-level output state. If the property is not specified + all lines will be initialized to the input state. + + The I/O expander can detect input state changes, and thus optionally act as + an interrupt controller. When the expander interrupt line is connected all the + following properties must be set. For more information please see the + interrupt controller device tree bindings documentation available at + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. + + - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. + - #interrupt-cells: Number of cells to encode an interrupt source, shall be 2. + - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. + - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. + + +Please refer to gpio.txt in this directory for details of the common GPIO +bindings used by client devices. + +Example: PCF8575 I/O expander node + + pcf8575: gpio@20 { + compatible = "nxp,pcf8575"; + reg = <0x20>; + interrupt-parent = <&irqpin2>; + interrupts = <3 0>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1fd98ffa8cb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090-pdc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +ImgTec TZ1090 PDC GPIO Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: Compatible property value should be "img,tz1090-pdc-gpio". + +- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. This starts at and cover the SOC_GPIO_CONTROL registers. + +- gpio-controller: Specifies that the node is a gpio controller. + +- #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the gpio specifier used by client + nodes should have the following values. + <[phandle of the gpio controller node] + [PDC gpio number] + [gpio flags]> + + Values for gpio specifier: + - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 6. + - GPIO flags: bit field of flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. + Only the following flags are supported: + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW + +Optional properties: +- gpio-ranges: Mapping to pin controller pins (as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt) + +- interrupts: Individual syswake interrupts (other GPIOs cannot interrupt) + + +Example: + + pdc_gpios: gpio-controller@02006500 { + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + compatible = "img,tz1090-pdc-gpio"; + reg = <0x02006500 0x100>; + + interrupt-parent = <&pdc>; + interrupts = <8 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>, /* Syswake 0 */ + <9 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>, /* Syswake 1 */ + <10 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>; /* Syswake 2 */ + gpio-ranges = <&pdc_pinctrl 0 0 7>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..174cdf309170 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-tz1090.txt @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +ImgTec TZ1090 GPIO Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: Compatible property value should be "img,tz1090-gpio". + +- reg: Physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + +- #address-cells: Should be 1 (for bank subnodes) + +- #size-cells: Should be 0 (for bank subnodes) + +- Each bank of GPIOs should have a subnode to represent it. + + Bank subnode required properties: + - reg: Index of bank in the range 0 to 2. + + - gpio-controller: Specifies that the node is a gpio controller. + + - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the gpio specifier used by client + nodes should have the following values. + <[phandle of the gpio controller node] + [gpio number within the gpio bank] + [gpio flags]> + + Values for gpio specifier: + - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 29. + - GPIO flags: bit field of flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. + Only the following flags are supported: + GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH + GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW + + Bank subnode optional properties: + - gpio-ranges: Mapping to pin controller pins (as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt) + + - interrupts: Interrupt for the entire bank + + - interrupt-controller: Specifies that the node is an interrupt controller + + - #interrupt-cells: Should be 2. The syntax of the interrupt specifier used by + client nodes should have the following values. + <[phandle of the interurupt controller] + [gpio number within the gpio bank] + [irq flags]> + + Values for irq specifier: + - GPIO number: a value in the range 0 to 29 + - IRQ flags: value to describe edge and level triggering, as defined in + <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h>. Only the following flags are + supported: + IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING + IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING + IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH + IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH + IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW + + + +Example: + + gpios: gpio-controller@02005800 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "img,tz1090-gpio"; + reg = <0x02005800 0x90>; + + /* bank 0 with an interrupt */ + gpios0: bank@0 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + reg = <0>; + interrupts = <13 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + gpio-controller; + gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl 0 0 30>; + interrupt-controller; + }; + + /* bank 2 without interrupt */ + gpios2: bank@2 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + reg = <2>; + gpio-controller; + gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl 0 60 30>; + }; + }; + + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt index 6cec6ff20d2e..0c85bb6e3a80 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -87,8 +87,10 @@ controllers. The gpio-ranges property described below represents this, and contains information structures as follows: gpio-range-list ::= <single-gpio-range> [gpio-range-list] - single-gpio-range ::= + single-gpio-range ::= <numeric-gpio-range> | <named-gpio-range> + numeric-gpio-range ::= <pinctrl-phandle> <gpio-base> <pinctrl-base> <count> + named-gpio-range ::= <pinctrl-phandle> <gpio-base> '<0 0>' gpio-phandle : phandle to pin controller node. gpio-base : Base GPIO ID in the GPIO controller pinctrl-base : Base pinctrl pin ID in the pin controller @@ -97,6 +99,19 @@ contains information structures as follows: The "pin controller node" mentioned above must conform to the bindings described in ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt. +In case named gpio ranges are used (ranges with both <pinctrl-base> and +<count> set to 0), the property gpio-ranges-group-names contains one string +for every single-gpio-range in gpio-ranges: + gpiorange-names-list ::= <gpiorange-name> [gpiorange-names-list] + gpiorange-name : Name of the pingroup associated to the GPIO range in + the respective pin controller. + +Elements of gpiorange-names-list corresponding to numeric ranges contain +the empty string. Elements of gpiorange-names-list corresponding to named +ranges contain the name of a pin group defined in the respective pin +controller. The number of pins/GPIOs in the range is the number of pins in +that pin group. + Previous versions of this binding required all pin controller nodes that were referenced by any gpio-ranges property to contain a property named #gpio-range-cells with value <3>. This requirement is now deprecated. @@ -104,7 +119,7 @@ However, that property may still exist in older device trees for compatibility reasons, and would still be required even in new device trees that need to be compatible with older software. -Example: +Example 1: qe_pio_e: gpio-controller@1460 { #gpio-cells = <2>; @@ -117,3 +132,24 @@ Example: Here, a single GPIO controller has GPIOs 0..9 routed to pin controller pinctrl1's pins 20..29, and GPIOs 10..19 routed to pin controller pinctrl2's pins 50..59. + +Example 2: + + gpio_pio_i: gpio-controller@14B0 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,qe-pario-bank-e", "fsl,qe-pario-bank"; + reg = <0x1480 0x18>; + gpio-controller; + gpio-ranges = <&pinctrl1 0 20 10>, + <&pinctrl2 10 0 0>, + <&pinctrl1 15 0 10>, + <&pinctrl2 25 0 0>; + gpio-ranges-group-names = "", + "foo", + "", + "bar"; + }; + +Here, three GPIO ranges are defined wrt. two pin controllers. pinctrl1 GPIO +ranges are defined using pin numbers whereas the GPIO ranges wrt. pinctrl2 +are named "foo" and "bar". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt index 9b3f1d4a88d6..66416261e14d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mrvl-gpio.txt @@ -10,8 +10,9 @@ Required properties: There're three gpio interrupts in arch-pxa, and they're gpio0, gpio1 and gpio_mux. There're only one gpio interrupt in arch-mmp, gpio_mux. -- interrupt-name : Should be the name of irq resource. Each interrupt - binds its interrupt-name. +- interrupt-names : Should be the names of irq resources. Each interrupt + uses its own interrupt name, so there should be as many interrupt names + as referenced interrups. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. @@ -24,7 +25,7 @@ Example: compatible = "marvell,mmp-gpio"; reg = <0xd4019000 0x1000>; interrupts = <49>; - interrupt-name = "gpio_mux"; + interrupt-names = "gpio_mux"; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <1>; interrupt-controller; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt index cb3dc7bcd8e6..8655df9440d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt @@ -23,6 +23,10 @@ Required Properties: Please refer to gpio.txt in this directory for details of gpio-ranges property and the common GPIO bindings used by client devices. +The GPIO controller also acts as an interrupt controller. It uses the default +two cells specifier as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ +interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. + Example: R8A7779 (R-Car H1) GPIO controller nodes gpio0: gpio@ffc40000 { @@ -33,6 +37,8 @@ Example: R8A7779 (R-Car H1) GPIO controller nodes #gpio-cells = <2>; gpio-controller; gpio-ranges = <&pfc 0 0 32>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; }; ... gpio6: gpio@ffc46000 { @@ -43,4 +49,6 @@ Example: R8A7779 (R-Car H1) GPIO controller nodes #gpio-cells = <2>; gpio-controller; gpio-ranges = <&pfc 0 192 9>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt index 3f454ffc654a..c4f358dafdaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpu/samsung-g2d.txt @@ -11,8 +11,11 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : G2D interrupt number to the CPU. - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to G2D clocks. - - clock-names : from common clock binding: must contain "sclk_fimg2d" and - "fimg2d", corresponding to entries in the clocks property. + - clock-names : names of clocks listed in clocks property, in the same + order, depending on SoC type: + - for S5PV210 and Exynos4 based SoCs: "fimg2d" and + "sclk_fimg2d" + - for Exynos5250 SoC: "fimg2d". Example: g2d@12800000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8632486b9ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/lm90.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +* LM90 series thermometer. + +Required node properties: +- compatible: manufacturer and chip name, one of + "adi,adm1032" + "adi,adt7461" + "adi,adt7461a" + "gmt,g781" + "national,lm90" + "national,lm86" + "national,lm89" + "national,lm99" + "dallas,max6646" + "dallas,max6647" + "dallas,max6649" + "dallas,max6657" + "dallas,max6658" + "dallas,max6659" + "dallas,max6680" + "dallas,max6681" + "dallas,max6695" + "dallas,max6696" + "onnn,nct1008" + "winbond,w83l771" + "nxp,sa56004" + +- reg: I2C bus address of the device + +- vcc-supply: vcc regulator for the supply voltage. + +Optional properties: +- interrupts: Contains a single interrupt specifier which describes the + LM90 "-ALERT" pin output. + See interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for the format. + +Example LM90 node: + +temp-sensor { + compatible = "onnn,nct1008"; + reg = <0x4c>; + vcc-supply = <&palmas_ldo6_reg>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(O, 4) IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/omap_rng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/omap_rng.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a62acd86953 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwrng/omap_rng.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +OMAP SoC HWRNG Module + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should contain entries for this and backward compatible + RNG versions: + - "ti,omap2-rng" for OMAP2. + - "ti,omap4-rng" for OMAP4, OMAP5 and AM33XX. + Note that these two versions are incompatible. +- ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the RNG module +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the module +- interrupts : the interrupt number for the RNG module. + Only used for "ti,omap4-rng". + +Example: +/* AM335x */ +rng: rng@48310000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-rng"; + ti,hwmods = "rng"; + reg = <0x48310000 0x2000>; + interrupts = <111>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b87b741fa8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-bcm-kona.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Broadcom Kona Family I2C +========================= + +This I2C controller is used in the following Broadcom SoCs: + + BCM11130 + BCM11140 + BCM11351 + BCM28145 + BCM28155 + +Required Properties +------------------- +- compatible: "brcm,bcm11351-i2c", "brcm,kona-i2c" +- reg: Physical base address and length of controller registers +- interrupts: The interrupt number used by the controller +- clocks: clock specifier for the kona i2c external clock +- clock-frequency: The I2C bus frequency in Hz +- #address-cells: Should be <1> +- #size-cells: Should be <0> + +Refer to clocks/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer +properties. + +Example: + +i2c@3e016000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-i2c","brcm,kona-i2c"; + reg = <0x3e016000 0x80>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 103 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&bsc1_clk>; + clock-frequency = <400000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..056732cfdcee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-exynos5.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +* Samsung's High Speed I2C controller + +The Samsung's High Speed I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices +at various speeds ranging from 100khz to 3.4Mhz. + +Required properties: + - compatible: value should be. + -> "samsung,exynos5-hsi2c", for i2c compatible with exynos5 hsi2c. + - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. + - #address-cells: always 1 (for i2c addresses) + - #size-cells: always 0 + + - Pinctrl: + - pinctrl-0: Pin control group to be used for this controller. + - pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default". + +Optional properties: + - clock-frequency: Desired operating frequency in Hz of the bus. + -> If not specified, the bus operates in fast-speed mode at + at 100khz. + -> If specified, the bus operates in high-speed mode only if the + clock-frequency is >= 1Mhz. + +Example: + +hsi2c@12ca0000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5-hsi2c"; + reg = <0x12ca0000 0x100>; + interrupts = <56>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; + + pinctrl-0 = <&i2c4_bus>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + s2mps11_pmic@66 { + compatible = "samsung,s2mps11-pmic"; + reg = <0x66>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt index 56564aa4b444..7e49839d4124 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-omap.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ I2C for OMAP platforms Required properties : -- compatible : Must be "ti,omap3-i2c" or "ti,omap4-i2c" +- compatible : Must be "ti,omap2420-i2c", "ti,omap2430-i2c", "ti,omap3-i2c" + or "ti,omap4-i2c" - ti,hwmods : Must be "i2c<n>", n being the instance number (1-based) - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..897cfcd5ce92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +I2C for R-Car platforms + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be one of + "renesas,i2c-rcar" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7778" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7779" + "renesas,i2c-r8a7790" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- interrupts: interrupt specifier. + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency: desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. The absence of this + propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz. + +Examples : + +i2c0: i2c@e6500000 { + compatible = "renesas,i2c-rcar-h2"; + reg = <0 0xe6500000 0 0x428>; + interrupts = <0 174 0x4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..437e0db3823c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-st.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +ST SSC binding, for I2C mode operation + +Required properties : +- compatible : Must be "st,comms-ssc-i2c" or "st,comms-ssc4-i2c" +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : the interrupt specifier +- clock-names: Must contain "ssc". +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each name in clock-names. See the common + clock bindings. +- A pinctrl state named "default" must be defined to set pins in mode of + operation for I2C transfer. + +Optional properties : +- clock-frequency : Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. If not specified, + the default 100 kHz frequency will be used. As only Normal and Fast modes + are supported, possible values are 100000 and 400000. +- st,i2c-min-scl-pulse-width-us : The minimum valid SCL pulse width that is + allowed through the deglitch circuit. In units of us. +- st,i2c-min-sda-pulse-width-us : The minimum valid SDA pulse width that is + allowed through the deglitch circuit. In units of us. +- A pinctrl state named "idle" could be defined to set pins in idle state + when I2C instance is not performing a transfer. +- A pinctrl state named "sleep" could be defined to set pins in sleep state + when driver enters in suspend. + + + +Example : + +i2c0: i2c@fed40000 { + compatible = "st,comms-ssc4-i2c"; + reg = <0xfed40000 0x110>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 187 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&CLK_S_ICN_REG_0>; + clock-names = "ssc"; + clock-frequency = <400000>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_i2c0_default>; + st,i2c-min-scl-pulse-width-us = <0>; + st,i2c-min-sda-pulse-width-us = <5>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt index ad6a73852f08..b1cb3415e6f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ adi,adt7461 +/-1C TDM Extended Temp Range I.C adt7461 +/-1C TDM Extended Temp Range I.C at,24c08 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) atmel,24c02 i2c serial eeprom (24cxx) +atmel,at97sc3204t i2c trusted platform module (TPM) catalyst,24c32 i2c serial eeprom dallas,ds1307 64 x 8, Serial, I2C Real-Time Clock dallas,ds1338 I2C RTC with 56-Byte NV RAM @@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ fsl,mc13892 MC13892: Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC) for i.MX35/51 fsl,mma8450 MMA8450Q: Xtrinsic Low-power, 3-axis Xtrinsic Accelerometer fsl,mpr121 MPR121: Proximity Capacitive Touch Sensor Controller fsl,sgtl5000 SGTL5000: Ultra Low-Power Audio Codec +gmt,g751 G751: Digital Temperature Sensor and Thermal Watchdog with Two-Wire Interface infineon,slb9635tt Infineon SLB9635 (Soft-) I2C TPM (old protocol, max 100khz) infineon,slb9645tt Infineon SLB9645 I2C TPM (new protocol, max 400khz) maxim,ds1050 5 Bit Programmable, Pulse-Width Modulator @@ -44,6 +46,7 @@ mc,rv3029c2 Real Time Clock Module with I2C-Bus national,lm75 I2C TEMP SENSOR national,lm80 Serial Interface ACPI-Compatible Microprocessor System Hardware Monitor national,lm92 ±0.33°C Accurate, 12-Bit + Sign Temperature Sensor and Thermal Window Comparator with Two-Wire Interface +nuvoton,npct501 i2c trusted platform module (TPM) nxp,pca9556 Octal SMBus and I2C registered interface nxp,pca9557 8-bit I2C-bus and SMBus I/O port with reset nxp,pcf8563 Real-time clock/calendar @@ -61,3 +64,4 @@ taos,tsl2550 Ambient Light Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface ti,tsc2003 I2C Touch-Screen Controller ti,tmp102 Low Power Digital Temperature Sensor with SMBUS/Two Wire Serial Interface ti,tmp275 Digital Temperature Sensor +winbond,wpct301 i2c trusted platform module (TPM) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/cm36651.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/cm36651.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c03e19db4550 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/cm36651.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +* Capella CM36651 I2C Proximity and Color Light sensor + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "capella,cm36651" +- reg: the I2C address of the device +- interrupts: interrupt-specifier for the sole interrupt + generated by the device +- vled-supply: regulator for the IR LED. IR_LED is a part + of the cm36651 for proximity detection. + As covered in ../../regulator/regulator.txt + +Example: + + i2c_cm36651: i2c-gpio { + /* ... */ + + cm36651@18 { + compatible = "capella,cm36651"; + reg = <0x18>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpx0>; + interrupts = <2 0>; + vled-supply = <&ps_als_reg>; + }; + + /* ... */ + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/gp2ap020a00f.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/gp2ap020a00f.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9231c82317ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/gp2ap020a00f.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +* Sharp GP2AP020A00F I2C Proximity/ALS sensor + +The proximity detector sensor requires power supply +for its built-in led. It is also defined by this binding. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "sharp,gp2ap020a00f" + - reg : the I2C slave address of the light sensor + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for the sole interrupt generated + by the device + - vled-supply : VLED power supply, as covered in ../regulator/regulator.txt + +Example: + +gp2ap020a00f@39 { + compatible = "sharp,gp2ap020a00f"; + reg = <0x39>; + interrupts = <2 0>; + vled-supply = <...>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2bb2626fdb78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/input-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +Input: sysrq reset sequence + +A simple binding to represent a set of keys as described in +include/uapi/linux/input.h. This is to communicate a sequence of keys to the +sysrq driver. Upon holding the keys for a specified amount of time (if +specified) the system is sync'ed and reset. + +Key sequences are global to the system but all the keys in a set must be coming +from the same input device. + +The /chosen node should contain a 'linux,sysrq-reset-seq' child node to define +a set of keys. + +Required property: +sysrq-reset-seq: array of Linux keycodes, one keycode per cell. + +Optional property: +timeout-ms: duration keys must be pressed together in milliseconds before +generating a sysrq. If omitted the system is rebooted immediately when a valid +sequence has been recognized. + +Example: + + chosen { + linux,sysrq-reset-seq { + keyset = <0x03 + 0x04 + 0x0a>; + timeout-ms = <3000>; + }; + }; + +Would represent KEY_2, KEY_3 and KEY_9. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt index df70318a617f..49fa14ed155c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: touch controller interrupt - wakeup-gpios: the gpio pin to be used for waking up the controller - as well as uased as irq pin + and also used as irq pin Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt index 491c97b78384..878549ba814d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ti-tsc-adc.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Required properties: ti,wires: Wires refer to application modes i.e. 4/5/8 wire touchscreen support on the platform. ti,x-plate-resistance: X plate resistance - ti,coordiante-readouts: The sequencer supports a total of 16 + ti,coordinate-readouts: The sequencer supports a total of 16 programmable steps each step is used to read a single coordinate. A single readout is enough but multiple reads can diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt index 57edb30dbbca..3d3b2b91e333 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sun4i-ic.txt @@ -8,9 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value shall be 1. -For the valid interrupt sources for your SoC, see the documentation in -sunxi/<soc>.txt - Example: intc: interrupt-controller { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt index 72a06c0ab1db..1486497a24c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt @@ -4,16 +4,33 @@ Specifying interrupt information for devices 1) Interrupt client nodes ------------------------- -Nodes that describe devices which generate interrupts must contain an -"interrupts" property. This property must contain a list of interrupt -specifiers, one per output interrupt. The format of the interrupt specifier is -determined by the interrupt controller to which the interrupts are routed; see -section 2 below for details. +Nodes that describe devices which generate interrupts must contain an either an +"interrupts" property or an "interrupts-extended" property. These properties +contain a list of interrupt specifiers, one per output interrupt. The format of +the interrupt specifier is determined by the interrupt controller to which the +interrupts are routed; see section 2 below for details. + + Example: + interrupt-parent = <&intc1>; + interrupts = <5 0>, <6 0>; The "interrupt-parent" property is used to specify the controller to which interrupts are routed and contains a single phandle referring to the interrupt controller node. This property is inherited, so it may be specified in an -interrupt client node or in any of its parent nodes. +interrupt client node or in any of its parent nodes. Interrupts listed in the +"interrupts" property are always in reference to the node's interrupt parent. + +The "interrupts-extended" property is a special form for use when a node needs +to reference multiple interrupt parents. Each entry in this property contains +both the parent phandle and the interrupt specifier. "interrupts-extended" +should only be used when a device has multiple interrupt parents. + + Example: + interrupts-extended = <&intc1 5 1>, <&intc2 1 0>; + +A device node may contain either "interrupts" or "interrupts-extended", but not +both. If both properties are present, then the operating system should log an +error and use only the data in "interrupts". 2) Interrupt controller nodes ----------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 76b98c834499..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun4i-a10.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -Allwinner A10 (sun4i) interrupt sources ---------------------------------------- - -The interrupt sources available for the Allwinner A10 SoC are the -following one: - -0: ENMI -1: UART0 -2: UART1 -3: UART2 -4: UART3 -5: IR0 -6: IR1 -7: I2C0 -8: I2C1 -9: I2C2 -10: SPI0 -11: SPI1 -12: SPI2 -13: SPDIF -14: AC97 -15: TS -16: I2S -17: UART4 -18: UART5 -19: UART6 -20: UART7 -21: KEYPAD -22: TIMER0 -23: TIMER1 -24: TIMER2 -25: TIMER3 -26: CAN -27: DMA -28: PIO -29: TOUCH_PANEL -30: AUDIO_CODEC -31: LRADC -32: MMC0 -33: MMC1 -34: MMC2 -35: MMC3 -36: MEMSTICK -37: NAND -38: USB0 -39: USB1 -40: USB2 -41: SCR -42: CSI0 -43: CSI1 -44: LCDCTRL0 -45: LCDCTRL1 -46: MP -47: DEFEBE0 -48: DEFEBE1 -49: PMU -50: SPI3 -51: TZASC -52: PATA -53: VE -54: SS -55: EMAC -56: SATA -57: GPS -58: HDMI -59: TVE -60: ACE -61: TVD -62: PS2_0 -63: PS2_1 -64: USB3 -65: USB4 -66: PLE_PFM -67: TIMER4 -68: TIMER5 -69: GPU_GP -70: GPU_GPMMU -71: GPU_PP0 -72: GPU_PPMMU0 -73: GPU_PMU -74: GPU_RSV0 -75: GPU_RSV1 -76: GPU_RSV2 -77: GPU_RSV3 -78: GPU_RSV4 -79: GPU_RSV5 -80: GPU_RSV6 -82: SYNC_TIMER0 -83: SYNC_TIMER1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 2ec3b5ce1a0b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sunxi/sun5i-a13.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -Allwinner A13 (sun5i) interrupt sources ---------------------------------------- - -The interrupt sources available for the Allwinner A13 SoC are the -following one: - -0: ENMI -2: UART1 -4: UART3 -5: IR -7: I2C0 -8: I2C1 -9: I2C2 -10: SPI0 -11: SPI1 -12: SPI2 -22: TIMER0 -23: TIMER1 -24: TIMER2 -25: TIMER3 -27: DMA -28: PIO -29: TOUCH_PANEL -30: AUDIO_CODEC -31: LRADC -32: MMC0 -33: MMC1 -34: MMC2 -37: NAND -38: USB OTG -39: USB EHCI -40: USB OHCI -42: CSI -44: LCDCTRL -47: DEFEBE -49: PMU -53: VE -54: SS -66: PLE_PFM -67: TIMER4 -68: TIMER5 -69: GPU_GP -70: GPU_GPMMU -71: GPU_PP0 -72: GPU_PPMMU0 -73: GPU_PMU -74: GPU_RSV0 -75: GPU_RSV1 -76: GPU_RSV2 -77: GPU_RSV3 -78: GPU_RSV4 -79: GPU_RSV5 -80: GPU_RSV6 -82: SYNC_TIMER0 -83: SYNC_TIMER1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt index d5176882d8b9..c55b8c016a9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Binding for TI/National Semiconductor LP55xx Led Drivers Required properties: -- compatible: "national,lp5521" or "national,lp5523" or "ti,lp5562" +- compatible: "national,lp5521" or "national,lp5523" or "ti,lp5562" or "ti,lp8501" - reg: I2C slave address - clock-mode: Input clock mode, (0: automode, 1: internal, 2: external) @@ -10,14 +10,23 @@ Each child has own specific current settings - max-cur: Maximun current at each led channel. Optional properties: +- enable-gpio: GPIO attached to the chip's enable pin - label: Used for naming LEDs +- pwr-sel: LP8501 specific property. Power selection for output channels. + 0: D1~9 are connected to VDD + 1: D1~6 with VDD, D7~9 with VOUT + 2: D1~6 with VOUT, D7~9 with VDD + 3: D1~9 are connected to VOUT -Alternatively, each child can have specific channel name -- chan-name: Name of each channel name +Alternatively, each child can have a specific channel name and trigger: +- chan-name (optional): name of channel +- linux,default-trigger (optional): see + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt example 1) LP5521 3 LED channels, external clock used. Channel names are 'lp5521_pri:channel0', -'lp5521_pri:channel1' and 'lp5521_pri:channel2' +'lp5521_pri:channel1' and 'lp5521_pri:channel2', with a heartbeat trigger +on channel 0. lp5521@32 { compatible = "national,lp5521"; @@ -28,6 +37,7 @@ lp5521@32 { chan0 { led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x2f>; max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x5f>; + linux,default-trigger = "heartbeat"; }; chan1 { @@ -145,3 +155,68 @@ lp5562@30 { max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x60>; }; }; + +example 4) LP8501 +9 channels are defined. The 'pwr-sel' is LP8501 specific property. +Others are same as LP5523. + +lp8501@32 { + compatible = "ti,lp8501"; + reg = <0x32>; + clock-mode = /bits/ 8 <2>; + pwr-sel = /bits/ 8 <3>; /* D1~9 connected to VOUT */ + + chan0 { + chan-name = "d1"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan1 { + chan-name = "d2"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan2 { + chan-name = "d3"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan3 { + chan-name = "d4"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan4 { + chan-name = "d5"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan5 { + chan-name = "d6"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan6 { + chan-name = "d7"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan7 { + chan-name = "d8"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; + + chan8 { + chan-name = "d9"; + led-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + max-cur = /bits/ 8 <0x20>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aece3eac1b63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/pca963x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +LEDs connected to pca9632, pca9633 or pca9634 + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be : "nxp,pca9632", "nxp,pca9633" or "nxp,pca9634" + +Optional properties: +- nxp,totem-pole : use totem pole (push-pull) instead of default open-drain +- nxp,hw-blink : use hardware blinking instead of software blinking + +Each led is represented as a sub-node of the nxp,pca963x device. + +LED sub-node properties: +- label : (optional) see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt +- reg : number of LED line (could be from 0 to 3 in pca9632 or pca9633 + or 0 to 7 in pca9634) +- linux,default-trigger : (optional) + see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt + +Examples: + +pca9632: pca9632 { + compatible = "nxp,pca9632"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x62>; + + red@0 { + label = "red"; + reg = <0>; + linux,default-trigger = "none"; + }; + green@1 { + label = "green"; + reg = <1>; + linux,default-trigger = "none"; + }; + blue@2 { + label = "blue"; + reg = <2>; + linux,default-trigger = "none"; + }; + unused@3 { + label = "unused"; + reg = <3>; + linux,default-trigger = "none"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt index 36bd2d6725c8..f4181680831b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/s5p-mfc.txt @@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ Required properties: mapped region. - interrupts : MFC interrupt number to the CPU. - - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to mfc clocks. - - clock-names : from common clock binding: must contain "sclk_mfc" and "mfc", - corresponding to entries in the clocks property. + - clocks : from common clock binding: handle to mfc clock. + - clock-names : from common clock binding: must contain "mfc", + corresponding to entry in the clocks property. - samsung,mfc-r : Base address of the first memory bank used by MFC for DMA contiguous memory allocation and its size. @@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ mfc: codec@13400000 { reg = <0x13400000 0x10000>; interrupts = <0 94 0>; samsung,power-domain = <&pd_mfc>; - clocks = <&clock 170>, <&clock 273>; - clock-names = "sclk_mfc", "mfc"; + clocks = <&clock 273>; + clock-names = "mfc"; }; Board specific DT entry: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05c432d08bca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/st-rc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for ST IRB IP + +Required properties: + - compatible: Should contain "st,comms-irb". + - reg: Base physical address of the controller and length of memory + mapped region. + - interrupts: interrupt-specifier for the sole interrupt generated by + the device. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt + controller parent. + - rx-mode: can be "infrared" or "uhf". This property specifies the L1 + protocol used for receiving remote control signals. rx-mode should + be present iff the rx pins are wired up. + - tx-mode: should be "infrared". This property specifies the L1 + protocol used for transmitting remote control signals. tx-mode should + be present iff the tx pins are wired up. + +Optional properties: + - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: the pincontrol settings to configure muxing + properly for IRB pins. + - clocks : phandle with clock-specifier pair for IRB. + +Example node: + + rc: rc@fe518000 { + compatible = "st,comms-irb"; + reg = <0xfe518000 0x234>; + interrupts = <0 203 0>; + rx-mode = "infrared"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a69118550344 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/metag/pdc-intc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +* ImgTec Powerdown Controller (PDC) Interrupt Controller Binding + +This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree +representation of a PDC IRQ controller. This has a number of input interrupt +lines which can wake the system, and are passed on through output interrupt +lines. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the interrupt controller. + The type shall be <string> and the value shall include "img,pdc-intc". + + - reg: Specifies the base PDC physical address(s) and size(s) of the + addressable register space. The type shall be <prop-encoded-array>. + + - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node + as an interrupt controller. No property value shall be defined. + + - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2. + + - num-perips: Number of waking peripherals. + + - num-syswakes: Number of SysWake inputs. + + - interrupts: List of interrupt specifiers. The first specifier shall be the + shared SysWake interrupt, and remaining specifies shall be PDC peripheral + interrupts in order. + +* Interrupt Specifier Definition + + Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as follows: + + - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source. + 0-7: Peripheral interrupts + 8-15: SysWake interrupts + + - <2nd-cell>: The level-sense information, encoded using the Linux interrupt + flags as follows (only 4 valid for peripheral interrupts): + 0 = none (decided by software) + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered + 3 = both edge triggered + 4 = active-high level-sensitive (required for perip irqs) + 8 = active-low level-sensitive + +* Examples + +Example 1: + + /* + * TZ1090 PDC block + */ + pdc: pdc@0x02006000 { + // This is an interrupt controller node. + interrupt-controller; + + // Three cells to encode interrupt sources. + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + // Offset address of 0x02006000 and size of 0x1000. + reg = <0x02006000 0x1000>; + + // Compatible with Meta hardware trigger block. + compatible = "img,pdc-intc"; + + // Three peripherals are connected. + num-perips = <3>; + + // Four SysWakes are connected. + num-syswakes = <4>; + + interrupts = <18 4 /* level */>, /* Syswakes */ + <30 4 /* level */>, /* Peripheral 0 (RTC) */ + <29 4 /* level */>, /* Peripheral 1 (IR) */ + <31 4 /* level */>; /* Peripheral 2 (WDT) */ + }; + +Example 2: + + /* + * An SoC peripheral that is wired through the PDC. + */ + rtc0 { + // The interrupt controller that this device is wired to. + interrupt-parent = <&pdc>; + + // Interrupt source Peripheral 0 + interrupts = <0 /* Peripheral 0 (RTC) */ + 4> /* IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH */ + }; + +Example 3: + + /* + * An interrupt generating device that is wired to a SysWake pin. + */ + touchscreen0 { + // The interrupt controller that this device is wired to. + interrupt-parent = <&pdc>; + + // Interrupt source SysWake 0 that is active-low level-sensitive + interrupts = <8 /* SysWake0 */ + 8 /* IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW */>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fc2191ecfd6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +* ams AS3722 Power management IC. + +Required properties: +------------------- +- compatible: Must be "ams,as3722". +- reg: I2C device address. +- interrupt-controller: AS3722 has internal interrupt controller which takes the + interrupt request from internal sub-blocks like RTC, regulators, GPIOs as well + as external input. +- #interrupt-cells: Should be set to 2 for IRQ number and flags. + The first cell is the IRQ number. IRQ numbers for different interrupt source + of AS3722 are defined at dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h + The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from binding document + interrupts.txt, using dt-bindings/irq. + +Optional submodule and their properties: +======================================= + +Pinmux and GPIO: +=============== +Device has 8 GPIO pins which can be configured as GPIO as well as the special IO +functions. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +Following are properties which is needed if GPIO and pinmux functionality +is required: + Required properties: + ------------------- + - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. + - #gpio-cells: Number of GPIO cells. Refer to binding document + gpio/gpio.txt + + Optional properties: + -------------------- + Following properties are require if pin control setting is required + at boot. + - pinctrl-names: A pinctrl state named "default" be defined, using the + bindings in pinctrl/pinctrl-binding.txt. + - pinctrl[0...n]: Properties to contain the phandle that refer to + different nodes of pin control settings. These nodes represents + the pin control setting of state 0 to state n. Each of these + nodes contains different subnodes to represents some desired + configuration for a list of pins. This configuration can + include the mux function to select on those pin(s), and + various pin configuration parameters, such as pull-up, + open drain. + + Each subnode have following properties: + Required properties: + - pins: List of pins. Valid values of pins properties are: + gpio0, gpio1, gpio2, gpio3, gpio4, gpio5, + gpio6, gpio7 + + Optional properties: + function, bias-disable, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, + bias-high-impedance, drive-open-drain. + + Valid values for function properties are: + gpio, interrupt-out, gpio-in-interrupt, + vsup-vbat-low-undebounce-out, + vsup-vbat-low-debounce-out, + voltage-in-standby, oc-pg-sd0, oc-pg-sd6, + powergood-out, pwm-in, pwm-out, clk32k-out, + watchdog-in, soft-reset-in + +Regulators: +=========== +Device has multiple DCDC and LDOs. The node "regulators" is require if regulator +functionality is needed. + +Following are properties of regulator subnode. + + Optional properties: + ------------------- + The input supply of regulators are the optional properties on the + regulator node. The input supply of these regulators are provided + through following properties: + vsup-sd2-supply: Input supply for SD2. + vsup-sd3-supply: Input supply for SD3. + vsup-sd4-supply: Input supply for SD4. + vsup-sd5-supply: Input supply for SD5. + vin-ldo0-supply: Input supply for LDO0. + vin-ldo1-6-supply: Input supply for LDO1 and LDO6. + vin-ldo2-5-7-supply: Input supply for LDO2, LDO5 and LDO7. + vin-ldo3-4-supply: Input supply for LDO3 and LDO4. + vin-ldo9-10-supply: Input supply for LDO9 and LDO10. + vin-ldo11-supply: Input supply for LDO11. + + Optional sub nodes for regulators: + --------------------------------- + The subnodes name is the name of regulator and it must be one of: + sd[0-6], ldo[0-7], ldo[9-11] + + Each sub-node should contain the constraints and initialization + information for that regulator. See regulator.txt for a description + of standard properties for these sub-nodes. + Additional optional custom properties are listed below. + ams,ext-control: External control of the rail. The option of + this properties will tell which external input is + controlling this rail. Valid values are 0, 1, 2 ad 3. + 0: There is no external control of this rail. + 1: Rail is controlled by ENABLE1 input pin. + 2: Rail is controlled by ENABLE2 input pin. + 3: Rail is controlled by ENABLE3 input pin. + Missing this property on DT will be assume as no + external control. The external control pin macros + are defined @dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h + + ams,enable-tracking: Enable tracking with SD1, only supported + by LDO3. + +Example: +-------- +#include <dt-bindings/mfd/as3722.h> +... +ams3722 { + compatible = "ams,as3722"; + reg = <0x48>; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&as3722_default>; + + as3722_default: pinmux { + gpio0 { + pins = "gpio0"; + function = "gpio"; + bias-pull-down; + }; + + gpio1_2_4_7 { + pins = "gpio1", "gpio2", "gpio4", "gpio7"; + function = "gpio"; + bias-pull-up; + }; + + gpio5 { + pins = "gpio5"; + function = "clk32k_out"; + }; + } + + regulators { + vsup-sd2-supply = <...>; + ... + + sd0 { + regulator-name = "vdd_cpu"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <2>; + }; + + sd1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_core"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <1>; + }; + + sd2 { + regulator-name = "vddio_ddr"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd4 { + regulator-name = "avdd-hdmi-pex"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd5 { + regulator-name = "vdd-1v8"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + .... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt index 892537d1a48f..e5f0f8303461 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ twl6035 (palmas) twl6037 (palmas) tps65913 (palmas) tps65914 (palmas) +tps659038 Required properties: - compatible : Should be from the list @@ -14,6 +15,7 @@ Required properties: ti,tps65913 ti,tps65914 ti,tps80036 + ti,tps659038 and also the generic series names ti,palmas - interrupt-controller : palmas has its own internal IRQs diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..78a840d7510d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + +* Samsung S2MPS11 Voltage and Current Regulator + +The Samsung S2MPS11 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and +current regulators, RTC, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is +interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface. Each sub-block is +addressed by the host system using different I2C slave addresses. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic". +- reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66. + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which + the interrupts from s2mps11 are delivered to. +- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for interrupt sources. + +Optional nodes: +- clocks: s2mps11 provides three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 KHz outputs, so to + register these as clocks with common clock framework instantiate a sub-node + named "clocks". It uses the common clock binding documented in : + [Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt] + - #clock-cells: should be 1. + + - The following is the list of clocks generated by the controller. Each clock + is assigned an identifier and client nodes use this identifier to specify + the clock which they consume. + Clock ID + ---------------------- + 32KhzAP 0 + 32KhzCP 1 + 32KhzBT 2 + +- regulators: The regulators of s2mps11 that have to be instantiated should be +included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this +sub-node should be of the format as listed below. + + regulator_name { + [standard regulator constraints....]; + }; + + regulator-ramp-delay for BUCKs = [6250/12500/25000(default)/50000] uV/us + + BUCK[2/3/4/6] supports disabling ramp delay on hardware, so explictly + regulator-ramp-delay = <0> can be used for them to disable ramp delay. + In the absence of the regulator-ramp-delay property, the default ramp + delay will be used. + +NOTE: Some BUCKs share the ramp rate setting i.e. same ramp value will be set +for a particular group of BUCKs. So provide same regulator-ramp-delay<value>. +Grouping of BUCKs sharing ramp rate setting is as follow : BUCK[1, 6], +BUCK[3, 4], and BUCK[7, 8, 10] + +The regulator constraints inside the regulator nodes use the standard regulator +bindings which are documented elsewhere. + +The following are the names of the regulators that the s2mps11 pmic block +supports. Note: The 'n' in LDOn and BUCKn represents the LDO or BUCK number +as per the datasheet of s2mps11. + + - LDOn + - valid values for n are 1 to 38 + - Example: LDO0, LD01, LDO28 + - BUCKn + - valid values for n are 1 to 10. + - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9 + +Example: + + s2mps11_pmic@66 { + compatible = "samsung,s2mps11-pmic"; + reg = <0x66>; + + s2m_osc: clocks{ + #clock-cells = 1; + clock-output-names = "xx", "yy", "zz"; + }; + + regulators { + ldo1_reg: LDO1 { + regulator-name = "VDD_ABB_3.3V"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + }; + + ldo2_reg: LDO2 { + regulator-name = "VDD_ALIVE_1.1V"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + buck1_reg: BUCK1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_mif"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-boot-on; + }; + + buck2_reg: BUCK2 { + regulator-name = "vdd_arm"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <950000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-ramp-delay = <50000>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..68ba37295565 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/allwinner,sunxi-sid.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Allwinner sunxi-sid + +Required properties: +- compatible: "allwinner,sun4i-sid" or "allwinner,sun7i-a20-sid". +- reg: Should contain registers location and length + +Example for sun4i: + sid@01c23800 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-sid"; + reg = <0x01c23800 0x10> + }; + +Example for sun7i: + sid@01c23800 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun7i-a20-sid"; + reg = <0x01c23800 0x200> + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt index 02b428136177..6c9f176f3571 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/smc.txt @@ -4,11 +4,12 @@ This binding defines the location of the bounce buffer used for non-secure to secure communications. Required properties: -- compatible : "bcm,kona-smc" +- compatible : "brcm,kona-smc" +- DEPRECATED: compatible : "bcm,kona-smc" - reg : Location and size of bounce buffer Example: smc@0x3404c000 { - compatible = "bcm,bcm11351-smc", "bcm,kona-smc"; + compatible = "brcm,bcm11351-smc", "brcm,kona-smc"; reg = <0x3404c000 0x400>; //1 KiB in SRAM }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ti,dac7512.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ti,dac7512.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1db45939dac9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/ti,dac7512.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +TI DAC7512 DEVICETREE BINDINGS + +Required properties: + + - "compatible" Must be set to "ti,dac7512" + +Property rules described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt +apply. In particular, "reg" and "spi-max-frequency" properties must be given. + + +Example: + + spi_master { + dac7512: dac7512@0 { + compatible = "ti,dac7512"; + reg = <0>; /* CS0 */ + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + }; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt index 6d1c0988cfc7..c67b975c8906 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -* Samsung Exynos specific extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile +* Samsung Exynos specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller -The Synopsis designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents -differences between the core Synopsis dw mshc controller properties described -by synopsis-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Samsung Exynos specific -extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. +differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described +by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Samsung Exynos specific +extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. Required Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt index bd9be0b5bc20..b7943f3f9995 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt @@ -19,6 +19,9 @@ Optional properties: "bus-width = <1>" property. - sdhci,auto-cmd12: specifies that a controller can only handle auto CMD12. + - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum + slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV). + Several ranges could be specified. Example: @@ -29,4 +32,5 @@ sdhci@2e000 { interrupt-parent = <&ipic>; /* Filled in by U-Boot */ clock-frequency = <0>; + voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt index 1dd622546d06..9046ba06c47a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt @@ -12,6 +12,11 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - fsl,cd-controller : Indicate to use controller internal card detection - fsl,wp-controller : Indicate to use controller internal write protection +- fsl,delay-line : Specify the number of delay cells for override mode. + This is used to set the clock delay for DLL(Delay Line) on override mode + to select a proper data sampling window in case the clock quality is not good + due to signal path is too long on the board. Please refer to eSDHC/uSDHC + chapter, DLL (Delay Line) section in RM for details. Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/bcm,kona-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/kona-sdhci.txt index 094ae010f2fb..789fb07a426d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/bcm,kona-sdhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/kona-sdhci.txt @@ -4,12 +4,13 @@ This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt and the properties present in the bcm281xx SDHCI Required properties: -- compatible : Should be "bcm,kona-sdhci" +- compatible : Should be "brcm,kona-sdhci" +- DEPRECATED: compatible : Should be "bcm,kona-sdhci" Example: sdio2: sdio@0x3f1a0000 { - compatible = "bcm,kona-sdhci"; + compatible = "brcm,kona-sdhci"; reg = <0x3f1a0000 0x10000>; interrupts = <0x0 74 0x4>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt index 8a3d91d47b6a..c559f3f36309 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -* Rockchip specific extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile +* Rockchip specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller -The Synopsis designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents -differences between the core Synopsis dw mshc controller properties described -by synopsis-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Rockchip specific -extensions to the Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. +differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described +by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Rockchip specific +extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. Required Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsis-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt index cdcebea9c6f5..8f3f13315358 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsis-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ -* Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller +* Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller -The Synopsis designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents differences between the core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the -properties used by the Synopsis Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. +properties used by the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. Required Properties: * compatible: should be - - snps,dw-mshc: for controllers compliant with synopsis dw-mshc. + - snps,dw-mshc: for controllers compliant with synopsys dw-mshc. * #address-cells: should be 1. * #size-cells: should be 0. @@ -52,6 +52,9 @@ Optional properties: is specified and the ciu clock is specified then we'll try to set the ciu clock to this at probe time. +* clock-freq-min-max: Minimum and Maximum clock frequency for card output + clock(cclk_out). If it's not specified, max is 200MHZ and min is 400KHz by default. + * num-slots: specifies the number of slots supported by the controller. The number of physical slots actually used could be equal or less than the value specified by num-slots. If this property is not specified, the value @@ -66,6 +69,10 @@ Optional properties: * supports-highspeed: Enables support for high speed cards (up to 50MHz) +* caps2-mmc-hs200-1_8v: Supports mmc HS200 SDR 1.8V mode + +* caps2-mmc-hs200-1_2v: Supports mmc HS200 SDR 1.2V mode + * broken-cd: as documented in mmc core bindings. * vmmc-supply: The phandle to the regulator to use for vmmc. If this is @@ -93,8 +100,10 @@ board specific portions as listed below. dwmmc0@12200000 { clock-frequency = <400000000>; + clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; num-slots = <1>; supports-highspeed; + caps2-mmc-hs200-1_8v; broken-cd; fifo-depth = <0x80>; card-detect-delay = <200>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt index ed271fc255b2..8c8908ab84ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap-hsmmc.txt @@ -20,8 +20,29 @@ ti,dual-volt: boolean, supports dual voltage cards ti,non-removable: non-removable slot (like eMMC) ti,needs-special-reset: Requires a special softreset sequence ti,needs-special-hs-handling: HSMMC IP needs special setting for handling High Speed +dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format +as described in the generic DMA client binding. A tx and rx +specifier is required. +dma-names: List of DMA request names. These strings correspond +1:1 with the DMA specifiers listed in dmas. The string naming is +to be "rx" and "tx" for RX and TX DMA requests, respectively. + +Examples: + +[hwmod populated DMA resources] + + mmc1: mmc@0x4809c000 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-hsmmc"; + reg = <0x4809c000 0x400>; + ti,hwmods = "mmc1"; + ti,dual-volt; + bus-width = <4>; + vmmc-supply = <&vmmc>; /* phandle to regulator node */ + ti,non-removable; + }; + +[generic DMA request binding] -Example: mmc1: mmc@0x4809c000 { compatible = "ti,omap4-hsmmc"; reg = <0x4809c000 0x400>; @@ -30,4 +51,7 @@ Example: bus-width = <4>; vmmc-supply = <&vmmc>; /* phandle to regulator node */ ti,non-removable; + dmas = <&edma 24 + &edma 25>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8de579969763 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/ti-omap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420 + +The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides +an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards. + +This file documents differences between the core properties described +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver. + +Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps, +please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers +- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller + instance starting 1 + +Examples: + + msdi1: mmc@4809c000 { + compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc"; + ti,hwmods = "msdi1"; + reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>; + interrupts = <83>; + dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + +* TI MMC host controller for OMAP1 and 2420 + +The MMC Host Controller on TI OMAP1 and 2420 family provides +an interface for MMC, SD, and SDIO types of memory cards. + +This file documents differences between the core properties described +by mmc.txt and the properties used by the omap mmc driver. + +Note that this driver will not work with omap2430 or later omaps, +please see the omap hsmmc driver for the current omaps. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "ti,omap2420-mmc", for OMAP2420 controllers +- ti,hwmods: For 2420, must be "msdi<n>", where n is controller + instance starting 1 + +Examples: + + msdi1: mmc@4809c000 { + compatible = "ti,omap2420-mmc"; + ti,hwmods = "msdi1"; + reg = <0x4809c000 0x80>; + interrupts = <83>; + dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt index df204e18e030..6a2a1160a70d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt @@ -9,12 +9,15 @@ compulsory and any optional properties, common to all SD/MMC drivers, as described in mmc.txt, can be used. Additionally the following tmio_mmc-specific optional bindings can be used. +Required properties: +- compatible: "renesas,sdhi-shmobile" - a generic sh-mobile SDHI unit + "renesas,sdhi-sh7372" - SDHI IP on SH7372 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-sh73a0" - SDHI IP on SH73A0 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a73a4" - SDHI IP on R8A73A4 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a7740" - SDHI IP on R8A7740 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a7778" - SDHI IP on R8A7778 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a7779" - SDHI IP on R8A7779 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a7790" - SDHI IP on R8A7790 SoC + Optional properties: - toshiba,mmc-wrprotect-disable: write-protect detection is unavailable - -When used with Renesas SDHI hardware, the following compatibility strings -configure various model-specific properties: - -"renesas,sh7372-sdhi": (default) compatible with SH7372 -"renesas,r8a7740-sdhi": compatible with R8A7740: certain MMC/SD commands have to - wait for the interface to become idle. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt index d555421ea49f..c4728839d0c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-nand.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Required properties: optional gpio and may be set to 0 if not present. Optional properties: +- atmel,nand-has-dma : boolean to support dma transfer for nand read/write. - nand-ecc-mode : String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode, soft by default. Supported values are: "none", "soft", "hw", "hw_syndrome", "hw_oob_first", "soft_bch". @@ -29,6 +30,14 @@ Optional properties: sector size 1024. - nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8 - nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false +- Nand Flash Controller(NFC) is a slave driver under Atmel nand flash + - Required properties: + - compatible : "atmel,sama5d3-nfc". + - reg : should specify the address and size used for NFC command registers, + NFC registers and NFC Sram. NFC Sram address and size can be absent + if don't want to use it. + - Optional properties: + - atmel,write-by-sram: boolean to enable NFC write by sram. Examples: nand0: nand@40000000,0 { @@ -77,3 +86,22 @@ nand0: nand@40000000 { ... }; }; + +/* for NFC supported chips */ +nand0: nand@40000000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-nand"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + ... + nfc@70000000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d3-nfc"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = < + 0x70000000 0x10000000 /* NFC Command Registers */ + 0xffffc000 0x00000070 /* NFC HSMC regs */ + 0x00200000 0x00100000 /* NFC SRAM banks */ + >; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt index 2240ac09f6ba..ec42935f3908 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsmc-nand.txt @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ -* FSMC NAND +ST Microelectronics Flexible Static Memory Controller (FSMC) +NAND Interface Required properties: - compatible : "st,spear600-fsmc-nand", "stericsson,fsmc-nand" @@ -9,6 +10,26 @@ Optional properties: - bank-width : Width (in bytes) of the device. If not present, the width defaults to 1 byte - nand-skip-bbtscan: Indicates the the BBT scanning should be skipped +- timings: array of 6 bytes for NAND timings. The meanings of these bytes + are: + byte 0 TCLR : CLE to RE delay in number of AHB clock cycles, only 4 bits + are valid. Zero means one clockcycle, 15 means 16 clock + cycles. + byte 1 TAR : ALE to RE delay, 4 bits are valid. Same format as TCLR. + byte 2 THIZ : number of HCLK clock cycles during which the data bus is + kept in Hi-Z (tristate) after the start of a write access. + Only valid for write transactions. Zero means zero cycles, + 255 means 255 cycles. + byte 3 THOLD : number of HCLK clock cycles to hold the address (and data + when writing) after the command deassertation. Zero means + one cycle, 255 means 256 cycles. + byte 4 TWAIT : number of HCLK clock cycles to assert the command to the + NAND flash in response to SMWAITn. Zero means 1 cycle, + 255 means 256 cycles. + byte 5 TSET : number of HCLK clock cycles to assert the address before the + command is asserted. Zero means one cycle, 255 means 256 + cycles. +- bank: default NAND bank to use (0-3 are valid, 0 is the default). Example: @@ -24,6 +45,8 @@ Example: bank-width = <1>; nand-skip-bbtscan; + timings = /bits/ 8 <0 0 0 2 3 0>; + bank = <1>; partition@0 { ... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt index df338cb5059c..5e1f31b5ff70 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt @@ -22,10 +22,10 @@ Optional properties: width of 8 is assumed. - ti,nand-ecc-opt: A string setting the ECC layout to use. One of: - - "sw" Software method (default) - "hw" Hardware method - "hw-romcode" gpmc hamming mode method & romcode layout + "sw" <deprecated> use "ham1" instead + "hw" <deprecated> use "ham1" instead + "hw-romcode" <deprecated> use "ham1" instead + "ham1" 1-bit Hamming ecc code "bch4" 4-bit BCH ecc code "bch8" 8-bit BCH ecc code @@ -36,8 +36,12 @@ Optional properties: "prefetch-dma" Prefetch enabled sDMA mode "prefetch-irq" Prefetch enabled irq mode - - elm_id: Specifies elm device node. This is required to support BCH - error correction using ELM module. + - elm_id: <deprecated> use "ti,elm-id" instead + - ti,elm-id: Specifies phandle of the ELM devicetree node. + ELM is an on-chip hardware engine on TI SoC which is used for + locating ECC errors for BCHx algorithms. SoC devices which have + ELM hardware engines should specify this device node in .dtsi + Using ELM for ECC error correction frees some CPU cycles. For inline partiton table parsing (optional): diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt index 9315ac96b49b..8e5557da1955 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Partitions can be represented by sub-nodes of an mtd device. This can be used on platforms which have strong conventions about which portions of a flash are used for what purposes, but which don't use an on-flash partition table such as RedBoot. +NOTE: if the sub-node has a compatible string, then it is not a partition. #address-cells & #size-cells must both be present in the mtd device. There are two valid values for both: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt index c2dbcec0ee31..f2105a47ec87 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Optional properties: If not specified or if the specified value is 0, the CLKOUT pin will be disabled. -- nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comperator. +- nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comparator. For further information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ff57a119f81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw-phy-sel.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +TI CPSW Phy mode Selection Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,am3352-cpsw-phy-sel" +- reg : physical base address and size of the cpsw + registers map +- reg-names : names of the register map given in "reg" node + +Optional properties: +-rmii-clock-ext : If present, the driver will configure the RMII + interface to external clock usage + +Examples: + + phy_sel: cpsw-phy-sel@44e10650 { + compatible = "ti,am3352-cpsw-phy-sel"; + reg= <0x44e10650 0x4>; + reg-names = "gmii-sel"; + }; + +(or) + phy_sel: cpsw-phy-sel@44e10650 { + compatible = "ti,am3352-cpsw-phy-sel"; + reg= <0x44e10650 0x4>; + reg-names = "gmii-sel"; + rmii-clock-ext; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt index 48b259e29e87..bad381faf036 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davinci_emac.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ This file provides information, what the device node for the davinci_emac interface contains. Required properties: -- compatible: "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac"; +- compatible: "ti,davinci-dm6467-emac" or "ti,am3517-emac" - reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device - ti,davinci-ctrl-reg-offset: offset to control register - ti,davinci-ctrl-mod-reg-offset: offset to control module register diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt index d53639221403..845ff848d895 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fec.txt @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: only if property "phy-reset-gpios" is available. Missing the property will have the duration be 1 millisecond. Numbers greater than 1000 are invalid and 1 millisecond will be used instead. +- phy-supply: regulator that powers the Ethernet PHY. Example: @@ -25,4 +26,5 @@ ethernet@83fec000 { phy-mode = "mii"; phy-reset-gpios = <&gpio2 14 0>; /* GPIO2_14 */ local-mac-address = [00 04 9F 01 1B B9]; + phy-supply = <®_fec_supply>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt index 2c6be0377f55..d2ea4605d078 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt @@ -86,6 +86,7 @@ General Properties: Clock Properties: + - fsl,cksel Timer reference clock source. - fsl,tclk-period Timer reference clock period in nanoseconds. - fsl,tmr-prsc Prescaler, divides the output clock. - fsl,tmr-add Frequency compensation value. @@ -97,7 +98,7 @@ Clock Properties: clock. You must choose these carefully for the clock to work right. Here is how to figure good values: - TimerOsc = system clock MHz + TimerOsc = selected reference clock MHz tclk_period = desired clock period nanoseconds NominalFreq = 1000 / tclk_period MHz FreqDivRatio = TimerOsc / NominalFreq (must be greater that 1.0) @@ -114,6 +115,20 @@ Clock Properties: Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal, since this will be offered to the PPS subsystem to synchronize the Linux clock. + Reference clock source is determined by the value, which is holded + in CKSEL bits in TMR_CTRL register. "fsl,cksel" property keeps the + value, which will be directly written in those bits, that is why, + according to reference manual, the next clock sources can be used: + + <0> - external high precision timer reference clock (TSEC_TMR_CLK + input is used for this purpose); + <1> - eTSEC system clock; + <2> - eTSEC1 transmit clock; + <3> - RTC clock input. + + When this attribute is not used, eTSEC system clock will serve as + IEEE 1588 timer reference clock. + Example: ptp_clock@24E00 { @@ -121,6 +136,7 @@ Example: reg = <0x24E00 0xB0>; interrupts = <12 0x8 13 0x8>; interrupt-parent = < &ipic >; + fsl,cksel = <1>; fsl,tclk-period = <10>; fsl,tmr-prsc = <100>; fsl,tmr-add = <0x999999A4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt index 953049b4248a..5a41a8658daa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt @@ -8,3 +8,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - phy-device : phandle to Ethernet phy - local-mac-address : Ethernet mac address to use +- reg-io-width : Mask of sizes (in bytes) of the IO accesses that + are supported on the device. Valid value for SMSC LAN91c111 are + 1, 2 or 4. If it's omitted or invalid, the size would be 2 meaning + 16-bit access only. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt index eabcb4b5db6e..d5d26d443693 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/designware-pcie.txt @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -* Synopsis Designware PCIe interface +* Synopsys Designware PCIe interface Required properties: - compatible: should contain "snps,dw-pcie" to identify the core, plus an identifier for the specific instance, such - as "samsung,exynos5440-pcie". + as "samsung,exynos5440-pcie" or "fsl,imx6q-pcie". - reg: base addresses and lengths of the pcie controller, the phy controller, additional register for the phy controller. - interrupts: interrupt values for level interrupt, @@ -21,6 +21,11 @@ Required properties: - num-lanes: number of lanes to use - reset-gpio: gpio pin number of power good signal +Optional properties for fsl,imx6q-pcie +- power-on-gpio: gpio pin number of power-enable signal +- wake-up-gpio: gpio pin number of incoming wakeup signal +- disable-gpio: gpio pin number of outgoing rfkill/endpoint disable signal + Example: SoC specific DT Entry: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt index f8d405897a94..08c716b2c6b6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mvebu-pci.txt @@ -1,20 +1,62 @@ * Marvell EBU PCIe interfaces Mandatory properties: + - compatible: one of the following values: marvell,armada-370-pcie marvell,armada-xp-pcie + marvell,dove-pcie marvell,kirkwood-pcie - #address-cells, set to <3> - #size-cells, set to <2> - #interrupt-cells, set to <1> - bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered - device_type, set to "pci" -- ranges: ranges for the PCI memory and I/O regions, as well as the - MMIO registers to control the PCIe interfaces. +- ranges: ranges describing the MMIO registers to control the PCIe + interfaces, and ranges describing the MBus windows needed to access + the memory and I/O regions of each PCIe interface. +- msi-parent: Link to the hardware entity that serves as the Message + Signaled Interrupt controller for this PCI controller. + +The ranges describing the MMIO registers have the following layout: + + 0x82000000 0 r MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) r 0 s + +where: + + * r is a 32-bits value that gives the offset of the MMIO + registers of this PCIe interface, from the base of the internal + registers. + + * s is a 32-bits value that give the size of this MMIO + registers area. This range entry translates the '0x82000000 0 r' PCI + address into the 'MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) r' CPU address, which is part + of the internal register window (as identified by MBUS_ID(0xf0, + 0x01)). + +The ranges describing the MBus windows have the following layout: + + 0x8t000000 s 0 MBUS_ID(w, a) 0 1 0 + +where: + + * t is the type of the MBus window (as defined by the standard PCI DT + bindings), 1 for I/O and 2 for memory. -In addition, the Device Tree node must have sub-nodes describing each + * s is the PCI slot that corresponds to this PCIe interface + + * w is the 'target ID' value for the MBus window + + * a the 'attribute' value for the MBus window. + +Since the location and size of the different MBus windows is not fixed in +hardware, and only determined in runtime, those ranges cover the full first +4 GB of the physical address space, and do not translate into a valid CPU +address. + +In addition, the device tree node must have sub-nodes describing each PCIe interface, having the following mandatory properties: + - reg: used only for interrupt mapping, so only the first four bytes are used to refer to the correct bus number and device number. - assigned-addresses: reference to the MMIO registers used to control @@ -26,7 +68,8 @@ PCIe interface, having the following mandatory properties: - #address-cells, set to <3> - #size-cells, set to <2> - #interrupt-cells, set to <1> -- ranges, empty property. +- ranges, translating the MBus windows ranges of the parent node into + standard PCI addresses. - interrupt-map-mask and interrupt-map, standard PCI properties to define the mapping of the PCIe interface to interrupt numbers. @@ -34,6 +77,8 @@ and the following optional properties: - marvell,pcie-lane: the physical PCIe lane number, for ports having multiple lanes. If this property is not found, we assume that the value is 0. +- reset-gpios: optional gpio to PERST# +- reset-delay-us: delay in us to wait after reset de-assertion Example: @@ -46,44 +91,73 @@ pcie-controller { #size-cells = <2>; bus-range = <0x00 0xff>; + msi-parent = <&mpic>; - ranges = <0x82000000 0 0xd0040000 0xd0040000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.0 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0042000 0xd0042000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 2.0 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0044000 0xd0044000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.1 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0048000 0xd0048000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.2 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd004c000 0xd004c000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.3 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0080000 0xd0080000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.0 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0082000 0xd0082000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 3.0 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0084000 0xd0084000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.1 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd0088000 0xd0088000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.2 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xd008c000 0xd008c000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.3 registers */ - 0x82000000 0 0xe0000000 0xe0000000 0 0x08000000 /* non-prefetchable memory */ - 0x81000000 0 0 0xe8000000 0 0x00100000>; /* downstream I/O */ + ranges = + <0x82000000 0 0x40000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x40000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x42000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x42000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 2.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x44000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x44000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.1 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x48000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x48000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.2 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x4c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x4c000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 0.3 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x80000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x80000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x82000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x82000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 3.0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x84000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x84000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.1 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x88000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x88000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.2 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x8c000 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0x8c000 0 0x00002000 /* Port 1.3 registers */ + 0x82000000 0x1 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.0 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x1 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xe0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.0 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x2 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xd8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.1 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x2 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xd0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.1 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x3 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xb8) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.2 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x3 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xb0) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.2 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x4 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0x78) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.3 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x4 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0x70) 0 1 0 /* Port 0.3 IO */ + + 0x82000000 0x5 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xe8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.0 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x5 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xe0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.0 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x6 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xd8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.1 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x6 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xd0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.1 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x7 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xb8) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.2 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x7 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xb0) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.2 IO */ + 0x82000000 0x8 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0x78) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.3 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x8 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0x70) 0 1 0 /* Port 1.3 IO */ + + 0x82000000 0x9 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xf8) 0 1 0 /* Port 2.0 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0x9 0 MBUS_ID(0x04, 0xf0) 0 1 0 /* Port 2.0 IO */ + + 0x82000000 0xa 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xf8) 0 1 0 /* Port 3.0 MEM */ + 0x81000000 0xa 0 MBUS_ID(0x08, 0xf0) 0 1 0 /* Port 3.0 IO */>; pcie@1,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82000800 0 0xd0040000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82000800 0 0x40000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x0800 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x1 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x1 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 58>; marvell,pcie-port = <0>; marvell,pcie-lane = <0>; + /* low-active PERST# reset on GPIO 25 */ + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 25 1>; + /* wait 20ms for device settle after reset deassertion */ + reset-delay-us = <20000>; clocks = <&gateclk 5>; status = "disabled"; }; pcie@2,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82001000 0 0xd0044000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82001000 0 0x44000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x1000 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x2 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x2 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 59>; marvell,pcie-port = <0>; @@ -94,12 +168,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@3,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82001800 0 0xd0048000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82001800 0 0x48000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x1800 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x3 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x3 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 60>; marvell,pcie-port = <0>; @@ -110,12 +185,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@4,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82002000 0 0xd004c000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82002000 0 0x4c000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x2000 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x4 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x4 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 61>; marvell,pcie-port = <0>; @@ -126,12 +202,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@5,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82002800 0 0xd0080000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82002800 0 0x80000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x2800 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x5 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x5 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 62>; marvell,pcie-port = <1>; @@ -142,12 +219,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@6,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82003000 0 0xd0084000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82003000 0 0x84000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x3000 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x6 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x6 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 63>; marvell,pcie-port = <1>; @@ -158,12 +236,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@7,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82003800 0 0xd0088000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82003800 0 0x88000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x3800 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x7 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x7 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 64>; marvell,pcie-port = <1>; @@ -174,12 +253,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@8,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82004000 0 0xd008c000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82004000 0 0x8c000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x4000 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x8 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x8 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 65>; marvell,pcie-port = <1>; @@ -187,14 +267,16 @@ pcie-controller { clocks = <&gateclk 12>; status = "disabled"; }; + pcie@9,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82004800 0 0xd0042000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82004800 0 0x42000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x4800 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0x9 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0x9 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 99>; marvell,pcie-port = <2>; @@ -205,12 +287,13 @@ pcie-controller { pcie@10,0 { device_type = "pci"; - assigned-addresses = <0x82005000 0 0xd0082000 0 0x2000>; + assigned-addresses = <0x82005000 0 0x82000 0 0x2000>; reg = <0x5000 0 0 0 0>; #address-cells = <3>; #size-cells = <2>; #interrupt-cells = <1>; - ranges; + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0 0x82000000 0xa 0 1 0 + 0x81000000 0 0 0x81000000 0xa 0 1 0>; interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 0>; interrupt-map = <0 0 0 0 &mpic 103>; marvell,pcie-port = <3>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b7510775c50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/nvidia,tegra20-pcie.txt @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra PCIe controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nvidia,tegra20-pcie" or "nvidia,tegra30-pcie" +- device_type: Must be "pci" +- reg: A list of physical base address and length for each set of controller + registers. Must contain an entry for each entry in the reg-names property. +- reg-names: Must include the following entries: + "pads": PADS registers + "afi": AFI registers + "cs": configuration space region +- interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an + entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property. +- interrupt-names: Must include the following entries: + "intr": The Tegra interrupt that is asserted for controller interrupts + "msi": The Tegra interrupt that is asserted when an MSI is received +- pex-clk-supply: Supply voltage for internal reference clock +- vdd-supply: Power supply for controller (1.05V) +- avdd-supply: Power supply for controller (1.05V) (not required for Tegra20) +- bus-range: Range of bus numbers associated with this controller +- #address-cells: Address representation for root ports (must be 3) + - cell 0 specifies the bus and device numbers of the root port: + [23:16]: bus number + [15:11]: device number + - cell 1 denotes the upper 32 address bits and should be 0 + - cell 2 contains the lower 32 address bits and is used to translate to the + CPU address space +- #size-cells: Size representation for root ports (must be 2) +- ranges: Describes the translation of addresses for root ports and standard + PCI regions. The entries must be 6 cells each, where the first three cells + correspond to the address as described for the #address-cells property + above, the fourth cell is the physical CPU address to translate to and the + fifth and six cells are as described for the #size-cells property above. + - The first two entries are expected to translate the addresses for the root + port registers, which are referenced by the assigned-addresses property of + the root port nodes (see below). + - The remaining entries setup the mapping for the standard I/O, memory and + prefetchable PCI regions. The first cell determines the type of region + that is setup: + - 0x81000000: I/O memory region + - 0x82000000: non-prefetchable memory region + - 0xc2000000: prefetchable memory region + Please refer to the standard PCI bus binding document for a more detailed + explanation. +- clocks: List of clock inputs of the controller. Must contain an entry for + each entry in the clock-names property. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + "pex": The Tegra clock of that name + "afi": The Tegra clock of that name + "pcie_xclk": The Tegra clock of that name + "pll_e": The Tegra clock of that name + "cml": The Tegra clock of that name (not required for Tegra20) + +Root ports are defined as subnodes of the PCIe controller node. + +Required properties: +- device_type: Must be "pci" +- assigned-addresses: Address and size of the port configuration registers +- reg: PCI bus address of the root port +- #address-cells: Must be 3 +- #size-cells: Must be 2 +- ranges: Sub-ranges distributed from the PCIe controller node. An empty + property is sufficient. +- nvidia,num-lanes: Number of lanes to use for this port. Valid combinations + are: + - Root port 0 uses 4 lanes, root port 1 is unused. + - Both root ports use 2 lanes. + +Example: + +SoC DTSI: + + pcie-controller { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-pcie"; + device_type = "pci"; + reg = <0x80003000 0x00000800 /* PADS registers */ + 0x80003800 0x00000200 /* AFI registers */ + 0x90000000 0x10000000>; /* configuration space */ + reg-names = "pads", "afi", "cs"; + interrupts = <0 98 0x04 /* controller interrupt */ + 0 99 0x04>; /* MSI interrupt */ + interrupt-names = "intr", "msi"; + + bus-range = <0x00 0xff>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + ranges = <0x82000000 0 0x80000000 0x80000000 0 0x00001000 /* port 0 registers */ + 0x82000000 0 0x80001000 0x80001000 0 0x00001000 /* port 1 registers */ + 0x81000000 0 0 0x82000000 0 0x00010000 /* downstream I/O */ + 0x82000000 0 0xa0000000 0xa0000000 0 0x10000000 /* non-prefetchable memory */ + 0xc2000000 0 0xb0000000 0xb0000000 0 0x10000000>; /* prefetchable memory */ + + clocks = <&tegra_car 70>, <&tegra_car 72>, <&tegra_car 74>, + <&tegra_car 118>; + clock-names = "pex", "afi", "pcie_xclk", "pll_e"; + status = "disabled"; + + pci@1,0 { + device_type = "pci"; + assigned-addresses = <0x82000800 0 0x80000000 0 0x1000>; + reg = <0x000800 0 0 0 0>; + status = "disabled"; + + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + ranges; + + nvidia,num-lanes = <2>; + }; + + pci@2,0 { + device_type = "pci"; + assigned-addresses = <0x82001000 0 0x80001000 0 0x1000>; + reg = <0x001000 0 0 0 0>; + status = "disabled"; + + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + ranges; + + nvidia,num-lanes = <2>; + }; + }; + + +Board DTS: + + pcie-controller { + status = "okay"; + + vdd-supply = <&pci_vdd_reg>; + pex-clk-supply = <&pci_clk_reg>; + + /* root port 00:01.0 */ + pci@1,0 { + status = "okay"; + + /* bridge 01:00.0 (optional) */ + pci@0,0 { + reg = <0x010000 0 0 0 0>; + + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + device_type = "pci"; + + /* endpoint 02:00.0 */ + pci@0,0 { + reg = <0x020000 0 0 0 0>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + +Note that devices on the PCI bus are dynamically discovered using PCI's bus +enumeration and therefore don't need corresponding device nodes in DT. However +if a device on the PCI bus provides a non-probeable bus such as I2C or SPI, +device nodes need to be added in order to allow the bus' children to be +instantiated at the proper location in the operating system's device tree (as +illustrated by the optional nodes in the example above). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8e0a1eb0acbb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +* Mediatek/Ralink RT3883 PCI controller + +1) Main node + + Required properties: + + - compatible: must be "ralink,rt3883-pci" + + - reg: specifies the physical base address of the controller and + the length of the memory mapped region. + + - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + address. The value must be 1. + + - #size-cells: specifies the number of cells used to represent the size + of an address. The value must be 1. + + - ranges: specifies the translation between child address space and parent + address space + + Optional properties: + + - status: indicates the operational status of the device. + Value must be either "disabled" or "okay". + +2) Child nodes + + The main node must have two child nodes which describes the built-in + interrupt controller and the PCI host bridge. + + a) Interrupt controller: + + Required properties: + + - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller + + - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + address. The value must be 0. As such, 'interrupt-map' nodes do not + have to specify a parent unit address. + + - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The value must be 1. + + - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. + + - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt + controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the + parent interrupt controller. + + b) PCI host bridge: + + Required properties: + + - #address-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + address. The value must be 0. + + - #size-cells: specifies the number of cells used to represent the size + of an address. The value must be 2. + + - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The value must be 1. + + - device_type: must be "pci" + + - bus-range: PCI bus numbers covered + + - ranges: specifies the ranges for the PCI memory and I/O regions + + - interrupt-map-mask, + - interrupt-map: standard PCI properties to define the mapping of the + PCI interface to interrupt numbers. + + The PCI host bridge node migh have additional sub-nodes representing + the onboard PCI devices/PCI slots. Each such sub-node must have the + following mandatory properties: + + - reg: used only for interrupt mapping, so only the first four bytes + are used to refer to the correct bus number and device number. + + - device_type: must be "pci" + + If a given sub-node represents a PCI bridge it must have following + mandatory properties as well: + + - #address-cells: must be set to <3> + + - #size-cells: must set to <2> + + - #interrupt-cells: must be set to <1> + + - interrupt-map-mask, + - interrupt-map: standard PCI properties to define the mapping of the + PCI interface to interrupt numbers. + + Besides the required properties the sub-nodes may have these optional + properties: + + - status: indicates the operational status of the sub-node. + Value must be either "disabled" or "okay". + +3) Example: + + a) SoC specific dtsi file: + + pci@10140000 { + compatible = "ralink,rt3883-pci"; + reg = <0x10140000 0x20000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; /* direct mapping */ + + status = "disabled"; + + pciintc: interrupt-controller { + interrupt-controller; + #address-cells = <0>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + interrupt-parent = <&cpuintc>; + interrupts = <4>; + }; + + host-bridge { + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + device_type = "pci"; + + bus-range = <0 255>; + ranges = < + 0x02000000 0 0x00000000 0x20000000 0 0x10000000 /* pci memory */ + 0x01000000 0 0x00000000 0x10160000 0 0x00010000 /* io space */ + >; + + interrupt-map-mask = <0xf800 0 0 7>; + interrupt-map = < + /* IDSEL 17 */ + 0x8800 0 0 1 &pciintc 18 + 0x8800 0 0 2 &pciintc 18 + 0x8800 0 0 3 &pciintc 18 + 0x8800 0 0 4 &pciintc 18 + /* IDSEL 18 */ + 0x9000 0 0 1 &pciintc 19 + 0x9000 0 0 2 &pciintc 19 + 0x9000 0 0 3 &pciintc 19 + 0x9000 0 0 4 &pciintc 19 + >; + + pci-bridge@1 { + reg = <0x0800 0 0 0 0>; + device_type = "pci"; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + interrupt-map-mask = <0x0 0 0 0>; + interrupt-map = <0x0 0 0 0 &pciintc 20>; + + status = "disabled"; + }; + + pci-slot@17 { + reg = <0x8800 0 0 0 0>; + device_type = "pci"; + + status = "disabled"; + }; + + pci-slot@18 { + reg = <0x9000 0 0 0 0>; + device_type = "pci"; + + status = "disabled"; + }; + }; + }; + + b) Board specific dts file: + + pci@10140000 { + status = "okay"; + + host-bridge { + pci-bridge@1 { + status = "okay"; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8ae844fc0c60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +This document explains only the device tree data binding. For general +information about PHY subsystem refer to Documentation/phy.txt + +PHY device node +=============== + +Required Properties: +#phy-cells: Number of cells in a PHY specifier; The meaning of all those + cells is defined by the binding for the phy node. The PHY + provider can use the values in cells to find the appropriate + PHY. + +For example: + +phys: phy { + compatible = "xxx"; + reg = <...>; + . + . + #phy-cells = <1>; + . + . +}; + +That node describes an IP block (PHY provider) that implements 2 different PHYs. +In order to differentiate between these 2 PHYs, an additonal specifier should be +given while trying to get a reference to it. + +PHY user node +============= + +Required Properties: +phys : the phandle for the PHY device (used by the PHY subsystem) +phy-names : the names of the PHY corresponding to the PHYs present in the + *phys* phandle + +Example 1: +usb1: usb_otg_ss@xxx { + compatible = "xxx"; + reg = <xxx>; + . + . + phys = <&usb2_phy>, <&usb3_phy>; + phy-names = "usb2phy", "usb3phy"; + . + . +}; + +This node represents a controller that uses two PHYs, one for usb2 and one for +usb3. + +Example 2: +usb2: usb_otg_ss@xxx { + compatible = "xxx"; + reg = <xxx>; + . + . + phys = <&phys 1>; + phy-names = "usbphy"; + . + . +}; + +This node represents a controller that uses one of the PHYs of the PHY provider +device defined previously. Note that the phy handle has an additional specifier +"1" to differentiate between the two PHYs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c0fccaa1671e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Samsung S5P/EXYNOS SoC series MIPI CSIS/DSIM DPHY +------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "samsung,s5pv210-mipi-video-phy"; +- reg : offset and length of the MIPI DPHY register set; +- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 1; + +For "samsung,s5pv210-mipi-video-phy" compatible PHYs the second cell in +the PHY specifier identifies the PHY and its meaning is as follows: + 0 - MIPI CSIS 0, + 1 - MIPI DSIM 0, + 2 - MIPI CSIS 1, + 3 - MIPI DSIM 1. + +Samsung EXYNOS SoC series Display Port PHY +------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "samsung,exynos5250-dp-video-phy"; +- reg : offset and length of the Display Port PHY register set; +- #phy-cells : from the generic PHY bindings, must be 0; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/abilis,tb10x-iomux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/abilis,tb10x-iomux.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2c11866221c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/abilis,tb10x-iomux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +Abilis Systems TB10x pin controller +=================================== + +Required properties +------------------- + +- compatible: should be "abilis,tb10x-iomux"; +- reg: should contain the physical address and size of the pin controller's + register range. + + +Function definitions +-------------------- + +Functions are defined (and referenced) by sub-nodes of the pin controller. +Every sub-node defines exactly one function (implying a set of pins). +Every function is associated to one named pin group inside the pin controller +driver and these names are used to associate pin group predefinitions to pin +controller sub-nodes. + +Required function definition subnode properties: + - abilis,function: should be set to the name of the function's pin group. + +The following pin groups are available: + - GPIO ports: gpioa, gpiob, gpioc, gpiod, gpioe, gpiof, gpiog, + gpioh, gpioi, gpioj, gpiok, gpiol, gpiom, gpion + - Serial TS input ports: mis0, mis1, mis2, mis3, mis4, mis5, mis6, mis7 + - Parallel TS input ports: mip1, mip3, mip5, mip7 + - Serial TS output ports: mos0, mos1, mos2, mos3 + - Parallel TS output port: mop + - CI+ port: ciplus + - CableCard (Mcard) port: mcard + - Smart card ports: stc0, stc1 + - UART ports: uart0, uart1 + - SPI ports: spi1, spi3 + - JTAG: jtag + +All other ports of the chip are not multiplexed and thus not managed by this +driver. + + +GPIO ranges definition +---------------------- + +The named pin groups of GPIO ports can be used to define GPIO ranges as +explained in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt. + + +Example +------- + +iomux: iomux@FF10601c { + compatible = "abilis,tb10x-iomux"; + reg = <0xFF10601c 0x4>; + pctl_gpio_a: pctl-gpio-a { + abilis,function = "gpioa"; + }; + pctl_uart0: pctl-uart0 { + abilis,function = "uart0"; + }; +}; +uart@FF100000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0xFF100000 0x100>; + clock-frequency = <166666666>; + interrupts = <25 1>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pctl_uart0>; +}; +gpioa: gpio@FF140000 { + compatible = "abilis,tb10x-gpio"; + reg = <0xFF140000 0x1000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + ngpio = <3>; + gpio-ranges = <&iomux 0 0>; + gpio-ranges-group-names = "gpioa"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt index 7ccae490ff6d..02ab5ab198a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pinctrl.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ mode) this pin can work on and the 'config' configures various pad settings such as pull-up, multi drive, etc. Required properties for iomux controller: -- compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl" +- compatible: "atmel,at91rm9200-pinctrl" or "atmel,at91sam9x5-pinctrl" - atmel,mux-mask: array of mask (periph per bank) to describe if a pin can be configured in this periph mode. All the periph and bank need to be describe. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt index 3a7caf7a744a..9fde25f1401a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt @@ -22,11 +22,12 @@ Required properties for iomux controller: Please refer to each fsl,<soc>-pinctrl.txt binding doc for supported SoCs. Required properties for pin configuration node: -- fsl,pins: two integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config - setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG>, PIN_FUNC_ID is a - pin working on a specific function, which consists of a tuple of - <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val input_val>. CONFIG is the pad setting - value like pull-up on this pin. +- fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config + setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val + input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in + imx*-pinfunc.h under device tree source folder. The last integer CONFIG is + the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. And that's why fsl,pins entry + looks like <PIN_FUNC_ID CONFIG> in the example below. Bits used for CONFIG: NO_PAD_CTL(1 << 31): indicate this pin does not need config. @@ -72,17 +73,18 @@ iomuxc@020e0000 { /* shared pinctrl settings */ usdhc4 { pinctrl_usdhc4_1: usdhc4grp-1 { - fsl,pins = <1386 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_CMD__USDHC4_CMD */ - 1392 0x10059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_CLK__USDHC4_CLK */ - 1462 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT0__USDHC4_DAT0 */ - 1470 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT1__USDHC4_DAT1 */ - 1478 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT2__USDHC4_DAT2 */ - 1486 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT3__USDHC4_DAT3 */ - 1493 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT4__USDHC4_DAT4 */ - 1501 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT5__USDHC4_DAT5 */ - 1509 0x17059 /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT6__USDHC4_DAT6 */ - 1517 0x17059>; /* MX6Q_PAD_SD4_DAT7__USDHC4_DAT7 */ - }; + fsl,pins = < + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_CMD__SD4_CMD 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_CLK__SD4_CLK 0x10059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT0__SD4_DATA0 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT1__SD4_DATA1 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT2__SD4_DATA2 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT3__SD4_DATA3 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT4__SD4_DATA4 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT5__SD4_DATA5 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT6__SD4_DATA6 0x17059 + MX6QDL_PAD_SD4_DAT7__SD4_DATA7 0x17059 + >; }; .... }; @@ -90,6 +92,3 @@ Refer to the IOMUXC controller chapter in imx6q datasheet, 0x17059 means enable hysteresis, 47KOhm Pull Up, 50Mhz speed, 80Ohm driver strength and Fast Slew Rate. User should refer to each SoC spec to set the correct value. - -TODO: when dtc macro support is available, we can change above raw data -to dt macro which can get better readability in dts file. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..353eca0efbf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx27-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +* Freescale IMX27 IOMUX Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,imx27-iomuxc" + +The iomuxc driver node should define subnodes containing of pinctrl configuration subnodes. + +Required properties for pin configuration node: +- fsl,pins: three integers array, represents a group of pins mux and config + setting. The format is fsl,pins = <PIN MUX_ID CONFIG>. + + PIN is an integer between 0 and 0xbf. imx27 has 6 ports with 32 configurable + configurable pins each. PIN is PORT * 32 + PORT_PIN, PORT_PIN is the pin + number on the specific port (between 0 and 31). + + MUX_ID is + function + (direction << 2) + (gpio_oconf << 4) + (gpio_iconfa << 8) + (gpio_iconfb << 10) + + function value is used to select the pin function. + Possible values: + 0 - Primary function + 1 - Alternate function + 2 - GPIO + Registers: GIUS (GPIO In Use), GPR (General Purpose Register) + + direction defines the data direction of the pin. + Possible values: + 0 - Input + 1 - Output + Register: DDIR + + gpio_oconf configures the gpio submodule output signal. This does not + have any effect unless GPIO function is selected. A/B/C_IN are output + signals of function blocks A,B and C. Specific function blocks are + described in the reference manual. + Possible values: + 0 - A_IN + 1 - B_IN + 2 - C_IN + 3 - Data Register + Registers: OCR1, OCR2 + + gpio_iconfa/b configures the gpio submodule input to functionblocks A and + B. GPIO function should be selected if this is configured. + Possible values: + 0 - GPIO_IN + 1 - Interrupt Status Register + 2 - Pulldown + 3 - Pullup + Registers ICONFA1, ICONFA2, ICONFB1 and ICONFB2 + + CONFIG can be 0 or 1, meaning Pullup disable/enable. + + + +Example: + +iomuxc: iomuxc@10015000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx27-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x10015000 0x600>; + + uart { + pinctrl_uart1: uart-1 { + fsl,pins = < + 0x8c 0x004 0x0 /* UART1_TXD__UART1_TXD */ + 0x8d 0x000 0x0 /* UART1_RXD__UART1_RXD */ + 0x8e 0x004 0x0 /* UART1_CTS__UART1_CTS */ + 0x8f 0x000 0x0 /* UART1_RTS__UART1_RTS */ + >; + }; + + ... + }; +}; + + +For convenience there are macros defined in imx27-pinfunc.h which provide PIN +and MUX_ID. They are structured as MX27_PAD_<Pad name>__<Signal name>. The names +are defined in the i.MX27 reference manual. + +The above example using macros: + +iomuxc: iomuxc@10015000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx27-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x10015000 0x600>; + + uart { + pinctrl_uart1: uart-1 { + fsl,pins = < + MX27_PAD_UART1_TXD__UART1_TXD 0x0 + MX27_PAD_UART1_RXD__UART1_RXD 0x0 + MX27_PAD_UART1_CTS__UART1_CTS 0x0 + MX27_PAD_UART1_RTS__UART1_RTS 0x0 + >; + }; + + ... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt index 3077370c89af..1e70a8aff260 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,mxs-pinctrl.txt @@ -59,16 +59,16 @@ Required subnode-properties: Optional subnode-properties: - fsl,drive-strength: Integer. - 0: 4 mA - 1: 8 mA - 2: 12 mA - 3: 16 mA + 0: MXS_DRIVE_4mA + 1: MXS_DRIVE_8mA + 2: MXS_DRIVE_12mA + 3: MXS_DRIVE_16mA - fsl,voltage: Integer. - 0: 1.8 V - 1: 3.3 V + 0: MXS_VOLTAGE_LOW - 1.8 V + 1: MXS_VOLTAGE_HIGH - 3.3 V - fsl,pull-up: Integer. - 0: Disable the internal pull-up - 1: Enable the internal pull-up + 0: MXS_PULL_DISABLE - Disable the internal pull-up + 1: MXS_PULL_ENABLE - Enable the internal pull-up Note that when enabling the pull-up, the internal pad keeper gets disabled. Also, some pins doesn't have a pull up, in that case, setting the fsl,pull-up @@ -85,23 +85,32 @@ pinctrl@80018000 { mmc0_8bit_pins_a: mmc0-8bit@0 { reg = <0>; fsl,pinmux-ids = < - 0x2000 0x2010 0x2020 0x2030 - 0x2040 0x2050 0x2060 0x2070 - 0x2080 0x2090 0x20a0>; - fsl,drive-strength = <1>; - fsl,voltage = <1>; - fsl,pull-up = <1>; + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA0__SSP0_D0 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA1__SSP0_D1 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA2__SSP0_D2 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA3__SSP0_D3 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__SSP0_D4 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__SSP0_D5 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__SSP0_D6 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__SSP0_D7 + MX28_PAD_SSP0_CMD__SSP0_CMD + MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__SSP0_CARD_DETECT + MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__SSP0_SCK + >; + fsl,drive-strength = <MXS_DRIVE_4mA>; + fsl,voltage = <MXS_VOLTAGE_HIGH>; + fsl,pull-up = <MXS_PULL_ENABLE>; }; mmc_cd_cfg: mmc-cd-cfg { - fsl,pinmux-ids = <0x2090>; - fsl,pull-up = <0>; + fsl,pinmux-ids = <MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__SSP0_CARD_DETECT>; + fsl,pull-up = <MXS_PULL_DISABLE>; }; mmc_sck_cfg: mmc-sck-cfg { - fsl,pinmux-ids = <0x20a0>; - fsl,drive-strength = <2>; - fsl,pull-up = <0>; + fsl,pinmux-ids = <MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__SSP0_SCK>; + fsl,drive-strength = <MXS_DRIVE_12mA>; + fsl,pull-up = <MXS_PULL_DISABLE>; }; }; @@ -112,811 +121,7 @@ adjusting the configuration for pins card-detection and clock from what group node mmc0-8bit defines. Only the configuration properties to be adjusted need to be listed in the config nodes. -Valid values for i.MX28 pinmux-id: - -pinmux id ------- -- -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPMI_D0 0x0000 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPMI_D1 0x0010 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPMI_D2 0x0020 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPMI_D3 0x0030 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPMI_D4 0x0040 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPMI_D5 0x0050 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPMI_D6 0x0060 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPMI_D7 0x0070 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPMI_CE0N 0x0100 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPMI_CE1N 0x0110 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPMI_CE2N 0x0120 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__GPMI_CE3N 0x0130 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPMI_READY0 0x0140 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPMI_READY1 0x0150 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPMI_READY2 0x0160 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPMI_READY3 0x0170 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPMI_RDN 0x0180 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPMI_WRN 0x0190 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPMI_ALE 0x01a0 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPMI_CLE 0x01b0 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__GPMI_RESETN 0x01c0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__LCD_D0 0x1000 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__LCD_D1 0x1010 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__LCD_D2 0x1020 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__LCD_D3 0x1030 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__LCD_D4 0x1040 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__LCD_D5 0x1050 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__LCD_D6 0x1060 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__LCD_D7 0x1070 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__LCD_D8 0x1080 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__LCD_D9 0x1090 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__LCD_D10 0x10a0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__LCD_D11 0x10b0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__LCD_D12 0x10c0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__LCD_D13 0x10d0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__LCD_D14 0x10e0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__LCD_D15 0x10f0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__LCD_D16 0x1100 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__LCD_D17 0x1110 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__LCD_D18 0x1120 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__LCD_D19 0x1130 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__LCD_D20 0x1140 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__LCD_D21 0x1150 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__LCD_D22 0x1160 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__LCD_D23 0x1170 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__LCD_RD_E 0x1180 -MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__LCD_WR_RWN 0x1190 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_RS 0x11a0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_CS 0x11b0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_VSYNC 0x11c0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__LCD_HSYNC 0x11d0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__LCD_DOTCLK 0x11e0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__LCD_ENABLE 0x11f0 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA0__SSP0_D0 0x2000 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA1__SSP0_D1 0x2010 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA2__SSP0_D2 0x2020 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA3__SSP0_D3 0x2030 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__SSP0_D4 0x2040 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__SSP0_D5 0x2050 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__SSP0_D6 0x2060 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__SSP0_D7 0x2070 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_CMD__SSP0_CMD 0x2080 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__SSP0_CARD_DETECT 0x2090 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__SSP0_SCK 0x20a0 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP1_SCK 0x20c0 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP1_CMD 0x20d0 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP1_D0 0x20e0 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP1_D3 0x20f0 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__SSP2_SCK 0x2100 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__SSP2_CMD 0x2110 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__SSP2_D0 0x2120 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__SSP2_D3 0x2130 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__SSP2_D4 0x2140 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__SSP2_D5 0x2150 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__SSP3_SCK 0x2180 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__SSP3_CMD 0x2190 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__SSP3_D0 0x21a0 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__SSP3_D3 0x21b0 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__AUART0_RX 0x3000 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__AUART0_TX 0x3010 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__AUART0_CTS 0x3020 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__AUART0_RTS 0x3030 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__AUART1_RX 0x3040 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__AUART1_TX 0x3050 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__AUART1_CTS 0x3060 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__AUART1_RTS 0x3070 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__AUART2_RX 0x3080 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__AUART2_TX 0x3090 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__AUART2_CTS 0x30a0 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__AUART2_RTS 0x30b0 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__AUART3_RX 0x30c0 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__AUART3_TX 0x30d0 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__AUART3_CTS 0x30e0 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__AUART3_RTS 0x30f0 -MX28_PAD_PWM0__PWM_0 0x3100 -MX28_PAD_PWM1__PWM_1 0x3110 -MX28_PAD_PWM2__PWM_2 0x3120 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__SAIF0_MCLK 0x3140 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__SAIF0_LRCLK 0x3150 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__SAIF0_BITCLK 0x3160 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__SAIF0_SDATA0 0x3170 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__I2C0_SCL 0x3180 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__I2C0_SDA 0x3190 -MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__SAIF1_SDATA0 0x31a0 -MX28_PAD_SPDIF__SPDIF_TX 0x31b0 -MX28_PAD_PWM3__PWM_3 0x31c0 -MX28_PAD_PWM4__PWM_4 0x31d0 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_RESET 0x31e0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__ENET0_MDC 0x4000 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__ENET0_MDIO 0x4010 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__ENET0_RX_EN 0x4020 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__ENET0_RXD0 0x4030 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__ENET0_RXD1 0x4040 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__ENET0_TX_CLK 0x4050 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__ENET0_TX_EN 0x4060 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__ENET0_TXD0 0x4070 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__ENET0_TXD1 0x4080 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET0_RXD2 0x4090 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET0_RXD3 0x40a0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET0_TXD2 0x40b0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET0_TXD3 0x40c0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_RX_CLK 0x40d0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET0_COL 0x40e0 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET0_CRS 0x40f0 -MX28_PAD_ENET_CLK__CLKCTRL_ENET 0x4100 -MX28_PAD_JTAG_RTCK__JTAG_RTCK 0x4140 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D00__EMI_DATA0 0x5000 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D01__EMI_DATA1 0x5010 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D02__EMI_DATA2 0x5020 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D03__EMI_DATA3 0x5030 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D04__EMI_DATA4 0x5040 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D05__EMI_DATA5 0x5050 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D06__EMI_DATA6 0x5060 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D07__EMI_DATA7 0x5070 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D08__EMI_DATA8 0x5080 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D09__EMI_DATA9 0x5090 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D10__EMI_DATA10 0x50a0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D11__EMI_DATA11 0x50b0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D12__EMI_DATA12 0x50c0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D13__EMI_DATA13 0x50d0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D14__EMI_DATA14 0x50e0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_D15__EMI_DATA15 0x50f0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_ODT0__EMI_ODT0 0x5100 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DQM0__EMI_DQM0 0x5110 -MX28_PAD_EMI_ODT1__EMI_ODT1 0x5120 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DQM1__EMI_DQM1 0x5130 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DDR_OPEN_FB__EMI_DDR_OPEN_FEEDBACK 0x5140 -MX28_PAD_EMI_CLK__EMI_CLK 0x5150 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DQS0__EMI_DQS0 0x5160 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DQS1__EMI_DQS1 0x5170 -MX28_PAD_EMI_DDR_OPEN__EMI_DDR_OPEN 0x51a0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A00__EMI_ADDR0 0x6000 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A01__EMI_ADDR1 0x6010 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A02__EMI_ADDR2 0x6020 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A03__EMI_ADDR3 0x6030 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A04__EMI_ADDR4 0x6040 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A05__EMI_ADDR5 0x6050 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A06__EMI_ADDR6 0x6060 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A07__EMI_ADDR7 0x6070 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A08__EMI_ADDR8 0x6080 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A09__EMI_ADDR9 0x6090 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A10__EMI_ADDR10 0x60a0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A11__EMI_ADDR11 0x60b0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A12__EMI_ADDR12 0x60c0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A13__EMI_ADDR13 0x60d0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_A14__EMI_ADDR14 0x60e0 -MX28_PAD_EMI_BA0__EMI_BA0 0x6100 -MX28_PAD_EMI_BA1__EMI_BA1 0x6110 -MX28_PAD_EMI_BA2__EMI_BA2 0x6120 -MX28_PAD_EMI_CASN__EMI_CASN 0x6130 -MX28_PAD_EMI_RASN__EMI_RASN 0x6140 -MX28_PAD_EMI_WEN__EMI_WEN 0x6150 -MX28_PAD_EMI_CE0N__EMI_CE0N 0x6160 -MX28_PAD_EMI_CE1N__EMI_CE1N 0x6170 -MX28_PAD_EMI_CKE__EMI_CKE 0x6180 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__SSP1_D0 0x0001 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__SSP1_D1 0x0011 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__SSP1_D2 0x0021 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__SSP1_D3 0x0031 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__SSP1_D4 0x0041 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__SSP1_D5 0x0051 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__SSP1_D6 0x0061 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__SSP1_D7 0x0071 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__SSP3_D0 0x0101 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__SSP3_D3 0x0111 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__CAN1_TX 0x0121 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__CAN1_RX 0x0131 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__SSP1_CARD_DETECT 0x0141 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__SSP1_CMD 0x0151 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__CAN0_TX 0x0161 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__CAN0_RX 0x0171 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__SSP3_SCK 0x0181 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__SSP1_SCK 0x0191 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__SSP3_D1 0x01a1 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__SSP3_D2 0x01b1 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__SSP3_CMD 0x01c1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA8 0x1031 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA9 0x1041 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA3 0x1081 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA4 0x1091 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__ENET1_1588_EVENT2_OUT 0x1141 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__ENET1_1588_EVENT2_IN 0x1151 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__ENET1_1588_EVENT3_OUT 0x1161 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__ENET1_1588_EVENT3_IN 0x1171 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__LCD_VSYNC 0x1181 -MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__LCD_HSYNC 0x1191 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_DOTCLK 0x11a1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_ENABLE 0x11b1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__SAIF1_SDATA0 0x11c1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__SAIF1_SDATA1 0x11d1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__SAIF1_MCLK 0x11e1 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__SSP2_D0 0x2041 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__SSP2_D3 0x2051 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__SSP2_CMD 0x2061 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__SSP2_SCK 0x2071 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP2_D1 0x20c1 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP2_D2 0x20d1 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP2_D6 0x20e1 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP2_D7 0x20f1 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__AUART2_RX 0x2101 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__AUART2_TX 0x2111 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__AUART3_RX 0x2121 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__AUART3_TX 0x2131 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__SSP2_D1 0x2141 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__SSP2_D2 0x2151 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__AUART4_TX 0x2181 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__AUART4_RX 0x2191 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__AUART4_RTS 0x21a1 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__AUART4_CTS 0x21b1 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__I2C0_SCL 0x3001 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__I2C0_SDA 0x3011 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__AUART4_RX 0x3021 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__AUART4_TX 0x3031 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__SSP2_CARD_DETECT 0x3041 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__SSP3_CARD_DETECT 0x3051 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__USB0_OVERCURRENT 0x3061 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__USB0_ID 0x3071 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__SSP3_D1 0x3081 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__SSP3_D2 0x3091 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__I2C1_SCL 0x30a1 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__I2C1_SDA 0x30b1 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__CAN0_TX 0x30c1 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__CAN0_RX 0x30d1 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__CAN1_TX 0x30e1 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__CAN1_RX 0x30f1 -MX28_PAD_PWM0__I2C1_SCL 0x3101 -MX28_PAD_PWM1__I2C1_SDA 0x3111 -MX28_PAD_PWM2__USB0_ID 0x3121 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__PWM_3 0x3141 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__PWM_4 0x3151 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__PWM_5 0x3161 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__PWM_6 0x3171 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__TIMROT_ROTARYA 0x3181 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__TIMROT_ROTARYB 0x3191 -MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__PWM_7 0x31a1 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_VSYNC 0x31e1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__GPMI_CE4N 0x4001 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__GPMI_CE5N 0x4011 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__GPMI_CE6N 0x4021 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__GPMI_CE7N 0x4031 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__GPMI_READY4 0x4041 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__HSADC_TRIGGER 0x4051 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__GPMI_READY5 0x4061 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__GPMI_READY6 0x4071 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__GPMI_READY7 0x4081 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET1_RXD0 0x4091 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET1_RXD1 0x40a1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET1_TXD0 0x40b1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET1_TXD1 0x40c1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_RX_ER 0x40d1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET1_TX_EN 0x40e1 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET1_RX_EN 0x40f1 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__ENET0_RX_ER 0x0122 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__SAIF1_MCLK 0x0132 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__USB0_ID 0x0142 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__ENET0_TX_ER 0x0162 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__HSADC_TRIGGER 0x0172 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__SSP3_D4 0x01a2 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__SSP3_D5 0x01b2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__ETM_DA0 0x1002 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__ETM_DA1 0x1012 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__ETM_DA2 0x1022 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA3 0x1032 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA4 0x1042 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__ETM_DA5 0x1052 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__ETM_DA6 0x1062 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__ETM_DA7 0x1072 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA8 0x1082 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA9 0x1092 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__ETM_DA10 0x10a2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__ETM_DA11 0x10b2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__ETM_DA12 0x10c2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__ETM_DA13 0x10d2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__ETM_DA14 0x10e2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__ETM_DA15 0x10f2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__ETM_DA7 0x1102 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__ETM_DA6 0x1112 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__ETM_DA5 0x1122 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__ETM_DA4 0x1132 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__ETM_DA3 0x1142 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__ETM_DA2 0x1152 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__ETM_DA1 0x1162 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__ETM_DA0 0x1172 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__ETM_TCTL 0x1182 -MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__ETM_TCLK 0x1192 -MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__ETM_TCTL 0x11d2 -MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__ETM_TCLK 0x11e2 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_OUT 0x20c2 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_IN 0x20d2 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_OUT 0x20e2 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_IN 0x20f2 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__SAIF0_SDATA1 0x2102 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__SAIF0_SDATA2 0x2112 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__SAIF1_SDATA1 0x2122 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__SAIF1_SDATA2 0x2132 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__USB1_OVERCURRENT 0x2142 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__USB0_OVERCURRENT 0x2152 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__ENET1_1588_EVENT0_OUT 0x2182 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__ENET1_1588_EVENT0_IN 0x2192 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__ENET1_1588_EVENT1_OUT 0x21a2 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__ENET1_1588_EVENT1_IN 0x21b2 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__DUART_CTS 0x3002 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__DUART_RTS 0x3012 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__DUART_RX 0x3022 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__DUART_TX 0x3032 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__PWM_0 0x3042 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__PWM_1 0x3052 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__TIMROT_ROTARYA 0x3062 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__TIMROT_ROTARYB 0x3072 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__SSP3_D4 0x3082 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__SSP3_D5 0x3092 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__SAIF1_BITCLK 0x30a2 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__SAIF1_LRCLK 0x30b2 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_OUT 0x30c2 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_IN 0x30d2 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_OUT 0x30e2 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_IN 0x30f2 -MX28_PAD_PWM0__DUART_RX 0x3102 -MX28_PAD_PWM1__DUART_TX 0x3112 -MX28_PAD_PWM2__USB1_OVERCURRENT 0x3122 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__AUART4_CTS 0x3142 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__AUART4_RTS 0x3152 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__AUART4_RX 0x3162 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__AUART4_TX 0x3172 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__DUART_RX 0x3182 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__DUART_TX 0x3192 -MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__SAIF0_SDATA1 0x31a2 -MX28_PAD_SPDIF__ENET1_RX_ER 0x31b2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__SAIF0_SDATA1 0x4002 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__SAIF0_SDATA2 0x4012 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__SAIF1_SDATA1 0x4022 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__SAIF1_SDATA2 0x4032 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_OUT 0x4052 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_OUT 0x4092 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__ENET0_1588_EVENT0_IN 0x40a2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_OUT 0x40b2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__ENET0_1588_EVENT1_IN 0x40c2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__ENET0_1588_EVENT2_IN 0x40d2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_OUT 0x40e2 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__ENET0_1588_EVENT3_IN 0x40f2 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPIO_0_0 0x0003 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPIO_0_1 0x0013 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPIO_0_2 0x0023 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPIO_0_3 0x0033 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPIO_0_4 0x0043 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPIO_0_5 0x0053 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPIO_0_6 0x0063 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPIO_0_7 0x0073 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPIO_0_16 0x0103 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPIO_0_17 0x0113 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPIO_0_18 0x0123 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CE3N__GPIO_0_19 0x0133 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPIO_0_20 0x0143 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPIO_0_21 0x0153 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPIO_0_22 0x0163 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPIO_0_23 0x0173 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPIO_0_24 0x0183 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPIO_0_25 0x0193 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPIO_0_26 0x01a3 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPIO_0_27 0x01b3 -MX28_PAD_GPMI_RESETN__GPIO_0_28 0x01c3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D00__GPIO_1_0 0x1003 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D01__GPIO_1_1 0x1013 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D02__GPIO_1_2 0x1023 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D03__GPIO_1_3 0x1033 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D04__GPIO_1_4 0x1043 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D05__GPIO_1_5 0x1053 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D06__GPIO_1_6 0x1063 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D07__GPIO_1_7 0x1073 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D08__GPIO_1_8 0x1083 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D09__GPIO_1_9 0x1093 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D10__GPIO_1_10 0x10a3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D11__GPIO_1_11 0x10b3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D12__GPIO_1_12 0x10c3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D13__GPIO_1_13 0x10d3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D14__GPIO_1_14 0x10e3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D15__GPIO_1_15 0x10f3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D16__GPIO_1_16 0x1103 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D17__GPIO_1_17 0x1113 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D18__GPIO_1_18 0x1123 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D19__GPIO_1_19 0x1133 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D20__GPIO_1_20 0x1143 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D21__GPIO_1_21 0x1153 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D22__GPIO_1_22 0x1163 -MX28_PAD_LCD_D23__GPIO_1_23 0x1173 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RD_E__GPIO_1_24 0x1183 -MX28_PAD_LCD_WR_RWN__GPIO_1_25 0x1193 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RS__GPIO_1_26 0x11a3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_CS__GPIO_1_27 0x11b3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__GPIO_1_28 0x11c3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__GPIO_1_29 0x11d3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_DOTCLK__GPIO_1_30 0x11e3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__GPIO_1_31 0x11f3 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA0__GPIO_2_0 0x2003 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA1__GPIO_2_1 0x2013 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA2__GPIO_2_2 0x2023 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA3__GPIO_2_3 0x2033 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA4__GPIO_2_4 0x2043 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA5__GPIO_2_5 0x2053 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA6__GPIO_2_6 0x2063 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DATA7__GPIO_2_7 0x2073 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_CMD__GPIO_2_8 0x2083 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_DETECT__GPIO_2_9 0x2093 -MX28_PAD_SSP0_SCK__GPIO_2_10 0x20a3 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_SCK__GPIO_2_12 0x20c3 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_CMD__GPIO_2_13 0x20d3 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__GPIO_2_14 0x20e3 -MX28_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__GPIO_2_15 0x20f3 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SCK__GPIO_2_16 0x2103 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MOSI__GPIO_2_17 0x2113 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_MISO__GPIO_2_18 0x2123 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS0__GPIO_2_19 0x2133 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS1__GPIO_2_20 0x2143 -MX28_PAD_SSP2_SS2__GPIO_2_21 0x2153 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SCK__GPIO_2_24 0x2183 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MOSI__GPIO_2_25 0x2193 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_MISO__GPIO_2_26 0x21a3 -MX28_PAD_SSP3_SS0__GPIO_2_27 0x21b3 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RX__GPIO_3_0 0x3003 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_TX__GPIO_3_1 0x3013 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_CTS__GPIO_3_2 0x3023 -MX28_PAD_AUART0_RTS__GPIO_3_3 0x3033 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RX__GPIO_3_4 0x3043 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_TX__GPIO_3_5 0x3053 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_CTS__GPIO_3_6 0x3063 -MX28_PAD_AUART1_RTS__GPIO_3_7 0x3073 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RX__GPIO_3_8 0x3083 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_TX__GPIO_3_9 0x3093 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_CTS__GPIO_3_10 0x30a3 -MX28_PAD_AUART2_RTS__GPIO_3_11 0x30b3 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RX__GPIO_3_12 0x30c3 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_TX__GPIO_3_13 0x30d3 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_CTS__GPIO_3_14 0x30e3 -MX28_PAD_AUART3_RTS__GPIO_3_15 0x30f3 -MX28_PAD_PWM0__GPIO_3_16 0x3103 -MX28_PAD_PWM1__GPIO_3_17 0x3113 -MX28_PAD_PWM2__GPIO_3_18 0x3123 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_MCLK__GPIO_3_20 0x3143 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_LRCLK__GPIO_3_21 0x3153 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_BITCLK__GPIO_3_22 0x3163 -MX28_PAD_SAIF0_SDATA0__GPIO_3_23 0x3173 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SCL__GPIO_3_24 0x3183 -MX28_PAD_I2C0_SDA__GPIO_3_25 0x3193 -MX28_PAD_SAIF1_SDATA0__GPIO_3_26 0x31a3 -MX28_PAD_SPDIF__GPIO_3_27 0x31b3 -MX28_PAD_PWM3__GPIO_3_28 0x31c3 -MX28_PAD_PWM4__GPIO_3_29 0x31d3 -MX28_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPIO_3_30 0x31e3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDC__GPIO_4_0 0x4003 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_MDIO__GPIO_4_1 0x4013 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_EN__GPIO_4_2 0x4023 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD0__GPIO_4_3 0x4033 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD1__GPIO_4_4 0x4043 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_CLK__GPIO_4_5 0x4053 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TX_EN__GPIO_4_6 0x4063 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD0__GPIO_4_7 0x4073 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD1__GPIO_4_8 0x4083 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD2__GPIO_4_9 0x4093 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RXD3__GPIO_4_10 0x40a3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD2__GPIO_4_11 0x40b3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_TXD3__GPIO_4_12 0x40c3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_RX_CLK__GPIO_4_13 0x40d3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_COL__GPIO_4_14 0x40e3 -MX28_PAD_ENET0_CRS__GPIO_4_15 0x40f3 -MX28_PAD_ENET_CLK__GPIO_4_16 0x4103 -MX28_PAD_JTAG_RTCK__GPIO_4_20 0x4143 - -Valid values for i.MX23 pinmux-id: - -pinmux id ------- -- -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPMI_D00 0x0000 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPMI_D01 0x0010 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPMI_D02 0x0020 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPMI_D03 0x0030 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPMI_D04 0x0040 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPMI_D05 0x0050 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPMI_D06 0x0060 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPMI_D07 0x0070 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__GPMI_D08 0x0080 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__GPMI_D09 0x0090 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__GPMI_D10 0x00a0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__GPMI_D11 0x00b0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__GPMI_D12 0x00c0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__GPMI_D13 0x00d0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__GPMI_D14 0x00e0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPMI_D15 0x00f0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPMI_CLE 0x0100 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPMI_ALE 0x0110 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPMI_CE2N 0x0120 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPMI_RDY0 0x0130 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPMI_RDY1 0x0140 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPMI_RDY2 0x0150 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPMI_RDY3 0x0160 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_WPN__GPMI_WPN 0x0170 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPMI_WRN 0x0180 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPMI_RDN 0x0190 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__AUART1_CTS 0x01a0 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__AUART1_RTS 0x01b0 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__AUART1_RX 0x01c0 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__AUART1_TX 0x01d0 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__I2C_SCL 0x01e0 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__I2C_SDA 0x01f0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__LCD_D00 0x1000 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__LCD_D01 0x1010 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__LCD_D02 0x1020 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__LCD_D03 0x1030 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__LCD_D04 0x1040 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__LCD_D05 0x1050 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__LCD_D06 0x1060 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__LCD_D07 0x1070 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__LCD_D08 0x1080 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__LCD_D09 0x1090 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__LCD_D10 0x10a0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__LCD_D11 0x10b0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__LCD_D12 0x10c0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__LCD_D13 0x10d0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__LCD_D14 0x10e0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__LCD_D15 0x10f0 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__LCD_D16 0x1100 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D17__LCD_D17 0x1110 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__LCD_RESET 0x1120 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__LCD_RS 0x1130 -MX23_PAD_LCD_WR__LCD_WR 0x1140 -MX23_PAD_LCD_CS__LCD_CS 0x1150 -MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__LCD_DOTCK 0x1160 -MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__LCD_ENABLE 0x1170 -MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__LCD_HSYNC 0x1180 -MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_VSYNC 0x1190 -MX23_PAD_PWM0__PWM0 0x11a0 -MX23_PAD_PWM1__PWM1 0x11b0 -MX23_PAD_PWM2__PWM2 0x11c0 -MX23_PAD_PWM3__PWM3 0x11d0 -MX23_PAD_PWM4__PWM4 0x11e0 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__SSP1_CMD 0x2000 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__SSP1_DETECT 0x2010 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__SSP1_DATA0 0x2020 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__SSP1_DATA1 0x2030 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__SSP1_DATA2 0x2040 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__SSP1_DATA3 0x2050 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__SSP1_SCK 0x2060 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__ROTARYA 0x2070 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__ROTARYB 0x2080 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A00__EMI_A00 0x2090 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A01__EMI_A01 0x20a0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A02__EMI_A02 0x20b0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A03__EMI_A03 0x20c0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A04__EMI_A04 0x20d0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A05__EMI_A05 0x20e0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A06__EMI_A06 0x20f0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A07__EMI_A07 0x2100 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A08__EMI_A08 0x2110 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A09__EMI_A09 0x2120 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A10__EMI_A10 0x2130 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A11__EMI_A11 0x2140 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A12__EMI_A12 0x2150 -MX23_PAD_EMI_BA0__EMI_BA0 0x2160 -MX23_PAD_EMI_BA1__EMI_BA1 0x2170 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CASN__EMI_CASN 0x2180 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CE0N__EMI_CE0N 0x2190 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CE1N__EMI_CE1N 0x21a0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPMI_CE1N 0x21b0 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPMI_CE0N 0x21c0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CKE__EMI_CKE 0x21d0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_RASN__EMI_RASN 0x21e0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_WEN__EMI_WEN 0x21f0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D00__EMI_D00 0x3000 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D01__EMI_D01 0x3010 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D02__EMI_D02 0x3020 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D03__EMI_D03 0x3030 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D04__EMI_D04 0x3040 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D05__EMI_D05 0x3050 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D06__EMI_D06 0x3060 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D07__EMI_D07 0x3070 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D08__EMI_D08 0x3080 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D09__EMI_D09 0x3090 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D10__EMI_D10 0x30a0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D11__EMI_D11 0x30b0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D12__EMI_D12 0x30c0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D13__EMI_D13 0x30d0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D14__EMI_D14 0x30e0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_D15__EMI_D15 0x30f0 -MX23_PAD_EMI_DQM0__EMI_DQM0 0x3100 -MX23_PAD_EMI_DQM1__EMI_DQM1 0x3110 -MX23_PAD_EMI_DQS0__EMI_DQS0 0x3120 -MX23_PAD_EMI_DQS1__EMI_DQS1 0x3130 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CLK__EMI_CLK 0x3140 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CLKN__EMI_CLKN 0x3150 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__LCD_D8 0x0001 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__LCD_D9 0x0011 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__LCD_D10 0x0021 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__LCD_D11 0x0031 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__LCD_D12 0x0041 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__LCD_D13 0x0051 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__LCD_D14 0x0061 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__LCD_D15 0x0071 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__LCD_D18 0x0081 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__LCD_D19 0x0091 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__LCD_D20 0x00a1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__LCD_D21 0x00b1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__LCD_D22 0x00c1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__LCD_D23 0x00d1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__AUART2_RX 0x00e1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__AUART2_TX 0x00f1 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__LCD_D16 0x0101 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__LCD_D17 0x0111 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__ATA_A2 0x0121 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__IR_CLK 0x01b1 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__IR_RX 0x01c1 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__IR_TX 0x01d1 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__GPMI_RDY2 0x01e1 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__GPMI_CE2N 0x01f1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__ETM_DA8 0x1001 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__ETM_DA9 0x1011 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__ETM_DA10 0x1021 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__ETM_DA11 0x1031 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__ETM_DA12 0x1041 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__ETM_DA13 0x1051 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__ETM_DA14 0x1061 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__ETM_DA15 0x1071 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__ETM_DA0 0x1081 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__ETM_DA1 0x1091 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__ETM_DA2 0x10a1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__ETM_DA3 0x10b1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__ETM_DA4 0x10c1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__ETM_DA5 0x10d1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__ETM_DA6 0x10e1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__ETM_DA7 0x10f1 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__ETM_TCTL 0x1121 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__ETM_TCLK 0x1131 -MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__GPMI_RDY3 0x1161 -MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__I2C_SCL 0x1171 -MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__I2C_SDA 0x1181 -MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__LCD_BUSY 0x1191 -MX23_PAD_PWM0__ROTARYA 0x11a1 -MX23_PAD_PWM1__ROTARYB 0x11b1 -MX23_PAD_PWM2__GPMI_RDY3 0x11c1 -MX23_PAD_PWM3__ETM_TCTL 0x11d1 -MX23_PAD_PWM4__ETM_TCLK 0x11e1 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__GPMI_CE3N 0x2011 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__I2C_SCL 0x2031 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__I2C_SDA 0x2041 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__AUART2_RTS 0x2071 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__AUART2_CTS 0x2081 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__SSP2_DATA0 0x0002 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__SSP2_DATA1 0x0012 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__SSP2_DATA2 0x0022 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__SSP2_DATA3 0x0032 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__SSP2_DATA4 0x0042 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__SSP2_DATA5 0x0052 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__SSP2_DATA6 0x0062 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__SSP2_DATA7 0x0072 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__SSP1_DATA4 0x0082 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__SSP1_DATA5 0x0092 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__SSP1_DATA6 0x00a2 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__SSP1_DATA7 0x00b2 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPMI_CE3N 0x00f2 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__SSP2_DETECT 0x0132 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__SSP2_CMD 0x0142 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__SSP2_SCK 0x0182 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__SSP1_DATA4 0x01a2 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__SSP1_DATA5 0x01b2 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__SSP1_DATA6 0x01c2 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__SSP1_DATA7 0x01d2 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__AUART1_TX 0x01e2 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__AUART1_RX 0x01f2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__SAIF2_SDATA0 0x1082 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__SAIF1_SDATA0 0x1092 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__SAIF_MCLK_BITCLK 0x10a2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__SAIF_LRCLK 0x10b2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__SAIF2_SDATA1 0x10c2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__SAIF2_SDATA2 0x10d2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__SAIF1_SDATA2 0x10e2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__SAIF1_SDATA1 0x10f2 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__SAIF_ALT_BITCLK 0x1102 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPMI_CE3N 0x1122 -MX23_PAD_PWM0__DUART_RX 0x11a2 -MX23_PAD_PWM1__DUART_TX 0x11b2 -MX23_PAD_PWM3__AUART1_CTS 0x11d2 -MX23_PAD_PWM4__AUART1_RTS 0x11e2 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__JTAG_TDO 0x2002 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__USB_OTG_ID 0x2012 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__JTAG_TDI 0x2022 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__JTAG_TCLK 0x2032 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__JTAG_RTCK 0x2042 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__JTAG_TMS 0x2052 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__JTAG_TRST 0x2062 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__SPDIF 0x2072 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__GPMI_CE3N 0x2082 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D00__GPIO_0_0 0x0003 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D01__GPIO_0_1 0x0013 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D02__GPIO_0_2 0x0023 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D03__GPIO_0_3 0x0033 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D04__GPIO_0_4 0x0043 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D05__GPIO_0_5 0x0053 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D06__GPIO_0_6 0x0063 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D07__GPIO_0_7 0x0073 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D08__GPIO_0_8 0x0083 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D09__GPIO_0_9 0x0093 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D10__GPIO_0_10 0x00a3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D11__GPIO_0_11 0x00b3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D12__GPIO_0_12 0x00c3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D13__GPIO_0_13 0x00d3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D14__GPIO_0_14 0x00e3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_D15__GPIO_0_15 0x00f3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CLE__GPIO_0_16 0x0103 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_ALE__GPIO_0_17 0x0113 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE2N__GPIO_0_18 0x0123 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY0__GPIO_0_19 0x0133 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY1__GPIO_0_20 0x0143 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY2__GPIO_0_21 0x0153 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDY3__GPIO_0_22 0x0163 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_WPN__GPIO_0_23 0x0173 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_WRN__GPIO_0_24 0x0183 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_RDN__GPIO_0_25 0x0193 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_CTS__GPIO_0_26 0x01a3 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RTS__GPIO_0_27 0x01b3 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_RX__GPIO_0_28 0x01c3 -MX23_PAD_AUART1_TX__GPIO_0_29 0x01d3 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SCL__GPIO_0_30 0x01e3 -MX23_PAD_I2C_SDA__GPIO_0_31 0x01f3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D00__GPIO_1_0 0x1003 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D01__GPIO_1_1 0x1013 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D02__GPIO_1_2 0x1023 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D03__GPIO_1_3 0x1033 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D04__GPIO_1_4 0x1043 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D05__GPIO_1_5 0x1053 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D06__GPIO_1_6 0x1063 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D07__GPIO_1_7 0x1073 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D08__GPIO_1_8 0x1083 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D09__GPIO_1_9 0x1093 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D10__GPIO_1_10 0x10a3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D11__GPIO_1_11 0x10b3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D12__GPIO_1_12 0x10c3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D13__GPIO_1_13 0x10d3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D14__GPIO_1_14 0x10e3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D15__GPIO_1_15 0x10f3 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D16__GPIO_1_16 0x1103 -MX23_PAD_LCD_D17__GPIO_1_17 0x1113 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RESET__GPIO_1_18 0x1123 -MX23_PAD_LCD_RS__GPIO_1_19 0x1133 -MX23_PAD_LCD_WR__GPIO_1_20 0x1143 -MX23_PAD_LCD_CS__GPIO_1_21 0x1153 -MX23_PAD_LCD_DOTCK__GPIO_1_22 0x1163 -MX23_PAD_LCD_ENABLE__GPIO_1_23 0x1173 -MX23_PAD_LCD_HSYNC__GPIO_1_24 0x1183 -MX23_PAD_LCD_VSYNC__GPIO_1_25 0x1193 -MX23_PAD_PWM0__GPIO_1_26 0x11a3 -MX23_PAD_PWM1__GPIO_1_27 0x11b3 -MX23_PAD_PWM2__GPIO_1_28 0x11c3 -MX23_PAD_PWM3__GPIO_1_29 0x11d3 -MX23_PAD_PWM4__GPIO_1_30 0x11e3 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_CMD__GPIO_2_0 0x2003 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DETECT__GPIO_2_1 0x2013 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA0__GPIO_2_2 0x2023 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA1__GPIO_2_3 0x2033 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA2__GPIO_2_4 0x2043 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_DATA3__GPIO_2_5 0x2053 -MX23_PAD_SSP1_SCK__GPIO_2_6 0x2063 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYA__GPIO_2_7 0x2073 -MX23_PAD_ROTARYB__GPIO_2_8 0x2083 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A00__GPIO_2_9 0x2093 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A01__GPIO_2_10 0x20a3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A02__GPIO_2_11 0x20b3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A03__GPIO_2_12 0x20c3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A04__GPIO_2_13 0x20d3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A05__GPIO_2_14 0x20e3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A06__GPIO_2_15 0x20f3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A07__GPIO_2_16 0x2103 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A08__GPIO_2_17 0x2113 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A09__GPIO_2_18 0x2123 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A10__GPIO_2_19 0x2133 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A11__GPIO_2_20 0x2143 -MX23_PAD_EMI_A12__GPIO_2_21 0x2153 -MX23_PAD_EMI_BA0__GPIO_2_22 0x2163 -MX23_PAD_EMI_BA1__GPIO_2_23 0x2173 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CASN__GPIO_2_24 0x2183 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CE0N__GPIO_2_25 0x2193 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CE1N__GPIO_2_26 0x21a3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE1N__GPIO_2_27 0x21b3 -MX23_PAD_GPMI_CE0N__GPIO_2_28 0x21c3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_CKE__GPIO_2_29 0x21d3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_RASN__GPIO_2_30 0x21e3 -MX23_PAD_EMI_WEN__GPIO_2_31 0x21f3 +Valid values for i.MX28/i.MX23 pinmux-id are defined in +arch/arm/boot/dts/imx28-pinfunc.h and arch/arm/boot/dts/imx23-pinfunc.h. +The definitions for the padconfig properties can be found in +arch/arm/boot/dts/mxs-pinfunc.h. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt index e204d009f16c..fb70856c5b51 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra114-pinmux.txt @@ -80,6 +80,17 @@ Valid values for pin and group names are: dbg, sdio3, spi, uaa, uab, uart2, uart3, sdio1, ddc, gma, gme, gmf, gmg, gmh, owr, uda. +Valid values for nvidia,functions are: + + blink, cec, cldvfs, clk12, cpu, dap, dap1, dap2, dev3, displaya, + displaya_alt, displayb, dtv, emc_dll, extperiph1, extperiph2, + extperiph3, gmi, gmi_alt, hda, hsi, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, i2c4, i2cpwr, + i2s0, i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, irda, kbc, nand, nand_alt, owr, pmi, + pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, pwron, reset_out_n, rsvd1, rsvd2, rsvd3, + rsvd4, sdmmc1, sdmmc2, sdmmc3, sdmmc4, soc, spdif, spi1, spi2, spi3, + spi4, spi5, spi6, sysclk, trace, uarta, uartb, uartc, uartd, ulpi, + usb, vgp1, vgp2, vgp3, vgp4, vgp5, vgp6, vi, vi_alt1, vi_alt3 + Example: pinmux: pinmux { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt index 683fde93c4fb..61e73cde9ae9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt @@ -103,6 +103,17 @@ Valid values for pin and group names are: drive_gma, drive_gmb, drive_gmc, drive_gmd, drive_gme, drive_owr, drive_uda. +Valid values for nvidia,functions are: + + ahb_clk, apb_clk, audio_sync, crt, dap1, dap2, dap3, dap4, dap5, + displaya, displayb, emc_test0_dll, emc_test1_dll, gmi, gmi_int, + hdmi, i2cp, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, ide, irda, kbc, mio, mipi_hs, nand, + osc, owr, pcie, plla_out, pllc_out1, pllm_out1, pllp_out2, pllp_out3, + pllp_out4, pwm, pwr_intr, pwr_on, rsvd1, rsvd2, rsvd3, rsvd4, rtck, + sdio1, sdio2, sdio3, sdio4, sflash, spdif, spi1, spi2, spi2_alt, + spi3, spi4, trace, twc, uarta, uartb, uartc, uartd, uarte, ulpi, + vi, vi_sensor_clk, xio + Example: pinctrl@70000000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt index 6f426ed7009e..0e6354c11e6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra30-pinmux.txt @@ -91,6 +91,18 @@ Valid values for pin and group names are: gmh, gpv, lcd1, lcd2, owr, sdio1, sdio2, sdio3, spi, uaa, uab, uart2, uart3, uda, vi1. +Valid values for nvidia,functions are: + + blink, cec, clk_12m_out, clk_32k_in, core_pwr_req, cpu_pwr_req, crt, + dap, ddr, dev3, displaya, displayb, dtv, extperiph1, extperiph2, + extperiph3, gmi, gmi_alt, hda, hdcp, hdmi, hsi, i2c1, i2c2, i2c3, + i2c4, i2cpwr, i2s0, i2s1, i2s2, i2s3, i2s4, invalid, kbc, mio, nand, + nand_alt, owr, pcie, pwm0, pwm1, pwm2, pwm3, pwr_int_n, rsvd1, rsvd2, + rsvd3, rsvd4, rtck, sata, sdmmc1, sdmmc2, sdmmc3, sdmmc4, spdif, spi1, + spi2, spi2_alt, spi3, spi4, spi5, spi6, sysclk, test, trace, uarta, + uartb, uartc, uartd, uarte, ulpi, vgp1, vgp2, vgp3, vgp4, vgp5, vgp6, + vi, vi_alt1, vi_alt2, vi_alt3 + Example: pinctrl@70000000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt index 734d9b04d533..caf297bee1fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-palmas.txt @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ pinctrl-bindings.txt: Required: pins Options: function, bias-disable, bias-pull-up, bias-pull-down, - bias-pin-default, drive-open-drain. + drive-open-drain. Note that many of these properties are only valid for certain specific pins. See the Palmas device datasheet for complete details regarding which pins diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt index 5a02e30dd262..7069a0b84e3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-single.txt @@ -72,6 +72,13 @@ Optional properties: /* pin base, nr pins & gpio function */ pinctrl-single,gpio-range = <&range 0 3 0 &range 3 9 1>; +- interrupt-controller : standard interrupt controller binding if using + interrupts for wake-up events for example. In this case pinctrl-single + is set up as a chained interrupt controller and the wake-up interrupts + can be requested by the drivers using request_irq(). + +- #interrupt-cells : standard interrupt binding if using interrupts + This driver assumes that there is only one register for each pin (unless the pinctrl-single,bit-per-mux is set), and uses the common pinctrl bindings as specified in the pinctrl-bindings.txt document in this directory. @@ -121,6 +128,8 @@ pmx_core: pinmux@4a100040 { reg = <0x4a100040 0x0196>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; pinctrl-single,register-width = <16>; pinctrl-single,function-mask = <0xffff>; }; @@ -131,6 +140,8 @@ pmx_wkup: pinmux@4a31e040 { reg = <0x4a31e040 0x0038>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; pinctrl-single,register-width = <16>; pinctrl-single,function-mask = <0xffff>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt index b0fb1018d7ad..f378d342aae4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/rockchip,pinctrl.txt @@ -21,10 +21,13 @@ defined as gpio sub-nodes of the pinmux controller. Required properties for iomux controller: - compatible: one of "rockchip,rk2928-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3066a-pinctrl" "rockchip,rk3066b-pinctrl", "rockchip,rk3188-pinctrl" + - reg: first element is the general register space of the iomux controller + second element is the separate pull register space of the rk3188 Required properties for gpio sub nodes: - - compatible: "rockchip,gpio-bank" + - compatible: "rockchip,gpio-bank", "rockchip,rk3188-gpio-bank0" - reg: register of the gpio bank (different than the iomux registerset) + second element: separate pull register for rk3188 bank0 - interrupts: base interrupt of the gpio bank in the interrupt controller - clocks: clock that drives this bank - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller and pin bank. @@ -95,3 +98,44 @@ uart2: serial@20064000 { pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&uart2_xfer>; }; + +Example for rk3188: + + pinctrl@20008000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3188-pinctrl"; + reg = <0x20008000 0xa0>, + <0x20008164 0x1a0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + gpio0: gpio0@0x2000a000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3188-gpio-bank0"; + reg = <0x2000a000 0x100>, + <0x20004064 0x8>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clk_gates8 9>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + }; + + gpio1: gpio1@0x2003c000 { + compatible = "rockchip,gpio-bank"; + reg = <0x2003c000 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 55 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clk_gates8 10>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + }; + + ... + + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt index 9a2f3f420526..6b33b9f18e88 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,nomadik.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ ST Ericsson Nomadik pinmux controller Required properties: -- compatible: "stericsson,nmk-pinctrl", "stericsson,nmk-pinctrl-db8540", - "stericsson,nmk-pinctrl-stn8815" +- compatible: "stericsson,db8500-pinctrl", "stericsson,db8540-pinctrl", + "stericsson,stn8815-pinctrl" - reg: Should contain the register physical address and length of the PRCMU. Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Optional subnode-properties: Example board file extract: pinctrl@80157000 { - compatible = "stericsson,nmk-pinctrl"; + compatible = "stericsson,db8500-pinctrl"; reg = <0x80157000 0x2000>; pinctrl-names = "default"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d5c706216df5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/twl-charger.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +TWL BCI (Battery Charger Interface) + +Required properties: +- compatible: + - "ti,twl4030-bci" +- interrupts: two interrupt lines from the TWL SIH (secondary + interrupt handler) - interrupts 9 and 2. + +Optional properties: +- ti,bb-uvolt: microvolts for charging the backup battery. +- ti,bb-uamp: microamps for charging the backup battery. + +Examples: + +bci { + compatible = "ti,twl4030-bci"; + interrupts = <9>, <2>; + ti,bb-uvolt = <3200000>; + ti,bb-uamp = <150>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ce44ad357565 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/msm-poweroff.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +MSM Restart Driver + +A power supply hold (ps-hold) bit is set to power the msm chipsets. +Clearing that bit allows us to restart/poweroff. The difference +between poweroff and restart is determined by unique power manager IC +settings. + +Required Properties: +-compatible: "qcom,pshold" +-reg: Specifies the physical address of the ps-hold register + +Example: + + restart@fc4ab000 { + compatible = "qcom,pshold"; + reg = <0xfc4ab000 0x4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4f6a550184d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/ti,bq24735.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +TI BQ24735 Charge Controller +~~~~~~~~~~ + +Required properties : + - compatible : "ti,bq24735" + +Optional properties : + - interrupts : Specify the interrupt to be used to trigger when the AC + adapter is either plugged in or removed. + - ti,ac-detect-gpios : This GPIO is optionally used to read the AC adapter + presence. This is a Host GPIO that is configured as an input and + connected to the bq24735. + - ti,charge-current : Used to control and set the charging current. This value + must be between 128mA and 8.128A with a 64mA step resolution. The POR value + is 0x0000h. This number is in mA (e.g. 8192), see spec for more information + about the ChargeCurrent (0x14h) register. + - ti,charge-voltage : Used to control and set the charging voltage. This value + must be between 1.024V and 19.2V with a 16mV step resolution. The POR value + is 0x0000h. This number is in mV (e.g. 19200), see spec for more information + about the ChargeVoltage (0x15h) register. + - ti,input-current : Used to control and set the charger input current. This + value must be between 128mA and 8.064A with a 128mA step resolution. The + POR value is 0x1000h. This number is in mA (e.g. 8064), see the spec for + more information about the InputCurrent (0x3fh) register. + +Example: + + bq24735@9 { + compatible = "ti,bq24735"; + reg = <0x9>; + ti,ac-detect-gpios = <&gpio 72 0x1>; + } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt index 2a4b4bce6110..7fc1b010fa75 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt @@ -1,33 +1,30 @@ -* Freescale 83xx DMA Controller +* Freescale DMA Controllers -Freescale PowerPC 83xx have on chip general purpose DMA controllers. +** Freescale Elo DMA Controller + This is a little-endian 4-channel DMA controller, used in Freescale mpc83xx + series chips such as mpc8315, mpc8349, mpc8379 etc. Required properties: -- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8349, mpc8360, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,elo-dma" -- reg : <registers mapping for DMA general status reg> -- ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - DMA controller channels. +- compatible : must include "fsl,elo-dma" +- reg : DMA General Status Register, i.e. DGSR which contains + status for all the 4 DMA channels +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller - cell-index : controller index. 0 for controller @ 0x8100 -- interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA IRQ> +- interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA IRQ - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping - - DMA channel nodes: - - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8349, mpc8350, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,elo-dma-channel". However, see note below. - - reg : <registers mapping for channel> - - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. + - compatible : must include "fsl,elo-dma-channel" + However, see note below. + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - cell-index : DMA channel index starts at 0. Optional properties: - - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ> - (on 83xx this is expected to be identical to - the interrupts property of the parent node) + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ + (on 83xx this is expected to be identical to + the interrupts property of the parent node) - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: @@ -70,30 +67,27 @@ Example: }; }; -* Freescale 85xx/86xx DMA Controller - -Freescale PowerPC 85xx/86xx have on chip general purpose DMA controllers. +** Freescale EloPlus DMA Controller + This is a 4-channel DMA controller with extended addresses and chaining, + mainly used in Freescale mpc85xx/86xx, Pxxx and BSC series chips, such as + mpc8540, mpc8641 p4080, bsc9131 etc. Required properties: -- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8540, mpc8540, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,eloplus-dma" -- reg : <registers mapping for DMA general status reg> +- compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma" +- reg : DMA General Status Register, i.e. DGSR which contains + status for all the 4 DMA channels - cell-index : controller index. 0 for controller @ 0x21000, 1 for controller @ 0xc000 -- ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - DMA controller channels. +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller - DMA channel nodes: - - compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, first is - "fsl,CHIP-dma-channel", where CHIP is the processor - (mpc8540, mpc8560, etc.) and the second is - "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel". However, see note below. - - cell-index : dma channel index starts at 0. - - reg : <registers mapping for channel> - - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for DMA channel IRQ> + - compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" + However, see note below. + - cell-index : DMA channel index starts at 0. + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: @@ -134,6 +128,76 @@ Example: }; }; +** Freescale Elo3 DMA Controller + DMA controller which has same function as EloPlus except that Elo3 has 8 + channels while EloPlus has only 4, it is used in Freescale Txxx and Bxxx + series chips, such as t1040, t4240, b4860. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : must include "fsl,elo3-dma" +- reg : contains two entries for DMA General Status Registers, + i.e. DGSR0 which includes status for channel 1~4, and + DGSR1 for channel 5~8 +- ranges : describes the mapping between the address space of the + DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller + +- DMA channel nodes: + - compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" + - reg : DMA channel specific registers + - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ + - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping + +Example: +dma@100300 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,elo3-dma"; + reg = <0x100300 0x4>, + <0x100600 0x4>; + ranges = <0x0 0x100100 0x500>; + dma-channel@0 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x0 0x80>; + interrupts = <28 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@80 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x80 0x80>; + interrupts = <29 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@100 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x100 0x80>; + interrupts = <30 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@180 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x180 0x80>; + interrupts = <31 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@300 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x300 0x80>; + interrupts = <76 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@380 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x380 0x80>; + interrupts = <77 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@400 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x400 0x80>; + interrupts = <78 2 0 0>; + }; + dma-channel@480 { + compatible = "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel"; + reg = <0x480 0x80>; + interrupts = <79 2 0 0>; + }; +}; + Note on DMA channel compatible properties: The compatible property must say "fsl,elo-dma-channel" or "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" to be used by the Elo DMA driver (fsldma). Any DMA channel used by fsldma cannot be used by another diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt index 5693877ab377..82dd5b65cf48 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt @@ -1,21 +1,20 @@ * Freescale MSI interrupt controller Required properties: -- compatible : compatible list, contains 2 entries, - first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572, - etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on - the parent type. +- compatible : compatible list, may contain one or two entries + The first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572, + etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" or + "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3" depending on the parent type and version. If mpic + version is 4.3, the number of MSI registers is increased to 16, MSIIR1 is + provided to access these 16 registers, and compatible "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3" + should be used. The first entry is optional; the second entry is + required. - reg : It may contain one or two regions. The first region should contain the address and the length of the shared message interrupt register set. - The second region should contain the address of aliased MSIIR register for - platforms that have such an alias. - -- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which - msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is - optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used. - Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e. - no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt). + The second region should contain the address of aliased MSIIR or MSIIR1 + register for platforms that have such an alias, if using MSIIR1, the second + region must be added because different MSI group has different MSIIR1 offset. - interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs, and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should @@ -28,6 +27,14 @@ Required properties: to MPIC. Optional properties: +- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which + msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is + optional, without this, all the MSI interrupts can be used. + Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e. + no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt). + MPIC v4.3 does not support this property because the 32 interrupts of an + individual register are not continuous when using MSIIR1. + - msi-address-64: 64-bit PCI address of the MSIIR register. The MSIIR register is used for MSI messaging. The address of MSIIR in PCI address space is the MSI message address. @@ -54,6 +61,28 @@ Example: interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; }; + msi@41600 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-msi-v4.3"; + reg = <0x41600 0x200 0x44148 4>; + interrupts = < + 0xe0 0 0 0 + 0xe1 0 0 0 + 0xe2 0 0 0 + 0xe3 0 0 0 + 0xe4 0 0 0 + 0xe5 0 0 0 + 0xe6 0 0 0 + 0xe7 0 0 0 + 0x100 0 0 0 + 0x101 0 0 0 + 0x102 0 0 0 + 0x103 0 0 0 + 0x104 0 0 0 + 0x105 0 0 0 + 0x106 0 0 0 + 0x107 0 0 0>; + }; + The Freescale hypervisor and msi-address-64 ------------------------------------------- Normally, PCI devices have access to all of CCSR via an ATMU mapping. The diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt index 4caa1a78863e..5538de9c2007 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-samsung.txt @@ -15,10 +15,20 @@ Required properties: samsung,s5pc100-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on S5PC100, S5PV210, Exynos4210 rev0 SoCs samsung,exynos4210-pwm - for 32-bit timers present on Exynos4210, - Exynos4x12 and Exynos5250 SoCs + Exynos4x12, Exynos5250 and Exynos5420 SoCs - reg: base address and size of register area - interrupts: list of timer interrupts (one interrupt per timer, starting at timer 0) +- clock-names: should contain all following required clock names: + - "timers" - PWM base clock used to generate PWM signals, + and any subset of following optional clock names: + - "pwm-tclk0" - first external PWM clock source, + - "pwm-tclk1" - second external PWM clock source. + Note that not all IP variants allow using all external clock sources. + Refer to SoC documentation to learn which clock source configurations + are available. +- clocks: should contain clock specifiers of all clocks, which input names + have been specified in clock-names property, in same order. - #pwm-cells: should be 3. See pwm.txt in this directory for a description of the cells format. The only third cell flag supported by this binding is PWM_POLARITY_INVERTED. @@ -34,6 +44,8 @@ Example: reg = <0x7f006000 0x1000>; interrupt-parent = <&vic0>; interrupts = <23>, <24>, <25>, <27>, <28>; + clocks = <&clock 67>; + clock-names = "timers"; samsung,pwm-outputs = <0>, <1>; #pwm-cells = <3>; } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/as3722-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/as3722-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..caad0c8a258d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/as3722-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +Regulator of AMS AS3722 PMIC. +Name of the regulator subnode must be "regulators". + +Optional properties: +-------------------- +The input supply of regulators are the optional properties on the +regulator node. The AS3722 is having 7 DCDC step-down regulators as +sd[0-6], 10 LDOs as ldo[0-7], ldo[9-11]. The input supply of these +regulators are provided through following properties: +vsup-sd2-supply: Input supply for SD2. +vsup-sd3-supply: Input supply for SD3. +vsup-sd4-supply: Input supply for SD4. +vsup-sd5-supply: Input supply for SD5. +vin-ldo0-supply: Input supply for LDO0. +vin-ldo1-6-supply: Input supply for LDO1 and LDO6. +vin-ldo2-5-7-supply: Input supply for LDO2, LDO5 and LDO7. +vin-ldo3-4-supply: Input supply for LDO3 and LDO4. +vin-ldo9-10-supply: Input supply for LDO9 and LDO10. +vin-ldo11-supply: Input supply for LDO11. + +Optional nodes: +-------------- +- regulators : Must contain a sub-node per regulator from the list below. + Each sub-node should contain the constraints and initialization + information for that regulator. See regulator.txt for a + description of standard properties for these sub-nodes. + Additional custom properties are listed below. + sd[0-6], ldo[0-7], ldo[9-11]. + + Optional sub-node properties: + ---------------------------- + ams,ext-control: External control of the rail. The option of + this properties will tell which external input is + controlling this rail. Valid values are 0, 1, 2 ad 3. + 0: There is no external control of this rail. + 1: Rail is controlled by ENABLE1 input pin. + 2: Rail is controlled by ENABLE2 input pin. + 3: Rail is controlled by ENABLE3 input pin. + ams,enable-tracking: Enable tracking with SD1, only supported + by LDO3. + +Example: +------- + ams3722: ams3722 { + compatible = "ams,as3722"; + reg = <0x40>; + ... + + regulators { + vsup-sd2-supply = <...>; + ... + + sd0 { + regulator-name = "vdd_cpu"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <2>; + }; + + sd1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_core"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1400000>; + regulator-always-on; + ams,ext-control = <1>; + }; + + sd2 { + regulator-name = "vddio_ddr"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1350000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd4 { + regulator-name = "avdd-hdmi-pex"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1050000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sd5 { + regulator-name = "vdd-1v8"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + .... + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/da9210.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/da9210.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f120f229d67d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/da9210.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +* Dialog Semiconductor DA9210 Voltage Regulator + +Required properties: + +- compatible: must be "diasemi,da9210" +- reg: the i2c slave address of the regulator. It should be 0x68. + +Any standard regulator properties can be used to configure the single da9210 +DCDC. + +Example: + + da9210@68 { + compatible = "diasemi,da9210"; + reg = <0x68>; + + regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt index a22e4c70db5c..42e6b6bc48ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt @@ -26,16 +26,25 @@ Optional nodes: For ti,palmas-pmic - smps12, smps123, smps3 depending on OTP, smps45, smps457, smps7 depending on variant, smps6, smps[8-9], - smps10_out2, smps10_out1, do[1-9], ldoln, ldousb. + smps10_out2, smps10_out1, ldo[1-9], ldoln, ldousb. Optional sub-node properties: ti,warm-reset - maintain voltage during warm reset(boolean) - ti,roof-floor - control voltage selection by pin(boolean) + ti,roof-floor - This takes as optional argument on platform supporting + the rail from desired external control. If there is no argument then + it will be assume that it is controlled by NSLEEP pin. + The valid value for external pins are: + ENABLE1 then 1, + ENABLE2 then 2 or + NSLEEP then 3. ti,mode-sleep - mode to adopt in pmic sleep 0 - off, 1 - auto, 2 - eco, 3 - forced pwm ti,smps-range - OTP has the wrong range set for the hardware so override 0 - low range, 1 - high range. +- ti,system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling + the system power. + Example: #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> @@ -48,6 +57,8 @@ pmic { ti,ldo6-vibrator; + ti,system-power-controller; + regulators { smps12_reg : smps12 { regulator-name = "smps12"; @@ -56,7 +67,7 @@ pmic { regulator-always-on; regulator-boot-on; ti,warm-reset; - ti,roof-floor; + ti,roof-floor = <1>; /* ENABLE1 control */ ti,mode-sleep = <0>; ti,smps-range = <1>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt index 2bd8f0978765..e2c7f1e7251a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -14,6 +14,11 @@ Optional properties: - regulator-ramp-delay: ramp delay for regulator(in uV/uS) For hardwares which support disabling ramp rate, it should be explicitly intialised to zero (regulator-ramp-delay = <0>) for disabling ramp delay. +- regulator-enable-ramp-delay: The time taken, in microseconds, for the supply + rail to reach the target voltage, plus/minus whatever tolerance the board + design requires. This property describes the total system ramp time + required due to the combination of internal ramping of the regulator itself, + and board design issues such as trace capacitance and load on the supply. Deprecated properties: - regulator-compatible: If a regulator chip contains multiple diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8e5853c2879b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +Qualcomm MSM pseudo random number generator. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "qcom,prng" +- reg : specifies base physical address and size of the registers map +- clocks : phandle to clock-controller plus clock-specifier pair +- clock-names : "core" clocks all registers, FIFO and circuits in PRNG IP block + +Example: + + rng@f9bff000 { + compatible = "qcom,prng"; + reg = <0xf9bff000 0x200>; + clocks = <&clock GCC_PRNG_AHB_CLK>; + clock-names = "core"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt index eb2327b2bdb3..c703d51abb6c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/dw-apb.txt @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ * Designware APB timer Required properties: -- compatible: "snps,dw-apb-timer-sp" or "snps,dw-apb-timer-osc" +- compatible: One of: + "snps,dw-apb-timer" + "snps,dw-apb-timer-sp" <DEPRECATED> + "snps,dw-apb-timer-osc" <DEPRECATED> - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. - interrupts: IRQ line for the timer. @@ -20,25 +23,10 @@ systems may use one. Example: - - timer1: timer@ffc09000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-timer-sp"; - interrupts = <0 168 4>; - clock-frequency = <200000000>; - reg = <0xffc09000 0x1000>; - }; - - timer2: timer@ffd00000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-timer-osc"; - interrupts = <0 169 4>; - clock-frequency = <200000000>; - reg = <0xffd00000 0x1000>; - }; - - timer3: timer@ffe00000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-apb-timer-osc"; - interrupts = <0 170 4>; - reg = <0xffe00000 0x1000>; - clocks = <&timer_clk>, <&timer_pclk>; - clock-names = "timer", "pclk"; - }; + timer@ffe00000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-timer"; + interrupts = <0 170 4>; + reg = <0xffe00000 0x1000>; + clocks = <&timer_clk>, <&timer_pclk>; + clock-names = "timer", "pclk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9d3ac1477fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/moxa,moxart-rtc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +MOXA ART real-time clock + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be "moxa,moxart-rtc" +- gpio-rtc-sclk : RTC sclk gpio, with zero flags +- gpio-rtc-data : RTC data gpio, with zero flags +- gpio-rtc-reset : RTC reset gpio, with zero flags + +Example: + + rtc: rtc { + compatible = "moxa,moxart-rtc"; + gpio-rtc-sclk = <&gpio 5 0>; + gpio-rtc-data = <&gpio 6 0>; + gpio-rtc-reset = <&gpio 7 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt index b47aa415c820..5a0f02d34d95 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt @@ -1,7 +1,11 @@ TI Real Time Clock Required properties: -- compatible: "ti,da830-rtc" +- compatible: + - "ti,da830-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on DA8xx SoC family. + - "ti,am3352-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on AM335x SoC family. + This RTC IP has special WAKE-EN Register to enable + Wakeup generation for event Alarm. - reg: Address range of rtc register set - interrupts: rtc timer, alarm interrupts in order - interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..adbccc0a51e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +Palmas RTC controller bindings + +Required properties: +- compatible: + - "ti,palmas-rtc" for palma series of the RTC controller +- interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt device, must be handle of palmas node. +- interrupts: Interrupt number of RTC submodule on device. + +Optional properties: + +- ti,backup-battery-chargeable: The Palmas series device like TPS65913 or + TPS80036 supports the backup battery for powering the RTC when main + battery is removed or in very low power state. The backup battery + can be chargeable or non-chargeable. This flag will tells whether + battery is chargeable or not. If charging battery then driver can + enable the charging. +- ti,backup-battery-charge-high-current: Enable high current charging in + backup battery. Device supports the < 100mA and > 100mA charging. + The high current will be > 100mA. Absence of this property will + charge battery to lower current i.e. < 100mA. + +Example: + palmas: tps65913@58 { + ... + palmas_rtc: rtc { + compatible = "ti,palmas-rtc"; + interrupt-parent = <&palmas>; + interrupts = <8 0>; + ti,backup-battery-chargeable; + ti,backup-battery-charge-high-current; + }; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt index c152f65f9a28..55a901051e8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ Altera JTAG UART Required properties: -- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0" +- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0" <DEPRECATED> +- compatible : should be "altr,juart-1.0" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt index 71cae3f70100..81bf7ffb1a81 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ Altera UART Required properties: -- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0" +- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0" <DEPRECATED> +- compatible : should be "altr,uart-1.0" Optional properties: - clock-frequency : frequency of the clock input to the UART diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt index c5e032c85bf9..c5e032c85bf9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt index 4d9eecc2ef7d..520199e2e347 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ Altera UP PS/2 controller Required properties: -- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0". +- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0". <DEPRECATED> +- compatible : should be "altr,ps2-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l73.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l73.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80ae910dbf6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l73.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +CS42L73 audio CODEC + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "cirrus,cs42l73" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C + +Optional properties: + + - reset_gpio : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. + - chgfreq : Charge Pump Frequency values 0x00-0x0F + + +Example: + +codec: cs42l73@4a { + compatible = "cirrus,cs42l73"; + reg = <0x4a>; + reset_gpio = <&gpio 10 0>; + chgfreq = <0x05>; +};
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-evm-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-evm-audio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..865178d5cdf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-evm-audio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +* Texas Instruments SoC audio setups with TLV320AIC3X Codec + +Required properties: +- compatible : "ti,da830-evm-audio" : forDM365/DA8xx/OMAPL1x/AM33xx +- ti,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. +- ti,audio-codec : The phandle of the TLV320AIC3x audio codec +- ti,mcasp-controller : The phandle of the McASP controller +- ti,codec-clock-rate : The Codec Clock rate (in Hz) applied to the Codec +- ti,audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, + the second being the connection's source. Valid names for sources and + sinks are the codec's pins, and the jacks on the board: + + Board connectors: + + * Headphone Jack + * Line Out + * Mic Jack + * Line In + + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "ti,da830-evm-audio"; + ti,model = "DA830 EVM"; + ti,audio-codec = <&tlv320aic3x>; + ti,mcasp-controller = <&mcasp1>; + ti,codec-clock-rate = <12000000>; + ti,audio-routing = + "Headphone Jack", "HPLOUT", + "Headphone Jack", "HPROUT", + "Line Out", "LLOUT", + "Line Out", "RLOUT", + "MIC3L", "Mic Bias 2V", + "MIC3R", "Mic Bias 2V", + "Mic Bias 2V", "Mic Jack", + "LINE1L", "Line In", + "LINE2L", "Line In", + "LINE1R", "Line In", + "LINE2R", "Line In"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt index 374e145c2ef1..ed785b3f67be 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt @@ -4,17 +4,25 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "ti,dm646x-mcasp-audio" : for DM646x platforms "ti,da830-mcasp-audio" : for both DA830 & DA850 platforms - "ti,omap2-mcasp-audio" : for OMAP2 platforms (TI81xx, AM33xx) - -- reg : Should contain McASP registers offset and length -- interrupts : Interrupt number for McASP -- op-mode : I2S/DIT ops mode. -- tdm-slots : Slots for TDM operation. -- num-serializer : Serializers used by McASP. -- serial-dir : A list of serializer pin mode. The list number should be equal - to "num-serializer" parameter. Each entry is a number indication - serializer pin direction. (0 - INACTIVE, 1 - TX, 2 - RX) + "ti,am33xx-mcasp-audio" : for AM33xx platforms (AM33xx, TI81xx) +- reg : Should contain reg specifiers for the entries in the reg-names property. +- reg-names : Should contain: + * "mpu" for the main registers (required). For compatibility with + existing software, it is recommended this is the first entry. + * "dat" for separate data port register access (optional). +- op-mode : I2S/DIT ops mode. 0 for I2S mode. 1 for DIT mode used for S/PDIF, + IEC60958-1, and AES-3 formats. +- tdm-slots : Slots for TDM operation. Indicates number of channels transmitted + or received over one serializer. +- serial-dir : A list of serializer configuration. Each entry is a number + indication for serializer pin direction. + (0 - INACTIVE, 1 - TX, 2 - RX) +- dmas: two element list of DMA controller phandles and DMA request line + ordered pairs. +- dma-names: identifier string for each DMA request line in the dmas property. + These strings correspond 1:1 with the ordered pairs in dmas. The dma + identifiers must be "rx" and "tx". Optional properties: @@ -23,18 +31,23 @@ Optional properties: - rx-num-evt : FIFO levels. - sram-size-playback : size of sram to be allocated during playback - sram-size-capture : size of sram to be allocated during capture +- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for McASP, currently not used by the driver +- interrupt-names : Known interrupt names are "tx" and "rx" +- pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control group used for this controller. +- pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default", for more details + please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt + Example: mcasp0: mcasp0@1d00000 { compatible = "ti,da830-mcasp-audio"; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; reg = <0x100000 0x3000>; - interrupts = <82 83>; + reg-names "mpu"; + interrupts = <82>, <83>; + interrupts-names = "tx", "rx"; op-mode = <0>; /* MCASP_IIS_MODE */ tdm-slots = <2>; - num-serializer = <16>; serial-dir = < 0 0 0 0 /* 0: INACTIVE, 1: TX, 2: RX */ 0 0 0 0 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt index 7e5fd37c1b3f..f0062c5871b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mvebu-audio.txt @@ -2,13 +2,17 @@ Required properties: -- compatible: "marvell,mvebu-audio" +- compatible: + "marvell,kirkwood-audio" for Kirkwood platforms + "marvell,dove-audio" for Dove platforms - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. -- interrupts: list of two irq numbers. - The first irq is used for data flow and the second one is used for errors. +- interrupts: + with "marvell,kirkwood-audio", the audio interrupt + with "marvell,dove-audio", a list of two interrupts, the first for + the data flow, and the second for errors. - clocks: one or two phandles. The first one is mandatory and defines the internal clock. @@ -21,7 +25,7 @@ Required properties: Example: i2s1: audio-controller@b4000 { - compatible = "marvell,mvebu-audio"; + compatible = "marvell,dove-audio"; reg = <0xb4000 0x2210>; interrupts = <21>, <22>; clocks = <&gate_clk 13>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt index 705a6b156c6c..5e6040c2c2e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tlv320aic3x.txt @@ -24,10 +24,36 @@ Optional properties: 3 - MICBIAS output is connected to AVDD, If this node is not mentioned or if the value is incorrect, then MicBias is powered down. +- AVDD-supply, IOVDD-supply, DRVDD-supply, DVDD-supply : power supplies for the + device as covered in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt + +CODEC output pins: + * LLOUT + * RLOUT + * MONO_LOUT + * HPLOUT + * HPROUT + * HPLCOM + * HPRCOM + +CODEC input pins: + * MIC3L + * MIC3R + * LINE1L + * LINE2L + * LINE1R + * LINE2R + +The pins can be used in referring sound node's audio-routing property. Example: tlv320aic3x: tlv320aic3x@1b { compatible = "ti,tlv320aic3x"; reg = <0x1b>; + + AVDD-supply = <®ulator>; + IOVDD-supply = <®ulator>; + DRVDD-supply = <®ulator>; + DVDD-supply = <®ulator>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tpa6130a2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tpa6130a2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6dfa740e4b2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tpa6130a2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Texas Instruments - tpa6130a2 Codec module + +The tpa6130a2 serial control bus communicates through I2C protocols + +Required properties: + +- compatible - "string" - One of: + "ti,tpa6130a2" - TPA6130A2 + "ti,tpa6140a2" - TPA6140A2 + + +- reg - <int> - I2C slave address + +- Vdd-supply - <phandle> - power supply regulator + +Optional properties: + +- power-gpio - gpio pin to power the device + +Example: + +tpa6130a2: tpa6130a2@60 { + compatible = "ti,tpa6130a2"; + reg = <0x60>; + Vdd-supply = <&vmmc2>; + power-gpio = <&gpio4 2 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6b9e51896693..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nvidia,tegra20-spi.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -NVIDIA Tegra 2 SPI device - -Required properties: -- compatible : should be "nvidia,tegra20-spi". -- gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselect. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt index 4c85c4c69584..2ba5f9c023ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/omap-spi.txt @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ OMAP2+ McSPI device Required properties: - compatible : - - "ti,omap2-spi" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. - - "ti,omap4-spi" for OMAP4+. + - "ti,omap2-mcspi" for OMAP2 & OMAP3. + - "ti,omap4-mcspi" for OMAP4+. - ti,spi-num-cs : Number of chipselect supported by the instance. - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McSPI - ti,pindir-d0-out-d1-in: Select the D0 pin as output and D1 as diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30b57b1c8a13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +Renesas HSPI. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "renesas,hspi" +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : interrupt line used by HSPI + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt index dda375943506..31319dcf30ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ Altera SPI Required properties: -- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0". +- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0". <DEPRECATED> +- compatible : should be "altr,spi-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt index 46882058b59b..ee05dc390694 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/mxs-lradc.txt @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ * Freescale i.MX28 LRADC device driver Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx28-lradc" +- compatible: Should be "fsl,imx23-lradc" for i.MX23 SoC and "fsl,imx28-lradc" + for i.MX28 SoC - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device - interrupts: Should contain the LRADC interrupts @@ -9,13 +10,38 @@ Optional properties: - fsl,lradc-touchscreen-wires: Number of wires used to connect the touchscreen to LRADC. Valid value is either 4 or 5. If this property is not present, then the touchscreen is - disabled. + disabled. 5 wires is valid for i.MX28 SoC only. +- fsl,ave-ctrl: number of samples per direction to calculate an average value. + Allowed value is 1 ... 31, default is 4 +- fsl,ave-delay: delay between consecutive samples. Allowed value is + 1 ... 2047. It is used if 'fsl,ave-ctrl' > 1, counts at + 2 kHz and its default is 2 (= 1 ms) +- fsl,settling: delay between plate switch to next sample. Allowed value is + 1 ... 2047. It counts at 2 kHz and its default is + 10 (= 5 ms) -Examples: +Example for i.MX23 SoC: + + lradc@80050000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx23-lradc"; + reg = <0x80050000 0x2000>; + interrupts = <36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44>; + status = "okay"; + fsl,lradc-touchscreen-wires = <4>; + fsl,ave-ctrl = <4>; + fsl,ave-delay = <2>; + fsl,settling = <10>; + }; + +Example for i.MX28 SoC: lradc@80050000 { compatible = "fsl,imx28-lradc"; reg = <0x80050000 0x2000>; - interrupts = <10 14 15 16 17 18 19 - 20 21 22 23 24 25>; + interrupts = <10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25>; + status = "okay"; + fsl,lradc-touchscreen-wires = <5>; + fsl,ave-ctrl = <4>; + fsl,ave-delay = <2>; + fsl,settling = <10>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..284f5300fd8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +* Exynos Thermal Management Unit (TMU) + +** Required properties: + +- compatible : One of the following: + "samsung,exynos4412-tmu" + "samsung,exynos4210-tmu" + "samsung,exynos5250-tmu" + "samsung,exynos5440-tmu" +- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller +- reg : Address range of the thermal registers. For soc's which has multiple + instances of TMU and some registers are shared across all TMU's like + interrupt related then 2 set of register has to supplied. First set + belongs to each instance of TMU and second set belongs to common TMU + registers. +- interrupts : Should contain interrupt for thermal system +- clocks : The main clock for TMU device +- clock-names : Thermal system clock name +- vtmu-supply: This entry is optional and provides the regulator node supplying + voltage to TMU. If needed this entry can be placed inside + board/platform specific dts file. + +Example 1): + + tmu@100C0000 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos4412-tmu"; + interrupt-parent = <&combiner>; + reg = <0x100C0000 0x100>; + interrupts = <2 4>; + clocks = <&clock 383>; + clock-names = "tmu_apbif"; + status = "disabled"; + vtmu-supply = <&tmu_regulator_node>; + }; + +Example 2): + + tmuctrl_0: tmuctrl@160118 { + compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-tmu"; + reg = <0x160118 0x230>, <0x160368 0x10>; + interrupts = <0 58 0>; + clocks = <&clock 21>; + clock-names = "tmu_apbif"; + }; + +Note: For multi-instance tmu each instance should have an alias correctly +numbered in "aliases" node. + +Example: + +aliases { + tmuctrl0 = &tmuctrl_0; + tmuctrl1 = &tmuctrl_1; + tmuctrl2 = &tmuctrl_2; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..541c25e49abf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* Temperature Monitor (TEMPMON) on Freescale i.MX SoCs + +Required properties: +- compatible : "fsl,imx6q-thermal" +- fsl,tempmon : phandle pointer to system controller that contains TEMPMON + control registers, e.g. ANATOP on imx6q. +- fsl,tempmon-data : phandle pointer to fuse controller that contains TEMPMON + calibration data, e.g. OCOTP on imx6q. The details about calibration data + can be found in SoC Reference Manual. + +Example: + +tempmon { + compatible = "fsl,imx6q-tempmon"; + fsl,tempmon = <&anatop>; + fsl,tempmon-data = <&ocotp>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/efm32,timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/efm32,timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..97a568f696c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/efm32,timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* EFM32 timer hardware + +The efm32 Giant Gecko SoCs come with four 16 bit timers. Two counters can be +connected to form a 32 bit counter. Each timer has three Compare/Capture +channels and can be used as PWM or Quadrature Decoder. Available clock sources +are the cpu's HFPERCLK (with a 10-bit prescaler) or an external pin. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be efm32,timer +- reg : Address and length of the register set +- clocks : Should contain a reference to the HFPERCLK + +Optional properties: +- interrupts : Reference to the timer interrupt + +Example: + +timer@40010c00 { + compatible = "efm32,timer"; + reg = <0x40010c00 0x400>; + interrupts = <14>; + clocks = <&cmu clk_HFPERCLKTIMER3>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt index 36381129d141..f455182b1086 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt @@ -2,14 +2,40 @@ Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Timers --------------------------------------- Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "marvell,armada-370-xp-timer" +- compatible: Should be either "marvell,armada-370-timer" or + "marvell,armada-xp-timer" as appropriate. - interrupts: Should contain the list of Global Timer interrupts and then local timer interrupts - reg: Should contain location and length for timers register. First pair for the Global Timer registers, second pair for the local/private timers. -- clocks: clock driving the timer hardware -Optional properties: -- marvell,timer-25Mhz: Tells whether the Global timer supports the 25 - Mhz fixed mode (available on Armada XP and not on Armada 370) +Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-370-timer": +- clocks : Must contain a single entry describing the clock input + +Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-timer": +- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names : Must include the following entries: + "nbclk" (L2/coherency fabric clock), + "fixed" (Reference 25 MHz fixed-clock). + +Examples: + +- Armada 370: + + timer { + compatible = "marvell,armada-370-timer"; + reg = <0x20300 0x30>, <0x21040 0x30>; + interrupts = <37>, <38>, <39>, <40>, <5>, <6>; + clocks = <&coreclk 2>; + }; + +- Armada XP: + + timer { + compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-timer"; + reg = <0x20300 0x30>, <0x21040 0x30>; + interrupts = <37>, <38>, <39>, <40>, <5>, <6>; + clocks = <&coreclk 2>, <&refclk>; + clock-names = "nbclk", "fixed"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5ea26c631e3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/msm-hsusb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +MSM SoC HSUSB controllers + +EHCI + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "qcom,ehci-host" +- regs: offset and length of the register set in the memory map +- usb-phy: phandle for the PHY device + +Example EHCI controller device node: + + ehci: ehci@f9a55000 { + compatible = "qcom,ehci-host"; + reg = <0xf9a55000 0x400>; + usb-phy = <&usb_otg>; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt index 9088ab09e200..090e5e22bd2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/omap-usb.txt @@ -3,9 +3,6 @@ OMAP GLUE AND OTHER OMAP SPECIFIC COMPONENTS OMAP MUSB GLUE - compatible : Should be "ti,omap4-musb" or "ti,omap3-musb" - ti,hwmods : must be "usb_otg_hs" - - ti,has-mailbox : to specify that omap uses an external mailbox - (in control module) to communicate with the musb core during device connect - and disconnect. - multipoint : Should be "1" indicating the musb controller supports multipoint. This is a MUSB configuration-specific setting. - num-eps : Specifies the number of endpoints. This is also a @@ -19,6 +16,9 @@ OMAP MUSB GLUE - power : Should be "50". This signifies the controller can supply up to 100mA when operating in host mode. - usb-phy : the phandle for the PHY device + - phys : the phandle for the PHY device (used by generic PHY framework) + - phy-names : the names of the PHY corresponding to the PHYs present in the + *phy* phandle. Optional properties: - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module this glue uses to write to @@ -28,11 +28,12 @@ SOC specific device node entry usb_otg_hs: usb_otg_hs@4a0ab000 { compatible = "ti,omap4-musb"; ti,hwmods = "usb_otg_hs"; - ti,has-mailbox; multipoint = <1>; num-eps = <16>; ram-bits = <12>; ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>; + phys = <&usb2_phy>; + phy-names = "usb2-phy"; }; Board specific device node entry @@ -78,22 +79,22 @@ omap_dwc3 { OMAP CONTROL USB Required properties: - - compatible: Should be "ti,omap-control-usb" + - compatible: Should be one of + "ti,control-phy-otghs" - if it has otghs_control mailbox register as on OMAP4. + "ti,control-phy-usb2" - if it has Power down bit in control_dev_conf register + e.g. USB2_PHY on OMAP5. + "ti,control-phy-pipe3" - if it has DPLL and individual Rx & Tx power control + e.g. USB3 PHY and SATA PHY on OMAP5. + "ti,control-phy-dra7usb2" - if it has power down register like USB2 PHY on + DRA7 platform. - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. It contains - the address of "control_dev_conf" and "otghs_control" or "phy_power_usb" - depending upon omap4 or omap5. - - reg-names: The names of the register addresses corresponding to the registers - filled in "reg". - - ti,type: This is used to differentiate whether the control module has - usb mailbox or usb3 phy power. omap4 has usb mailbox in control module to - notify events to the musb core and omap5 has usb3 phy power register to - power on usb3 phy. Should be "1" if it has mailbox and "2" if it has usb3 - phy power. + the address of "otghs_control" for control-phy-otghs or "power" register + for other types. + - reg-names: should be "otghs_control" control-phy-otghs and "power" for + other types. omap_control_usb: omap-control-usb@4a002300 { - compatible = "ti,omap-control-usb"; - reg = <0x4a002300 0x4>, - <0x4a00233c 0x4>; - reg-names = "control_dev_conf", "otghs_control"; - ti,type = <1>; + compatible = "ti,control-phy-otghs"; + reg = <0x4a00233c 0x4>; + reg-names = "otghs_control"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt index d7e272671c7e..1bd37faba05b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-nop-xceiv.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: - vcc-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides RESET to the PHY. -- reset-supply: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the PHY. +- reset-gpios: Should specify the GPIO for reset. Example: @@ -25,10 +25,9 @@ Example: clocks = <&osc 0>; clock-names = "main_clk"; vcc-supply = <&hsusb1_vcc_regulator>; - reset-supply = <&hsusb1_reset_regulator>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio1 7 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; hsusb1_phy is a NOP USB PHY device that gets its clock from an oscillator and expects that clock to be configured to 19.2MHz by the NOP PHY driver. -hsusb1_vcc_regulator provides power to the PHY and hsusb1_reset_regulator -controls RESET. +hsusb1_vcc_regulator provides power to the PHY and GPIO 7 controls RESET. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt index 61496f5cb095..c0245c888982 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-phy.txt @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ OMAP USB2 PHY Required properties: - compatible: Should be "ti,omap-usb2" - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. + - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the + phandle while referencing this phy. Optional properties: - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module used by PHY driver to power on @@ -16,6 +18,7 @@ usb2phy@4a0ad080 { compatible = "ti,omap-usb2"; reg = <0x4a0ad080 0x58>; ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>; + #phy-cells = <0>; }; OMAP USB3 PHY @@ -25,6 +28,8 @@ Required properties: - reg : Address and length of the register set for the device. - reg-names: The names of the register addresses corresponding to the registers filled in "reg". + - #phy-cells: determine the number of cells that should be given in the + phandle while referencing this phy. Optional properties: - ctrl-module : phandle of the control module used by PHY driver to power on @@ -39,4 +44,5 @@ usb3phy@4a084400 { <0x4a084c00 0x40>; reg-names = "phy_rx", "phy_tx", "pll_ctrl"; ctrl-module = <&omap_control_usb>; + #phy-cells = <0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt index 330d6ec15401..439a41c79afa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ux500-usb.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: Example: usb_per5@a03e0000 { - compatible = "stericsson,db8500-musb", "mentor,musb"; + compatible = "stericsson,db8500-musb"; reg = <0xa03e0000 0x10000>; interrupts = <0 23 0x4>; interrupt-names = "mc"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index ec4d713674fa..edbb8d88c85e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -7,15 +7,20 @@ ad Avionic Design GmbH adi Analog Devices, Inc. aeroflexgaisler Aeroflex Gaisler AB ak Asahi Kasei Corp. +altr Altera Corp. amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) arm ARM Ltd. atmel Atmel Corporation +auo AU Optronics Corporation avago Avago Technologies bosch Bosch Sensortec GmbH brcm Broadcom Corporation +capella Capella Microsystems, Inc cavium Cavium, Inc. +cdns Cadence Design Systems Inc. chrp Common Hardware Reference Platform +chunghwa Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd. cirrus Cirrus Logic, Inc. cortina Cortina Systems, Inc. dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) @@ -27,22 +32,27 @@ est ESTeem Wireless Modems fsl Freescale Semiconductor GEFanuc GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. gef GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +gmt Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc. hisilicon Hisilicon Limited. hp Hewlett Packard ibm International Business Machines (IBM) idt Integrated Device Technologies, Inc. img Imagination Technologies Ltd. intercontrol Inter Control Group +lg LG Corporation linux Linux-specific binding lsi LSI Corp. (LSI Logic) marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. maxim Maxim Integrated Products +microchip Microchip Technology Inc. mosaixtech Mosaix Technologies, Inc. national National Semiconductor nintendo Nintendo nvidia NVIDIA nxp NXP Semiconductors onnn ON Semiconductor Corp. +panasonic Panasonic Corporation +phytec PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH picochip Picochip Ltd powervr PowerVR (deprecated, use img) qca Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. @@ -62,12 +72,12 @@ snps Synopsys, Inc. st STMicroelectronics ste ST-Ericsson stericsson ST-Ericsson -toumaz Toumaz ti Texas Instruments toshiba Toshiba Corporation +toumaz Toumaz v3 V3 Semiconductor via VIA Technologies, Inc. +winbond Winbond Electronics corp. wlf Wolfson Microelectronics wm Wondermedia Technologies, Inc. -winbond Winbond Electronics corp. xlnx Xilinx diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/atmel,lcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/atmel,lcdc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1ec175eddca8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/atmel,lcdc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +Atmel LCDC Framebuffer +----------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : + "atmel,at91sam9261-lcdc" , + "atmel,at91sam9263-lcdc" , + "atmel,at91sam9g10-lcdc" , + "atmel,at91sam9g45-lcdc" , + "atmel,at91sam9g45es-lcdc" , + "atmel,at91sam9rl-lcdc" , + "atmel,at32ap-lcdc" +- reg : Should contain 1 register ranges(address and length) +- interrupts : framebuffer controller interrupt +- display: a phandle pointing to the display node + +Required nodes: +- display: a display node is required to initialize the lcd panel + This should be in the board dts. +- default-mode: a videomode within the display with timing parameters + as specified below. + +Example: + + fb0: fb@0x00500000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9g45-lcdc"; + reg = <0x00500000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <23 3 0>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_fb>; + display = <&display0>; + status = "okay"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + }; + +Atmel LCDC Display +----------------------------------------------------- +Required properties (as per of_videomode_helper): + + - atmel,dmacon: dma controler configuration + - atmel,lcdcon2: lcd controler configuration + - atmel,guard-time: lcd guard time (Delay in frame periods) + - bits-per-pixel: lcd panel bit-depth. + +Optional properties (as per of_videomode_helper): + - atmel,lcdcon-backlight: enable backlight + - atmel,lcd-wiring-mode: lcd wiring mode "RGB" or "BRG" + - atmel,power-control-gpio: gpio to power on or off the LCD (as many as needed) + +Example: + display0: display { + bits-per-pixel = <32>; + atmel,lcdcon-backlight; + atmel,dmacon = <0x1>; + atmel,lcdcon2 = <0x80008002>; + atmel,guard-time = <9>; + atmel,lcd-wiring-mode = <1>; + + display-timings { + native-mode = <&timing0>; + timing0: timing0 { + clock-frequency = <9000000>; + hactive = <480>; + vactive = <272>; + hback-porch = <1>; + hfront-porch = <1>; + vback-porch = <40>; + vfront-porch = <1>; + hsync-len = <45>; + vsync-len = <1>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt index 1482103d288f..96e83a56048e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ lp855x bindings Required properties: - compatible: "ti,lp8550", "ti,lp8551", "ti,lp8552", "ti,lp8553", - "ti,lp8556", "ti,lp8557" + "ti,lp8555", "ti,lp8556", "ti,lp8557" - reg: I2C slave address (u8) - dev-ctrl: Value of DEVICE CONTROL register (u8). It depends on the device. @@ -15,6 +15,33 @@ Optional properties: Example: + /* LP8555 */ + backlight@2c { + compatible = "ti,lp8555"; + reg = <0x2c>; + + dev-ctrl = /bits/ 8 <0x00>; + pwm-period = <10000>; + + /* 4V OV, 4 output LED0 string enabled */ + rom_14h { + rom-addr = /bits/ 8 <0x14>; + rom-val = /bits/ 8 <0xcf>; + }; + + /* Heavy smoothing, 24ms ramp time step */ + rom_15h { + rom-addr = /bits/ 8 <0x15>; + rom-val = /bits/ 8 <0xc7>; + }; + + /* 4 output LED1 string enabled */ + rom_19h { + rom-addr = /bits/ 8 <0x19>; + rom-val = /bits/ 8 <0x0f>; + }; + }; + /* LP8556 */ backlight@2c { compatible = "ti,lp8556"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt index 1e4fc727f3b1..764db86d441a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt @@ -10,12 +10,16 @@ Required properties: last value in the array represents a 100% duty cycle (brightest). - default-brightness-level: the default brightness level (index into the array defined by the "brightness-levels" property) + - power-supply: regulator for supply voltage Optional properties: - pwm-names: a list of names for the PWM devices specified in the "pwms" property (see PWM binding[0]) + - enable-gpios: contains a single GPIO specifier for the GPIO which enables + and disables the backlight (see GPIO binding[1]) [0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt +[1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt Example: @@ -25,4 +29,7 @@ Example: brightness-levels = <0 4 8 16 32 64 128 255>; default-brightness-level = <6>; + + power-supply = <&vdd_bl_reg>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio 58 0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt index 84f10c16cb38..3289d76a21d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_dp.txt @@ -6,10 +6,10 @@ We use two nodes: -dptx-phy node(defined inside dp-controller node) For the DP-PHY initialization, we use the dptx-phy node. -Required properties for dptx-phy: - -reg: +Required properties for dptx-phy: deprecated, use phys and phy-names + -reg: deprecated Base address of DP PHY register. - -samsung,enable-mask: + -samsung,enable-mask: deprecated The bit-mask used to enable/disable DP PHY. For the Panel initialization, we read data from dp-controller node. @@ -27,6 +27,10 @@ Required properties for dp-controller: from common clock binding: Shall be "dp". -interrupt-parent: phandle to Interrupt combiner node. + -phys: + from general PHY binding: the phandle for the PHY device. + -phy-names: + from general PHY binding: Should be "dp". -samsung,color-space: input video data format. COLOR_RGB = 0, COLOR_YCBCR422 = 1, COLOR_YCBCR444 = 2 @@ -68,11 +72,8 @@ SOC specific portion: clocks = <&clock 342>; clock-names = "dp"; - dptx-phy { - reg = <0x10040720>; - samsung,enable-mask = <1>; - }; - + phys = <&dp_phy>; + phy-names = "dp"; }; Board Specific portion: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt index 323983be3c30..50decf8e1b90 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_hdmi.txt @@ -12,7 +12,19 @@ Required properties: a) phandle of the gpio controller node. b) pin number within the gpio controller. c) optional flags and pull up/down. - +- clocks: list of clock IDs from SoC clock driver. + a) hdmi: Gate of HDMI IP bus clock. + b) sclk_hdmi: Gate of HDMI special clock. + c) sclk_pixel: Pixel special clock, one of the two possible inputs of + HDMI clock mux. + d) sclk_hdmiphy: HDMI PHY clock output, one of two possible inputs of + HDMI clock mux. + e) mout_hdmi: It is required by the driver to switch between the 2 + parents i.e. sclk_pixel and sclk_hdmiphy. If hdmiphy is stable + after configuration, parent is set to sclk_hdmiphy else + sclk_pixel. +- clock-names: aliases as per driver requirements for above clock IDs: + "hdmi", "sclk_hdmi", "sclk_pixel", "sclk_hdmiphy" and "mout_hdmi". Example: hdmi { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt index 3334b0a8e343..7bfde9c9d658 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/exynos_mixer.txt @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address of the mixer and length of memory mapped region. - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. +- clocks: list of clock IDs from SoC clock driver. + a) mixer: Gate of Mixer IP bus clock. + b) sclk_hdmi: HDMI Special clock, one of the two possible inputs of + mixer mux. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..08e16f684f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/dw_wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Synopsys Designware Watchdog Timer + +Required Properties: + +- compatible : Should contain "snps,dw-wdt" +- reg : Base address and size of the watchdog timer registers. +- clocks : phandle + clock-specifier for the clock that drives the + watchdog timer. + +Optional Properties: + +- interrupts : The interrupt used for the watchdog timeout warning. + +Example: + + watchdog0: wd@ffd02000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-wdt"; + reg = <0xffd02000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 171 4>; + clocks = <&per_base_clk>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/men-a021-wdt.txt index 370dee3226d9..370dee3226d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/men-a021-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/men-a021-wdt.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1169857d1d12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/moxa,moxart-watchdog.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +MOXA ART Watchdog timer + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Must be "moxa,moxart-watchdog" +- reg : Should contain registers location and length +- clocks : Should contain phandle for the clock that drives the counter + +Example: + + watchdog: watchdog@98500000 { + compatible = "moxa,moxart-watchdog"; + reg = <0x98500000 0x10>; + clocks = <&coreclk>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d7bab3db9d1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Ralink Watchdog Timers + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "ralink,rt2880-wdt" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of the register range + +Optional properties: +- interrupt-parent: phandle to the INTC device node +- interrupts: Specify the INTC interrupt number + +Example: + + watchdog@120 { + compatible = "ralink,rt2880-wdt"; + reg = <0x120 0x10>; + + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9cbc76c89b2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sirfsoc_wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +SiRFSoC Timer and Watchdog Timer(WDT) Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: "sirf,prima2-tick" +- reg: Address range of tick timer/WDT register set +- interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu + +Example: + +timer@b0020000 { + compatible = "sirf,prima2-tick"; + reg = <0xb0020000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sun4i-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sunxi-wdt.txt index ecd650adff31..e39cb266c8f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sun4i-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sunxi-wdt.txt @@ -1,8 +1,9 @@ -Allwinner sun4i Watchdog timer +Allwinner SoCs Watchdog timer Required properties: -- compatible : should be "allwinner,sun4i-wdt" +- compatible : should be "allwinner,<soc-family>-wdt", the currently supported + SoC families being sun4i and sun6i - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt index e31a2a9d2b07..505e71172ae7 100644 --- a/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt +++ b/Documentation/dma-buf-sharing.txt @@ -407,6 +407,18 @@ Being able to mmap an export dma-buf buffer object has 2 main use-cases: interesting ways depending upong the exporter (if userspace starts depending upon this implicit synchronization). +Other Interfaces Exposed to Userspace on the dma-buf FD +------------------------------------------------------ + +- Since kernel 3.12 the dma-buf FD supports the llseek system call, but only + with offset=0 and whence=SEEK_END|SEEK_SET. SEEK_SET is supported to allow + the usual size discover pattern size = SEEK_END(0); SEEK_SET(0). Every other + llseek operation will report -EINVAL. + + If llseek on dma-buf FDs isn't support the kernel will report -ESPIPE for all + cases. Userspace can use this to detect support for discovering the dma-buf + size using llseek. + Miscellaneous notes ------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/dmatest.txt b/Documentation/dmatest.txt index 132a094c7bc3..dd77a81bdb80 100644 --- a/Documentation/dmatest.txt +++ b/Documentation/dmatest.txt @@ -15,38 +15,48 @@ be built as module or inside kernel. Let's consider those cases. Part 2 - When dmatest is built as a module... -After mounting debugfs and loading the module, the /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest -folder with nodes will be created. They are the same as module parameters with -addition of the 'run' node that controls run and stop phases of the test. +Example of usage: + % modprobe dmatest channel=dma0chan0 timeout=2000 iterations=1 run=1 -Note that in this case test will not run on load automatically. +...or: + % modprobe dmatest + % echo dma0chan0 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/channel + % echo 2000 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/timeout + % echo 1 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/iterations + % echo 1 > /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/run -Example of usage: - % echo dma0chan0 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/channel - % echo 2000 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/timeout - % echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/iterations - % echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run +...or on the kernel command line: + + dmatest.channel=dma0chan0 dmatest.timeout=2000 dmatest.iterations=1 dmatest.run=1 Hint: available channel list could be extracted by running the following command: % ls -1 /sys/class/dma/ -After a while you will start to get messages about current status or error like -in the original code. +Once started a message like "dmatest: Started 1 threads using dma0chan0" is +emitted. After that only test failure messages are reported until the test +stops. Note that running a new test will not stop any in progress test. -The following command should return actual state of the test. - % cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run - -To wait for test done the user may perform a busy loop that checks the state. - - % while [ $(cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/run) = "Y" ] - > do - > echo -n "." - > sleep 1 - > done - > echo +The following command returns the state of the test. + % cat /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/run + +To wait for test completion userpace can poll 'run' until it is false, or use +the wait parameter. Specifying 'wait=1' when loading the module causes module +initialization to pause until a test run has completed, while reading +/sys/module/dmatest/parameters/wait waits for any running test to complete +before returning. For example, the following scripts wait for 42 tests +to complete before exiting. Note that if 'iterations' is set to 'infinite' then +waiting is disabled. + +Example: + % modprobe dmatest run=1 iterations=42 wait=1 + % modprobe -r dmatest +...or: + % modprobe dmatest run=1 iterations=42 + % cat /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/wait + % modprobe -r dmatest Part 3 - When built-in in the kernel... @@ -55,27 +65,28 @@ for the first performed test. After user gets a control, the test could be re-run with the same or different parameters. For the details see the above section "Part 2 - When dmatest is built as a module..." -In both cases the module parameters are used as initial values for the test case. -You always could check them at run-time by running +In both cases the module parameters are used as the actual values for the test +case. You always could check them at run-time by running % grep -H . /sys/module/dmatest/parameters/* Part 4 - Gathering the test results -The module provides a storage for the test results in the memory. The gathered -data could be used after test is done. +Test results are printed to the kernel log buffer with the format: -The special file 'results' in the debugfs represents gathered data of the in -progress test. The messages collected are printed to the kernel log as well. +"dmatest: result <channel>: <test id>: '<error msg>' with src_off=<val> dst_off=<val> len=<val> (<err code>)" Example of output: - % cat /sys/kernel/debug/dmatest/results - dma0chan0-copy0: #1: No errors with src_off=0x7bf dst_off=0x8ad len=0x3fea (0) + % dmesg | tail -n 1 + dmatest: result dma0chan0-copy0: #1: No errors with src_off=0x7bf dst_off=0x8ad len=0x3fea (0) The message format is unified across the different types of errors. A number in the parens represents additional information, e.g. error code, error counter, -or status. +or status. A test thread also emits a summary line at completion listing the +number of tests executed, number that failed, and a result code. -Comparison between buffers is stored to the dedicated structure. +Example: + % dmesg | tail -n 1 + dmatest: dma0chan0-copy0: summary 1 test, 0 failures 1000 iops 100000 KB/s (0) -Note that the verify result is now accessible only via file 'results' in the -debugfs. +The details of a data miscompare error are also emitted, but do not follow the +above format. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index fb57d85e7316..5bdc8cb5fc28 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -283,6 +283,7 @@ REGULATOR devm_regulator_get() devm_regulator_put() devm_regulator_bulk_get() + devm_regulator_register() CLOCK devm_clk_get() @@ -299,3 +300,9 @@ PWM PHY devm_usb_get_phy() devm_usb_put_phy() + +SLAVE DMA ENGINE + devm_acpi_dma_controller_register() + +SPI + devm_spi_register_master() diff --git a/Documentation/x86/efi-stub.txt b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt index 44e6bb6ead10..44e6bb6ead10 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/efi-stub.txt +++ b/Documentation/efi-stub.txt diff --git a/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class index eb0fa5f4fe88..5377f6317961 100644 --- a/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class +++ b/Documentation/extcon/porting-android-switch-class @@ -25,8 +25,10 @@ MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> @print_state: no change but type change (switch_dev->extcon_dev) - switch_dev_register(sdev, dev) - => extcon_dev_register(edev, dev) - : no change but type change (sdev->edev) + => extcon_dev_register(edev) + : type change (sdev->edev) + : remove second param('dev'). if edev has parent device, should store + 'dev' to 'edev.dev.parent' before registering extcon device - switch_dev_unregister(sdev) => extcon_dev_unregister(edev) : no change but type change (sdev->edev) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt index 9dae59407437..5dd282dda55c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt @@ -70,6 +70,12 @@ Unless otherwise specified, all options default to off. See comments at the top of fs/btrfs/check-integrity.c for more info. + commit=<seconds> + Set the interval of periodic commit, 30 seconds by default. Higher + values defer data being synced to permanent storage with obvious + consequences when the system crashes. The upper bound is not forced, + but a warning is printed if it's more than 300 seconds (5 minutes). + compress compress=<type> compress-force @@ -154,7 +160,11 @@ Unless otherwise specified, all options default to off. Currently this scans a list of several previous tree roots and tries to use the first readable. - skip_balance + rescan_uuid_tree + Force check and rebuild procedure of the UUID tree. This should not + normally be needed. + + skip_balance Skip automatic resume of interrupted balance operation after mount. May be resumed with "btrfs balance resume." @@ -234,24 +244,14 @@ available from the git repository at the following location: These include the following tools: -mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem - -btrfsctl: control program to create snapshots and subvolumes: +* mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem - mount /dev/sda2 /mnt - btrfsctl -s new_subvol_name /mnt - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_default /mnt/default - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_new_subvol /mnt/new_subvol_name - btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_a_snapshot /mnt/snapshot_of_new_subvol - ls /mnt - default snapshot_of_a_snapshot snapshot_of_new_subvol - new_subvol_name snapshot_of_default +* btrfs: a single tool to manage the filesystems, refer to the manpage for more details - Snapshots and subvolumes cannot be deleted right now, but you can - rm -rf all the files and directories inside them. +* 'btrfsck' or 'btrfs check': do a consistency check of the filesystem -btrfsck: do a limited check of the FS extent trees. +Other tools for specific tasks: -btrfs-debug-tree: print all of the FS metadata in text form. Example: +* btrfs-convert: in-place conversion from ext2/3/4 filesystems - btrfs-debug-tree /dev/sda2 >& big_output_file +* btrfs-image: dump filesystem metadata for debugging diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt index d78bab9622c6..277d1e810670 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.txt @@ -299,6 +299,15 @@ performed on the denizens of the cache. These are held in a structure of type: enough space in the cache to permit this. + (*) Check coherency state of an object [mandatory]: + + int (*check_consistency)(struct fscache_object *object) + + This method is called to have the cache check the saved auxiliary data of + the object against the netfs's idea of the state. 0 should be returned + if they're consistent and -ESTALE otherwise. -ENOMEM and -ERESTARTSYS + may also be returned. + (*) Update object [mandatory]: int (*update_object)(struct fscache_object *object) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt index 97e6c0ecc5ef..aed6b94160b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt @@ -29,15 +29,16 @@ This document contains the following sections: (6) Index registration (7) Data file registration (8) Miscellaneous object registration - (9) Setting the data file size + (9) Setting the data file size (10) Page alloc/read/write (11) Page uncaching - (12) Index and data file update - (13) Miscellaneous cookie operations - (14) Cookie unregistration - (15) Index invalidation - (16) Data file invalidation - (17) FS-Cache specific page flags. + (12) Index and data file consistency + (13) Cookie enablement + (14) Miscellaneous cookie operations + (15) Cookie unregistration + (16) Index invalidation + (17) Data file invalidation + (18) FS-Cache specific page flags. ============================= @@ -334,7 +335,8 @@ the path to the file: struct fscache_cookie * fscache_acquire_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *parent, const struct fscache_object_def *def, - void *netfs_data); + void *netfs_data, + bool enable); This function creates an index entry in the index represented by parent, filling in the index entry by calling the operations pointed to by def. @@ -350,6 +352,10 @@ object needs to be created somewhere down the hierarchy. Furthermore, an index may be created in several different caches independently at different times. This is all handled transparently, and the netfs doesn't see any of it. +A cookie will be created in the disabled state if enabled is false. A cookie +must be enabled to do anything with it. A disabled cookie can be enabled by +calling fscache_enable_cookie() (see below). + For example, with AFS, a cell would be added to the primary index. This index entry would have a dependent inode containing a volume location index for the volume mappings within this cell: @@ -357,7 +363,7 @@ volume mappings within this cell: cell->cache = fscache_acquire_cookie(afs_cache_netfs.primary_index, &afs_cell_cache_index_def, - cell); + cell, true); Then when a volume location was accessed, it would be entered into the cell's index and an inode would be allocated that acts as a volume type and hash chain @@ -366,7 +372,7 @@ combination: vlocation->cache = fscache_acquire_cookie(cell->cache, &afs_vlocation_cache_index_def, - vlocation); + vlocation, true); And then a particular flavour of volume (R/O for example) could be added to that index, creating another index for vnodes (AFS inode equivalents): @@ -374,7 +380,7 @@ that index, creating another index for vnodes (AFS inode equivalents): volume->cache = fscache_acquire_cookie(vlocation->cache, &afs_volume_cache_index_def, - volume); + volume, true); ====================== @@ -388,7 +394,7 @@ the object definition should be something other than index type. vnode->cache = fscache_acquire_cookie(volume->cache, &afs_vnode_cache_object_def, - vnode); + vnode, true); ================================= @@ -404,7 +410,7 @@ it would be some other type of object such as a data file. xattr->cache = fscache_acquire_cookie(vnode->cache, &afs_xattr_cache_object_def, - xattr); + xattr, true); Miscellaneous objects might be used to store extended attributes or directory entries for example. @@ -433,7 +439,7 @@ to the caller. The attribute adjustment excludes read and write operations. ===================== -PAGE READ/ALLOC/WRITE +PAGE ALLOC/READ/WRITE ===================== And the sixth step is to store and retrieve pages in the cache. There are @@ -499,7 +505,7 @@ Else if there's a copy of the page resident in the cache: (*) An argument that's 0 on success or negative for an error code. If an error occurs, it should be assumed that the page contains no usable - data. + data. fscache_readpages_cancel() may need to be called. end_io_func() will be called in process context if the read is results in an error, but it might be called in interrupt context if the read is @@ -623,6 +629,22 @@ some of the pages being read and some being allocated. Those pages will have been marked appropriately and will need uncaching. +CANCELLATION OF UNREAD PAGES +---------------------------- + +If one or more pages are passed to fscache_read_or_alloc_pages() but not then +read from the cache and also not read from the underlying filesystem then +those pages will need to have any marks and reservations removed. This can be +done by calling: + + void fscache_readpages_cancel(struct fscache_cookie *cookie, + struct list_head *pages); + +prior to returning to the caller. The cookie argument should be as passed to +fscache_read_or_alloc_pages(). Every page in the pages list will be examined +and any that have PG_fscache set will be uncached. + + ============== PAGE UNCACHING ============== @@ -690,9 +712,18 @@ written to the cache and for the cache to finish with the page generally. No error is returned. -========================== -INDEX AND DATA FILE UPDATE -========================== +=============================== +INDEX AND DATA FILE CONSISTENCY +=============================== + +To find out whether auxiliary data for an object is up to data within the +cache, the following function can be called: + + int fscache_check_consistency(struct fscache_cookie *cookie) + +This will call back to the netfs to check whether the auxiliary data associated +with a cookie is correct. It returns 0 if it is and -ESTALE if it isn't; it +may also return -ENOMEM and -ERESTARTSYS. To request an update of the index data for an index or other object, the following function should be called: @@ -708,6 +739,47 @@ Note that partial updates may happen automatically at other times, such as when data blocks are added to a data file object. +================= +COOKIE ENABLEMENT +================= + +Cookies exist in one of two states: enabled and disabled. If a cookie is +disabled, it ignores all attempts to acquire child cookies; check, update or +invalidate its state; allocate, read or write backing pages - though it is +still possible to uncache pages and relinquish the cookie. + +The initial enablement state is set by fscache_acquire_cookie(), but the cookie +can be enabled or disabled later. To disable a cookie, call: + + void fscache_disable_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie, + bool invalidate); + +If the cookie is not already disabled, this locks the cookie against other +enable and disable ops, marks the cookie as being disabled, discards or +invalidates any backing objects and waits for cessation of activity on any +associated object before unlocking the cookie. + +All possible failures are handled internally. The caller should consider +calling fscache_uncache_all_inode_pages() afterwards to make sure all page +markings are cleared up. + +Cookies can be enabled or reenabled with: + + void fscache_enable_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie, + bool (*can_enable)(void *data), + void *data) + +If the cookie is not already enabled, this locks the cookie against other +enable and disable ops, invokes can_enable() and, if the cookie is not an index +cookie, will begin the procedure of acquiring backing objects. + +The optional can_enable() function is passed the data argument and returns a +ruling as to whether or not enablement should actually be permitted to begin. + +All possible failures are handled internally. The cookie will only be marked +as enabled if provisional backing objects are allocated. + + =============================== MISCELLANEOUS COOKIE OPERATIONS =============================== @@ -753,7 +825,7 @@ COOKIE UNREGISTRATION To get rid of a cookie, this function should be called. void fscache_relinquish_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie, - int retire); + bool retire); If retire is non-zero, then the object will be marked for recycling, and all copies of it will be removed from all active caches in which it is present. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 49cc923a93e3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ - This is the client VFS module for the Common Internet File System - (CIFS) protocol which is the successor to the Server Message Block - (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early - PC operating systems. CIFS is fully supported by current network - file servers such as Windows 2000, Windows 2003 (including - Windows XP) as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS - server support for Linux and many other operating systems), so - this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of - servers. The smbfs module should be used instead of this cifs module - for mounting to older SMB servers such as OS/2. The smbfs and cifs - modules can coexist and do not conflict. The CIFS VFS filesystem - module is designed to work well with servers that implement the - newer versions (dialects) of the SMB/CIFS protocol such as Samba, - the program written by Andrew Tridgell that turns any Unix host - into a SMB/CIFS file server. - - The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network - file system function for CIFS compliant servers, including better - POSIX compliance, secure per-user session establishment, high - performance safe distributed caching (oplock), optional packet - signing, large files, Unicode support and other internationalization - improvements. Since both Samba server and this filesystem client support - the CIFS Unix extensions, the combination can provide a reasonable - alternative to NFSv4 for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments, - not just in Linux to Windows environments. - - This filesystem has an optional mount utility (mount.cifs) that can - be obtained from the project page and installed in the path in the same - directory with the other mount helpers (such as mount.smbfs). - Mounting using the cifs filesystem without installing the mount helper - requires specifying the server's ip address. - - For Linux 2.4: - mount //anything/here /mnt_target -o - user=username,pass=password,unc=//ip_address_of_server/sharename - - For Linux 2.5: - mount //ip_address_of_server/sharename /mnt_target -o user=username, pass=password - - - For more information on the module see the project page at - - http://us1.samba.org/samba/Linux_CIFS_client.html - - For more information on CIFS see: - - http://www.snia.org/tech_activities/CIFS - - or the Samba site: - - http://www.samba.org diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ca4a67a0bb1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +Original Author +=============== +Steve French (sfrench@samba.org) + +The author wishes to express his appreciation and thanks to: +Andrew Tridgell (Samba team) for his early suggestions about smb/cifs VFS +improvements. Thanks to IBM for allowing me time and test resources to pursue +this project, to Jim McDonough from IBM (and the Samba Team) for his help, to +the IBM Linux JFS team for explaining many esoteric Linux filesystem features. +Jeremy Allison of the Samba team has done invaluable work in adding the server +side of the original CIFS Unix extensions and reviewing and implementing +portions of the newer CIFS POSIX extensions into the Samba 3 file server. Thank +Dave Boutcher of IBM Rochester (author of the OS/400 smb/cifs filesystem client) +for proving years ago that very good smb/cifs clients could be done on Unix-like +operating systems. Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Urban Widmark, John +Newbigin and others for their work on the Linux smbfs module. Thanks to +the other members of the Storage Network Industry Association CIFS Technical +Workgroup for their work specifying this highly complex protocol and finally +thanks to the Samba team for their technical advice and encouragement. + +Patch Contributors +------------------ +Zwane Mwaikambo +Andi Kleen +Amrut Joshi +Shobhit Dayal +Sergey Vlasov +Richard Hughes +Yury Umanets +Mark Hamzy (for some of the early cifs IPv6 work) +Domen Puncer +Jesper Juhl (in particular for lots of whitespace/formatting cleanup) +Vince Negri and Dave Stahl (for finding an important caching bug) +Adrian Bunk (kcalloc cleanups) +Miklos Szeredi +Kazeon team for various fixes especially for 2.4 version. +Asser Ferno (Change Notify support) +Shaggy (Dave Kleikamp) for innumerable small fs suggestions and some good cleanup +Gunter Kukkukk (testing and suggestions for support of old servers) +Igor Mammedov (DFS support) +Jeff Layton (many, many fixes, as well as great work on the cifs Kerberos code) +Scott Lovenberg + +Test case and Bug Report contributors +------------------------------------- +Thanks to those in the community who have submitted detailed bug reports +and debug of problems they have found: Jochen Dolze, David Blaine, +Rene Scharfe, Martin Josefsson, Alexander Wild, Anthony Liguori, +Lars Muller, Urban Widmark, Massimiliano Ferrero, Howard Owen, +Olaf Kirch, Kieron Briggs, Nick Millington and others. Also special +mention to the Stanford Checker (SWAT) which pointed out many minor +bugs in error paths. Valuable suggestions also have come from Al Viro +and Dave Miller. + +And thanks to the IBM LTC and Power test teams and SuSE testers for +finding multiple bugs during excellent stress test runs. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bc0025cdd1c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES @@ -0,0 +1,1065 @@ +Version 1.62 +------------ +Add sockopt=TCP_NODELAY mount option. EA (xattr) routines hardened +to more strictly handle corrupt frames. + +Version 1.61 +------------ +Fix append problem to Samba servers (files opened with O_APPEND could +have duplicated data). Fix oops in cifs_lookup. Workaround problem +mounting to OS/400 Netserve. Fix oops in cifs_get_tcp_session. +Disable use of server inode numbers when server only +partially supports them (e.g. for one server querying inode numbers on +FindFirst fails but QPathInfo queries works). Fix oops with dfs in +cifs_put_smb_ses. Fix mmap to work on directio mounts (needed +for OpenOffice when on forcedirectio mount e.g.) + +Version 1.60 +------------- +Fix memory leak in reconnect. Fix oops in DFS mount error path. +Set s_maxbytes to smaller (the max that vfs can handle) so that +sendfile will now work over cifs mounts again. Add noforcegid +and noforceuid mount parameters. Fix small mem leak when using +ntlmv2. Fix 2nd mount to same server but with different port to +be allowed (rather than reusing the 1st port) - only when the +user explicitly overrides the port on the 2nd mount. + +Version 1.59 +------------ +Client uses server inode numbers (which are persistent) rather than +client generated ones by default (mount option "serverino" turned +on by default if server supports it). Add forceuid and forcegid +mount options (so that when negotiating unix extensions specifying +which uid mounted does not immediately force the server's reported +uids to be overridden). Add support for scope mount parm. Improve +hard link detection to use same inode for both. Do not set +read-only dos attribute on directories (for chmod) since Windows +explorer special cases this attribute bit for directories for +a different purpose. + +Version 1.58 +------------ +Guard against buffer overruns in various UCS-2 to UTF-8 string conversions +when the UTF-8 string is composed of unusually long (more than 4 byte) converted +characters. Add support for mounting root of a share which redirects immediately +to DFS target. Convert string conversion functions from Unicode to more +accurately mark string length before allocating memory (which may help the +rare cases where a UTF-8 string is much larger than the UCS2 string that +we converted from). Fix endianness of the vcnum field used during +session setup to distinguish multiple mounts to same server from different +userids. Raw NTLMSSP fixed (it requires /proc/fs/cifs/experimental +flag to be set to 2, and mount must enable krb5 to turn on extended security). +Performance of file create to Samba improved (posix create on lookup +removes 1 of 2 network requests sent on file create) + +Version 1.57 +------------ +Improve support for multiple security contexts to the same server. We +used to use the same "vcnumber" for all connections which could cause +the server to treat subsequent connections, especially those that +are authenticated as guest, as reconnections, invalidating the earlier +user's smb session. This fix allows cifs to mount multiple times to the +same server with different userids without risking invalidating earlier +established security contexts. fsync now sends SMB Flush operation +to better ensure that we wait for server to write all of the data to +server disk (not just write it over the network). Add new mount +parameter to allow user to disable sending the (slow) SMB flush on +fsync if desired (fsync still flushes all cached write data to the server). +Posix file open support added (turned off after one attempt if server +fails to support it properly, as with Samba server versions prior to 3.3.2) +Fix "redzone overwritten" bug in cifs_put_tcon (CIFSTcon may allocate too +little memory for the "nativeFileSystem" field returned by the server +during mount). Endian convert inode numbers if necessary (makes it easier +to compare inode numbers on network files from big endian systems). + +Version 1.56 +------------ +Add "forcemandatorylock" mount option to allow user to use mandatory +rather than posix (advisory) byte range locks, even though server would +support posix byte range locks. Fix query of root inode when prefixpath +specified and user does not have access to query information about the +top of the share. Fix problem in 2.6.28 resolving DFS paths to +Samba servers (worked to Windows). Fix rmdir so that pending search +(readdir) requests do not get invalid results which include the now +removed directory. Fix oops in cifs_dfs_ref.c when prefixpath is not reachable +when using DFS. Add better file create support to servers which support +the CIFS POSIX protocol extensions (this adds support for new flags +on create, and improves semantics for write of locked ranges). + +Version 1.55 +------------ +Various fixes to make delete of open files behavior more predictable +(when delete of an open file fails we mark the file as "delete-on-close" +in a way that more servers accept, but only if we can first rename the +file to a temporary name). Add experimental support for more safely +handling fcntl(F_SETLEASE). Convert cifs to using blocking tcp +sends, and also let tcp autotune the socket send and receive buffers. +This reduces the number of EAGAIN errors returned by TCP/IP in +high stress workloads (and the number of retries on socket writes +when sending large SMBWriteX requests). Fix case in which a portion of +data can in some cases not get written to the file on the server before the +file is closed. Fix DFS parsing to properly handle path consumed field, +and to handle certain codepage conversions better. Fix mount and +umount race that can cause oops in mount or umount or reconnect. + +Version 1.54 +------------ +Fix premature write failure on congested networks (we would give up +on EAGAIN from the socket too quickly on large writes). +Cifs_mkdir and cifs_create now respect the setgid bit on parent dir. +Fix endian problems in acl (mode from/to cifs acl) on bigendian +architectures. Fix problems with preserving timestamps on copying open +files (e.g. "cp -a") to Windows servers. For mkdir and create honor setgid bit +on parent directory when server supports Unix Extensions but not POSIX +create. Update cifs.upcall version to handle new Kerberos sec flags +(this requires update of cifs.upcall program from Samba). Fix memory leak +on dns_upcall (resolving DFS referralls). Fix plain text password +authentication (requires setting SecurityFlags to 0x30030 to enable +lanman and plain text though). Fix writes to be at correct offset when +file is open with O_APPEND and file is on a directio (forcediretio) mount. +Fix bug in rewinding readdir directory searches. Add nodfs mount option. + +Version 1.53 +------------ +DFS support added (Microsoft Distributed File System client support needed +for referrals which enable a hierarchical name space among servers). +Disable temporary caching of mode bits to servers which do not support +storing of mode (e.g. Windows servers, when client mounts without cifsacl +mount option) and add new "dynperm" mount option to enable temporary caching +of mode (enable old behavior). Fix hang on mount caused when server crashes +tcp session during negotiate protocol. + +Version 1.52 +------------ +Fix oops on second mount to server when null auth is used. +Enable experimental Kerberos support. Return writebehind errors on flush +and sync so that events like out of disk space get reported properly on +cached files. Fix setxattr failure to certain Samba versions. Fix mount +of second share to disconnected server session (autoreconnect on this). +Add ability to modify cifs acls for handling chmod (when mounted with +cifsacl flag). Fix prefixpath path separator so we can handle mounts +with prefixpaths longer than one directory (one path component) when +mounted to Windows servers. Fix slow file open when cifsacl +enabled. Fix memory leak in FindNext when the SMB call returns -EBADF. + + +Version 1.51 +------------ +Fix memory leak in statfs when mounted to very old servers (e.g. +Windows 9x). Add new feature "POSIX open" which allows servers +which support the current POSIX Extensions to provide better semantics +(e.g. delete for open files opened with posix open). Take into +account umask on posix mkdir not just older style mkdir. Add +ability to mount to IPC$ share (which allows CIFS named pipes to be +opened, read and written as if they were files). When 1st tree +connect fails (e.g. due to signing negotiation failure) fix +leak that causes cifsd not to stop and rmmod to fail to cleanup +cifs_request_buffers pool. Fix problem with POSIX Open/Mkdir on +bigendian architectures. Fix possible memory corruption when +EAGAIN returned on kern_recvmsg. Return better error if server +requires packet signing but client has disabled it. When mounted +with cifsacl mount option - mode bits are approximated based +on the contents of the ACL of the file or directory. When cifs +mount helper is missing convert make sure that UNC name +has backslash (not forward slash) between ip address of server +and the share name. + +Version 1.50 +------------ +Fix NTLMv2 signing. NFS server mounted over cifs works (if cifs mount is +done with "serverino" mount option). Add support for POSIX Unlink +(helps with certain sharing violation cases when server such as +Samba supports newer POSIX CIFS Protocol Extensions). Add "nounix" +mount option to allow disabling the CIFS Unix Extensions for just +that mount. Fix hang on spinlock in find_writable_file (race when +reopening file after session crash). Byte range unlock request to +windows server could unlock more bytes (on server copy of file) +than intended if start of unlock request is well before start of +a previous byte range lock that we issued. + +Version 1.49 +------------ +IPv6 support. Enable ipv6 addresses to be passed on mount (put the ipv6 +address after the "ip=" mount option, at least until mount.cifs is fixed to +handle DNS host to ipv6 name translation). Accept override of uid or gid +on mount even when Unix Extensions are negotiated (it used to be ignored +when Unix Extensions were ignored). This allows users to override the +default uid and gid for files when they are certain that the uids or +gids on the server do not match those of the client. Make "sec=none" +mount override username (so that null user connection is attempted) +to match what documentation said. Support for very large reads, over 127K, +available to some newer servers (such as Samba 3.0.26 and later but +note that it also requires setting CIFSMaxBufSize at module install +time to a larger value which may hurt performance in some cases). +Make sign option force signing (or fail if server does not support it). + +Version 1.48 +------------ +Fix mtime bouncing around from local idea of last write times to remote time. +Fix hang (in i_size_read) when simultaneous size update of same remote file +on smp system corrupts sequence number. Do not reread unnecessarily partial page +(which we are about to overwrite anyway) when writing out file opened rw. +When DOS attribute of file on non-Unix server's file changes on the server side +from read-only back to read-write, reflect this change in default file mode +(we had been leaving a file's mode read-only until the inode were reloaded). +Allow setting of attribute back to ATTR_NORMAL (removing readonly dos attribute +when archive dos attribute not set and we are changing mode back to writeable +on server which does not support the Unix Extensions). Remove read only dos +attribute on chmod when adding any write permission (ie on any of +user/group/other (not all of user/group/other ie 0222) when +mounted to windows. Add support for POSIX MkDir (slight performance +enhancement and eliminates the network race between the mkdir and set +path info of the mode). + + +Version 1.47 +------------ +Fix oops in list_del during mount caused by unaligned string. +Fix file corruption which could occur on some large file +copies caused by writepages page i/o completion bug. +Seek to SEEK_END forces check for update of file size for non-cached +files. Allow file size to be updated on remote extend of locally open, +non-cached file. Fix reconnect to newer Samba servers (or other servers +which support the CIFS Unix/POSIX extensions) so that we again tell the +server the Unix/POSIX cifs capabilities which we support (SetFSInfo). +Add experimental support for new POSIX Open/Mkdir (which returns +stat information on the open, and allows setting the mode). + +Version 1.46 +------------ +Support deep tree mounts. Better support OS/2, Win9x (DOS) time stamps. +Allow null user to be specified on mount ("username="). Do not return +EINVAL on readdir when filldir fails due to overwritten blocksize +(fixes FC problem). Return error in rename 2nd attempt retry (ie report +if rename by handle also fails, after rename by path fails, we were +not reporting whether the retry worked or not). Fix NTLMv2 to +work to Windows servers (mount with option "sec=ntlmv2"). + +Version 1.45 +------------ +Do not time out lockw calls when using posix extensions. Do not +time out requests if server still responding reasonably fast +on requests on other threads. Improve POSIX locking emulation, +(lock cancel now works, and unlock of merged range works even +to Windows servers now). Fix oops on mount to lanman servers +(win9x, os/2 etc.) when null password. Do not send listxattr +(SMB to query all EAs) if nouser_xattr specified. Fix SE Linux +problem (instantiate inodes/dentries in right order for readdir). + +Version 1.44 +------------ +Rewritten sessionsetup support, including support for legacy SMB +session setup needed for OS/2 and older servers such as Windows 95 and 98. +Fix oops on ls to OS/2 servers. Add support for level 1 FindFirst +so we can do search (ls etc.) to OS/2. Do not send NTCreateX +or recent levels of FindFirst unless server says it supports NT SMBs +(instead use legacy equivalents from LANMAN dialect). Fix to allow +NTLMv2 authentication support (now can use stronger password hashing +on mount if corresponding /proc/fs/cifs/SecurityFlags is set (0x4004). +Allow override of global cifs security flags on mount via "sec=" option(s). + +Version 1.43 +------------ +POSIX locking to servers which support CIFS POSIX Extensions +(disabled by default controlled by proc/fs/cifs/Experimental). +Handle conversion of long share names (especially Asian languages) +to Unicode during mount. Fix memory leak in sess struct on reconnect. +Fix rare oops after acpi suspend. Fix O_TRUNC opens to overwrite on +cifs open which helps rare case when setpathinfo fails or server does +not support it. + +Version 1.42 +------------ +Fix slow oplock break when mounted to different servers at the same time and +the tids match and we try to find matching fid on wrong server. Fix read +looping when signing required by server (2.6.16 kernel only). Fix readdir +vs. rename race which could cause each to hang. Return . and .. even +if server does not. Allow searches to skip first three entries and +begin at any location. Fix oops in find_writeable_file. + +Version 1.41 +------------ +Fix NTLMv2 security (can be enabled in /proc/fs/cifs) so customers can +configure stronger authentication. Fix sfu symlinks so they can +be followed (not just recognized). Fix wraparound of bcc on +read responses when buffer size over 64K and also fix wrap of +max smb buffer size when CIFSMaxBufSize over 64K. Fix oops in +cifs_user_read and cifs_readpages (when EAGAIN on send of smb +on socket is returned over and over). Add POSIX (advisory) byte range +locking support (requires server with newest CIFS UNIX Extensions +to the protocol implemented). Slow down negprot slightly in port 139 +RFC1001 case to give session_init time on buggy servers. + +Version 1.40 +------------ +Use fsuid (fsgid) more consistently instead of uid (gid). Improve performance +of readpages by eliminating one extra memcpy. Allow update of file size +from remote server even if file is open for write as long as mount is +directio. Recognize share mode security and send NTLM encrypted password +on tree connect if share mode negotiated. + +Version 1.39 +------------ +Defer close of a file handle slightly if pending writes depend on that handle +(this reduces the EBADF bad file handle errors that can be logged under heavy +stress on writes). Modify cifs Kconfig options to expose CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 +Fix SFU style symlinks and mknod needed for servers which do not support the +CIFS Unix Extensions. Fix setfacl/getfacl on bigendian. Timeout negative +dentries so files that the client sees as deleted but that later get created +on the server will be recognized. Add client side permission check on setattr. +Timeout stuck requests better (where server has never responded or sent corrupt +responses) + +Version 1.38 +------------ +Fix tcp socket retransmission timeouts (e.g. on ENOSPACE from the socket) +to be smaller at first (but increasing) so large write performance performance +over GigE is better. Do not hang thread on illegal byte range lock response +from Windows (Windows can send an RFC1001 size which does not match smb size) by +allowing an SMBs TCP length to be up to a few bytes longer than it should be. +wsize and rsize can now be larger than negotiated buffer size if server +supports large readx/writex, even when directio mount flag not specified. +Write size will in many cases now be 16K instead of 4K which greatly helps +file copy performance on lightly loaded networks. Fix oops in dnotify +when experimental config flag enabled. Make cifsFYI more granular. + +Version 1.37 +------------ +Fix readdir caching when unlink removes file in current search buffer, +and this is followed by a rewind search to just before the deleted entry. +Do not attempt to set ctime unless atime and/or mtime change requested +(most servers throw it away anyway). Fix length check of received smbs +to be more accurate. Fix big endian problem with mapchars mount option, +and with a field returned by statfs. + +Version 1.36 +------------ +Add support for mounting to older pre-CIFS servers such as Windows9x and ME. +For these older servers, add option for passing netbios name of server in +on mount (servernetbiosname). Add suspend support for power management, to +avoid cifsd thread preventing software suspend from working. +Add mount option for disabling the default behavior of sending byte range lock +requests to the server (necessary for certain applications which break with +mandatory lock behavior such as Evolution), and also mount option for +requesting case insensitive matching for path based requests (requesting +case sensitive is the default). + +Version 1.35 +------------ +Add writepage performance improvements. Fix path name conversions +for long filenames on mounts which were done with "mapchars" mount option +specified. Ensure multiplex ids do not collide. Fix case in which +rmmod can oops if done soon after last unmount. Fix truncated +search (readdir) output when resume filename was a long filename. +Fix filename conversion when mapchars mount option was specified and +filename was a long filename. + +Version 1.34 +------------ +Fix error mapping of the TOO_MANY_LINKS (hardlinks) case. +Do not oops if root user kills cifs oplock kernel thread or +kills the cifsd thread (NB: killing the cifs kernel threads is not +recommended, unmount and rmmod cifs will kill them when they are +no longer needed). Fix readdir to ASCII servers (ie older servers +which do not support Unicode) and also require asterisk. +Fix out of memory case in which data could be written one page +off in the page cache. + +Version 1.33 +------------ +Fix caching problem, in which readdir of directory containing a file +which was cached could cause the file's time stamp to be updated +without invalidating the readahead data (so we could get stale +file data on the client for that file even as the server copy changed). +Cleanup response processing so cifsd can not loop when abnormally +terminated. + + +Version 1.32 +------------ +Fix oops in ls when Transact2 FindFirst (or FindNext) returns more than one +transact response for an SMB request and search entry split across two frames. +Add support for lsattr (getting ext2/ext3/reiserfs attr flags from the server) +as new protocol extensions. Do not send Get/Set calls for POSIX ACLs +unless server explicitly claims to support them in CIFS Unix extensions +POSIX ACL capability bit. Fix packet signing when multiuser mounting with +different users from the same client to the same server. Fix oops in +cifs_close. Add mount option for remapping reserved characters in +filenames (also allow recognizing files with created by SFU which have any +of these seven reserved characters, except backslash, to be recognized). +Fix invalid transact2 message (we were sometimes trying to interpret +oplock breaks as SMB responses). Add ioctl for checking that the +current uid matches the uid of the mounter (needed by umount.cifs). +Reduce the number of large buffer allocations in cifs response processing +(significantly reduces memory pressure under heavy stress with multiple +processes accessing the same server at the same time). + +Version 1.31 +------------ +Fix updates of DOS attributes and time fields so that files on NT4 servers +do not get marked delete on close. Display sizes of cifs buffer pools in +cifs stats. Fix oops in unmount when cifsd thread being killed by +shutdown. Add generic readv/writev and aio support. Report inode numbers +consistently in readdir and lookup (when serverino mount option is +specified use the inode number that the server reports - for both lookup +and readdir, otherwise by default the locally generated inode number is used +for inodes created in either path since servers are not always able to +provide unique inode numbers when exporting multiple volumes from under one +sharename). + +Version 1.30 +------------ +Allow new nouser_xattr mount parm to disable xattr support for user namespace. +Do not flag user_xattr mount parm in dmesg. Retry failures setting file time +(mostly affects NT4 servers) by retry with handle based network operation. +Add new POSIX Query FS Info for returning statfs info more accurately. +Handle passwords with multiple commas in them. + +Version 1.29 +------------ +Fix default mode in sysfs of cifs module parms. Remove old readdir routine. +Fix capabilities flags for large readx so as to allow reads larger than 64K. + +Version 1.28 +------------ +Add module init parm for large SMB buffer size (to allow it to be changed +from its default of 16K) which is especially useful for large file copy +when mounting with the directio mount option. Fix oops after +returning from mount when experimental ExtendedSecurity enabled and +SpnegoNegotiated returning invalid error. Fix case to retry better when +peek returns from 1 to 3 bytes on socket which should have more data. +Fixed path based calls (such as cifs lookup) to handle path names +longer than 530 (now can handle PATH_MAX). Fix pass through authentication +from Samba server to DC (Samba required dummy LM password). + +Version 1.27 +------------ +Turn off DNOTIFY (directory change notification support) by default +(unless built with the experimental flag) to fix hang with KDE +file browser. Fix DNOTIFY flag mappings. Fix hang (in wait_event +waiting on an SMB response) in SendReceive when session dies but +reconnects quickly from another task. Add module init parms for +minimum number of large and small network buffers in the buffer pools, +and for the maximum number of simultaneous requests. + +Version 1.26 +------------ +Add setfacl support to allow setting of ACLs remotely to Samba 3.10 and later +and other POSIX CIFS compliant servers. Fix error mapping for getfacl +to EOPNOTSUPP when server does not support posix acls on the wire. Fix +improperly zeroed buffer in CIFS Unix extensions set times call. + +Version 1.25 +------------ +Fix internationalization problem in cifs readdir with filenames that map to +longer UTF-8 strings than the string on the wire was in Unicode. Add workaround +for readdir to netapp servers. Fix search rewind (seek into readdir to return +non-consecutive entries). Do not do readdir when server negotiates +buffer size to small to fit filename. Add support for reading POSIX ACLs from +the server (add also acl and noacl mount options). + +Version 1.24 +------------ +Optionally allow using server side inode numbers, rather than client generated +ones by specifying mount option "serverino" - this is required for some apps +to work which double check hardlinked files and have persistent inode numbers. + +Version 1.23 +------------ +Multiple bigendian fixes. On little endian systems (for reconnect after +network failure) fix tcp session reconnect code so we do not try first +to reconnect on reverse of port 445. Treat reparse points (NTFS junctions) +as directories rather than symlinks because we can do follow link on them. + +Version 1.22 +------------ +Add config option to enable XATTR (extended attribute) support, mapping +xattr names in the "user." namespace space to SMB/CIFS EAs. Lots of +minor fixes pointed out by the Stanford SWAT checker (mostly missing +or out of order NULL pointer checks in little used error paths). + +Version 1.21 +------------ +Add new mount parm to control whether mode check (generic_permission) is done +on the client. If Unix extensions are enabled and the uids on the client +and server do not match, client permission checks are meaningless on +server uids that do not exist on the client (this does not affect the +normal ACL check which occurs on the server). Fix default uid +on mknod to match create and mkdir. Add optional mount parm to allow +override of the default uid behavior (in which the server sets the uid +and gid of newly created files). Normally for network filesystem mounts +user want the server to set the uid/gid on newly created files (rather than +using uid of the client processes you would in a local filesystem). + +Version 1.20 +------------ +Make transaction counts more consistent. Merge /proc/fs/cifs/SimultaneousOps +info into /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData. Fix oops in rare oops in readdir +(in build_wildcard_path_from_dentry). Fix mknod to pass type field +(block/char/fifo) properly. Remove spurious mount warning log entry when +credentials passed as mount argument. Set major/minor device number in +inode for block and char devices when unix extensions enabled. + +Version 1.19 +------------ +Fix /proc/fs/cifs/Stats and DebugData display to handle larger +amounts of return data. Properly limit requests to MAX_REQ (50 +is the usual maximum active multiplex SMB/CIFS requests per server). +Do not kill cifsd (and thus hurt the other SMB session) when more than one +session to the same server (but with different userids) exists and one +of the two user's smb sessions is being removed while leaving the other. +Do not loop reconnecting in cifsd demultiplex thread when admin +kills the thread without going through unmount. + +Version 1.18 +------------ +Do not rename hardlinked files (since that should be a noop). Flush +cached write behind data when reopening a file after session abend, +except when already in write. Grab per socket sem during reconnect +to avoid oops in sendmsg if overlapping with reconnect. Do not +reset cached inode file size on readdir for files open for write on +client. + + +Version 1.17 +------------ +Update number of blocks in file so du command is happier (in Linux a fake +blocksize of 512 is required for calculating number of blocks in inode). +Fix prepare write of partial pages to read in data from server if possible. +Fix race on tcpStatus field between unmount and reconnection code, causing +cifsd process sometimes to hang around forever. Improve out of memory +checks in cifs_filldir + +Version 1.16 +------------ +Fix incorrect file size in file handle based setattr on big endian hardware. +Fix oops in build_path_from_dentry when out of memory. Add checks for invalid +and closing file structs in writepage/partialpagewrite. Add statistics +for each mounted share (new menuconfig option). Fix endianness problem in +volume information displayed in /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData (only affects +affects big endian architectures). Prevent renames while constructing +path names for open, mkdir and rmdir. + +Version 1.15 +------------ +Change to mempools for alloc smb request buffers and multiplex structs +to better handle low memory problems (and potential deadlocks). + +Version 1.14 +------------ +Fix incomplete listings of large directories on Samba servers when Unix +extensions enabled. Fix oops when smb_buffer can not be allocated. Fix +rename deadlock when writing out dirty pages at same time. + +Version 1.13 +------------ +Fix open of files in which O_CREATE can cause the mode to change in +some cases. Fix case in which retry of write overlaps file close. +Fix PPC64 build error. Reduce excessive stack usage in smb password +hashing. Fix overwrite of Linux user's view of file mode to Windows servers. + +Version 1.12 +------------ +Fixes for large file copy, signal handling, socket retry, buffer +allocation and low memory situations. + +Version 1.11 +------------ +Better port 139 support to Windows servers (RFC1001/RFC1002 Session_Initialize) +also now allowing support for specifying client netbiosname. NT4 support added. + +Version 1.10 +------------ +Fix reconnection (and certain failed mounts) to properly wake up the +blocked users thread so it does not seem hung (in some cases was blocked +until the cifs receive timeout expired). Fix spurious error logging +to kernel log when application with open network files killed. + +Version 1.09 +------------ +Fix /proc/fs module unload warning message (that could be logged +to the kernel log). Fix intermittent failure in connectathon +test7 (hardlink count not immediately refreshed in case in which +inode metadata can be incorrectly kept cached when time near zero) + +Version 1.08 +------------ +Allow file_mode and dir_mode (specified at mount time) to be enforced +locally (the server already enforced its own ACLs too) for servers +that do not report the correct mode (do not support the +CIFS Unix Extensions). + +Version 1.07 +------------ +Fix some small memory leaks in some unmount error paths. Fix major leak +of cache pages in readpages causing multiple read oriented stress +testcases (including fsx, and even large file copy) to fail over time. + +Version 1.06 +------------ +Send NTCreateX with ATTR_POSIX if Linux/Unix extensions negotiated with server. +This allows files that differ only in case and improves performance of file +creation and file open to such servers. Fix semaphore conflict which causes +slow delete of open file to Samba (which unfortunately can cause an oplock +break to self while vfs_unlink held i_sem) which can hang for 20 seconds. + +Version 1.05 +------------ +fixes to cifs_readpages for fsx test case + +Version 1.04 +------------ +Fix caching data integrity bug when extending file size especially when no +oplock on file. Fix spurious logging of valid already parsed mount options +that are parsed outside of the cifs vfs such as nosuid. + + +Version 1.03 +------------ +Connect to server when port number override not specified, and tcp port +unitialized. Reset search to restart at correct file when kernel routine +filldir returns error during large directory searches (readdir). + +Version 1.02 +------------ +Fix caching problem when files opened by multiple clients in which +page cache could contain stale data, and write through did +not occur often enough while file was still open when read ahead +(read oplock) not allowed. Treat "sep=" when first mount option +as an override of comma as the default separator between mount +options. + +Version 1.01 +------------ +Allow passwords longer than 16 bytes. Allow null password string. + +Version 1.00 +------------ +Gracefully clean up failed mounts when attempting to mount to servers such as +Windows 98 that terminate tcp sessions during protocol negotiation. Handle +embedded commas in mount parsing of passwords. + +Version 0.99 +------------ +Invalidate local inode cached pages on oplock break and when last file +instance is closed so that the client does not continue using stale local +copy rather than later modified server copy of file. Do not reconnect +when server drops the tcp session prematurely before negotiate +protocol response. Fix oops in reopen_file when dentry freed. Allow +the support for CIFS Unix Extensions to be disabled via proc interface. + +Version 0.98 +------------ +Fix hang in commit_write during reconnection of open files under heavy load. +Fix unload_nls oops in a mount failure path. Serialize writes to same socket +which also fixes any possible races when cifs signatures are enabled in SMBs +being sent out of signature sequence number order. + +Version 0.97 +------------ +Fix byte range locking bug (endian problem) causing bad offset and +length. + +Version 0.96 +------------ +Fix oops (in send_sig) caused by CIFS unmount code trying to +wake up the demultiplex thread after it had exited. Do not log +error on harmless oplock release of closed handle. + +Version 0.95 +------------ +Fix unsafe global variable usage and password hash failure on gcc 3.3.1 +Fix problem reconnecting secondary mounts to same server after session +failure. Fix invalid dentry - race in mkdir when directory gets created +by another client between the lookup and mkdir. + +Version 0.94 +------------ +Fix to list processing in reopen_files. Fix reconnection when server hung +but tcpip session still alive. Set proper timeout on socket read. + +Version 0.93 +------------ +Add missing mount options including iocharset. SMP fixes in write and open. +Fix errors in reconnecting after TCP session failure. Fix module unloading +of default nls codepage + +Version 0.92 +------------ +Active smb transactions should never go negative (fix double FreeXid). Fix +list processing in file routines. Check return code on kmalloc in open. +Fix spinlock usage for SMP. + +Version 0.91 +------------ +Fix oops in reopen_files when invalid dentry. drop dentry on server rename +and on revalidate errors. Fix cases where pid is now tgid. Fix return code +on create hard link when server does not support them. + +Version 0.90 +------------ +Fix scheduling while atomic error in getting inode info on newly created file. +Fix truncate of existing files opened with O_CREAT but not O_TRUNC set. + +Version 0.89 +------------ +Fix oops on write to dead tcp session. Remove error log write for case when file open +O_CREAT but not O_EXCL + +Version 0.88 +------------ +Fix non-POSIX behavior on rename of open file and delete of open file by taking +advantage of trans2 SetFileInfo rename facility if available on target server. +Retry on ENOSPC and EAGAIN socket errors. + +Version 0.87 +------------ +Fix oops on big endian readdir. Set blksize to be even power of two (2**blkbits) to fix +allocation size miscalculation. After oplock token lost do not read through +cache. + +Version 0.86 +------------ +Fix oops on empty file readahead. Fix for file size handling for locally cached files. + +Version 0.85 +------------ +Fix oops in mkdir when server fails to return inode info. Fix oops in reopen_files +during auto reconnection to server after server recovered from failure. + +Version 0.84 +------------ +Finish support for Linux 2.5 open/create changes, which removes the +redundant NTCreate/QPathInfo/close that was sent during file create. +Enable oplock by default. Enable packet signing by default (needed to +access many recent Windows servers) + +Version 0.83 +------------ +Fix oops when mounting to long server names caused by inverted parms to kmalloc. +Fix MultiuserMount (/proc/fs/cifs configuration setting) so that when enabled +we will choose a cifs user session (smb uid) that better matches the local +uid if a) the mount uid does not match the current uid and b) we have another +session to the same server (ip address) for a different mount which +matches the current local uid. + +Version 0.82 +------------ +Add support for mknod of block or character devices. Fix oplock +code (distributed caching) to properly send response to oplock +break from server. + +Version 0.81 +------------ +Finish up CIFS packet digital signing for the default +NTLM security case. This should help Windows 2003 +network interoperability since it is common for +packet signing to be required now. Fix statfs (stat -f) +which recently started returning errors due to +invalid value (-1 instead of 0) being set in the +struct kstatfs f_ffiles field. + +Version 0.80 +----------- +Fix oops on stopping oplock thread when removing cifs when +built as module. + +Version 0.79 +------------ +Fix mount options for ro (readonly), uid, gid and file and directory mode. + +Version 0.78 +------------ +Fix errors displayed on failed mounts to be more understandable. +Fixed various incorrect or misleading smb to posix error code mappings. + +Version 0.77 +------------ +Fix display of NTFS DFS junctions to display as symlinks. +They are the network equivalent. Fix oops in +cifs_partialpagewrite caused by missing spinlock protection +of openfile linked list. Allow writebehind caching errors to +be returned to the application at file close. + +Version 0.76 +------------ +Clean up options displayed in /proc/mounts by show_options to +be more consistent with other filesystems. + +Version 0.75 +------------ +Fix delete of readonly file to Windows servers. Reflect +presence or absence of read only dos attribute in mode +bits for servers that do not support CIFS Unix extensions. +Fix shortened results on readdir of large directories to +servers supporting CIFS Unix extensions (caused by +incorrect resume key). + +Version 0.74 +------------ +Fix truncate bug (set file size) that could cause hangs e.g. running fsx + +Version 0.73 +------------ +unload nls if mount fails. + +Version 0.72 +------------ +Add resume key support to search (readdir) code to workaround +Windows bug. Add /proc/fs/cifs/LookupCacheEnable which +allows disabling caching of attribute information for +lookups. + +Version 0.71 +------------ +Add more oplock handling (distributed caching code). Remove +dead code. Remove excessive stack space utilization from +symlink routines. + +Version 0.70 +------------ +Fix oops in get dfs referral (triggered when null path sent in to +mount). Add support for overriding rsize at mount time. + +Version 0.69 +------------ +Fix buffer overrun in readdir which caused intermittent kernel oopses. +Fix writepage code to release kmap on write data. Allow "-ip=" new +mount option to be passed in on parameter distinct from the first part +(server name portion of) the UNC name. Allow override of the +tcp port of the target server via new mount option "-port=" + +Version 0.68 +------------ +Fix search handle leak on rewind. Fix setuid and gid so that they are +reflected in the local inode immediately. Cleanup of whitespace +to make 2.4 and 2.5 versions more consistent. + + +Version 0.67 +------------ +Fix signal sending so that captive thread (cifsd) exits on umount +(which was causing the warning in kmem_cache_free of the request buffers +at rmmod time). This had broken as a sideeffect of the recent global +kernel change to daemonize. Fix memory leak in readdir code which +showed up in "ls -R" (and applications that did search rewinding). + +Version 0.66 +------------ +Reconnect tids and fids after session reconnection (still do not +reconnect byte range locks though). Fix problem caching +lookup information for directory inodes, improving performance, +especially in deep directory trees. Fix various build warnings. + +Version 0.65 +------------ +Finish fixes to commit write for caching/readahead consistency. fsx +now works to Samba servers. Fix oops caused when readahead +was interrupted by a signal. + +Version 0.64 +------------ +Fix data corruption (in partial page after truncate) that caused fsx to +fail to Windows servers. Cleaned up some extraneous error logging in +common error paths. Add generic sendfile support. + +Version 0.63 +------------ +Fix memory leak in AllocMidQEntry. +Finish reconnection logic, so connection with server can be dropped +(or server rebooted) and the cifs client will reconnect. + +Version 0.62 +------------ +Fix temporary socket leak when bad userid or password specified +(or other SMBSessSetup failure). Increase maximum buffer size to slightly +over 16K to allow negotiation of up to Samba and Windows server default read +sizes. Add support for readpages + +Version 0.61 +------------ +Fix oops when username not passed in on mount. Extensive fixes and improvements +to error logging (strip redundant newlines, change debug macros to ensure newline +passed in and to be more consistent). Fix writepage wrong file handle problem, +a readonly file handle could be incorrectly used to attempt to write out +file updates through the page cache to multiply open files. This could cause +the iozone benchmark to fail on the fwrite test. Fix bug mounting two different +shares to the same Windows server when using different usernames +(doing this to Samba servers worked but Windows was rejecting it) - now it is +possible to use different userids when connecting to the same server from a +Linux client. Fix oops when treeDisconnect called during unmount on +previously freed socket. + +Version 0.60 +------------ +Fix oops in readpages caused by not setting address space operations in inode in +rare code path. + +Version 0.59 +------------ +Includes support for deleting of open files and renaming over existing files (per POSIX +requirement). Add readlink support for Windows junction points (directory symlinks). + +Version 0.58 +------------ +Changed read and write to go through pagecache. Added additional address space operations. +Memory mapped operations now working. + +Version 0.57 +------------ +Added writepage code for additional memory mapping support. Fixed leak in xids causing +the simultaneous operations counter (/proc/fs/cifs/SimultaneousOps) to increase on +every stat call. Additional formatting cleanup. + +Version 0.56 +------------ +Fix bigendian bug in order of time conversion. Merge 2.5 to 2.4 version. Formatting cleanup. + +Version 0.55 +------------ +Fixes from Zwane Mwaikambo for adding missing return code checking in a few places. +Also included a modified version of his fix to protect global list manipulation of +the smb session and tree connection and mid related global variables. + +Version 0.54 +------------ +Fix problem with captive thread hanging around at unmount time. Adjust to 2.5.42-pre +changes to superblock layout. Remove wasteful allocation of smb buffers (now the send +buffer is reused for responses). Add more oplock handling. Additional minor cleanup. + +Version 0.53 +------------ +More stylistic updates to better match kernel style. Add additional statistics +for filesystem which can be viewed via /proc/fs/cifs. Add more pieces of NTLMv2 +and CIFS Packet Signing enablement. + +Version 0.52 +------------ +Replace call to sleep_on with safer wait_on_event. +Make stylistic changes to better match kernel style recommendations. +Remove most typedef usage (except for the PDUs themselves). + +Version 0.51 +------------ +Update mount so the -unc mount option is no longer required (the ip address can be specified +in a UNC style device name. Implementation of readpage/writepage started. + +Version 0.50 +------------ +Fix intermittent problem with incorrect smb header checking on badly +fragmented tcp responses + +Version 0.49 +------------ +Fixes to setting of allocation size and file size. + +Version 0.48 +------------ +Various 2.5.38 fixes. Now works on 2.5.38 + +Version 0.47 +------------ +Prepare for 2.5 kernel merge. Remove ifdefs. + +Version 0.46 +------------ +Socket buffer management fixes. Fix dual free. + +Version 0.45 +------------ +Various big endian fixes for hardlinks and symlinks and also for dfs. + +Version 0.44 +------------ +Various big endian fixes for servers with Unix extensions such as Samba + +Version 0.43 +------------ +Various FindNext fixes for incorrect filenames on large directory searches on big endian +clients. basic posix file i/o tests now work on big endian machines, not just le + +Version 0.42 +------------ +SessionSetup and NegotiateProtocol now work from Big Endian machines. +Various Big Endian fixes found during testing on the Linux on 390. Various fixes for compatibility with older +versions of 2.4 kernel (now builds and works again on kernels at least as early as 2.4.7). + +Version 0.41 +------------ +Various minor fixes for Connectathon Posix "basic" file i/o test suite. Directory caching fixed so hardlinked +files now return the correct number of links on fstat as they are repeatedly linked and unlinked. + +Version 0.40 +------------ +Implemented "Raw" (i.e. not encapsulated in SPNEGO) NTLMSSP (i.e. the Security Provider Interface used to negotiate +session advanced session authentication). Raw NTLMSSP is preferred by Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP. +Began implementing support for SPNEGO encapsulation of NTLMSSP based session authentication blobs +(which is the mechanism preferred by Windows 2000 server in the absence of Kerberos). + +Version 0.38 +------------ +Introduced optional mount helper utility mount.cifs and made coreq changes to cifs vfs to enable +it. Fixed a few bugs in the DFS code (e.g. bcc two bytes too short and incorrect uid in PDU). + +Version 0.37 +------------ +Rewrote much of connection and mount/unmount logic to handle bugs with +multiple uses to same share, multiple users to same server etc. + +Version 0.36 +------------ +Fixed major problem with dentry corruption (missing call to dput) + +Version 0.35 +------------ +Rewrite of readdir code to fix bug. Various fixes for bigendian machines. +Begin adding oplock support. Multiusermount and oplockEnabled flags added to /proc/fs/cifs +although corresponding function not fully implemented in the vfs yet + +Version 0.34 +------------ +Fixed dentry caching bug, misc. cleanup + +Version 0.33 +------------ +Fixed 2.5 support to handle build and configure changes as well as misc. 2.5 changes. Now can build +on current 2.5 beta version (2.5.24) of the Linux kernel as well as on 2.4 Linux kernels. +Support for STATUS codes (newer 32 bit NT error codes) added. DFS support begun to be added. + +Version 0.32 +------------ +Unix extensions (symlink, readlink, hardlink, chmod and some chgrp and chown) implemented +and tested against Samba 2.2.5 + + +Version 0.31 +------------ +1) Fixed lockrange to be correct (it was one byte too short) + +2) Fixed GETLK (i.e. the fcntl call to test a range of bytes in a file to see if locked) to correctly +show range as locked when there is a conflict with an existing lock. + +3) default file perms are now 2767 (indicating support for mandatory locks) instead of 777 for directories +in most cases. Eventually will offer optional ability to query server for the correct perms. + +3) Fixed eventual trap when mounting twice to different shares on the same server when the first succeeded +but the second one was invalid and failed (the second one was incorrectly disconnecting the tcp and smb +session) + +4) Fixed error logging of valid mount options + +5) Removed logging of password field. + +6) Moved negotiate, treeDisconnect and uloggoffX (only tConx and SessSetup remain in connect.c) to cifssmb.c +and cleaned them up and made them more consistent with other cifs functions. + +7) Server support for Unix extensions is now fully detected and FindFirst is implemented both ways +(with or without Unix extensions) but FindNext and QueryPathInfo with the Unix extensions are not completed, +nor is the symlink support using the Unix extensions + +8) Started adding the readlink and follow_link code + +Version 0.3 +----------- +Initial drop + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2d5622f60e11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README @@ -0,0 +1,753 @@ +The CIFS VFS support for Linux supports many advanced network filesystem +features such as hierarchical dfs like namespace, hardlinks, locking and more. +It was designed to comply with the SNIA CIFS Technical Reference (which +supersedes the 1992 X/Open SMB Standard) as well as to perform best practice +practical interoperability with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Samba and equivalent +servers. This code was developed in participation with the Protocol Freedom +Information Foundation. + +Please see + http://protocolfreedom.org/ and + http://samba.org/samba/PFIF/ +for more details. + + +For questions or bug reports please contact: + sfrench@samba.org (sfrench@us.ibm.com) + +Build instructions: +================== +For Linux 2.4: +1) Get the kernel source (e.g.from http://www.kernel.org) +and download the cifs vfs source (see the project page +at http://us1.samba.org/samba/Linux_CIFS_client.html) +and change directory into the top of the kernel directory +then patch the kernel (e.g. "patch -p1 < cifs_24.patch") +to add the cifs vfs to your kernel configure options if +it has not already been added (e.g. current SuSE and UL +users do not need to apply the cifs_24.patch since the cifs vfs is +already in the kernel configure menu) and then +mkdir linux/fs/cifs and then copy the current cifs vfs files from +the cifs download to your kernel build directory e.g. + + cp <cifs_download_dir>/fs/cifs/* to <kernel_download_dir>/fs/cifs + +2) make menuconfig (or make xconfig) +3) select cifs from within the network filesystem choices +4) save and exit +5) make dep +6) make modules (or "make" if CIFS VFS not to be built as a module) + +For Linux 2.6: +1) Download the kernel (e.g. from http://www.kernel.org) +and change directory into the top of the kernel directory tree +(e.g. /usr/src/linux-2.5.73) +2) make menuconfig (or make xconfig) +3) select cifs from within the network filesystem choices +4) save and exit +5) make + + +Installation instructions: +========================= +If you have built the CIFS vfs as module (successfully) simply +type "make modules_install" (or if you prefer, manually copy the file to +the modules directory e.g. /lib/modules/2.4.10-4GB/kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.o). + +If you have built the CIFS vfs into the kernel itself, follow the instructions +for your distribution on how to install a new kernel (usually you +would simply type "make install"). + +If you do not have the utility mount.cifs (in the Samba 3.0 source tree and on +the CIFS VFS web site) copy it to the same directory in which mount.smbfs and +similar files reside (usually /sbin). Although the helper software is not +required, mount.cifs is recommended. Eventually the Samba 3.0 utility program +"net" may also be helpful since it may someday provide easier mount syntax for +users who are used to Windows e.g. + net use <mount point> <UNC name or cifs URL> +Note that running the Winbind pam/nss module (logon service) on all of your +Linux clients is useful in mapping Uids and Gids consistently across the +domain to the proper network user. The mount.cifs mount helper can be +trivially built from Samba 3.0 or later source e.g. by executing: + + gcc samba/source/client/mount.cifs.c -o mount.cifs + +If cifs is built as a module, then the size and number of network buffers +and maximum number of simultaneous requests to one server can be configured. +Changing these from their defaults is not recommended. By executing modinfo + modinfo kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.ko +on kernel/fs/cifs/cifs.ko the list of configuration changes that can be made +at module initialization time (by running insmod cifs.ko) can be seen. + +Allowing User Mounts +==================== +To permit users to mount and unmount over directories they own is possible +with the cifs vfs. A way to enable such mounting is to mark the mount.cifs +utility as suid (e.g. "chmod +s /sbin/mount.cifs). To enable users to +umount shares they mount requires +1) mount.cifs version 1.4 or later +2) an entry for the share in /etc/fstab indicating that a user may +unmount it e.g. +//server/usersharename /mnt/username cifs user 0 0 + +Note that when the mount.cifs utility is run suid (allowing user mounts), +in order to reduce risks, the "nosuid" mount flag is passed in on mount to +disallow execution of an suid program mounted on the remote target. +When mount is executed as root, nosuid is not passed in by default, +and execution of suid programs on the remote target would be enabled +by default. This can be changed, as with nfs and other filesystems, +by simply specifying "nosuid" among the mount options. For user mounts +though to be able to pass the suid flag to mount requires rebuilding +mount.cifs with the following flag: + + gcc samba/source/client/mount.cifs.c -DCIFS_ALLOW_USR_SUID -o mount.cifs + +There is a corresponding manual page for cifs mounting in the Samba 3.0 and +later source tree in docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8 + +Allowing User Unmounts +====================== +To permit users to ummount directories that they have user mounted (see above), +the utility umount.cifs may be used. It may be invoked directly, or if +umount.cifs is placed in /sbin, umount can invoke the cifs umount helper +(at least for most versions of the umount utility) for umount of cifs +mounts, unless umount is invoked with -i (which will avoid invoking a umount +helper). As with mount.cifs, to enable user unmounts umount.cifs must be marked +as suid (e.g. "chmod +s /sbin/umount.cifs") or equivalent (some distributions +allow adding entries to a file to the /etc/permissions file to achieve the +equivalent suid effect). For this utility to succeed the target path +must be a cifs mount, and the uid of the current user must match the uid +of the user who mounted the resource. + +Also note that the customary way of allowing user mounts and unmounts is +(instead of using mount.cifs and unmount.cifs as suid) to add a line +to the file /etc/fstab for each //server/share you wish to mount, but +this can become unwieldy when potential mount targets include many +or unpredictable UNC names. + +Samba Considerations +==================== +To get the maximum benefit from the CIFS VFS, we recommend using a server that +supports the SNIA CIFS Unix Extensions standard (e.g. Samba 2.2.5 or later or +Samba 3.0) but the CIFS vfs works fine with a wide variety of CIFS servers. +Note that uid, gid and file permissions will display default values if you do +not have a server that supports the Unix extensions for CIFS (such as Samba +2.2.5 or later). To enable the Unix CIFS Extensions in the Samba server, add +the line: + + unix extensions = yes + +to your smb.conf file on the server. Note that the following smb.conf settings +are also useful (on the Samba server) when the majority of clients are Unix or +Linux: + + case sensitive = yes + delete readonly = yes + ea support = yes + +Note that server ea support is required for supporting xattrs from the Linux +cifs client, and that EA support is present in later versions of Samba (e.g. +3.0.6 and later (also EA support works in all versions of Windows, at least to +shares on NTFS filesystems). Extended Attribute (xattr) support is an optional +feature of most Linux filesystems which may require enabling via +make menuconfig. Client support for extended attributes (user xattr) can be +disabled on a per-mount basis by specifying "nouser_xattr" on mount. + +The CIFS client can get and set POSIX ACLs (getfacl, setfacl) to Samba servers +version 3.10 and later. Setting POSIX ACLs requires enabling both XATTR and +then POSIX support in the CIFS configuration options when building the cifs +module. POSIX ACL support can be disabled on a per mount basic by specifying +"noacl" on mount. + +Some administrators may want to change Samba's smb.conf "map archive" and +"create mask" parameters from the default. Unless the create mask is changed +newly created files can end up with an unnecessarily restrictive default mode, +which may not be what you want, although if the CIFS Unix extensions are +enabled on the server and client, subsequent setattr calls (e.g. chmod) can +fix the mode. Note that creating special devices (mknod) remotely +may require specifying a mkdev function to Samba if you are not using +Samba 3.0.6 or later. For more information on these see the manual pages +("man smb.conf") on the Samba server system. Note that the cifs vfs, +unlike the smbfs vfs, does not read the smb.conf on the client system +(the few optional settings are passed in on mount via -o parameters instead). +Note that Samba 2.2.7 or later includes a fix that allows the CIFS VFS to delete +open files (required for strict POSIX compliance). Windows Servers already +supported this feature. Samba server does not allow symlinks that refer to files +outside of the share, so in Samba versions prior to 3.0.6, most symlinks to +files with absolute paths (ie beginning with slash) such as: + ln -s /mnt/foo bar +would be forbidden. Samba 3.0.6 server or later includes the ability to create +such symlinks safely by converting unsafe symlinks (ie symlinks to server +files that are outside of the share) to a samba specific format on the server +that is ignored by local server applications and non-cifs clients and that will +not be traversed by the Samba server). This is opaque to the Linux client +application using the cifs vfs. Absolute symlinks will work to Samba 3.0.5 or +later, but only for remote clients using the CIFS Unix extensions, and will +be invisbile to Windows clients and typically will not affect local +applications running on the same server as Samba. + +Use instructions: +================ +Once the CIFS VFS support is built into the kernel or installed as a module +(cifs.o), you can use mount syntax like the following to access Samba or Windows +servers: + + mount -t cifs //9.53.216.11/e$ /mnt -o user=myname,pass=mypassword + +Before -o the option -v may be specified to make the mount.cifs +mount helper display the mount steps more verbosely. +After -o the following commonly used cifs vfs specific options +are supported: + + user=<username> + pass=<password> + domain=<domain name> + +Other cifs mount options are described below. Use of TCP names (in addition to +ip addresses) is available if the mount helper (mount.cifs) is installed. If +you do not trust the server to which are mounted, or if you do not have +cifs signing enabled (and the physical network is insecure), consider use +of the standard mount options "noexec" and "nosuid" to reduce the risk of +running an altered binary on your local system (downloaded from a hostile server +or altered by a hostile router). + +Although mounting using format corresponding to the CIFS URL specification is +not possible in mount.cifs yet, it is possible to use an alternate format +for the server and sharename (which is somewhat similar to NFS style mount +syntax) instead of the more widely used UNC format (i.e. \\server\share): + mount -t cifs tcp_name_of_server:share_name /mnt -o user=myname,pass=mypasswd + +When using the mount helper mount.cifs, passwords may be specified via alternate +mechanisms, instead of specifying it after -o using the normal "pass=" syntax +on the command line: +1) By including it in a credential file. Specify credentials=filename as one +of the mount options. Credential files contain two lines + username=someuser + password=your_password +2) By specifying the password in the PASSWD environment variable (similarly +the user name can be taken from the USER environment variable). +3) By specifying the password in a file by name via PASSWD_FILE +4) By specifying the password in a file by file descriptor via PASSWD_FD + +If no password is provided, mount.cifs will prompt for password entry + +Restrictions +============ +Servers must support either "pure-TCP" (port 445 TCP/IP CIFS connections) or RFC +1001/1002 support for "Netbios-Over-TCP/IP." This is not likely to be a +problem as most servers support this. + +Valid filenames differ between Windows and Linux. Windows typically restricts +filenames which contain certain reserved characters (e.g.the character : +which is used to delimit the beginning of a stream name by Windows), while +Linux allows a slightly wider set of valid characters in filenames. Windows +servers can remap such characters when an explicit mapping is specified in +the Server's registry. Samba starting with version 3.10 will allow such +filenames (ie those which contain valid Linux characters, which normally +would be forbidden for Windows/CIFS semantics) as long as the server is +configured for Unix Extensions (and the client has not disabled +/proc/fs/cifs/LinuxExtensionsEnabled). + + +CIFS VFS Mount Options +====================== +A partial list of the supported mount options follows: + user The user name to use when trying to establish + the CIFS session. + password The user password. If the mount helper is + installed, the user will be prompted for password + if not supplied. + ip The ip address of the target server + unc The target server Universal Network Name (export) to + mount. + domain Set the SMB/CIFS workgroup name prepended to the + username during CIFS session establishment + forceuid Set the default uid for inodes to the uid + passed in on mount. For mounts to servers + which do support the CIFS Unix extensions, such as a + properly configured Samba server, the server provides + the uid, gid and mode so this parameter should not be + specified unless the server and clients uid and gid + numbering differ. If the server and client are in the + same domain (e.g. running winbind or nss_ldap) and + the server supports the Unix Extensions then the uid + and gid can be retrieved from the server (and uid + and gid would not have to be specifed on the mount. + For servers which do not support the CIFS Unix + extensions, the default uid (and gid) returned on lookup + of existing files will be the uid (gid) of the person + who executed the mount (root, except when mount.cifs + is configured setuid for user mounts) unless the "uid=" + (gid) mount option is specified. Also note that permission + checks (authorization checks) on accesses to a file occur + at the server, but there are cases in which an administrator + may want to restrict at the client as well. For those + servers which do not report a uid/gid owner + (such as Windows), permissions can also be checked at the + client, and a crude form of client side permission checking + can be enabled by specifying file_mode and dir_mode on + the client. (default) + forcegid (similar to above but for the groupid instead of uid) (default) + noforceuid Fill in file owner information (uid) by requesting it from + the server if possible. With this option, the value given in + the uid= option (on mount) will only be used if the server + can not support returning uids on inodes. + noforcegid (similar to above but for the group owner, gid, instead of uid) + uid Set the default uid for inodes, and indicate to the + cifs kernel driver which local user mounted. If the server + supports the unix extensions the default uid is + not used to fill in the owner fields of inodes (files) + unless the "forceuid" parameter is specified. + gid Set the default gid for inodes (similar to above). + file_mode If CIFS Unix extensions are not supported by the server + this overrides the default mode for file inodes. + fsc Enable local disk caching using FS-Cache (off by default). This + option could be useful to improve performance on a slow link, + heavily loaded server and/or network where reading from the + disk is faster than reading from the server (over the network). + This could also impact scalability positively as the + number of calls to the server are reduced. However, local + caching is not suitable for all workloads for e.g. read-once + type workloads. So, you need to consider carefully your + workload/scenario before using this option. Currently, local + disk caching is functional for CIFS files opened as read-only. + dir_mode If CIFS Unix extensions are not supported by the server + this overrides the default mode for directory inodes. + port attempt to contact the server on this tcp port, before + trying the usual ports (port 445, then 139). + iocharset Codepage used to convert local path names to and from + Unicode. Unicode is used by default for network path + names if the server supports it. If iocharset is + not specified then the nls_default specified + during the local client kernel build will be used. + If server does not support Unicode, this parameter is + unused. + rsize default read size (usually 16K). The client currently + can not use rsize larger than CIFSMaxBufSize. CIFSMaxBufSize + defaults to 16K and may be changed (from 8K to the maximum + kmalloc size allowed by your kernel) at module install time + for cifs.ko. Setting CIFSMaxBufSize to a very large value + will cause cifs to use more memory and may reduce performance + in some cases. To use rsize greater than 127K (the original + cifs protocol maximum) also requires that the server support + a new Unix Capability flag (for very large read) which some + newer servers (e.g. Samba 3.0.26 or later) do. rsize can be + set from a minimum of 2048 to a maximum of 130048 (127K or + CIFSMaxBufSize, whichever is smaller) + wsize default write size (default 57344) + maximum wsize currently allowed by CIFS is 57344 (fourteen + 4096 byte pages) + actimeo=n attribute cache timeout in seconds (default 1 second). + After this timeout, the cifs client requests fresh attribute + information from the server. This option allows to tune the + attribute cache timeout to suit the workload needs. Shorter + timeouts mean better the cache coherency, but increased number + of calls to the server. Longer timeouts mean reduced number + of calls to the server at the expense of less stricter cache + coherency checks (i.e. incorrect attribute cache for a short + period of time). + rw mount the network share read-write (note that the + server may still consider the share read-only) + ro mount network share read-only + version used to distinguish different versions of the + mount helper utility (not typically needed) + sep if first mount option (after the -o), overrides + the comma as the separator between the mount + parms. e.g. + -o user=myname,password=mypassword,domain=mydom + could be passed instead with period as the separator by + -o sep=.user=myname.password=mypassword.domain=mydom + this might be useful when comma is contained within username + or password or domain. This option is less important + when the cifs mount helper cifs.mount (version 1.1 or later) + is used. + nosuid Do not allow remote executables with the suid bit + program to be executed. This is only meaningful for mounts + to servers such as Samba which support the CIFS Unix Extensions. + If you do not trust the servers in your network (your mount + targets) it is recommended that you specify this option for + greater security. + exec Permit execution of binaries on the mount. + noexec Do not permit execution of binaries on the mount. + dev Recognize block devices on the remote mount. + nodev Do not recognize devices on the remote mount. + suid Allow remote files on this mountpoint with suid enabled to + be executed (default for mounts when executed as root, + nosuid is default for user mounts). + credentials Although ignored by the cifs kernel component, it is used by + the mount helper, mount.cifs. When mount.cifs is installed it + opens and reads the credential file specified in order + to obtain the userid and password arguments which are passed to + the cifs vfs. + guest Although ignored by the kernel component, the mount.cifs + mount helper will not prompt the user for a password + if guest is specified on the mount options. If no + password is specified a null password will be used. + perm Client does permission checks (vfs_permission check of uid + and gid of the file against the mode and desired operation), + Note that this is in addition to the normal ACL check on the + target machine done by the server software. + Client permission checking is enabled by default. + noperm Client does not do permission checks. This can expose + files on this mount to access by other users on the local + client system. It is typically only needed when the server + supports the CIFS Unix Extensions but the UIDs/GIDs on the + client and server system do not match closely enough to allow + access by the user doing the mount, but it may be useful with + non CIFS Unix Extension mounts for cases in which the default + mode is specified on the mount but is not to be enforced on the + client (e.g. perhaps when MultiUserMount is enabled) + Note that this does not affect the normal ACL check on the + target machine done by the server software (of the server + ACL against the user name provided at mount time). + serverino Use server's inode numbers instead of generating automatically + incrementing inode numbers on the client. Although this will + make it easier to spot hardlinked files (as they will have + the same inode numbers) and inode numbers may be persistent, + note that the server does not guarantee that the inode numbers + are unique if multiple server side mounts are exported under a + single share (since inode numbers on the servers might not + be unique if multiple filesystems are mounted under the same + shared higher level directory). Note that some older + (e.g. pre-Windows 2000) do not support returning UniqueIDs + or the CIFS Unix Extensions equivalent and for those + this mount option will have no effect. Exporting cifs mounts + under nfsd requires this mount option on the cifs mount. + This is now the default if server supports the + required network operation. + noserverino Client generates inode numbers (rather than using the actual one + from the server). These inode numbers will vary after + unmount or reboot which can confuse some applications, + but not all server filesystems support unique inode + numbers. + setuids If the CIFS Unix extensions are negotiated with the server + the client will attempt to set the effective uid and gid of + the local process on newly created files, directories, and + devices (create, mkdir, mknod). If the CIFS Unix Extensions + are not negotiated, for newly created files and directories + instead of using the default uid and gid specified on + the mount, cache the new file's uid and gid locally which means + that the uid for the file can change when the inode is + reloaded (or the user remounts the share). + nosetuids The client will not attempt to set the uid and gid on + on newly created files, directories, and devices (create, + mkdir, mknod) which will result in the server setting the + uid and gid to the default (usually the server uid of the + user who mounted the share). Letting the server (rather than + the client) set the uid and gid is the default. If the CIFS + Unix Extensions are not negotiated then the uid and gid for + new files will appear to be the uid (gid) of the mounter or the + uid (gid) parameter specified on the mount. + netbiosname When mounting to servers via port 139, specifies the RFC1001 + source name to use to represent the client netbios machine + name when doing the RFC1001 netbios session initialize. + direct Do not do inode data caching on files opened on this mount. + This precludes mmapping files on this mount. In some cases + with fast networks and little or no caching benefits on the + client (e.g. when the application is doing large sequential + reads bigger than page size without rereading the same data) + this can provide better performance than the default + behavior which caches reads (readahead) and writes + (writebehind) through the local Linux client pagecache + if oplock (caching token) is granted and held. Note that + direct allows write operations larger than page size + to be sent to the server. + strictcache Use for switching on strict cache mode. In this mode the + client read from the cache all the time it has Oplock Level II, + otherwise - read from the server. All written data are stored + in the cache, but if the client doesn't have Exclusive Oplock, + it writes the data to the server. + rwpidforward Forward pid of a process who opened a file to any read or write + operation on that file. This prevent applications like WINE + from failing on read and write if we use mandatory brlock style. + acl Allow setfacl and getfacl to manage posix ACLs if server + supports them. (default) + noacl Do not allow setfacl and getfacl calls on this mount + user_xattr Allow getting and setting user xattrs (those attributes whose + name begins with "user." or "os2.") as OS/2 EAs (extended + attributes) to the server. This allows support of the + setfattr and getfattr utilities. (default) + nouser_xattr Do not allow getfattr/setfattr to get/set/list xattrs + mapchars Translate six of the seven reserved characters (not backslash) + *?<>|: + to the remap range (above 0xF000), which also + allows the CIFS client to recognize files created with + such characters by Windows's POSIX emulation. This can + also be useful when mounting to most versions of Samba + (which also forbids creating and opening files + whose names contain any of these seven characters). + This has no effect if the server does not support + Unicode on the wire. + nomapchars Do not translate any of these seven characters (default). + nocase Request case insensitive path name matching (case + sensitive is the default if the server supports it). + (mount option "ignorecase" is identical to "nocase") + posixpaths If CIFS Unix extensions are supported, attempt to + negotiate posix path name support which allows certain + characters forbidden in typical CIFS filenames, without + requiring remapping. (default) + noposixpaths If CIFS Unix extensions are supported, do not request + posix path name support (this may cause servers to + reject creatingfile with certain reserved characters). + nounix Disable the CIFS Unix Extensions for this mount (tree + connection). This is rarely needed, but it may be useful + in order to turn off multiple settings all at once (ie + posix acls, posix locks, posix paths, symlink support + and retrieving uids/gids/mode from the server) or to + work around a bug in server which implement the Unix + Extensions. + nobrl Do not send byte range lock requests to the server. + This is necessary for certain applications that break + with cifs style mandatory byte range locks (and most + cifs servers do not yet support requesting advisory + byte range locks). + forcemandatorylock Even if the server supports posix (advisory) byte range + locking, send only mandatory lock requests. For some + (presumably rare) applications, originally coded for + DOS/Windows, which require Windows style mandatory byte range + locking, they may be able to take advantage of this option, + forcing the cifs client to only send mandatory locks + even if the cifs server would support posix advisory locks. + "forcemand" is accepted as a shorter form of this mount + option. + nostrictsync If this mount option is set, when an application does an + fsync call then the cifs client does not send an SMB Flush + to the server (to force the server to write all dirty data + for this file immediately to disk), although cifs still sends + all dirty (cached) file data to the server and waits for the + server to respond to the write. Since SMB Flush can be + very slow, and some servers may be reliable enough (to risk + delaying slightly flushing the data to disk on the server), + turning on this option may be useful to improve performance for + applications that fsync too much, at a small risk of server + crash. If this mount option is not set, by default cifs will + send an SMB flush request (and wait for a response) on every + fsync call. + nodfs Disable DFS (global name space support) even if the + server claims to support it. This can help work around + a problem with parsing of DFS paths with Samba server + versions 3.0.24 and 3.0.25. + remount remount the share (often used to change from ro to rw mounts + or vice versa) + cifsacl Report mode bits (e.g. on stat) based on the Windows ACL for + the file. (EXPERIMENTAL) + servern Specify the server 's netbios name (RFC1001 name) to use + when attempting to setup a session to the server. + This is needed for mounting to some older servers (such + as OS/2 or Windows 98 and Windows ME) since they do not + support a default server name. A server name can be up + to 15 characters long and is usually uppercased. + sfu When the CIFS Unix Extensions are not negotiated, attempt to + create device files and fifos in a format compatible with + Services for Unix (SFU). In addition retrieve bits 10-12 + of the mode via the SETFILEBITS extended attribute (as + SFU does). In the future the bottom 9 bits of the + mode also will be emulated using queries of the security + descriptor (ACL). + mfsymlinks Enable support for Minshall+French symlinks + (see http://wiki.samba.org/index.php/UNIX_Extensions#Minshall.2BFrench_symlinks) + This option is ignored when specified together with the + 'sfu' option. Minshall+French symlinks are used even if + the server supports the CIFS Unix Extensions. + sign Must use packet signing (helps avoid unwanted data modification + by intermediate systems in the route). Note that signing + does not work with lanman or plaintext authentication. + seal Must seal (encrypt) all data on this mounted share before + sending on the network. Requires support for Unix Extensions. + Note that this differs from the sign mount option in that it + causes encryption of data sent over this mounted share but other + shares mounted to the same server are unaffected. + locallease This option is rarely needed. Fcntl F_SETLEASE is + used by some applications such as Samba and NFSv4 server to + check to see whether a file is cacheable. CIFS has no way + to explicitly request a lease, but can check whether a file + is cacheable (oplocked). Unfortunately, even if a file + is not oplocked, it could still be cacheable (ie cifs client + could grant fcntl leases if no other local processes are using + the file) for cases for example such as when the server does not + support oplocks and the user is sure that the only updates to + the file will be from this client. Specifying this mount option + will allow the cifs client to check for leases (only) locally + for files which are not oplocked instead of denying leases + in that case. (EXPERIMENTAL) + sec Security mode. Allowed values are: + none attempt to connection as a null user (no name) + krb5 Use Kerberos version 5 authentication + krb5i Use Kerberos authentication and packet signing + ntlm Use NTLM password hashing (default) + ntlmi Use NTLM password hashing with signing (if + /proc/fs/cifs/PacketSigningEnabled on or if + server requires signing also can be the default) + ntlmv2 Use NTLMv2 password hashing + ntlmv2i Use NTLMv2 password hashing with packet signing + lanman (if configured in kernel config) use older + lanman hash +hard Retry file operations if server is not responding +soft Limit retries to unresponsive servers (usually only + one retry) before returning an error. (default) + +The mount.cifs mount helper also accepts a few mount options before -o +including: + + -S take password from stdin (equivalent to setting the environment + variable "PASSWD_FD=0" + -V print mount.cifs version + -? display simple usage information + +With most 2.6 kernel versions of modutils, the version of the cifs kernel +module can be displayed via modinfo. + +Misc /proc/fs/cifs Flags and Debug Info +======================================= +Informational pseudo-files: +DebugData Displays information about active CIFS sessions and + shares, features enabled as well as the cifs.ko + version. +Stats Lists summary resource usage information as well as per + share statistics, if CONFIG_CIFS_STATS in enabled + in the kernel configuration. + +Configuration pseudo-files: +PacketSigningEnabled If set to one, cifs packet signing is enabled + and will be used if the server requires + it. If set to two, cifs packet signing is + required even if the server considers packet + signing optional. (default 1) +SecurityFlags Flags which control security negotiation and + also packet signing. Authentication (may/must) + flags (e.g. for NTLM and/or NTLMv2) may be combined with + the signing flags. Specifying two different password + hashing mechanisms (as "must use") on the other hand + does not make much sense. Default flags are + 0x07007 + (NTLM, NTLMv2 and packet signing allowed). The maximum + allowable flags if you want to allow mounts to servers + using weaker password hashes is 0x37037 (lanman, + plaintext, ntlm, ntlmv2, signing allowed). Some + SecurityFlags require the corresponding menuconfig + options to be enabled (lanman and plaintext require + CONFIG_CIFS_WEAK_PW_HASH for example). Enabling + plaintext authentication currently requires also + enabling lanman authentication in the security flags + because the cifs module only supports sending + laintext passwords using the older lanman dialect + form of the session setup SMB. (e.g. for authentication + using plain text passwords, set the SecurityFlags + to 0x30030): + + may use packet signing 0x00001 + must use packet signing 0x01001 + may use NTLM (most common password hash) 0x00002 + must use NTLM 0x02002 + may use NTLMv2 0x00004 + must use NTLMv2 0x04004 + may use Kerberos security 0x00008 + must use Kerberos 0x08008 + may use lanman (weak) password hash 0x00010 + must use lanman password hash 0x10010 + may use plaintext passwords 0x00020 + must use plaintext passwords 0x20020 + (reserved for future packet encryption) 0x00040 + +cifsFYI If set to non-zero value, additional debug information + will be logged to the system error log. This field + contains three flags controlling different classes of + debugging entries. The maximum value it can be set + to is 7 which enables all debugging points (default 0). + Some debugging statements are not compiled into the + cifs kernel unless CONFIG_CIFS_DEBUG2 is enabled in the + kernel configuration. cifsFYI may be set to one or + nore of the following flags (7 sets them all): + + log cifs informational messages 0x01 + log return codes from cifs entry points 0x02 + log slow responses (ie which take longer than 1 second) + CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 must be enabled in .config 0x04 + + +traceSMB If set to one, debug information is logged to the + system error log with the start of smb requests + and responses (default 0) +LookupCacheEnable If set to one, inode information is kept cached + for one second improving performance of lookups + (default 1) +OplockEnabled If set to one, safe distributed caching enabled. + (default 1) +LinuxExtensionsEnabled If set to one then the client will attempt to + use the CIFS "UNIX" extensions which are optional + protocol enhancements that allow CIFS servers + to return accurate UID/GID information as well + as support symbolic links. If you use servers + such as Samba that support the CIFS Unix + extensions but do not want to use symbolic link + support and want to map the uid and gid fields + to values supplied at mount (rather than the + actual values, then set this to zero. (default 1) + +These experimental features and tracing can be enabled by changing flags in +/proc/fs/cifs (after the cifs module has been installed or built into the +kernel, e.g. insmod cifs). To enable a feature set it to 1 e.g. to enable +tracing to the kernel message log type: + + echo 7 > /proc/fs/cifs/cifsFYI + +cifsFYI functions as a bit mask. Setting it to 1 enables additional kernel +logging of various informational messages. 2 enables logging of non-zero +SMB return codes while 4 enables logging of requests that take longer +than one second to complete (except for byte range lock requests). +Setting it to 4 requires defining CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 manually in the +source code (typically by setting it in the beginning of cifsglob.h), +and setting it to seven enables all three. Finally, tracing +the start of smb requests and responses can be enabled via: + + echo 1 > /proc/fs/cifs/traceSMB + +Per share (per client mount) statistics are available in /proc/fs/cifs/Stats +if the kernel was configured with cifs statistics enabled. The statistics +represent the number of successful (ie non-zero return code from the server) +SMB responses to some of the more common commands (open, delete, mkdir etc.). +Also recorded is the total bytes read and bytes written to the server for +that share. Note that due to client caching effects this can be less than the +number of bytes read and written by the application running on the client. +The statistics for the number of total SMBs and oplock breaks are different in +that they represent all for that share, not just those for which the server +returned success. + +Also note that "cat /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData" will display information about +the active sessions and the shares that are mounted. + +Enabling Kerberos (extended security) works but requires version 1.2 or later +of the helper program cifs.upcall to be present and to be configured in the +/etc/request-key.conf file. The cifs.upcall helper program is from the Samba +project(http://www.samba.org). NTLM and NTLMv2 and LANMAN support do not +require this helper. Note that NTLMv2 security (which does not require the +cifs.upcall helper program), instead of using Kerberos, is sufficient for +some use cases. + +DFS support allows transparent redirection to shares in an MS-DFS name space. +In addition, DFS support for target shares which are specified as UNC +names which begin with host names (rather than IP addresses) requires +a user space helper (such as cifs.upcall) to be present in order to +translate host names to ip address, and the user space helper must also +be configured in the file /etc/request-key.conf. Samba, Windows servers and +many NAS appliances support DFS as a way of constructing a global name +space to ease network configuration and improve reliability. + +To use cifs Kerberos and DFS support, the Linux keyutils package should be +installed and something like the following lines should be added to the +/etc/request-key.conf file: + +create cifs.spnego * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k +create dns_resolver * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k + +CIFS kernel module parameters +============================= +These module parameters can be specified or modified either during the time of +module loading or during the runtime by using the interface + /proc/module/cifs/parameters/<param> + +i.e. echo "value" > /sys/module/cifs/parameters/<param> + +1. enable_oplocks - Enable or disable oplocks. Oplocks are enabled by default. + [Y/y/1]. To disable use any of [N/n/0]. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..355abcdcda98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +Version 1.53 May 20, 2008 + +A Partial List of Missing Features +================================== + +Contributions are welcome. There are plenty of opportunities +for visible, important contributions to this module. Here +is a partial list of the known problems and missing features: + +a) Support for SecurityDescriptors(Windows/CIFS ACLs) for chmod/chgrp/chown +so that these operations can be supported to Windows servers + +b) Mapping POSIX ACLs (and eventually NFSv4 ACLs) to CIFS +SecurityDescriptors + +c) Better pam/winbind integration (e.g. to handle uid mapping +better) + +d) Cleanup now unneeded SessSetup code in +fs/cifs/connect.c and add back in NTLMSSP code if any servers +need it + +e) fix NTLMv2 signing when two mounts with different users to same +server. + +f) Directory entry caching relies on a 1 second timer, rather than +using FindNotify or equivalent. - (started) + +g) quota support (needs minor kernel change since quota calls +to make it to network filesystems or deviceless filesystems) + +h) investigate sync behavior (including syncpage) and check +for proper behavior of intr/nointr + +i) improve support for very old servers (OS/2 and Win9x for example) +Including support for changing the time remotely (utimes command). + +j) hook lower into the sockets api (as NFS/SunRPC does) to avoid the +extra copy in/out of the socket buffers in some cases. + +k) Better optimize open (and pathbased setfilesize) to reduce the +oplock breaks coming from windows srv. Piggyback identical file +opens on top of each other by incrementing reference count rather +than resending (helps reduce server resource utilization and avoid +spurious oplock breaks). + +l) Improve performance of readpages by sending more than one read +at a time when 8 pages or more are requested. In conjuntion +add support for async_cifs_readpages. + +m) Add support for storing symlink info to Windows servers +in the Extended Attribute format their SFU clients would recognize. + +n) Finish fcntl D_NOTIFY support so kde and gnome file list windows +will autorefresh (partially complete by Asser). Needs minor kernel +vfs change to support removing D_NOTIFY on a file. + +o) Add GUI tool to configure /proc/fs/cifs settings and for display of +the CIFS statistics (started) + +p) implement support for security and trusted categories of xattrs +(requires minor protocol extension) to enable better support for SELINUX + +q) Implement O_DIRECT flag on open (already supported on mount) + +r) Create UID mapping facility so server UIDs can be mapped on a per +mount or a per server basis to client UIDs or nobody if no mapping +exists. This is helpful when Unix extensions are negotiated to +allow better permission checking when UIDs differ on the server +and client. Add new protocol request to the CIFS protocol +standard for asking the server for the corresponding name of a +particular uid. + +s) Add support for CIFS Unix and also the newer POSIX extensions to the +server side for Samba 4. + +t) In support for OS/2 (LANMAN 1.2 and LANMAN2.1 based SMB servers) +need to add ability to set time to server (utimes command) + +u) DOS attrs - returned as pseudo-xattr in Samba format (check VFAT and NTFS for this too) + +v) mount check for unmatched uids + +w) Add support for new vfs entry point for fallocate + +x) Fix Samba 3 server to handle Linux kernel aio so dbench with lots of +processes can proceed better in parallel (on the server) + +y) Fix Samba 3 to handle reads/writes over 127K (and remove the cifs mount +restriction of wsize max being 127K) + +KNOWN BUGS (updated April 24, 2007) +==================================== +See http://bugzilla.samba.org - search on product "CifsVFS" for +current bug list. + +1) existing symbolic links (Windows reparse points) are recognized but +can not be created remotely. They are implemented for Samba and those that +support the CIFS Unix extensions, although earlier versions of Samba +overly restrict the pathnames. +2) follow_link and readdir code does not follow dfs junctions +but recognizes them +3) create of new files to FAT partitions on Windows servers can +succeed but still return access denied (appears to be Windows +server not cifs client problem) and has not been reproduced recently. +NTFS partitions do not have this problem. +4) Unix/POSIX capabilities are reset after reconnection, and affect +a few fields in the tree connection but we do do not know which +superblocks to apply these changes to. We should probably walk +the list of superblocks to set these. Also need to check the +flags on the second mount to the same share, and see if we +can do the same trick that NFS does to remount duplicate shares. + +Misc testing to do +================== +1) check out max path names and max path name components against various server +types. Try nested symlinks (8 deep). Return max path name in stat -f information + +2) Modify file portion of ltp so it can run against a mounted network +share and run it against cifs vfs in automated fashion. + +3) Additional performance testing and optimization using iozone and similar - +there are some easy changes that can be done to parallelize sequential writes, +and when signing is disabled to request larger read sizes (larger than +negotiated size) and send larger write sizes to modern servers. + +4) More exhaustively test against less common servers. More testing +against Windows 9x, Windows ME servers. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2fac91ac96cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + This is the client VFS module for the Common Internet File System + (CIFS) protocol which is the successor to the Server Message Block + (SMB) protocol, the native file sharing mechanism for most early + PC operating systems. New and improved versions of CIFS are now + called SMB2 and SMB3. These dialects are also supported by the + CIFS VFS module. CIFS is fully supported by network + file servers such as Windows 2000, 2003, 2008 and 2012 + as well by Samba (which provides excellent CIFS + server support for Linux and many other operating systems), so + this network filesystem client can mount to a wide variety of + servers. + + The intent of this module is to provide the most advanced network + file system function for CIFS compliant servers, including better + POSIX compliance, secure per-user session establishment, high + performance safe distributed caching (oplock), optional packet + signing, large files, Unicode support and other internationalization + improvements. Since both Samba server and this filesystem client support + the CIFS Unix extensions, the combination can provide a reasonable + alternative to NFSv4 for fileserving in some Linux to Linux environments, + not just in Linux to Windows environments. + + This filesystem has an mount utility (mount.cifs) that can be obtained from + + https://ftp.samba.org/pub/linux-cifs/cifs-utils/ + + It must be installed in the directory with the other mount helpers. + + For more information on the module see the project wiki page at + + https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFS_utils diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..322a9c833f23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/winucase_convert.pl @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +#!/usr/bin/perl -w +# +# winucase_convert.pl -- convert "Windows 8 Upper Case Mapping Table.txt" to +# a two-level set of C arrays. +# +# Copyright 2013: Jeff Layton <jlayton@redhat.com> +# +# This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. +# + +while(<>) { + next if (!/^0x(..)(..)\t0x(....)\t/); + $firstchar = hex($1); + $secondchar = hex($2); + $uppercase = hex($3); + + $top[$firstchar][$secondchar] = $uppercase; +} + +for ($i = 0; $i < 256; $i++) { + next if (!$top[$i]); + + printf("static const wchar_t t2_%2.2x[256] = {", $i); + for ($j = 0; $j < 256; $j++) { + if (($j % 8) == 0) { + print "\n\t"; + } else { + print " "; + } + printf("0x%4.4x,", $top[$i][$j] ? $top[$i][$j] : 0); + } + print "\n};\n\n"; +} + +printf("static const wchar_t *const toplevel[256] = {", $i); +for ($i = 0; $i < 256; $i++) { + if (($i % 8) == 0) { + print "\n\t"; + } elsif ($top[$i]) { + print " "; + } else { + print " "; + } + + if ($top[$i]) { + printf("t2_%2.2x,", $i); + } else { + print "NULL,"; + } +} +print "\n};\n\n"; diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking b/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking index ff7b611abf33..09bbf9a54f80 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking @@ -2,6 +2,10 @@ kinds of locks - per-inode (->i_mutex) and per-filesystem (->s_vfs_rename_mutex). + When taking the i_mutex on multiple non-directory objects, we +always acquire the locks in order by increasing address. We'll call +that "inode pointer" order in the following. + For our purposes all operations fall in 5 classes: 1) read access. Locking rules: caller locks directory we are accessing. @@ -12,8 +16,9 @@ kinds of locks - per-inode (->i_mutex) and per-filesystem locks victim and calls the method. 4) rename() that is _not_ cross-directory. Locking rules: caller locks -the parent, finds source and target, if target already exists - locks it -and then calls the method. +the parent and finds source and target. If target already exists, lock +it. If source is a non-directory, lock it. If that means we need to +lock both, lock them in inode pointer order. 5) link creation. Locking rules: * lock parent @@ -30,7 +35,9 @@ rules: fail with -ENOTEMPTY * if new parent is equal to or is a descendent of source fail with -ELOOP - * if target exists - lock it. + * If target exists, lock it. If source is a non-directory, lock + it. In case that means we need to lock both source and target, + do so in inode pointer order. * call the method. @@ -56,9 +63,11 @@ objects - A < B iff A is an ancestor of B. renames will be blocked on filesystem lock and we don't start changing the order until we had acquired all locks). -(3) any operation holds at most one lock on non-directory object and - that lock is acquired after all other locks. (Proof: see descriptions - of operations). +(3) locks on non-directory objects are acquired only after locks on + directory objects, and are acquired in inode pointer order. + (Proof: all operations but renames take lock on at most one + non-directory object, except renames, which take locks on source and + target in inode pointer order in the case they are not directories.) Now consider the minimal deadlock. Each process is blocked on attempt to acquire some lock and already holds at least one lock. Let's @@ -66,9 +75,13 @@ consider the set of contended locks. First of all, filesystem lock is not contended, since any process blocked on it is not holding any locks. Thus all processes are blocked on ->i_mutex. - Non-directory objects are not contended due to (3). Thus link -creation can't be a part of deadlock - it can't be blocked on source -and it means that it doesn't hold any locks. + By (3), any process holding a non-directory lock can only be +waiting on another non-directory lock with a larger address. Therefore +the process holding the "largest" such lock can always make progress, and +non-directory objects are not included in the set of contended locks. + + Thus link creation can't be a part of deadlock - it can't be +blocked on source and it means that it doesn't hold any locks. Any contended object is either held by cross-directory rename or has a child that is also contended. Indeed, suppose that it is held by diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt index 3cd27bed6349..a3fe811bbdbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt @@ -119,6 +119,7 @@ active_logs=%u Support configuring the number of active logs. In the Default number is 6. disable_ext_identify Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs does not aware of cold files such as media files. +inline_xattr Enable the inline xattrs feature. ================================================================================ DEBUGFS ENTRIES @@ -164,6 +165,12 @@ Files in /sys/fs/f2fs/<devname> gc_idle = 1 will select the Cost Benefit approach & setting gc_idle = 2 will select the greedy aproach. + reclaim_segments This parameter controls the number of prefree + segments to be reclaimed. If the number of prefree + segments is larger than this number, f2fs tries to + conduct checkpoint to reclaim the prefree segments + to free segments. By default, 100 segments, 200MB. + ================================================================================ USAGE ================================================================================ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index 206a1bdc7321..fe2b7ae6f962 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -451,3 +451,15 @@ in your dentry operations instead. -- [mandatory] ->readdir() is gone now; switch to ->iterate() +[mandatory] + vfs_follow_link has been removed. Filesystems must use nd_set_link + from ->follow_link for normal symlinks, or nd_jump_link for magic + /proc/<pid> style links. +-- +[mandatory] + iget5_locked()/ilookup5()/ilookup5_nowait() test() callback used to be + called with both ->i_lock and inode_hash_lock held; the former is *not* + taken anymore, so verify that your callbacks do not rely on it (none + of the in-tree instances did). inode_hash_lock is still held, + of course, so they are still serialized wrt removal from inode hash, + as well as wrt set() callback of iget5_locked(). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index fcc22c982a25..22d89aa37218 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -460,6 +460,7 @@ manner. The codes are the following: nl - non-linear mapping ar - architecture specific flag dd - do not include area into core dump + sd - soft-dirty flag mm - mixed map area hg - huge page advise flag nh - no-huge page advise flag @@ -854,16 +855,15 @@ Committed_AS: The amount of memory presently allocated on the system. The committed memory is a sum of all of the memory which has been allocated by processes, even if it has not been "used" by them as of yet. A process which malloc()'s 1G - of memory, but only touches 300M of it will only show up - as using 300M of memory even if it has the address space - allocated for the entire 1G. This 1G is memory which has - been "committed" to by the VM and can be used at any time - by the allocating application. With strict overcommit - enabled on the system (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'), - allocations which would exceed the CommitLimit (detailed - above) will not be permitted. This is useful if one needs - to guarantee that processes will not fail due to lack of - memory once that memory has been successfully allocated. + of memory, but only touches 300M of it will show up as + using 1G. This 1G is memory which has been "committed" to + by the VM and can be used at any time by the allocating + application. With strict overcommit enabled on the system + (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'),allocations which would + exceed the CommitLimit (detailed above) will not be permitted. + This is useful if one needs to guarantee that processes will + not fail due to lack of memory once that memory has been + successfully allocated. VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used VmallocChunk: largest contiguous block of vmalloc area which is free diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt index 59b4a0962e0f..b176928e6963 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt @@ -79,6 +79,10 @@ to just make sure certain lists can't become empty. Most systems just mount another filesystem over rootfs and ignore it. The amount of space an empty instance of ramfs takes up is tiny. +If CONFIG_TMPFS is enabled, rootfs will use tmpfs instead of ramfs by +default. To force ramfs, add "rootfstype=ramfs" to the kernel command +line. + What is initramfs? ------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt index aa1f459fa6cf..4a93e98b290a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ the following: <proceeding files...> <slot #3, id = 0x43, characters = "h is long"> - <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension which"> + <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension whic"> <slot #1, id = 0x01, characters = "My Big File.E"> <directory entry, name = "MYBIGFIL.EXT"> diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index f93a88250a44..deb48b5fd883 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -359,11 +359,9 @@ struct inode_operations { ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *); void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int); - int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, + int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *, + unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode, int *opened); int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t); -} ____cacheline_aligned; - struct file *, unsigned open_flag, - umode_t create_mode, int *opened); }; Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless @@ -470,9 +468,11 @@ otherwise noted. method the filesystem can look up, possibly create and open the file in one atomic operation. If it cannot perform this (e.g. the file type turned out to be wrong) it may signal this by returning 1 instead of - usual 0 or -ve . This method is only called if the last - component is negative or needs lookup. Cached positive dentries are - still handled by f_op->open(). + usual 0 or -ve . This method is only called if the last component is + negative or needs lookup. Cached positive dentries are still handled by + f_op->open(). If the file was created, the FILE_CREATED flag should be + set in "opened". In case of O_EXCL the method must only succeed if the + file didn't exist and hence FILE_CREATED shall always be set on success. tmpfile: called in the end of O_TMPFILE open(). Optional, equivalent to atomically creating, opening and unlinking a file in given directory. diff --git a/Documentation/gcov.txt b/Documentation/gcov.txt index e7ca6478cd93..7b727783db7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/gcov.txt +++ b/Documentation/gcov.txt @@ -50,6 +50,10 @@ Configure the kernel with: CONFIG_DEBUG_FS=y CONFIG_GCOV_KERNEL=y +select the gcc's gcov format, default is autodetect based on gcc version: + + CONFIG_GCOV_FORMAT_AUTODETECT=y + and to get coverage data for the entire kernel: CONFIG_GCOV_PROFILE_ALL=y diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX b/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1de43ae46ae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +00-INDEX + - This file +gpio.txt + - Introduction to GPIOs and their kernel interfaces +consumer.txt + - How to obtain and use GPIOs in a driver +driver.txt + - How to write a GPIO driver +board.txt + - How to assign GPIOs to a consumer device and a function +sysfs.txt + - Information about the GPIO sysfs interface +gpio-legacy.txt + - Historical documentation of the deprecated GPIO integer interface diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/board.txt b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0d03506f2cc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/board.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +GPIO Mappings +============= + +This document explains how GPIOs can be assigned to given devices and functions. +Note that it only applies to the new descriptor-based interface. For a +description of the deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to +gpio-legacy.txt (actually, there is no real mapping possible with the old +interface; you just fetch an integer from somewhere and request the +corresponding GPIO. + +Platforms that make use of GPIOs must select ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB (if GPIO usage +is mandatory) or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB (if GPIO support can be omitted) in +their Kconfig. Then, how GPIOs are mapped depends on what the platform uses to +describe its hardware layout. Currently, mappings can be defined through device +tree, ACPI, and platform data. + +Device Tree +----------- +GPIOs can easily be mapped to devices and functions in the device tree. The +exact way to do it depends on the GPIO controller providing the GPIOs, see the +device tree bindings for your controller. + +GPIOs mappings are defined in the consumer device's node, in a property named +<function>-gpios, where <function> is the function the driver will request +through gpiod_get(). For example: + + foo_device { + compatible = "acme,foo"; + ... + led-gpios = <&gpio 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* red */ + <&gpio 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>, /* green */ + <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* blue */ + + power-gpio = <&gpio 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; + +This property will make GPIOs 15, 16 and 17 available to the driver under the +"led" function, and GPIO 1 as the "power" GPIO: + + struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; + + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); + +The led GPIOs will be active-high, while the power GPIO will be active-low (i.e. +gpiod_is_active_low(power) will be true). + +ACPI +---- +ACPI does not support function names for GPIOs. Therefore, only the "idx" +argument of gpiod_get_index() is useful to discriminate between GPIOs assigned +to a device. The "con_id" argument can still be set for debugging purposes (it +will appear under error messages as well as debug and sysfs nodes). + +Platform Data +------------- +Finally, GPIOs can be bound to devices and functions using platform data. Board +files that desire to do so need to include the following header: + + #include <linux/gpio/driver.h> + +GPIOs are mapped by the means of tables of lookups, containing instances of the +gpiod_lookup structure. Two macros are defined to help declaring such mappings: + + GPIO_LOOKUP(chip_label, chip_hwnum, dev_id, con_id, flags) + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX(chip_label, chip_hwnum, dev_id, con_id, idx, flags) + +where + + - chip_label is the label of the gpiod_chip instance providing the GPIO + - chip_hwnum is the hardware number of the GPIO within the chip + - dev_id is the identifier of the device that will make use of this GPIO. If + NULL, the GPIO will be available to all devices. + - con_id is the name of the GPIO function from the device point of view. It + can be NULL. + - idx is the index of the GPIO within the function. + - flags is defined to specify the following properties: + * GPIOF_ACTIVE_LOW - to configure the GPIO as active-low + * GPIOF_OPEN_DRAIN - GPIO pin is open drain type. + * GPIOF_OPEN_SOURCE - GPIO pin is open source type. + +In the future, these flags might be extended to support more properties. + +Note that GPIO_LOOKUP() is just a shortcut to GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX() where idx = 0. + +A lookup table can then be defined as follows: + + struct gpiod_lookup gpios_table[] = { + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 15, "foo.0", "led", 0, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 16, "foo.0", "led", 1, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP_IDX("gpio.0", 17, "foo.0", "led", 2, GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH), + GPIO_LOOKUP("gpio.0", 1, "foo.0", "power", GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW), + }; + +And the table can be added by the board code as follows: + + gpiod_add_table(gpios_table, ARRAY_SIZE(gpios_table)); + +The driver controlling "foo.0" will then be able to obtain its GPIOs as follows: + + struct gpio_desc *red, *green, *blue, *power; + + red = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 0); + green = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 1); + blue = gpiod_get_index(dev, "led", 2); + + power = gpiod_get(dev, "power"); + gpiod_direction_output(power, 1); + +Since the "power" GPIO is mapped as active-low, its actual signal will be 0 +after this code. Contrary to the legacy integer GPIO interface, the active-low +property is handled during mapping and is thus transparent to GPIO consumers. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..07c74a3765a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ +GPIO Descriptor Consumer Interface +================================== + +This document describes the consumer interface of the GPIO framework. Note that +it describes the new descriptor-based interface. For a description of the +deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to gpio-legacy.txt. + + +Guidelines for GPIOs consumers +============================== + +Drivers that can't work without standard GPIO calls should have Kconfig entries +that depend on GPIOLIB. The functions that allow a driver to obtain and use +GPIOs are available by including the following file: + + #include <linux/gpio/consumer.h> + +All the functions that work with the descriptor-based GPIO interface are +prefixed with gpiod_. The gpio_ prefix is used for the legacy interface. No +other function in the kernel should use these prefixes. + + +Obtaining and Disposing GPIOs +============================= + +With the descriptor-based interface, GPIOs are identified with an opaque, +non-forgeable handler that must be obtained through a call to one of the +gpiod_get() functions. Like many other kernel subsystems, gpiod_get() takes the +device that will use the GPIO and the function the requested GPIO is supposed to +fulfill: + + struct gpio_desc *gpiod_get(struct device *dev, const char *con_id) + +If a function is implemented by using several GPIOs together (e.g. a simple LED +device that displays digits), an additional index argument can be specified: + + struct gpio_desc *gpiod_get_index(struct device *dev, + const char *con_id, unsigned int idx) + +Both functions return either a valid GPIO descriptor, or an error code checkable +with IS_ERR(). They will never return a NULL pointer. + +Device-managed variants of these functions are also defined: + + struct gpio_desc *devm_gpiod_get(struct device *dev, const char *con_id) + + struct gpio_desc *devm_gpiod_get_index(struct device *dev, + const char *con_id, + unsigned int idx) + +A GPIO descriptor can be disposed of using the gpiod_put() function: + + void gpiod_put(struct gpio_desc *desc) + +It is strictly forbidden to use a descriptor after calling this function. The +device-managed variant is, unsurprisingly: + + void devm_gpiod_put(struct device *dev, struct gpio_desc *desc) + + +Using GPIOs +=========== + +Setting Direction +----------------- +The first thing a driver must do with a GPIO is setting its direction. This is +done by invoking one of the gpiod_direction_*() functions: + + int gpiod_direction_input(struct gpio_desc *desc) + int gpiod_direction_output(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +The return value is zero for success, else a negative errno. It should be +checked, since the get/set calls don't return errors and since misconfiguration +is possible. You should normally issue these calls from a task context. However, +for spinlock-safe GPIOs it is OK to use them before tasking is enabled, as part +of early board setup. + +For output GPIOs, the value provided becomes the initial output value. This +helps avoid signal glitching during system startup. + +A driver can also query the current direction of a GPIO: + + int gpiod_get_direction(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +This function will return either GPIOF_DIR_IN or GPIOF_DIR_OUT. + +Be aware that there is no default direction for GPIOs. Therefore, **using a GPIO +without setting its direction first is illegal and will result in undefined +behavior!** + + +Spinlock-Safe GPIO Access +------------------------- +Most GPIO controllers can be accessed with memory read/write instructions. Those +don't need to sleep, and can safely be done from inside hard (non-threaded) IRQ +handlers and similar contexts. + +Use the following calls to access GPIOs from an atomic context: + + int gpiod_get_value(const struct gpio_desc *desc); + void gpiod_set_value(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value); + +The values are boolean, zero for low, nonzero for high. When reading the value +of an output pin, the value returned should be what's seen on the pin. That +won't always match the specified output value, because of issues including +open-drain signaling and output latencies. + +The get/set calls do not return errors because "invalid GPIO" should have been +reported earlier from gpiod_direction_*(). However, note that not all platforms +can read the value of output pins; those that can't should always return zero. +Also, using these calls for GPIOs that can't safely be accessed without sleeping +(see below) is an error. + + +GPIO Access That May Sleep +-------------------------- +Some GPIO controllers must be accessed using message based buses like I2C or +SPI. Commands to read or write those GPIO values require waiting to get to the +head of a queue to transmit a command and get its response. This requires +sleeping, which can't be done from inside IRQ handlers. + +Platforms that support this type of GPIO distinguish them from other GPIOs by +returning nonzero from this call: + + int gpiod_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +To access such GPIOs, a different set of accessors is defined: + + int gpiod_get_value_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_value_cansleep(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +Accessing such GPIOs requires a context which may sleep, for example a threaded +IRQ handler, and those accessors must be used instead of spinlock-safe +accessors without the cansleep() name suffix. + +Other than the fact that these accessors might sleep, and will work on GPIOs +that can't be accessed from hardIRQ handlers, these calls act the same as the +spinlock-safe calls. + + +Active-low State and Raw GPIO Values +------------------------------------ +Device drivers like to manage the logical state of a GPIO, i.e. the value their +device will actually receive, no matter what lies between it and the GPIO line. +In some cases, it might make sense to control the actual GPIO line value. The +following set of calls ignore the active-low property of a GPIO and work on the +raw line value: + + int gpiod_get_raw_value(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_raw_value(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + int gpiod_get_raw_value_cansleep(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + void gpiod_set_raw_value_cansleep(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value) + +The active-low state of a GPIO can also be queried using the following call: + + int gpiod_is_active_low(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +Note that these functions should only be used with great moderation ; a driver +should not have to care about the physical line level. + +GPIOs mapped to IRQs +-------------------- +GPIO lines can quite often be used as IRQs. You can get the IRQ number +corresponding to a given GPIO using the following call: + + int gpiod_to_irq(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + +It will return an IRQ number, or an negative errno code if the mapping can't be +done (most likely because that particular GPIO cannot be used as IRQ). It is an +unchecked error to use a GPIO that wasn't set up as an input using +gpiod_direction_input(), or to use an IRQ number that didn't originally come +from gpiod_to_irq(). gpiod_to_irq() is not allowed to sleep. + +Non-error values returned from gpiod_to_irq() can be passed to request_irq() or +free_irq(). They will often be stored into IRQ resources for platform devices, +by the board-specific initialization code. Note that IRQ trigger options are +part of the IRQ interface, e.g. IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING, as are system wakeup +capabilities. + + +Interacting With the Legacy GPIO Subsystem +========================================== +Many kernel subsystems still handle GPIOs using the legacy integer-based +interface. Although it is strongly encouraged to upgrade them to the safer +descriptor-based API, the following two functions allow you to convert a GPIO +descriptor into the GPIO integer namespace and vice-versa: + + int desc_to_gpio(const struct gpio_desc *desc) + struct gpio_desc *gpio_to_desc(unsigned gpio) + +The GPIO number returned by desc_to_gpio() can be safely used as long as the +GPIO descriptor has not been freed. All the same, a GPIO number passed to +gpio_to_desc() must have been properly acquired, and usage of the returned GPIO +descriptor is only possible after the GPIO number has been released. + +Freeing a GPIO obtained by one API with the other API is forbidden and an +unchecked error. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9da0bfa74781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/driver.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +GPIO Descriptor Driver Interface +================================ + +This document serves as a guide for GPIO chip drivers writers. Note that it +describes the new descriptor-based interface. For a description of the +deprecated integer-based GPIO interface please refer to gpio-legacy.txt. + +Each GPIO controller driver needs to include the following header, which defines +the structures used to define a GPIO driver: + + #include <linux/gpio/driver.h> + + +Internal Representation of GPIOs +================================ + +Inside a GPIO driver, individual GPIOs are identified by their hardware number, +which is a unique number between 0 and n, n being the number of GPIOs managed by +the chip. This number is purely internal: the hardware number of a particular +GPIO descriptor is never made visible outside of the driver. + +On top of this internal number, each GPIO also need to have a global number in +the integer GPIO namespace so that it can be used with the legacy GPIO +interface. Each chip must thus have a "base" number (which can be automatically +assigned), and for each GPIO the global number will be (base + hardware number). +Although the integer representation is considered deprecated, it still has many +users and thus needs to be maintained. + +So for example one platform could use numbers 32-159 for GPIOs, with a +controller defining 128 GPIOs at a "base" of 32 ; while another platform uses +numbers 0..63 with one set of GPIO controllers, 64-79 with another type of GPIO +controller, and on one particular board 80-95 with an FPGA. The numbers need not +be contiguous; either of those platforms could also use numbers 2000-2063 to +identify GPIOs in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders. + + +Controller Drivers: gpio_chip +============================= + +In the gpiolib framework each GPIO controller is packaged as a "struct +gpio_chip" (see linux/gpio/driver.h for its complete definition) with members +common to each controller of that type: + + - methods to establish GPIO direction + - methods used to access GPIO values + - method to return the IRQ number associated to a given GPIO + - flag saying whether calls to its methods may sleep + - optional debugfs dump method (showing extra state like pullup config) + - optional base number (will be automatically assigned if omitted) + - label for diagnostics and GPIOs mapping using platform data + +The code implementing a gpio_chip should support multiple instances of the +controller, possibly using the driver model. That code will configure each +gpio_chip and issue gpiochip_add(). Removing a GPIO controller should be rare; +use gpiochip_remove() when it is unavoidable. + +Most often a gpio_chip is part of an instance-specific structure with state not +exposed by the GPIO interfaces, such as addressing, power management, and more. +Chips such as codecs will have complex non-GPIO state. + +Any debugfs dump method should normally ignore signals which haven't been +requested as GPIOs. They can use gpiochip_is_requested(), which returns either +NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested. + +Locking IRQ usage +----------------- +Input GPIOs can be used as IRQ signals. When this happens, a driver is requested +to mark the GPIO as being used as an IRQ: + + int gpiod_lock_as_irq(struct gpio_desc *desc) + +This will prevent the use of non-irq related GPIO APIs until the GPIO IRQ lock +is released: + + void gpiod_unlock_as_irq(struct gpio_desc *desc) diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio/gpio-legacy.txt index 6f83fa965b4b..6f83fa965b4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/gpio-legacy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd9b356e88cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +GPIO Interfaces +=============== + +The documents in this directory give detailed instructions on how to access +GPIOs in drivers, and how to write a driver for a device that provides GPIOs +itself. + +Due to the history of GPIO interfaces in the kernel, there are two different +ways to obtain and use GPIOs: + + - The descriptor-based interface is the preferred way to manipulate GPIOs, +and is described by all the files in this directory excepted gpio-legacy.txt. + - The legacy integer-based interface which is considered deprecated (but still +usable for compatibility reasons) is documented in gpio-legacy.txt. + +The remainder of this document applies to the new descriptor-based interface. +gpio-legacy.txt contains the same information applied to the legacy +integer-based interface. + + +What is a GPIO? +=============== + +A "General Purpose Input/Output" (GPIO) is a flexible software-controlled +digital signal. They are provided from many kinds of chip, and are familiar +to Linux developers working with embedded and custom hardware. Each GPIO +represents a bit connected to a particular pin, or "ball" on Ball Grid Array +(BGA) packages. Board schematics show which external hardware connects to +which GPIOs. Drivers can be written generically, so that board setup code +passes such pin configuration data to drivers. + +System-on-Chip (SOC) processors heavily rely on GPIOs. In some cases, every +non-dedicated pin can be configured as a GPIO; and most chips have at least +several dozen of them. Programmable logic devices (like FPGAs) can easily +provide GPIOs; multifunction chips like power managers, and audio codecs +often have a few such pins to help with pin scarcity on SOCs; and there are +also "GPIO Expander" chips that connect using the I2C or SPI serial buses. +Most PC southbridges have a few dozen GPIO-capable pins (with only the BIOS +firmware knowing how they're used). + +The exact capabilities of GPIOs vary between systems. Common options: + + - Output values are writable (high=1, low=0). Some chips also have + options about how that value is driven, so that for example only one + value might be driven, supporting "wire-OR" and similar schemes for the + other value (notably, "open drain" signaling). + + - Input values are likewise readable (1, 0). Some chips support readback + of pins configured as "output", which is very useful in such "wire-OR" + cases (to support bidirectional signaling). GPIO controllers may have + input de-glitch/debounce logic, sometimes with software controls. + + - Inputs can often be used as IRQ signals, often edge triggered but + sometimes level triggered. Such IRQs may be configurable as system + wakeup events, to wake the system from a low power state. + + - Usually a GPIO will be configurable as either input or output, as needed + by different product boards; single direction ones exist too. + + - Most GPIOs can be accessed while holding spinlocks, but those accessed + through a serial bus normally can't. Some systems support both types. + +On a given board each GPIO is used for one specific purpose like monitoring +MMC/SD card insertion/removal, detecting card write-protect status, driving +a LED, configuring a transceiver, bit-banging a serial bus, poking a hardware +watchdog, sensing a switch, and so on. + + +Common GPIO Properties +====================== + +These properties are met through all the other documents of the GPIO interface +and it is useful to understand them, especially if you need to define GPIO +mappings. + +Active-High and Active-Low +-------------------------- +It is natural to assume that a GPIO is "active" when its output signal is 1 +("high"), and inactive when it is 0 ("low"). However in practice the signal of a +GPIO may be inverted before is reaches its destination, or a device could decide +to have different conventions about what "active" means. Such decisions should +be transparent to device drivers, therefore it is possible to define a GPIO as +being either active-high ("1" means "active", the default) or active-low ("0" +means "active") so that drivers only need to worry about the logical signal and +not about what happens at the line level. + +Open Drain and Open Source +-------------------------- +Sometimes shared signals need to use "open drain" (where only the low signal +level is actually driven), or "open source" (where only the high signal level is +driven) signaling. That term applies to CMOS transistors; "open collector" is +used for TTL. A pullup or pulldown resistor causes the high or low signal level. +This is sometimes called a "wire-AND"; or more practically, from the negative +logic (low=true) perspective this is a "wire-OR". + +One common example of an open drain signal is a shared active-low IRQ line. +Also, bidirectional data bus signals sometimes use open drain signals. + +Some GPIO controllers directly support open drain and open source outputs; many +don't. When you need open drain signaling but your hardware doesn't directly +support it, there's a common idiom you can use to emulate it with any GPIO pin +that can be used as either an input or an output: + + LOW: gpiod_direction_output(gpio, 0) ... this drives the signal and overrides + the pullup. + + HIGH: gpiod_direction_input(gpio) ... this turns off the output, so the pullup + (or some other device) controls the signal. + +The same logic can be applied to emulate open source signaling, by driving the +high signal and configuring the GPIO as input for low. This open drain/open +source emulation can be handled transparently by the GPIO framework. + +If you are "driving" the signal high but gpiod_get_value(gpio) reports a low +value (after the appropriate rise time passes), you know some other component is +driving the shared signal low. That's not necessarily an error. As one common +example, that's how I2C clocks are stretched: a slave that needs a slower clock +delays the rising edge of SCK, and the I2C master adjusts its signaling rate +accordingly. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c2c3a97f8ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +GPIO Sysfs Interface for Userspace +================================== + +Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to +configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs. This is different from the +debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and +value instead of just showing a gpio state summary. Plus, it could be +present on production systems without debugging support. + +Given appropriate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could +know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to +protect boot loader segments in flash memory. System upgrade procedures +may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO, +then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling +the write protection. In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched, +and the kernel would have no need to know about it. + +Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems +userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that +standard kernels won't know about. And for some tasks, simple userspace +GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs. + +Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons" +GPIO tasks: "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively. Use those +instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel +frameworks better than your userspace code could. + + +Paths in Sysfs +-------------- +There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio: + + - Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs; + + - GPIOs themselves; and + + - GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances). + +That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink. + +The control interfaces are write-only: + + /sys/class/gpio/ + + "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of + a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file. + + Example: "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node + for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code. + + "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace. + + Example: "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19" + node exported using the "export" file. + +GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42) +and have the following read/write attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/ + + "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may + normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to + initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free + operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to + configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value. + + Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel + doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or + it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly + allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction. + + "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO + is configured as an output, this value may be written; + any nonzero value is treated as high. + + If the pin can be configured as interrupt-generating interrupt + and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the + description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and + poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If + you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you + use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After + poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs + file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it + to read the value. + + "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or + "both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s) + that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return. + + This file exists only if the pin can be configured as an + interrupt generating input pin. + + "active_low" ... reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write + any nonzero value to invert the value attribute both + for reading and writing. Existing and subsequent + poll(2) support configuration via the edge attribute + for "rising" and "falling" edges will follow this + setting. + +GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpiochip42/ (for the +controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following +read-only attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/ + + "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip + + "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique) + + "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1) + +Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for +what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on +a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used, +or other cards in the stack. In such cases, you may need to use the +gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine +the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal. + + +Exporting from Kernel code +-------------------------- +Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been +requested using gpio_request(): + + /* export the GPIO to userspace */ + int gpiod_export(struct gpio_desc *desc, bool direction_may_change); + + /* reverse gpio_export() */ + void gpiod_unexport(struct gpio_desc *desc); + + /* create a sysfs link to an exported GPIO node */ + int gpiod_export_link(struct device *dev, const char *name, + struct gpio_desc *desc); + + /* change the polarity of a GPIO node in sysfs */ + int gpiod_sysfs_set_active_low(struct gpio_desc *desc, int value); + +After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in +the sysfs interface by gpiod_export(). The driver can control whether the +signal direction may change. This helps drivers prevent userspace code +from accidentally clobbering important system state. + +This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds +of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's +suitable for documenting as part of a board support package. + +After the GPIO has been exported, gpiod_export_link() allows creating +symlinks from elsewhere in sysfs to the GPIO sysfs node. Drivers can +use this to provide the interface under their own device in sysfs with +a descriptive name. + +Drivers can use gpiod_sysfs_set_active_low() to hide GPIO line polarity +differences between boards from user space. Polarity change can be done both +before and after gpiod_export(), and previously enabled poll(2) support for +either rising or falling edge will be reconfigured to follow this setting. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 index c1b57d72efc3..b34c3de5c1bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm25066 @@ -8,6 +8,11 @@ Supported chips: Datasheets: http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056 http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/lm25056a + * TI LM25063 + Prefix: 'lm25063' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + To be announced * National Semiconductor LM25066 Prefix: 'lm25066' Addresses scanned: - @@ -32,7 +37,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver supports hardware montoring for National Semiconductor / TI LM25056, -LM25066, LM5064, and LM5064 Power Management, Monitoring, Control, and +LM25063, LM25066, LM5064, and LM5066 Power Management, Monitoring, Control, and Protection ICs. The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see @@ -64,8 +69,12 @@ in1_input Measured input voltage. in1_average Average measured input voltage. in1_min Minimum input voltage. in1_max Maximum input voltage. +in1_crit Critical high input voltage (LM25063 only). +in1_lcrit Critical low input voltage (LM25063 only). in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm (LM25063 only). +in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. (LM25063 only). in2_label "vmon" in2_input Measured voltage on VAUX pin @@ -80,12 +89,16 @@ in3_input Measured output voltage. in3_average Average measured output voltage. in3_min Minimum output voltage. in3_min_alarm Output voltage low alarm. +in3_highest Historical minimum output voltage (LM25063 only). +in3_lowest Historical maximum output voltage (LM25063 only). curr1_label "iin" curr1_input Measured input current. curr1_average Average measured input current. curr1_max Maximum input current. +curr1_crit Critical input current (LM25063 only). curr1_max_alarm Input current high alarm. +curr1_crit_alarm Input current critical high alarm (LM25063 only). power1_label "pin" power1_input Measured input power. @@ -95,6 +108,11 @@ power1_alarm Input power alarm power1_input_highest Historical maximum power. power1_reset_history Write any value to reset maximum power history. +power2_label "pout". LM25063 only. +power2_input Measured output power. +power2_max Maximum output power limit. +power2_crit Critical output power limit. + temp1_input Measured temperature. temp1_max Maximum temperature. temp1_crit Critical high temperature. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index b466974e142f..ab81013cc390 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -122,6 +122,12 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'g781' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d Datasheet: Not publicly available from GMT + * Texas Instruments TMP451 + Prefix: 'tmp451' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at TI website + http://www.ti.com/litv/pdf/sbos686 + Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 index dc0d08c61305..a0546fc42273 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 @@ -6,10 +6,15 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'ltc2974' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2974 - * Linear Technology LTC2978 + * Linear Technology LTC2977 + Prefix: 'ltc2977' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2977 + * Linear Technology LTC2978, LTC2978A Prefix: 'ltc2978' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978 + http://www.linear.com/product/ltc2978a * Linear Technology LTC3880 Prefix: 'ltc3880' Addresses scanned: - @@ -26,8 +31,9 @@ Description ----------- LTC2974 is a quad digital power supply manager. LTC2978 is an octal power supply -monitor. LTC3880 is a dual output poly-phase step-down DC/DC controller. LTC3883 -is a single phase step-down DC/DC controller. +monitor. LTC2977 is a pin compatible replacement for LTC2978. LTC3880 is a dual +output poly-phase step-down DC/DC controller. LTC3883 is a single phase +step-down DC/DC controller. Usage Notes @@ -49,21 +55,25 @@ Sysfs attributes in1_label "vin" in1_input Measured input voltage. in1_min Minimum input voltage. -in1_max Maximum input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. -in1_lcrit Critical minimum input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 - only. +in1_max Maximum input voltage. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. +in1_lcrit Critical minimum input voltage. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. in1_crit Critical maximum input voltage. in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. -in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. -in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978 - only. +in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. -in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. +in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. in1_highest Highest input voltage. in1_reset_history Reset input voltage history. in[N]_label "vout[1-8]". LTC2974: N=2-5 + LTC2977: N=2-9 LTC2978: N=2-9 LTC3880: N=2-3 LTC3883: N=2 @@ -83,21 +93,23 @@ in[N]_reset_history Reset output voltage history. temp[N]_input Measured temperature. On LTC2974, temp[1-4] report external temperatures, and temp5 reports the chip temperature. - On LTC2978, only one temperature measurement is - supported and reports the chip temperature. + On LTC2977 and LTC2978, only one temperature measurement + is supported and reports the chip temperature. On LTC3880, temp1 and temp2 report external temperatures, and temp3 reports the chip temperature. On LTC3883, temp1 reports an external temperature, and temp2 reports the chip temperature. -temp[N]_min Mimimum temperature. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. +temp[N]_min Mimimum temperature. LTC2974, LCT2977, and LTC2978 only. temp[N]_max Maximum temperature. temp[N]_lcrit Critical low temperature. temp[N]_crit Critical high temperature. -temp[N]_min_alarm Temperature low alarm. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. +temp[N]_min_alarm Temperature low alarm. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. temp[N]_max_alarm Temperature high alarm. temp[N]_lcrit_alarm Temperature critical low alarm. temp[N]_crit_alarm Temperature critical high alarm. -temp[N]_lowest Lowest measured temperature. LTC2974 and LTC2978 only. +temp[N]_lowest Lowest measured temperature. + LTC2974, LTC2977, and LTC2978 only. Not supported for chip temperature sensor on LTC2974. temp[N]_highest Highest measured temperature. Not supported for chip temperature sensor on LTC2974. @@ -109,6 +121,7 @@ power1_input Measured input power. power[N]_label "pout[1-4]". LTC2974: N=1-4 + LTC2977: Not supported LTC2978: Not supported LTC3880: N=1-2 LTC3883: N=2 @@ -123,6 +136,7 @@ curr1_reset_history Reset input current history. LTC3883 only. curr[N]_label "iout[1-4]". LTC2974: N=1-4 + LTC2977: not supported LTC2978: not supported LTC3880: N=2-3 LTC3883: N=2 diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index 90387c3540f7..f4021a285460 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Credits: Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, and Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> w83792d.c: - Chunhao Huang <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw>, + Shane Huang (Winbond), Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz> Additional contributors: diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d index 8a023ce0b72e..53f7b6866fec 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83792d @@ -7,8 +7,7 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com.tw -Author: Chunhao Huang -Contact: DZShen <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw> +Author: Shane Huang (Winbond) Module Parameters diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index d29dea0f3232..7b0dcdb57173 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -25,6 +25,7 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel Avoton (SOC) * Intel Wellsburg (PCH) * Intel Coleto Creek (PCH) + * Intel Wildcat Point-LP (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt index 8002c894c6b0..31bb6a4029ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/gamepad.txt @@ -122,12 +122,14 @@ D-Pad: BTN_DPAD_* Analog buttons are reported as: ABS_HAT0X and ABS_HAT0Y + (for ABS values negative is left/up, positive is right/down) Analog-Sticks: The left analog-stick is reported as ABS_X, ABS_Y. The right analog stick is reported as ABS_RX, ABS_RY. Zero, one or two sticks may be present. If analog-sticks provide digital buttons, they are mapped accordingly as BTN_THUMBL (first/left) and BTN_THUMBR (second/right). + (for ABS values negative is left/up, positive is right/down) Triggers: Trigger buttons can be available as digital or analog buttons or both. User- @@ -138,6 +140,7 @@ Triggers: ABS_HAT2X (right/ZR) and BTN_TL2 or ABS_HAT2Y (left/ZL). If only one trigger-button combination is present (upper+lower), they are reported as "right" triggers (BTN_TR/ABS_HAT1X). + (ABS trigger values start at 0, pressure is reported as positive values) Menu-Pad: Menu buttons are always digital and are mapped according to their location diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 2a5f0e14efa3..7cbfa3c4fc3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -138,6 +138,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h conflict! 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/bnep/bnep.h conflict! 'H' F1 linux/hid-roccat.h <mailto:erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +'H' F8-FA sound/firewire.h 'I' all linux/isdn.h conflict! 'I' 00-0F drivers/isdn/divert/isdn_divert.h conflict! 'I' 40-4F linux/mISDNif.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt index c858f8419eba..c420676c6fe3 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt @@ -147,6 +147,7 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax). - "modules" This declares the symbol to be used as the MODULES symbol, which enables the third modular state for all config symbols. + At most one symbol may have the "modules" option set. - "env"=<value> This imports the environment variable into Kconfig. It behaves like diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt index e349f293cc98..bbc99c0c1094 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt @@ -20,16 +20,9 @@ symbols have been introduced. To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use cp user/some/old.config .config - yes "" | make oldconfig >conf.new + make listnewconfig -and the config program will list as (NEW) any new symbols that have -unknown values. Of course, the .config file is also updated with -new (default) values, so you can use: - - grep "(NEW)" conf.new - -to see the new config symbols or you can use diffconfig to see the -differences between the previous and new .config files: +and the config program will list any new symbols, one per line. scripts/diffconfig .config.old .config | less @@ -175,11 +168,9 @@ Searching in menuconfig: /^hotplug When searching, symbols are sorted thus: - - exact match first: an exact match is when the search matches - the complete symbol name; - - alphabetical order: when two symbols do not match exactly, - they are sorted in alphabetical order (in the user's current - locale). + - first, exact matches, sorted alphabetically (an exact match + is when the search matches the complete symbol name); + - then, other matches, sorted alphabetically. For example: ^ATH.K matches: ATH5K ATH9K ATH5K_AHB ATH5K_DEBUG [...] ATH6KL ATH6KL_DEBUG [...] ATH9K_AHB ATH9K_BTCOEX_SUPPORT ATH9K_COMMON [...] diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 5589f4dbc12f..0ccd5fc038b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -480,6 +480,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Format: <io>,<irq>,<mode> See header of drivers/net/hamradio/baycom_ser_hdx.c. + blkdevparts= Manual partition parsing of block device(s) for + embedded devices based on command line input. + See Documentation/block/cmdline-partition.txt + boot_delay= Milliseconds to delay each printk during boot. Values larger than 10 seconds (10000) are changed to no delay (0). @@ -850,6 +854,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. earlyprintk= [X86,SH,BLACKFIN,ARM] earlyprintk=vga + earlyprintk=efi earlyprintk=xen earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]] earlyprintk=serial[,0x...[,baudrate]] @@ -863,7 +868,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Append ",keep" to not disable it when the real console takes over. - Only vga or serial or usb debug port at a time. + Only one of vga, efi, serial, or usb debug port can + be used at a time. Currently only ttyS0 and ttyS1 may be specified by name. Other I/O ports may be explicitly specified @@ -877,8 +883,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Interaction with the standard serial driver is not very good. - The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real - console. + The VGA and EFI output is eventually overwritten by + the real console. The xen output can only be used by Xen PV guests. @@ -1071,6 +1077,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. VIA, nVidia) verbose: show contents of HPET registers during setup + hpet_mmap= [X86, HPET_MMAP] Allow userspace to mmap HPET + registers. Default set by CONFIG_HPET_MMAP_DEFAULT. + hugepages= [HW,X86-32,IA-64] HugeTLB pages to allocate at boot. hugepagesz= [HW,IA-64,PPC,X86-64] The size of the HugeTLB pages. On x86-64 and powerpc, this option can be specified @@ -1188,15 +1197,24 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. owned by uid=0. ima_hash= [IMA] - Format: { "sha1" | "md5" } + Format: { md5 | sha1 | rmd160 | sha256 | sha384 + | sha512 | ... } default: "sha1" + The list of supported hash algorithms is defined + in crypto/hash_info.h. + ima_tcb [IMA] Load a policy which meets the needs of the Trusted Computing Base. This means IMA will measure all programs exec'd, files mmap'd for exec, and all files opened for read by uid=0. + ima_template= [IMA] + Select one of defined IMA measurements template formats. + Formats: { "ima" | "ima-ng" } + Default: "ima-ng" + init= [KNL] Format: <full_path> Run specified binary instead of /sbin/init as init @@ -1364,7 +1382,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. pages. In the event, a node is too small to have both kernelcore and Movable pages, kernelcore pages will take priority and other nodes will have a larger number - of kernelcore pages. The Movable zone is used for the + of Movable pages. The Movable zone is used for the allocation of pages that may be reclaimed or moved by the page migration subsystem. This means that HugeTLB pages may not be allocated from this zone. @@ -1776,6 +1794,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. that the amount of memory usable for all allocations is not too small. + movable_node [KNL,X86] Boot-time switch to enable the effects + of CONFIG_MOVABLE_NODE=y. See mm/Kconfig for details. + MTD_Partition= [MTD] Format: <name>,<region-number>,<size>,<offset> @@ -1905,6 +1926,18 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. will be sent. The default is to send the implementation identification information. + + nfs.recover_lost_locks = + [NFSv4] Attempt to recover locks that were lost due + to a lease timeout on the server. Please note that + doing this risks data corruption, since there are + no guarantees that the file will remain unchanged + after the locks are lost. + If you want to enable the kernel legacy behaviour of + attempting to recover these locks, then set this + parameter to '1'. + The default parameter value of '0' causes the kernel + not to attempt recovery of lost locks. nfsd.nfs4_disable_idmapping= [NFSv4] When set to the default of '1', the NFSv4 @@ -2590,7 +2623,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. ramdisk_size= [RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. - rcu_nocbs= [KNL,BOOT] + rcu_nocbs= [KNL] In kernels built with CONFIG_RCU_NOCB_CPU=y, set the specified list of CPUs to be no-callback CPUs. Invocation of these CPUs' RCU callbacks will @@ -2603,7 +2636,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. real-time workloads. It can also improve energy efficiency for asymmetric multiprocessors. - rcu_nocb_poll [KNL,BOOT] + rcu_nocb_poll [KNL] Rather than requiring that offloaded CPUs (specified by rcu_nocbs= above) explicitly awaken the corresponding "rcuoN" kthreads, @@ -2614,126 +2647,145 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. energy efficiency by requiring that the kthreads periodically wake up to do the polling. - rcutree.blimit= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.blimit= [KNL] Set maximum number of finished RCU callbacks to process in one batch. - rcutree.fanout_leaf= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.rcu_fanout_leaf= [KNL] Increase the number of CPUs assigned to each leaf rcu_node structure. Useful for very large systems. - rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.jiffies_till_first_fqs= [KNL] Set delay from grace-period initialization to first attempt to force quiescent states. Units are jiffies, minimum value is zero, and maximum value is HZ. - rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.jiffies_till_next_fqs= [KNL] Set delay between subsequent attempts to force quiescent states. Units are jiffies, minimum value is one, and maximum value is HZ. - rcutree.qhimark= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.qhimark= [KNL] Set threshold of queued RCU callbacks over which batch limiting is disabled. - rcutree.qlowmark= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.qlowmark= [KNL] Set threshold of queued RCU callbacks below which batch limiting is re-enabled. - rcutree.rcu_cpu_stall_suppress= [KNL,BOOT] - Suppress RCU CPU stall warning messages. - - rcutree.rcu_cpu_stall_timeout= [KNL,BOOT] - Set timeout for RCU CPU stall warning messages. - - rcutree.rcu_idle_gp_delay= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.rcu_idle_gp_delay= [KNL] Set wakeup interval for idle CPUs that have RCU callbacks (RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y). - rcutree.rcu_idle_lazy_gp_delay= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutree.rcu_idle_lazy_gp_delay= [KNL] Set wakeup interval for idle CPUs that have only "lazy" RCU callbacks (RCU_FAST_NO_HZ=y). Lazy RCU callbacks are those which RCU can prove do nothing more than free memory. - rcutorture.fqs_duration= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.fqs_duration= [KNL] Set duration of force_quiescent_state bursts. - rcutorture.fqs_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.fqs_holdoff= [KNL] Set holdoff time within force_quiescent_state bursts. - rcutorture.fqs_stutter= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.fqs_stutter= [KNL] Set wait time between force_quiescent_state bursts. - rcutorture.irqreader= [KNL,BOOT] - Test RCU readers from irq handlers. + rcutorture.gp_exp= [KNL] + Use expedited update-side primitives. - rcutorture.n_barrier_cbs= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.gp_normal= [KNL] + Use normal (non-expedited) update-side primitives. + If both gp_exp and gp_normal are set, do both. + If neither gp_exp nor gp_normal are set, still + do both. + + rcutorture.n_barrier_cbs= [KNL] Set callbacks/threads for rcu_barrier() testing. - rcutorture.nfakewriters= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.nfakewriters= [KNL] Set number of concurrent RCU writers. These just stress RCU, they don't participate in the actual test, hence the "fake". - rcutorture.nreaders= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.nreaders= [KNL] Set number of RCU readers. - rcutorture.onoff_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.object_debug= [KNL] + Enable debug-object double-call_rcu() testing. + + rcutorture.onoff_holdoff= [KNL] Set time (s) after boot for CPU-hotplug testing. - rcutorture.onoff_interval= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.onoff_interval= [KNL] Set time (s) between CPU-hotplug operations, or zero to disable CPU-hotplug testing. - rcutorture.shuffle_interval= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.rcutorture_runnable= [BOOT] + Start rcutorture running at boot time. + + rcutorture.shuffle_interval= [KNL] Set task-shuffle interval (s). Shuffling tasks allows some CPUs to go into dyntick-idle mode during the rcutorture test. - rcutorture.shutdown_secs= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.shutdown_secs= [KNL] Set time (s) after boot system shutdown. This is useful for hands-off automated testing. - rcutorture.stall_cpu= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.stall_cpu= [KNL] Duration of CPU stall (s) to test RCU CPU stall warnings, zero to disable. - rcutorture.stall_cpu_holdoff= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.stall_cpu_holdoff= [KNL] Time to wait (s) after boot before inducing stall. - rcutorture.stat_interval= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.stat_interval= [KNL] Time (s) between statistics printk()s. - rcutorture.stutter= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.stutter= [KNL] Time (s) to stutter testing, for example, specifying five seconds causes the test to run for five seconds, wait for five seconds, and so on. This tests RCU's ability to transition abruptly to and from idle. - rcutorture.test_boost= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.test_boost= [KNL] Test RCU priority boosting? 0=no, 1=maybe, 2=yes. "Maybe" means test if the RCU implementation under test support RCU priority boosting. - rcutorture.test_boost_duration= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.test_boost_duration= [KNL] Duration (s) of each individual boost test. - rcutorture.test_boost_interval= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.test_boost_interval= [KNL] Interval (s) between each boost test. - rcutorture.test_no_idle_hz= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.test_no_idle_hz= [KNL] Test RCU's dyntick-idle handling. See also the rcutorture.shuffle_interval parameter. - rcutorture.torture_type= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.torture_type= [KNL] Specify the RCU implementation to test. - rcutorture.verbose= [KNL,BOOT] + rcutorture.verbose= [KNL] Enable additional printk() statements. + rcupdate.rcu_expedited= [KNL] + Use expedited grace-period primitives, for + example, synchronize_rcu_expedited() instead + of synchronize_rcu(). This reduces latency, + but can increase CPU utilization, degrade + real-time latency, and degrade energy efficiency. + + rcupdate.rcu_cpu_stall_suppress= [KNL] + Suppress RCU CPU stall warning messages. + + rcupdate.rcu_cpu_stall_timeout= [KNL] + Set timeout for RCU CPU stall warning messages. + rdinit= [KNL] Format: <full_path> Run specified binary instead of /init from the ramdisk, @@ -3462,11 +3514,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. default x2apic cluster mode on platforms supporting x2apic. - x86_mrst_timer= [X86-32,APBT] - Choose timer option for x86 Moorestown MID platform. + x86_intel_mid_timer= [X86-32,APBT] + Choose timer option for x86 Intel MID platform. Two valid options are apbt timer only and lapic timer plus one apbt timer for broadcast timer. - x86_mrst_timer=apbt_only | lapic_and_apbt + x86_intel_mid_timer=apbt_only | lapic_and_apbt xen_emul_unplug= [HW,X86,XEN] Unplug Xen emulated devices @@ -3480,6 +3532,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. the unplug protocol never -- do not unplug even if version check succeeds + xen_nopvspin [X86,XEN] + Disables the ticketlock slowpath using Xen PV + optimizations. + xirc2ps_cs= [NET,PCMCIA] Format: <irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]] diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt b/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt index 32351bfabf20..827104fb9364 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt @@ -181,12 +181,17 @@ To reduce its OS jitter, do any of the following: make sure that this is safe on your particular system. d. It is not possible to entirely get rid of OS jitter from vmstat_update() on CONFIG_SMP=y systems, but you - can decrease its frequency by writing a large value to - /proc/sys/vm/stat_interval. The default value is HZ, - for an interval of one second. Of course, larger values - will make your virtual-memory statistics update more - slowly. Of course, you can also run your workload at - a real-time priority, thus preempting vmstat_update(). + can decrease its frequency by writing a large value + to /proc/sys/vm/stat_interval. The default value is + HZ, for an interval of one second. Of course, larger + values will make your virtual-memory statistics update + more slowly. Of course, you can also run your workload + at a real-time priority, thus preempting vmstat_update(), + but if your workload is CPU-bound, this is a bad idea. + However, there is an RFC patch from Christoph Lameter + (based on an earlier one from Gilad Ben-Yossef) that + reduces or even eliminates vmstat overhead for some + workloads at https://lkml.org/lkml/2013/9/4/379. e. If running on high-end powerpc servers, build with CONFIG_PPC_RTAS_DAEMON=n. This prevents the RTAS daemon from running on each CPU every second or so. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 86c52360ffe7..fc04c14de4bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver - Version 0.24 - December 11th, 2009 + Version 0.25 + October 16th, 2013 Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net> Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br> @@ -741,6 +741,9 @@ compiled with the CONFIG_THINKPAD_ACPI_UNSAFE_LEDS option enabled. Distributions must never enable this option. Individual users that are aware of the consequences are welcome to enabling it. +Audio mute and microphone mute LEDs are supported, but currently not +visible to userspace. They are used by the snd-hda-intel audio driver. + procfs notes: The available commands are: diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt index 79e4c2e6e5e8..d08d8c179f85 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt @@ -18,7 +18,25 @@ All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs. More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet. LP5521 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns. -For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt +There are two ways to run LED patterns. + +1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode and enginex_load + Control interface for the engines: + x is 1 .. 3 + enginex_mode : disabled, load, run + enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode) + + Example (start to blink the channel 2 led): + cd /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device + echo "load" > engine3_mode + echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load + echo "run" > engine3_mode + + To stop the engine: + echo "disabled" > engine3_mode + +2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface + For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt sysfs contains a selftest entry. The test communicates with the chip and checks that diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt index 899fdad509fe..5b3e91d4ac59 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt @@ -28,7 +28,26 @@ If both fields are NULL, 'lp5523' is used by default. /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channelN (N: 0 ~ 8) LP5523 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns. -For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt +There are two ways to run LED patterns. + +1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode, enginex_load and enginex_leds + Control interface for the engines: + x is 1 .. 3 + enginex_mode : disabled, load, run + enginex_load : microcode load (visible only in load mode) + enginex_leds : led mux control (visible only in load mode) + + cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device + echo "load" > engine3_mode + echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load + echo "111111111" > engine3_leds + echo "run" > engine3_mode + + To stop the engine: + echo "disabled" > engine3_mode + +2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface + For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt Selftest uses always the current from the platform data. diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt index eec8fa2ffe4e..82713ff92eb3 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -LP5521/LP5523/LP55231 Common Driver -=================================== +LP5521/LP5523/LP55231/LP5562/LP8501 Common Driver +================================================= Authors: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com> Description ----------- -LP5521, LP5523/55231 and LP5562 have common features as below. +LP5521, LP5523/55231, LP5562 and LP8501 have common features as below. Register access via the I2C Device initialization/deinitialization @@ -109,6 +109,30 @@ As soon as 'loading' is set to 0, registered callback is called. Inside the callback, the selected engine is loaded and memory is updated. To run programmed pattern, 'run_engine' attribute should be enabled. +The pattern sqeuence of LP8501 is same as LP5523. +However pattern data is specific. +Ex 1) Engine 1 is used +echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine +echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data +echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine + +Ex 2) Engine 2 and 3 are used at the same time +echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine +sleep 1 +echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data +echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +sleep 1 +echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine +sleep 1 +echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +echo "9d0340ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data +echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading +sleep 1 +echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/d1/device/run_engine + ( 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' ) The sequence of running the program data is common. But each device has own specific register addresses for commands. diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt index dd2f7b26ca30..72d010689751 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockstat.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt @@ -46,16 +46,14 @@ With these hooks we provide the following statistics: contentions - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait wait time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock max - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock - total - total time we spend waiting on this lock + total - total time we spend waiting on this lock + avg - average time spent waiting on this lock acq-bounces - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data acquisitions - number of times we took the lock hold time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock - max - longest time we ever held the lock - total - total time this lock was held - -From these number various other statistics can be derived, such as: - - hold time average = hold time total / acquisitions + max - longest time we ever held the lock + total - total time this lock was held + avg - average time this lock was held These numbers are gathered per lock class, per read/write state (when applicable). @@ -84,37 +82,38 @@ Look at the current lock statistics: # less /proc/lock_stat -01 lock_stat version 0.3 -02 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total -04 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +01 lock_stat version 0.4 +02----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total waittime-avg acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total holdtime-avg +04----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05 -06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 233 538 18446744073708 22924.27 607243.51 1342 45806 1.71 8595.89 1180582.34 -07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 205 587 18446744073708 28403.36 731975.00 1940 412426 0.58 187825.45 6307502.88 -08 --------------- -09 &mm->mmap_sem 487 [<ffffffff8053491f>] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928 -10 &mm->mmap_sem 179 [<ffffffff802a6200>] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d -11 &mm->mmap_sem 279 [<ffffffff80210a57>] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce -12 &mm->mmap_sem 76 [<ffffffff802a490b>] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59 -13 --------------- -14 &mm->mmap_sem 270 [<ffffffff80210a57>] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce -15 &mm->mmap_sem 431 [<ffffffff8053491f>] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928 -16 &mm->mmap_sem 138 [<ffffffff802a490b>] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59 -17 &mm->mmap_sem 145 [<ffffffff802a6200>] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d +06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 46 84 0.26 939.10 16371.53 194.90 47291 2922365 0.16 2220301.69 17464026916.32 5975.99 +07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 37 100 1.31 299502.61 325629.52 3256.30 212344 34316685 0.10 7744.91 95016910.20 2.77 +08 --------------- +09 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff811502a7>] khugepaged_scan_mm_slot+0x57/0x280 +19 &mm->mmap_sem 96 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510 +11 &mm->mmap_sem 34 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0 +12 &mm->mmap_sem 17 [<ffffffff81127e71>] vm_munmap+0x41/0x80 +13 --------------- +14 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff81046fda>] dup_mmap+0x2a/0x3f0 +15 &mm->mmap_sem 60 [<ffffffff81129e29>] SyS_mprotect+0xe9/0x250 +16 &mm->mmap_sem 41 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510 +17 &mm->mmap_sem 68 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0 18 -19 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... +19............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 -21 dcache_lock: 621 623 0.52 118.26 1053.02 6745 91930 0.29 316.29 118423.41 -22 ----------- -23 dcache_lock 179 [<ffffffff80378274>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54 -24 dcache_lock 113 [<ffffffff802cc17b>] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb -25 dcache_lock 99 [<ffffffff802ca0dc>] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44 -26 dcache_lock 104 [<ffffffff802cbca0>] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a -27 ----------- -28 dcache_lock 192 [<ffffffff80378274>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54 -29 dcache_lock 98 [<ffffffff802ca0dc>] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44 -30 dcache_lock 72 [<ffffffff802cc17b>] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb -31 dcache_lock 112 [<ffffffff802cbca0>] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a +21 unix_table_lock: 110 112 0.21 49.24 163.91 1.46 21094 66312 0.12 624.42 31589.81 0.48 +22 --------------- +23 unix_table_lock 45 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0 +24 unix_table_lock 47 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250 +25 unix_table_lock 15 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230 +26 unix_table_lock 5 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0 +27 --------------- +28 unix_table_lock 39 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250 +29 unix_table_lock 49 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0 +30 unix_table_lock 20 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230 +31 unix_table_lock 4 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0 + This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04 @@ -131,30 +130,30 @@ The integer part of the time values is in us. Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear: -32............................................................................................................................................................................................... +32........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33 -34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 +34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 7.91 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 3.82 35 --------- -36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 -37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a -38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a -39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb +36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 +37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a +38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a +39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb 40 --------- -41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 -42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a -43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 -44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 +41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 +42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a +43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 +44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 45 -46............................................................................................................................................................................................... +46........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 -48 &rq->lock/1: 11526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 +48 &rq->lock/1: 1526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 11.86 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 2.84 49 ----------- -50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 +50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 51 ----------- -52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 -53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 -54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 -55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a +52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 +53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 +54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 +55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a Line 48 shows statistics for the second subclass (/1) of &rq->lock class (subclass starts from 0), since in this case, as line 50 suggests, @@ -163,16 +162,16 @@ double_rq_lock actually acquires a nested lock of two spinlocks. View the top contending locks: # grep : /proc/lock_stat | head - &inode->i_data.tree_lock-W: 15 21657 0.18 1093295.30 11547131054.85 58 10415 0.16 87.51 6387.60 - &inode->i_data.tree_lock-R: 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 23302 231198 0.25 8.45 98023.38 - dcache_lock: 1037 1161 0.38 45.32 774.51 6611 243371 0.15 306.48 77387.24 - &inode->i_mutex: 161 286 18446744073709 62882.54 1244614.55 3653 20598 18446744073709 62318.60 1693822.74 - &zone->lru_lock: 94 94 0.53 7.33 92.10 4366 32690 0.29 59.81 16350.06 - &inode->i_data.i_mmap_mutex: 79 79 0.40 3.77 53.03 11779 87755 0.28 116.93 29898.44 - &q->__queue_lock: 48 50 0.52 31.62 86.31 774 13131 0.17 113.08 12277.52 - &rq->rq_lock_key: 43 47 0.74 68.50 170.63 3706 33929 0.22 107.99 17460.62 - &rq->rq_lock_key#2: 39 46 0.75 6.68 49.03 2979 32292 0.17 125.17 17137.63 - tasklist_lock-W: 15 15 1.45 10.87 32.70 1201 7390 0.58 62.55 13648.47 + clockevents_lock: 2926159 2947636 0.15 46882.81 1784540466.34 605.41 3381345 3879161 0.00 2260.97 53178395.68 13.71 + tick_broadcast_lock: 346460 346717 0.18 2257.43 39364622.71 113.54 3642919 4242696 0.00 2263.79 49173646.60 11.59 + &mapping->i_mmap_mutex: 203896 203899 3.36 645530.05 31767507988.39 155800.21 3361776 8893984 0.17 2254.15 14110121.02 1.59 + &rq->lock: 135014 136909 0.18 606.09 842160.68 6.15 1540728 10436146 0.00 728.72 17606683.41 1.69 + &(&zone->lru_lock)->rlock: 93000 94934 0.16 59.18 188253.78 1.98 1199912 3809894 0.15 391.40 3559518.81 0.93 + tasklist_lock-W: 40667 41130 0.23 1189.42 428980.51 10.43 270278 510106 0.16 653.51 3939674.91 7.72 + tasklist_lock-R: 21298 21305 0.20 1310.05 215511.12 10.12 186204 241258 0.14 1162.33 1179779.23 4.89 + rcu_node_1: 47656 49022 0.16 635.41 193616.41 3.95 844888 1865423 0.00 764.26 1656226.96 0.89 + &(&dentry->d_lockref.lock)->rlock: 39791 40179 0.15 1302.08 88851.96 2.21 2790851 12527025 0.10 1910.75 3379714.27 0.27 + rcu_node_0: 29203 30064 0.16 786.55 1555573.00 51.74 88963 244254 0.00 398.87 428872.51 1.76 Clear the statistics: diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b41929224804 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +An Intel MIC X100 device is a PCIe form factor add-in coprocessor +card based on the Intel Many Integrated Core (MIC) architecture +that runs a Linux OS. It is a PCIe endpoint in a platform and therefore +implements the three required standard address spaces i.e. configuration, +memory and I/O. The host OS loads a device driver as is typical for +PCIe devices. The card itself runs a bootstrap after reset that +transfers control to the card OS downloaded from the host driver. The +host driver supports OSPM suspend and resume operations. It shuts down +the card during suspend and reboots the card OS during resume. +The card OS as shipped by Intel is a Linux kernel with modifications +for the X100 devices. + +Since it is a PCIe card, it does not have the ability to host hardware +devices for networking, storage and console. We provide these devices +on X100 coprocessors thus enabling a self-bootable equivalent environment +for applications. A key benefit of our solution is that it leverages +the standard virtio framework for network, disk and console devices, +though in our case the virtio framework is used across a PCIe bus. + +Here is a block diagram of the various components described above. The +virtio backends are situated on the host rather than the card given better +single threaded performance for the host compared to MIC, the ability of +the host to initiate DMA's to/from the card using the MIC DMA engine and +the fact that the virtio block storage backend can only be on the host. + + | + +----------+ | +----------+ + | Card OS | | | Host OS | + +----------+ | +----------+ + | ++-------+ +--------+ +------+ | +---------+ +--------+ +--------+ +| Virtio| |Virtio | |Virtio| | |Virtio | |Virtio | |Virtio | +| Net | |Console | |Block | | |Net | |Console | |Block | +| Driver| |Driver | |Driver| | |backend | |backend | |backend | ++-------+ +--------+ +------+ | +---------+ +--------+ +--------+ + | | | | | | | + | | | |User | | | + | | | |------|------------|---------|------- + +-------------------+ |Kernel +--------------------------+ + | | | Virtio over PCIe IOCTLs | + | | +--------------------------+ + +--------------+ | | + |Intel MIC | | +---------------+ + |Card Driver | | |Intel MIC | + +--------------+ | |Host Driver | + | | +---------------+ + | | | + +-------------------------------------------------------------+ + | | + | PCIe Bus | + +-------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/.gitignore b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8b7c72f07c92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/.gitignore @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +mpssd diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb860a7d152e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +# +# Makefile - Intel MIC User Space Tools. +# Copyright(c) 2013, Intel Corporation. +# +ifdef DEBUG +CFLAGS += $(USERWARNFLAGS) -I. -g -Wall -DDEBUG=$(DEBUG) +else +CFLAGS += $(USERWARNFLAGS) -I. -g -Wall +endif + +mpssd: mpssd.o sysfs.o + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $@ $^ -lpthread + +install: + install mpssd /usr/sbin/mpssd + install micctrl /usr/sbin/micctrl + +clean: + rm -f mpssd *.o diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/micctrl b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/micctrl new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..8f2629b41c5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/micctrl @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +#!/bin/bash +# Intel MIC Platform Software Stack (MPSS) +# +# Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as +# published by the Free Software Foundation. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +# General Public License for more details. +# +# The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in +# the file called "COPYING". +# +# Intel MIC User Space Tools. +# +# micctrl - Controls MIC boot/start/stop. +# +# chkconfig: 2345 95 05 +# description: start MPSS stack processing. +# +### BEGIN INIT INFO +# Provides: micctrl +### END INIT INFO + +# Source function library. +. /etc/init.d/functions + +sysfs="/sys/class/mic" + +_status() +{ + f=$sysfs/$1 + echo -e $1 state: "`cat $f/state`" shutdown_status: "`cat $f/shutdown_status`" +} + +status() +{ + if [ "`echo $1 | head -c3`" == "mic" ]; then + _status $1 + return $? + fi + for f in $sysfs/* + do + _status `basename $f` + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && return $RETVAL + done + return 0 +} + +_reset() +{ + f=$sysfs/$1 + echo reset > $f/state +} + +reset() +{ + if [ "`echo $1 | head -c3`" == "mic" ]; then + _reset $1 + return $? + fi + for f in $sysfs/* + do + _reset `basename $f` + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && return $RETVAL + done + return 0 +} + +_boot() +{ + f=$sysfs/$1 + echo "linux" > $f/bootmode + echo "mic/uos.img" > $f/firmware + echo "mic/$1.image" > $f/ramdisk + echo "boot" > $f/state +} + +boot() +{ + if [ "`echo $1 | head -c3`" == "mic" ]; then + _boot $1 + return $? + fi + for f in $sysfs/* + do + _boot `basename $f` + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && return $RETVAL + done + return 0 +} + +_shutdown() +{ + f=$sysfs/$1 + echo shutdown > $f/state +} + +shutdown() +{ + if [ "`echo $1 | head -c3`" == "mic" ]; then + _shutdown $1 + return $? + fi + for f in $sysfs/* + do + _shutdown `basename $f` + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && return $RETVAL + done + return 0 +} + +_wait() +{ + f=$sysfs/$1 + while [ "`cat $f/state`" != "offline" -a "`cat $f/state`" != "online" ] + do + sleep 1 + echo -e "Waiting for $1 to go offline" + done +} + +wait() +{ + if [ "`echo $1 | head -c3`" == "mic" ]; then + _wait $1 + return $? + fi + # Wait for the cards to go offline + for f in $sysfs/* + do + _wait `basename $f` + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && return $RETVAL + done + return 0 +} + +if [ ! -d "$sysfs" ]; then + echo -e $"Module unloaded " + exit 3 +fi + +case $1 in + -s) + status $2 + ;; + -r) + reset $2 + ;; + -b) + boot $2 + ;; + -S) + shutdown $2 + ;; + -w) + wait $2 + ;; + *) + echo $"Usage: $0 {-s (status) |-r (reset) |-b (boot) |-S (shutdown) |-w (wait)}" + exit 2 +esac + +exit $? diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..3136c68dad0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpss @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +#!/bin/bash +# Intel MIC Platform Software Stack (MPSS) +# +# Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as +# published by the Free Software Foundation. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +# General Public License for more details. +# +# The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in +# the file called "COPYING". +# +# Intel MIC User Space Tools. +# +# mpss Start mpssd. +# +# chkconfig: 2345 95 05 +# description: start MPSS stack processing. +# +### BEGIN INIT INFO +# Provides: mpss +# Required-Start: +# Required-Stop: +# Short-Description: MPSS stack control +# Description: MPSS stack control +### END INIT INFO + +# Source function library. +. /etc/init.d/functions + +exec=/usr/sbin/mpssd +sysfs="/sys/class/mic" + +start() +{ + [ -x $exec ] || exit 5 + + if [ "`ps -e | awk '{print $4}' | grep mpssd | head -1`" = "mpssd" ]; then + echo -e $"MPSSD already running! " + success + echo + return 0 + fi + + echo -e $"Starting MPSS Stack" + echo -e $"Loading MIC_HOST Module" + + # Ensure the driver is loaded + if [ ! -d "$sysfs" ]; then + modprobe mic_host + RETVAL=$? + if [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ]; then + failure + echo + return $RETVAL + fi + fi + + # Start the daemon + echo -n $"Starting MPSSD " + $exec + RETVAL=$? + if [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ]; then + failure + echo + return $RETVAL + fi + success + echo + + sleep 5 + + # Boot the cards + micctrl -b + + # Wait till ping works + for f in $sysfs/* + do + count=100 + ipaddr=`cat $f/cmdline` + ipaddr=${ipaddr#*address,} + ipaddr=`echo $ipaddr | cut -d, -f1 | cut -d\; -f1` + while [ $count -ge 0 ] + do + echo -e "Pinging "`basename $f`" " + ping -c 1 $ipaddr &> /dev/null + RETVAL=$? + if [ $RETVAL -eq 0 ]; then + success + break + fi + sleep 1 + count=`expr $count - 1` + done + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && failure || success + echo + done + return $RETVAL +} + +stop() +{ + echo -e $"Shutting down MPSS Stack: " + + # Bail out if module is unloaded + if [ ! -d "$sysfs" ]; then + echo -n $"Module unloaded " + success + echo + return 0 + fi + + # Shut down the cards. + micctrl -S + + # Wait for the cards to go offline + for f in $sysfs/* + do + while [ "`cat $f/state`" != "offline" ] + do + sleep 1 + echo -e "Waiting for "`basename $f`" to go offline" + done + done + + # Display the status of the cards + micctrl -s + + # Kill MPSSD now + echo -n $"Killing MPSSD" + killall -9 mpssd 2>/dev/null + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && failure || success + echo + return $RETVAL +} + +restart() +{ + stop + sleep 5 + start +} + +status() +{ + micctrl -s + if [ "`ps -e | awk '{print $4}' | grep mpssd | head -n 1`" = "mpssd" ]; then + echo "mpssd is running" + else + echo "mpssd is stopped" + fi + return 0 +} + +unload() +{ + if [ ! -d "$sysfs" ]; then + echo -n $"No MIC_HOST Module: " + success + echo + return + fi + + stop + + sleep 5 + echo -n $"Removing MIC_HOST Module: " + modprobe -r mic_host + RETVAL=$? + [ $RETVAL -ne 0 ] && failure || success + echo + return $RETVAL +} + +case $1 in + start) + start + ;; + stop) + stop + ;; + restart) + restart + ;; + status) + status + ;; + unload) + unload + ;; + *) + echo $"Usage: $0 {start|stop|restart|status|unload}" + exit 2 +esac + +exit $? diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d17487d5ad9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.c @@ -0,0 +1,1727 @@ +/* + * Intel MIC Platform Software Stack (MPSS) + * + * Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as + * published by the Free Software Foundation. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but + * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + * General Public License for more details. + * + * The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in + * the file called "COPYING". + * + * Intel MIC User Space Tools. + */ + +#define _GNU_SOURCE + +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <getopt.h> +#include <assert.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <stdbool.h> +#include <signal.h> +#include <poll.h> +#include <features.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <sys/mman.h> +#include <sys/socket.h> +#include <linux/virtio_ring.h> +#include <linux/virtio_net.h> +#include <linux/virtio_console.h> +#include <linux/virtio_blk.h> +#include <linux/version.h> +#include "mpssd.h" +#include <linux/mic_ioctl.h> +#include <linux/mic_common.h> + +static void init_mic(struct mic_info *mic); + +static FILE *logfp; +static struct mic_info mic_list; + +#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0])) + +#define min_t(type, x, y) ({ \ + type __min1 = (x); \ + type __min2 = (y); \ + __min1 < __min2 ? __min1 : __min2; }) + +/* align addr on a size boundary - adjust address up/down if needed */ +#define _ALIGN_DOWN(addr, size) ((addr)&(~((size)-1))) +#define _ALIGN_UP(addr, size) _ALIGN_DOWN(addr + size - 1, size) + +/* align addr on a size boundary - adjust address up if needed */ +#define _ALIGN(addr, size) _ALIGN_UP(addr, size) + +/* to align the pointer to the (next) page boundary */ +#define PAGE_ALIGN(addr) _ALIGN(addr, PAGE_SIZE) + +#define ACCESS_ONCE(x) (*(volatile typeof(x) *)&(x)) + +#define GSO_ENABLED 1 +#define MAX_GSO_SIZE (64 * 1024) +#define ETH_H_LEN 14 +#define MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE (_ALIGN_UP(MAX_GSO_SIZE + ETH_H_LEN, 64)) +#define MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END 0x1000 + +#ifndef VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_DATA_VALID +#define VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_DATA_VALID 2 /* Csum is valid */ +#endif + +static struct { + struct mic_device_desc dd; + struct mic_vqconfig vqconfig[2]; + __u32 host_features, guest_acknowledgements; + struct virtio_console_config cons_config; +} virtcons_dev_page = { + .dd = { + .type = VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE, + .num_vq = ARRAY_SIZE(virtcons_dev_page.vqconfig), + .feature_len = sizeof(virtcons_dev_page.host_features), + .config_len = sizeof(virtcons_dev_page.cons_config), + }, + .vqconfig[0] = { + .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), + }, + .vqconfig[1] = { + .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), + }, +}; + +static struct { + struct mic_device_desc dd; + struct mic_vqconfig vqconfig[2]; + __u32 host_features, guest_acknowledgements; + struct virtio_net_config net_config; +} virtnet_dev_page = { + .dd = { + .type = VIRTIO_ID_NET, + .num_vq = ARRAY_SIZE(virtnet_dev_page.vqconfig), + .feature_len = sizeof(virtnet_dev_page.host_features), + .config_len = sizeof(virtnet_dev_page.net_config), + }, + .vqconfig[0] = { + .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), + }, + .vqconfig[1] = { + .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), + }, +#if GSO_ENABLED + .host_features = htole32( + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM | + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GSO | + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4 | + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6 | + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN | + 1 << VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_UFO), +#else + .host_features = 0, +#endif +}; + +static const char *mic_config_dir = "/etc/sysconfig/mic"; +static const char *virtblk_backend = "VIRTBLK_BACKEND"; +static struct { + struct mic_device_desc dd; + struct mic_vqconfig vqconfig[1]; + __u32 host_features, guest_acknowledgements; + struct virtio_blk_config blk_config; +} virtblk_dev_page = { + .dd = { + .type = VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK, + .num_vq = ARRAY_SIZE(virtblk_dev_page.vqconfig), + .feature_len = sizeof(virtblk_dev_page.host_features), + .config_len = sizeof(virtblk_dev_page.blk_config), + }, + .vqconfig[0] = { + .num = htole16(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES), + }, + .host_features = + htole32(1<<VIRTIO_BLK_F_SEG_MAX), + .blk_config = { + .seg_max = htole32(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES - 2), + .capacity = htole64(0), + } +}; + +static char *myname; + +static int +tap_configure(struct mic_info *mic, char *dev) +{ + pid_t pid; + char *ifargv[7]; + char ipaddr[IFNAMSIZ]; + int ret = 0; + + pid = fork(); + if (pid == 0) { + ifargv[0] = "ip"; + ifargv[1] = "link"; + ifargv[2] = "set"; + ifargv[3] = dev; + ifargv[4] = "up"; + ifargv[5] = NULL; + mpsslog("Configuring %s\n", dev); + ret = execvp("ip", ifargv); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s execvp failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + } + if (pid < 0) { + mpsslog("%s fork failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + ret = waitpid(pid, NULL, 0); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s waitpid failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + snprintf(ipaddr, IFNAMSIZ, "172.31.%d.254/24", mic->id); + + pid = fork(); + if (pid == 0) { + ifargv[0] = "ip"; + ifargv[1] = "addr"; + ifargv[2] = "add"; + ifargv[3] = ipaddr; + ifargv[4] = "dev"; + ifargv[5] = dev; + ifargv[6] = NULL; + mpsslog("Configuring %s ipaddr %s\n", dev, ipaddr); + ret = execvp("ip", ifargv); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s execvp failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + } + if (pid < 0) { + mpsslog("%s fork failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + + ret = waitpid(pid, NULL, 0); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s waitpid failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return ret; + } + mpsslog("MIC name %s %s %d DONE!\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__); + return 0; +} + +static int tun_alloc(struct mic_info *mic, char *dev) +{ + struct ifreq ifr; + int fd, err; +#if GSO_ENABLED + unsigned offload; +#endif + fd = open("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("Could not open /dev/net/tun %s\n", strerror(errno)); + goto done; + } + + memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); + + ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR; + if (*dev) + strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, dev, IFNAMSIZ); + + err = ioctl(fd, TUNSETIFF, (void *)&ifr); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d TUNSETIFF failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + close(fd); + return err; + } +#if GSO_ENABLED + offload = TUN_F_CSUM | TUN_F_TSO4 | TUN_F_TSO6 | + TUN_F_TSO_ECN | TUN_F_UFO; + + err = ioctl(fd, TUNSETOFFLOAD, offload); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d TUNSETOFFLOAD failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + close(fd); + return err; + } +#endif + strcpy(dev, ifr.ifr_name); + mpsslog("Created TAP %s\n", dev); +done: + return fd; +} + +#define NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET 0 +#define NET_FD_TUN 1 +#define MAX_NET_FD 2 + +static void set_dp(struct mic_info *mic, int type, void *dp) +{ + switch (type) { + case VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE: + mic->mic_console.console_dp = dp; + return; + case VIRTIO_ID_NET: + mic->mic_net.net_dp = dp; + return; + case VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK: + mic->mic_virtblk.block_dp = dp; + return; + } + mpsslog("%s %s %d not found\n", mic->name, __func__, type); + assert(0); +} + +static void *get_dp(struct mic_info *mic, int type) +{ + switch (type) { + case VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE: + return mic->mic_console.console_dp; + case VIRTIO_ID_NET: + return mic->mic_net.net_dp; + case VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK: + return mic->mic_virtblk.block_dp; + } + mpsslog("%s %s %d not found\n", mic->name, __func__, type); + assert(0); + return NULL; +} + +static struct mic_device_desc *get_device_desc(struct mic_info *mic, int type) +{ + struct mic_device_desc *d; + int i; + void *dp = get_dp(mic, type); + + for (i = sizeof(struct mic_bootparam); i < PAGE_SIZE; + i += mic_total_desc_size(d)) { + d = dp + i; + + /* End of list */ + if (d->type == 0) + break; + + if (d->type == -1) + continue; + + mpsslog("%s %s d-> type %d d %p\n", + mic->name, __func__, d->type, d); + + if (d->type == (__u8)type) + return d; + } + mpsslog("%s %s %d not found\n", mic->name, __func__, type); + assert(0); + return NULL; +} + +/* See comments in vhost.c for explanation of next_desc() */ +static unsigned next_desc(struct vring_desc *desc) +{ + unsigned int next; + + if (!(le16toh(desc->flags) & VRING_DESC_F_NEXT)) + return -1U; + next = le16toh(desc->next); + return next; +} + +/* Sum up all the IOVEC length */ +static ssize_t +sum_iovec_len(struct mic_copy_desc *copy) +{ + ssize_t sum = 0; + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < copy->iovcnt; i++) + sum += copy->iov[i].iov_len; + return sum; +} + +static inline void verify_out_len(struct mic_info *mic, + struct mic_copy_desc *copy) +{ + if (copy->out_len != sum_iovec_len(copy)) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d BUG copy->out_len 0x%x len 0x%zx\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + copy->out_len, sum_iovec_len(copy)); + assert(copy->out_len == sum_iovec_len(copy)); + } +} + +/* Display an iovec */ +static void +disp_iovec(struct mic_info *mic, struct mic_copy_desc *copy, + const char *s, int line) +{ + int i; + + for (i = 0; i < copy->iovcnt; i++) + mpsslog("%s %s %d copy->iov[%d] addr %p len 0x%zx\n", + mic->name, s, line, i, + copy->iov[i].iov_base, copy->iov[i].iov_len); +} + +static inline __u16 read_avail_idx(struct mic_vring *vr) +{ + return ACCESS_ONCE(vr->info->avail_idx); +} + +static inline void txrx_prepare(int type, bool tx, struct mic_vring *vr, + struct mic_copy_desc *copy, ssize_t len) +{ + copy->vr_idx = tx ? 0 : 1; + copy->update_used = true; + if (type == VIRTIO_ID_NET) + copy->iov[1].iov_len = len - sizeof(struct virtio_net_hdr); + else + copy->iov[0].iov_len = len; +} + +/* Central API which triggers the copies */ +static int +mic_virtio_copy(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, + struct mic_vring *vr, struct mic_copy_desc *copy) +{ + int ret; + + ret = ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_COPY_DESC, copy); + if (ret) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d errno %s ret %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno), ret); + } + return ret; +} + +/* + * This initialization routine requires at least one + * vring i.e. vr0. vr1 is optional. + */ +static void * +init_vr(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type, + struct mic_vring *vr0, struct mic_vring *vr1, int num_vq) +{ + int vr_size; + char *va; + + vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); + va = mmap(NULL, MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size * num_vq, + PROT_READ, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); + if (MAP_FAILED == va) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d mmap failed errno %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + goto done; + } + set_dp(mic, type, va); + vr0->va = (struct mic_vring *)&va[MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END]; + vr0->info = vr0->va + + vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); + vring_init(&vr0->vr, + MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, vr0->va, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); + mpsslog("%s %s vr0 %p vr0->info %p vr_size 0x%x vring 0x%x ", + __func__, mic->name, vr0->va, vr0->info, vr_size, + vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); + mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", + le32toh(vr0->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type); + assert(le32toh(vr0->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type); + if (vr1) { + vr1->va = (struct mic_vring *) + &va[MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size]; + vr1->info = vr1->va + vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); + vring_init(&vr1->vr, + MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, vr1->va, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN); + mpsslog("%s %s vr1 %p vr1->info %p vr_size 0x%x vring 0x%x ", + __func__, mic->name, vr1->va, vr1->info, vr_size, + vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN)); + mpsslog("magic 0x%x expected 0x%x\n", + le32toh(vr1->info->magic), MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); + assert(le32toh(vr1->info->magic) == MIC_MAGIC + type + 1); + } +done: + return va; +} + +static void +wait_for_card_driver(struct mic_info *mic, int fd, int type) +{ + struct pollfd pollfd; + int err; + struct mic_device_desc *desc = get_device_desc(mic, type); + + pollfd.fd = fd; + mpsslog("%s %s Waiting .... desc-> type %d status 0x%x\n", + mic->name, __func__, type, desc->status); + while (1) { + pollfd.events = POLLIN; + pollfd.revents = 0; + err = poll(&pollfd, 1, -1); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %s poll failed %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, strerror(errno)); + continue; + } + + if (pollfd.revents) { + mpsslog("%s %s Waiting... desc-> type %d status 0x%x\n", + mic->name, __func__, type, desc->status); + if (desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK) { + mpsslog("%s %s poll.revents %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, pollfd.revents); + mpsslog("%s %s desc-> type %d status 0x%x\n", + mic->name, __func__, type, + desc->status); + break; + } + } + } +} + +/* Spin till we have some descriptors */ +static void +spin_for_descriptors(struct mic_info *mic, struct mic_vring *vr) +{ + __u16 avail_idx = read_avail_idx(vr); + + while (avail_idx == le16toh(ACCESS_ONCE(vr->vr.avail->idx))) { +#ifdef DEBUG + mpsslog("%s %s waiting for desc avail %d info_avail %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, + le16toh(vr->vr.avail->idx), vr->info->avail_idx); +#endif + sched_yield(); + } +} + +static void * +virtio_net(void *arg) +{ + static __u8 vnet_hdr[2][sizeof(struct virtio_net_hdr)]; + static __u8 vnet_buf[2][MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE] __attribute__ ((aligned(64))); + struct iovec vnet_iov[2][2] = { + { { .iov_base = vnet_hdr[0], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_hdr[0]) }, + { .iov_base = vnet_buf[0], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_buf[0]) } }, + { { .iov_base = vnet_hdr[1], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_hdr[1]) }, + { .iov_base = vnet_buf[1], .iov_len = sizeof(vnet_buf[1]) } }, + }; + struct iovec *iov0 = vnet_iov[0], *iov1 = vnet_iov[1]; + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; + char if_name[IFNAMSIZ]; + struct pollfd net_poll[MAX_NET_FD]; + struct mic_vring tx_vr, rx_vr; + struct mic_copy_desc copy; + struct mic_device_desc *desc; + int err; + + snprintf(if_name, IFNAMSIZ, "mic%d", mic->id); + mic->mic_net.tap_fd = tun_alloc(mic, if_name); + if (mic->mic_net.tap_fd < 0) + goto done; + + if (tap_configure(mic, if_name)) + goto done; + mpsslog("MIC name %s id %d\n", mic->name, mic->id); + + net_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].fd = mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd; + net_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].events = POLLIN; + net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].fd = mic->mic_net.tap_fd; + net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].events = POLLIN; + + if (MAP_FAILED == init_vr(mic, mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_NET, &tx_vr, &rx_vr, + virtnet_dev_page.dd.num_vq)) { + mpsslog("%s init_vr failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + goto done; + } + + copy.iovcnt = 2; + desc = get_device_desc(mic, VIRTIO_ID_NET); + + while (1) { + ssize_t len; + + net_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].revents = 0; + net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].revents = 0; + + /* Start polling for data from tap and virtio net */ + err = poll(net_poll, 2, -1); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s poll failed %s\n", + __func__, strerror(errno)); + continue; + } + if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) + wait_for_card_driver(mic, mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_NET); + /* + * Check if there is data to be read from TUN and write to + * virtio net fd if there is. + */ + if (net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].revents & POLLIN) { + copy.iov = iov0; + len = readv(net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].fd, + copy.iov, copy.iovcnt); + if (len > 0) { + struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr + = (struct virtio_net_hdr *)vnet_hdr[0]; + + /* Disable checksums on the card since we are on + a reliable PCIe link */ + hdr->flags |= VIRTIO_NET_HDR_F_DATA_VALID; +#ifdef DEBUG + mpsslog("%s %s %d hdr->flags 0x%x ", mic->name, + __func__, __LINE__, hdr->flags); + mpsslog("copy.out_len %d hdr->gso_type 0x%x\n", + copy.out_len, hdr->gso_type); +#endif +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d read from tap 0x%lx\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + len); +#endif + spin_for_descriptors(mic, &tx_vr); + txrx_prepare(VIRTIO_ID_NET, 1, &tx_vr, ©, + len); + + err = mic_virtio_copy(mic, + mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, &tx_vr, + ©); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d mic_virtio_copy %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + } + if (!err) + verify_out_len(mic, ©); +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d wrote to net 0x%lx\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + sum_iovec_len(©)); +#endif + /* Reinitialize IOV for next run */ + iov0[1].iov_len = MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE; + } else if (len < 0) { + disp_iovec(mic, ©, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d read failed %s ", mic->name, + __func__, __LINE__, strerror(errno)); + mpsslog("cnt %d sum %zd\n", + copy.iovcnt, sum_iovec_len(©)); + } + } + + /* + * Check if there is data to be read from virtio net and + * write to TUN if there is. + */ + if (net_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].revents & POLLIN) { + while (rx_vr.info->avail_idx != + le16toh(rx_vr.vr.avail->idx)) { + copy.iov = iov1; + txrx_prepare(VIRTIO_ID_NET, 0, &rx_vr, ©, + MAX_NET_PKT_SIZE + + sizeof(struct virtio_net_hdr)); + + err = mic_virtio_copy(mic, + mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd, &rx_vr, + ©); + if (!err) { +#ifdef DEBUG + struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr + = (struct virtio_net_hdr *) + vnet_hdr[1]; + + mpsslog("%s %s %d hdr->flags 0x%x, ", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + hdr->flags); + mpsslog("out_len %d gso_type 0x%x\n", + copy.out_len, + hdr->gso_type); +#endif + /* Set the correct output iov_len */ + iov1[1].iov_len = copy.out_len - + sizeof(struct virtio_net_hdr); + verify_out_len(mic, ©); +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d ", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("read from net 0x%lx\n", + sum_iovec_len(copy)); +#endif + len = writev(net_poll[NET_FD_TUN].fd, + copy.iov, copy.iovcnt); + if (len != sum_iovec_len(©)) { + mpsslog("Tun write failed %s ", + strerror(errno)); + mpsslog("len 0x%zx ", len); + mpsslog("read_len 0x%zx\n", + sum_iovec_len(©)); + } else { +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, ©, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d ", + mic->name, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("wrote to tap 0x%lx\n", + len); +#endif + } + } else { + mpsslog("%s %s %d mic_virtio_copy %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + break; + } + } + } + if (net_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].revents & POLLERR) + mpsslog("%s: %s: POLLERR\n", __func__, mic->name); + } +done: + pthread_exit(NULL); +} + +/* virtio_console */ +#define VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD 0 +#define MONITOR_FD (VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD + 1) +#define MAX_CONSOLE_FD (MONITOR_FD + 1) /* must be the last one + 1 */ +#define MAX_BUFFER_SIZE PAGE_SIZE + +static void * +virtio_console(void *arg) +{ + static __u8 vcons_buf[2][PAGE_SIZE]; + struct iovec vcons_iov[2] = { + { .iov_base = vcons_buf[0], .iov_len = sizeof(vcons_buf[0]) }, + { .iov_base = vcons_buf[1], .iov_len = sizeof(vcons_buf[1]) }, + }; + struct iovec *iov0 = &vcons_iov[0], *iov1 = &vcons_iov[1]; + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; + int err; + struct pollfd console_poll[MAX_CONSOLE_FD]; + int pty_fd; + char *pts_name; + ssize_t len; + struct mic_vring tx_vr, rx_vr; + struct mic_copy_desc copy; + struct mic_device_desc *desc; + + pty_fd = posix_openpt(O_RDWR); + if (pty_fd < 0) { + mpsslog("can't open a pseudoterminal master device: %s\n", + strerror(errno)); + goto _return; + } + pts_name = ptsname(pty_fd); + if (pts_name == NULL) { + mpsslog("can't get pts name\n"); + goto _close_pty; + } + printf("%s console message goes to %s\n", mic->name, pts_name); + mpsslog("%s console message goes to %s\n", mic->name, pts_name); + err = grantpt(pty_fd); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("can't grant access: %s %s\n", + pts_name, strerror(errno)); + goto _close_pty; + } + err = unlockpt(pty_fd); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("can't unlock a pseudoterminal: %s %s\n", + pts_name, strerror(errno)); + goto _close_pty; + } + console_poll[MONITOR_FD].fd = pty_fd; + console_poll[MONITOR_FD].events = POLLIN; + + console_poll[VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD].fd = mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd; + console_poll[VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD].events = POLLIN; + + if (MAP_FAILED == init_vr(mic, mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE, &tx_vr, &rx_vr, + virtcons_dev_page.dd.num_vq)) { + mpsslog("%s init_vr failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + goto _close_pty; + } + + copy.iovcnt = 1; + desc = get_device_desc(mic, VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE); + + for (;;) { + console_poll[MONITOR_FD].revents = 0; + console_poll[VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD].revents = 0; + err = poll(console_poll, MAX_CONSOLE_FD, -1); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %d: poll failed: %s\n", __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + continue; + } + if (!(desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK)) + wait_for_card_driver(mic, + mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE); + + if (console_poll[MONITOR_FD].revents & POLLIN) { + copy.iov = iov0; + len = readv(pty_fd, copy.iov, copy.iovcnt); + if (len > 0) { +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d read from tap 0x%lx\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + len); +#endif + spin_for_descriptors(mic, &tx_vr); + txrx_prepare(VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE, 1, &tx_vr, + ©, len); + + err = mic_virtio_copy(mic, + mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, + &tx_vr, ©); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %s %d mic_virtio_copy %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + } + if (!err) + verify_out_len(mic, ©); +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d wrote to net 0x%lx\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + sum_iovec_len(copy)); +#endif + /* Reinitialize IOV for next run */ + iov0->iov_len = PAGE_SIZE; + } else if (len < 0) { + disp_iovec(mic, ©, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d read failed %s ", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + mpsslog("cnt %d sum %zd\n", + copy.iovcnt, sum_iovec_len(©)); + } + } + + if (console_poll[VIRTIO_CONSOLE_FD].revents & POLLIN) { + while (rx_vr.info->avail_idx != + le16toh(rx_vr.vr.avail->idx)) { + copy.iov = iov1; + txrx_prepare(VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE, 0, &rx_vr, + ©, PAGE_SIZE); + + err = mic_virtio_copy(mic, + mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd, + &rx_vr, ©); + if (!err) { + /* Set the correct output iov_len */ + iov1->iov_len = copy.out_len; + verify_out_len(mic, ©); +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d ", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__); + mpsslog("read from net 0x%lx\n", + sum_iovec_len(copy)); +#endif + len = writev(pty_fd, + copy.iov, copy.iovcnt); + if (len != sum_iovec_len(©)) { + mpsslog("Tun write failed %s ", + strerror(errno)); + mpsslog("len 0x%zx ", len); + mpsslog("read_len 0x%zx\n", + sum_iovec_len(©)); + } else { +#ifdef DEBUG + disp_iovec(mic, copy, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("%s %s %d ", + mic->name, __func__, + __LINE__); + mpsslog("wrote to tap 0x%lx\n", + len); +#endif + } + } else { + mpsslog("%s %s %d mic_virtio_copy %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + break; + } + } + } + if (console_poll[NET_FD_VIRTIO_NET].revents & POLLERR) + mpsslog("%s: %s: POLLERR\n", __func__, mic->name); + } +_close_pty: + close(pty_fd); +_return: + pthread_exit(NULL); +} + +static void +add_virtio_device(struct mic_info *mic, struct mic_device_desc *dd) +{ + char path[PATH_MAX]; + int fd, err; + + snprintf(path, PATH_MAX, "/dev/mic%d", mic->id); + fd = open(path, O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("Could not open %s %s\n", path, strerror(errno)); + return; + } + + err = ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_ADD_DEVICE, dd); + if (err < 0) { + mpsslog("Could not add %d %s\n", dd->type, strerror(errno)); + close(fd); + return; + } + switch (dd->type) { + case VIRTIO_ID_NET: + mic->mic_net.virtio_net_fd = fd; + mpsslog("Added VIRTIO_ID_NET for %s\n", mic->name); + break; + case VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE: + mic->mic_console.virtio_console_fd = fd; + mpsslog("Added VIRTIO_ID_CONSOLE for %s\n", mic->name); + break; + case VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK: + mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd = fd; + mpsslog("Added VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK for %s\n", mic->name); + break; + } +} + +static bool +set_backend_file(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + FILE *config; + char buff[PATH_MAX], *line, *evv, *p; + + snprintf(buff, PATH_MAX, "%s/mpssd%03d.conf", mic_config_dir, mic->id); + config = fopen(buff, "r"); + if (config == NULL) + return false; + do { /* look for "virtblk_backend=XXXX" */ + line = fgets(buff, PATH_MAX, config); + if (line == NULL) + break; + if (*line == '#') + continue; + p = strchr(line, '\n'); + if (p) + *p = '\0'; + } while (strncmp(line, virtblk_backend, strlen(virtblk_backend)) != 0); + fclose(config); + if (line == NULL) + return false; + evv = strchr(line, '='); + if (evv == NULL) + return false; + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file = malloc(strlen(evv) + 1); + if (mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file == NULL) { + mpsslog("%s %d can't allocate memory\n", mic->name, mic->id); + return false; + } + strcpy(mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file, evv + 1); + return true; +} + +#define SECTOR_SIZE 512 +static bool +set_backend_size(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size = lseek(mic->mic_virtblk.backend, 0, + SEEK_END); + if (mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: can't seek: %s\n", + mic->name, mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file); + return false; + } + virtblk_dev_page.blk_config.capacity = + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size / SECTOR_SIZE; + if ((mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size % SECTOR_SIZE) != 0) + virtblk_dev_page.blk_config.capacity++; + + virtblk_dev_page.blk_config.capacity = + htole64(virtblk_dev_page.blk_config.capacity); + + return true; +} + +static bool +open_backend(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + if (!set_backend_file(mic)) + goto _error_exit; + mic->mic_virtblk.backend = open(mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file, O_RDWR); + if (mic->mic_virtblk.backend < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: can't open: %s\n", mic->name, + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file); + goto _error_free; + } + if (!set_backend_size(mic)) + goto _error_close; + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_addr = mmap(NULL, + mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size, + PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, + mic->mic_virtblk.backend, 0L); + if (mic->mic_virtblk.backend_addr == MAP_FAILED) { + mpsslog("%s: can't map: %s %s\n", + mic->name, mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file, + strerror(errno)); + goto _error_close; + } + return true; + + _error_close: + close(mic->mic_virtblk.backend); + _error_free: + free(mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file); + _error_exit: + return false; +} + +static void +close_backend(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + munmap(mic->mic_virtblk.backend_addr, mic->mic_virtblk.backend_size); + close(mic->mic_virtblk.backend); + free(mic->mic_virtblk.backend_file); +} + +static bool +start_virtblk(struct mic_info *mic, struct mic_vring *vring) +{ + if (((unsigned long)&virtblk_dev_page.blk_config % 8) != 0) { + mpsslog("%s: blk_config is not 8 byte aligned.\n", + mic->name); + return false; + } + add_virtio_device(mic, &virtblk_dev_page.dd); + if (MAP_FAILED == init_vr(mic, mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd, + VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK, vring, NULL, + virtblk_dev_page.dd.num_vq)) { + mpsslog("%s init_vr failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + return false; + } + return true; +} + +static void +stop_virtblk(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + int vr_size, ret; + + vr_size = PAGE_ALIGN(vring_size(MIC_VRING_ENTRIES, + MIC_VIRTIO_RING_ALIGN) + sizeof(struct _mic_vring_info)); + ret = munmap(mic->mic_virtblk.block_dp, + MIC_DEVICE_PAGE_END + vr_size * virtblk_dev_page.dd.num_vq); + if (ret < 0) + mpsslog("%s munmap errno %d\n", mic->name, errno); + close(mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd); +} + +static __u8 +header_error_check(struct vring_desc *desc) +{ + if (le32toh(desc->len) != sizeof(struct virtio_blk_outhdr)) { + mpsslog("%s() %d: length is not sizeof(virtio_blk_outhd)\n", + __func__, __LINE__); + return -EIO; + } + if (!(le16toh(desc->flags) & VRING_DESC_F_NEXT)) { + mpsslog("%s() %d: alone\n", + __func__, __LINE__); + return -EIO; + } + if (le16toh(desc->flags) & VRING_DESC_F_WRITE) { + mpsslog("%s() %d: not read\n", + __func__, __LINE__); + return -EIO; + } + return 0; +} + +static int +read_header(int fd, struct virtio_blk_outhdr *hdr, __u32 desc_idx) +{ + struct iovec iovec; + struct mic_copy_desc copy; + + iovec.iov_len = sizeof(*hdr); + iovec.iov_base = hdr; + copy.iov = &iovec; + copy.iovcnt = 1; + copy.vr_idx = 0; /* only one vring on virtio_block */ + copy.update_used = false; /* do not update used index */ + return ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_COPY_DESC, ©); +} + +static int +transfer_blocks(int fd, struct iovec *iovec, __u32 iovcnt) +{ + struct mic_copy_desc copy; + + copy.iov = iovec; + copy.iovcnt = iovcnt; + copy.vr_idx = 0; /* only one vring on virtio_block */ + copy.update_used = false; /* do not update used index */ + return ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_COPY_DESC, ©); +} + +static __u8 +status_error_check(struct vring_desc *desc) +{ + if (le32toh(desc->len) != sizeof(__u8)) { + mpsslog("%s() %d: length is not sizeof(status)\n", + __func__, __LINE__); + return -EIO; + } + return 0; +} + +static int +write_status(int fd, __u8 *status) +{ + struct iovec iovec; + struct mic_copy_desc copy; + + iovec.iov_base = status; + iovec.iov_len = sizeof(*status); + copy.iov = &iovec; + copy.iovcnt = 1; + copy.vr_idx = 0; /* only one vring on virtio_block */ + copy.update_used = true; /* Update used index */ + return ioctl(fd, MIC_VIRTIO_COPY_DESC, ©); +} + +static void * +virtio_block(void *arg) +{ + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; + int ret; + struct pollfd block_poll; + struct mic_vring vring; + __u16 avail_idx; + __u32 desc_idx; + struct vring_desc *desc; + struct iovec *iovec, *piov; + __u8 status; + __u32 buffer_desc_idx; + struct virtio_blk_outhdr hdr; + void *fos; + + for (;;) { /* forever */ + if (!open_backend(mic)) { /* No virtblk */ + for (mic->mic_virtblk.signaled = 0; + !mic->mic_virtblk.signaled;) + sleep(1); + continue; + } + + /* backend file is specified. */ + if (!start_virtblk(mic, &vring)) + goto _close_backend; + iovec = malloc(sizeof(*iovec) * + le32toh(virtblk_dev_page.blk_config.seg_max)); + if (!iovec) { + mpsslog("%s: can't alloc iovec: %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(ENOMEM)); + goto _stop_virtblk; + } + + block_poll.fd = mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd; + block_poll.events = POLLIN; + for (mic->mic_virtblk.signaled = 0; + !mic->mic_virtblk.signaled;) { + block_poll.revents = 0; + /* timeout in 1 sec to see signaled */ + ret = poll(&block_poll, 1, 1000); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s %d: poll failed: %s\n", + __func__, __LINE__, + strerror(errno)); + continue; + } + + if (!(block_poll.revents & POLLIN)) { +#ifdef DEBUG + mpsslog("%s %d: block_poll.revents=0x%x\n", + __func__, __LINE__, block_poll.revents); +#endif + continue; + } + + /* POLLIN */ + while (vring.info->avail_idx != + le16toh(vring.vr.avail->idx)) { + /* read header element */ + avail_idx = + vring.info->avail_idx & + (vring.vr.num - 1); + desc_idx = le16toh( + vring.vr.avail->ring[avail_idx]); + desc = &vring.vr.desc[desc_idx]; +#ifdef DEBUG + mpsslog("%s() %d: avail_idx=%d ", + __func__, __LINE__, + vring.info->avail_idx); + mpsslog("vring.vr.num=%d desc=%p\n", + vring.vr.num, desc); +#endif + status = header_error_check(desc); + ret = read_header( + mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd, + &hdr, desc_idx); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s() %d %s: ret=%d %s\n", + __func__, __LINE__, + mic->name, ret, + strerror(errno)); + break; + } + /* buffer element */ + piov = iovec; + status = 0; + fos = mic->mic_virtblk.backend_addr + + (hdr.sector * SECTOR_SIZE); + buffer_desc_idx = next_desc(desc); + desc_idx = buffer_desc_idx; + for (desc = &vring.vr.desc[buffer_desc_idx]; + desc->flags & VRING_DESC_F_NEXT; + desc_idx = next_desc(desc), + desc = &vring.vr.desc[desc_idx]) { + piov->iov_len = desc->len; + piov->iov_base = fos; + piov++; + fos += desc->len; + } + /* Returning NULLs for VIRTIO_BLK_T_GET_ID. */ + if (hdr.type & ~(VIRTIO_BLK_T_OUT | + VIRTIO_BLK_T_GET_ID)) { + /* + VIRTIO_BLK_T_IN - does not do + anything. Probably for documenting. + VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD - for + virtio_scsi. + VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH - turned off in + config space. + VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER - defined but not + used in anywhere. + */ + mpsslog("%s() %d: type %x ", + __func__, __LINE__, + hdr.type); + mpsslog("is not supported\n"); + status = -ENOTSUP; + + } else { + ret = transfer_blocks( + mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd, + iovec, + piov - iovec); + if (ret < 0 && + status != 0) + status = ret; + } + /* write status and update used pointer */ + if (status != 0) + status = status_error_check(desc); + ret = write_status( + mic->mic_virtblk.virtio_block_fd, + &status); +#ifdef DEBUG + mpsslog("%s() %d: write status=%d on desc=%p\n", + __func__, __LINE__, + status, desc); +#endif + } + } + free(iovec); +_stop_virtblk: + stop_virtblk(mic); +_close_backend: + close_backend(mic); + } /* forever */ + + pthread_exit(NULL); +} + +static void +reset(struct mic_info *mic) +{ +#define RESET_TIMEOUT 120 + int i = RESET_TIMEOUT; + setsysfs(mic->name, "state", "reset"); + while (i) { + char *state; + state = readsysfs(mic->name, "state"); + if (!state) + goto retry; + mpsslog("%s: %s %d state %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, state); + + /* + * If the shutdown was initiated by OSPM, the state stays + * in "suspended" which is also a valid condition for reset. + */ + if ((!strcmp(state, "offline")) || + (!strcmp(state, "suspended"))) { + free(state); + break; + } + free(state); +retry: + sleep(1); + i--; + } +} + +static int +get_mic_shutdown_status(struct mic_info *mic, char *shutdown_status) +{ + if (!strcmp(shutdown_status, "nop")) + return MIC_NOP; + if (!strcmp(shutdown_status, "crashed")) + return MIC_CRASHED; + if (!strcmp(shutdown_status, "halted")) + return MIC_HALTED; + if (!strcmp(shutdown_status, "poweroff")) + return MIC_POWER_OFF; + if (!strcmp(shutdown_status, "restart")) + return MIC_RESTART; + mpsslog("%s: BUG invalid status %s\n", mic->name, shutdown_status); + /* Invalid state */ + assert(0); +}; + +static int get_mic_state(struct mic_info *mic, char *state) +{ + if (!strcmp(state, "offline")) + return MIC_OFFLINE; + if (!strcmp(state, "online")) + return MIC_ONLINE; + if (!strcmp(state, "shutting_down")) + return MIC_SHUTTING_DOWN; + if (!strcmp(state, "reset_failed")) + return MIC_RESET_FAILED; + if (!strcmp(state, "suspending")) + return MIC_SUSPENDING; + if (!strcmp(state, "suspended")) + return MIC_SUSPENDED; + mpsslog("%s: BUG invalid state %s\n", mic->name, state); + /* Invalid state */ + assert(0); +}; + +static void mic_handle_shutdown(struct mic_info *mic) +{ +#define SHUTDOWN_TIMEOUT 60 + int i = SHUTDOWN_TIMEOUT, ret, stat = 0; + char *shutdown_status; + while (i) { + shutdown_status = readsysfs(mic->name, "shutdown_status"); + if (!shutdown_status) + continue; + mpsslog("%s: %s %d shutdown_status %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, shutdown_status); + switch (get_mic_shutdown_status(mic, shutdown_status)) { + case MIC_RESTART: + mic->restart = 1; + case MIC_HALTED: + case MIC_POWER_OFF: + case MIC_CRASHED: + free(shutdown_status); + goto reset; + default: + break; + } + free(shutdown_status); + sleep(1); + i--; + } +reset: + ret = kill(mic->pid, SIGTERM); + mpsslog("%s: %s %d kill pid %d ret %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + mic->pid, ret); + if (!ret) { + ret = waitpid(mic->pid, &stat, + WIFSIGNALED(stat)); + mpsslog("%s: %s %d waitpid ret %d pid %d\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, + ret, mic->pid); + } + if (ret == mic->pid) + reset(mic); +} + +static void * +mic_config(void *arg) +{ + struct mic_info *mic = (struct mic_info *)arg; + char *state = NULL; + char pathname[PATH_MAX]; + int fd, ret; + struct pollfd ufds[1]; + char value[4096]; + + snprintf(pathname, PATH_MAX - 1, "%s/%s/%s", + MICSYSFSDIR, mic->name, "state"); + + fd = open(pathname, O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: opening file %s failed %s\n", + mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); + goto error; + } + + do { + ret = lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: Failed to seek to file start '%s': %s\n", + mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); + goto close_error1; + } + ret = read(fd, value, sizeof(value)); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: Failed to read sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", + mic->name, pathname, strerror(errno)); + goto close_error1; + } +retry: + state = readsysfs(mic->name, "state"); + if (!state) + goto retry; + mpsslog("%s: %s %d state %s\n", + mic->name, __func__, __LINE__, state); + switch (get_mic_state(mic, state)) { + case MIC_SHUTTING_DOWN: + mic_handle_shutdown(mic); + goto close_error; + case MIC_SUSPENDING: + mic->boot_on_resume = 1; + setsysfs(mic->name, "state", "suspend"); + mic_handle_shutdown(mic); + goto close_error; + case MIC_OFFLINE: + if (mic->boot_on_resume) { + setsysfs(mic->name, "state", "boot"); + mic->boot_on_resume = 0; + } + break; + default: + break; + } + free(state); + + ufds[0].fd = fd; + ufds[0].events = POLLERR | POLLPRI; + ret = poll(ufds, 1, -1); + if (ret < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: poll failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + goto close_error1; + } + } while (1); +close_error: + free(state); +close_error1: + close(fd); +error: + init_mic(mic); + pthread_exit(NULL); +} + +static void +set_cmdline(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + char buffer[PATH_MAX]; + int len; + + len = snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, + "clocksource=tsc highres=off nohz=off "); + len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX, + "cpufreq_on;corec6_off;pc3_off;pc6_off "); + len += snprintf(buffer + len, PATH_MAX, + "ifcfg=static;address,172.31.%d.1;netmask,255.255.255.0", + mic->id); + + setsysfs(mic->name, "cmdline", buffer); + mpsslog("%s: Command line: \"%s\"\n", mic->name, buffer); + snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "172.31.%d.1", mic->id); + mpsslog("%s: IPADDR: \"%s\"\n", mic->name, buffer); +} + +static void +set_log_buf_info(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + int fd; + off_t len; + char system_map[] = "/lib/firmware/mic/System.map"; + char *map, *temp, log_buf[17] = {'\0'}; + + fd = open(system_map, O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: Opening System.map failed: %d\n", + mic->name, errno); + return; + } + len = lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_END); + if (len < 0) { + mpsslog("%s: Reading System.map size failed: %d\n", + mic->name, errno); + close(fd); + return; + } + map = mmap(NULL, len, PROT_READ, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); + if (map == MAP_FAILED) { + mpsslog("%s: mmap of System.map failed: %d\n", + mic->name, errno); + close(fd); + return; + } + temp = strstr(map, "__log_buf"); + if (!temp) { + mpsslog("%s: __log_buf not found: %d\n", mic->name, errno); + munmap(map, len); + close(fd); + return; + } + strncpy(log_buf, temp - 19, 16); + setsysfs(mic->name, "log_buf_addr", log_buf); + mpsslog("%s: log_buf_addr: %s\n", mic->name, log_buf); + temp = strstr(map, "log_buf_len"); + if (!temp) { + mpsslog("%s: log_buf_len not found: %d\n", mic->name, errno); + munmap(map, len); + close(fd); + return; + } + strncpy(log_buf, temp - 19, 16); + setsysfs(mic->name, "log_buf_len", log_buf); + mpsslog("%s: log_buf_len: %s\n", mic->name, log_buf); + munmap(map, len); + close(fd); +} + +static void init_mic(struct mic_info *mic); + +static void +change_virtblk_backend(int x, siginfo_t *siginfo, void *p) +{ + struct mic_info *mic; + + for (mic = mic_list.next; mic != NULL; mic = mic->next) + mic->mic_virtblk.signaled = 1/* true */; +} + +static void +init_mic(struct mic_info *mic) +{ + struct sigaction ignore = { + .sa_flags = 0, + .sa_handler = SIG_IGN + }; + struct sigaction act = { + .sa_flags = SA_SIGINFO, + .sa_sigaction = change_virtblk_backend, + }; + char buffer[PATH_MAX]; + int err; + + /* + * Currently, one virtio block device is supported for each MIC card + * at a time. Any user (or test) can send a SIGUSR1 to the MIC daemon. + * The signal informs the virtio block backend about a change in the + * configuration file which specifies the virtio backend file name on + * the host. Virtio block backend then re-reads the configuration file + * and switches to the new block device. This signalling mechanism may + * not be required once multiple virtio block devices are supported by + * the MIC daemon. + */ + sigaction(SIGUSR1, &ignore, NULL); + + mic->pid = fork(); + switch (mic->pid) { + case 0: + set_log_buf_info(mic); + set_cmdline(mic); + add_virtio_device(mic, &virtcons_dev_page.dd); + add_virtio_device(mic, &virtnet_dev_page.dd); + err = pthread_create(&mic->mic_console.console_thread, NULL, + virtio_console, mic); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s virtcons pthread_create failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(err)); + err = pthread_create(&mic->mic_net.net_thread, NULL, + virtio_net, mic); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s virtnet pthread_create failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(err)); + err = pthread_create(&mic->mic_virtblk.block_thread, NULL, + virtio_block, mic); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s virtblk pthread_create failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(err)); + sigemptyset(&act.sa_mask); + err = sigaction(SIGUSR1, &act, NULL); + if (err) + mpsslog("%s sigaction SIGUSR1 failed %s\n", + mic->name, strerror(errno)); + while (1) + sleep(60); + case -1: + mpsslog("fork failed MIC name %s id %d errno %d\n", + mic->name, mic->id, errno); + break; + default: + if (mic->restart) { + snprintf(buffer, PATH_MAX, "boot"); + setsysfs(mic->name, "state", buffer); + mpsslog("%s restarting mic %d\n", + mic->name, mic->restart); + mic->restart = 0; + } + pthread_create(&mic->config_thread, NULL, mic_config, mic); + } +} + +static void +start_daemon(void) +{ + struct mic_info *mic; + + for (mic = mic_list.next; mic != NULL; mic = mic->next) + init_mic(mic); + + while (1) + sleep(60); +} + +static int +init_mic_list(void) +{ + struct mic_info *mic = &mic_list; + struct dirent *file; + DIR *dp; + int cnt = 0; + + dp = opendir(MICSYSFSDIR); + if (!dp) + return 0; + + while ((file = readdir(dp)) != NULL) { + if (!strncmp(file->d_name, "mic", 3)) { + mic->next = calloc(1, sizeof(struct mic_info)); + if (mic->next) { + mic = mic->next; + mic->id = atoi(&file->d_name[3]); + mic->name = malloc(strlen(file->d_name) + 16); + if (mic->name) + strcpy(mic->name, file->d_name); + mpsslog("MIC name %s id %d\n", mic->name, + mic->id); + cnt++; + } + } + } + + closedir(dp); + return cnt; +} + +void +mpsslog(char *format, ...) +{ + va_list args; + char buffer[4096]; + char ts[52], *ts1; + time_t t; + + if (logfp == NULL) + return; + + va_start(args, format); + vsprintf(buffer, format, args); + va_end(args); + + time(&t); + ts1 = ctime_r(&t, ts); + ts1[strlen(ts1) - 1] = '\0'; + fprintf(logfp, "%s: %s", ts1, buffer); + + fflush(logfp); +} + +int +main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ + int cnt; + pid_t pid; + + myname = argv[0]; + + logfp = fopen(LOGFILE_NAME, "a+"); + if (!logfp) { + fprintf(stderr, "cannot open logfile '%s'\n", LOGFILE_NAME); + exit(1); + } + pid = fork(); + switch (pid) { + case 0: + break; + case -1: + exit(2); + default: + exit(0); + } + + mpsslog("MIC Daemon start\n"); + + cnt = init_mic_list(); + if (cnt == 0) { + mpsslog("MIC module not loaded\n"); + exit(3); + } + mpsslog("MIC found %d devices\n", cnt); + + start_daemon(); + + exit(0); +} diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f5f18b15d9a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/mpssd.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + * Intel MIC Platform Software Stack (MPSS) + * + * Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as + * published by the Free Software Foundation. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but + * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + * General Public License for more details. + * + * The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in + * the file called "COPYING". + * + * Intel MIC User Space Tools. + */ +#ifndef _MPSSD_H_ +#define _MPSSD_H_ + +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <string.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <dirent.h> +#include <libgen.h> +#include <pthread.h> +#include <stdarg.h> +#include <time.h> +#include <errno.h> +#include <sys/dir.h> +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/poll.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/socket.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/mman.h> +#include <sys/utsname.h> +#include <sys/wait.h> +#include <netinet/in.h> +#include <arpa/inet.h> +#include <netdb.h> +#include <pthread.h> +#include <signal.h> +#include <limits.h> +#include <syslog.h> +#include <getopt.h> +#include <net/if.h> +#include <linux/if_tun.h> +#include <linux/if_tun.h> +#include <linux/virtio_ids.h> + +#define MICSYSFSDIR "/sys/class/mic" +#define LOGFILE_NAME "/var/log/mpssd" +#define PAGE_SIZE 4096 + +struct mic_console_info { + pthread_t console_thread; + int virtio_console_fd; + void *console_dp; +}; + +struct mic_net_info { + pthread_t net_thread; + int virtio_net_fd; + int tap_fd; + void *net_dp; +}; + +struct mic_virtblk_info { + pthread_t block_thread; + int virtio_block_fd; + void *block_dp; + volatile sig_atomic_t signaled; + char *backend_file; + int backend; + void *backend_addr; + long backend_size; +}; + +struct mic_info { + int id; + char *name; + pthread_t config_thread; + pid_t pid; + struct mic_console_info mic_console; + struct mic_net_info mic_net; + struct mic_virtblk_info mic_virtblk; + int restart; + int boot_on_resume; + struct mic_info *next; +}; + +__attribute__((format(printf, 1, 2))) +void mpsslog(char *format, ...); +char *readsysfs(char *dir, char *entry); +int setsysfs(char *dir, char *entry, char *value); +#endif diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/sysfs.c b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/sysfs.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8dd326936083 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/sysfs.c @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + * Intel MIC Platform Software Stack (MPSS) + * + * Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as + * published by the Free Software Foundation. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but + * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + * General Public License for more details. + * + * The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in + * the file called "COPYING". + * + * Intel MIC User Space Tools. + */ + +#include "mpssd.h" + +#define PAGE_SIZE 4096 + +char * +readsysfs(char *dir, char *entry) +{ + char filename[PATH_MAX]; + char value[PAGE_SIZE]; + char *string = NULL; + int fd; + int len; + + if (dir == NULL) + snprintf(filename, PATH_MAX, "%s/%s", MICSYSFSDIR, entry); + else + snprintf(filename, PATH_MAX, + "%s/%s/%s", MICSYSFSDIR, dir, entry); + + fd = open(filename, O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) { + mpsslog("Failed to open sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", + filename, strerror(errno)); + return NULL; + } + + len = read(fd, value, sizeof(value)); + if (len < 0) { + mpsslog("Failed to read sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", + filename, strerror(errno)); + goto readsys_ret; + } + if (len == 0) + goto readsys_ret; + + value[len - 1] = '\0'; + + string = malloc(strlen(value) + 1); + if (string) + strcpy(string, value); + +readsys_ret: + close(fd); + return string; +} + +int +setsysfs(char *dir, char *entry, char *value) +{ + char filename[PATH_MAX]; + char *oldvalue; + int fd, ret = 0; + + if (dir == NULL) + snprintf(filename, PATH_MAX, "%s/%s", MICSYSFSDIR, entry); + else + snprintf(filename, PATH_MAX, "%s/%s/%s", + MICSYSFSDIR, dir, entry); + + oldvalue = readsysfs(dir, entry); + + fd = open(filename, O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + ret = errno; + mpsslog("Failed to open sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", + filename, strerror(errno)); + goto done; + } + + if (!oldvalue || strcmp(value, oldvalue)) { + if (write(fd, value, strlen(value)) < 0) { + ret = errno; + mpsslog("Failed to write new sysfs entry '%s': %s\n", + filename, strerror(errno)); + } + } + close(fd); +done: + if (oldvalue) + free(oldvalue); + return ret; +} diff --git a/Documentation/mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/mutex-design.txt index 38c10fd7f411..1dfe62c3641d 100644 --- a/Documentation/mutex-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/mutex-design.txt @@ -116,11 +116,11 @@ using mutexes at the moment, please let me know if you find any. ] Implementation of mutexes ------------------------- -'struct mutex' is the new mutex type, defined in include/linux/mutex.h -and implemented in kernel/mutex.c. It is a counter-based mutex with a -spinlock and a wait-list. The counter has 3 states: 1 for "unlocked", -0 for "locked" and negative numbers (usually -1) for "locked, potential -waiters queued". +'struct mutex' is the new mutex type, defined in include/linux/mutex.h and +implemented in kernel/locking/mutex.c. It is a counter-based mutex with a +spinlock and a wait-list. The counter has 3 states: 1 for "unlocked", 0 for +"locked" and negative numbers (usually -1) for "locked, potential waiters +queued". the APIs of 'struct mutex' have been streamlined: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index 18b64b2b8a68..f11580f8719a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -86,6 +86,8 @@ generic_netlink.txt - info on Generic Netlink gianfar.txt - Gianfar Ethernet Driver. +i40e.txt + - README for the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710 Driver (i40e). ieee802154.txt - Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation, API and drivers igb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index c1d82047a4b1..89490beb3c0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -69,8 +69,7 @@ folder: # aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth log_level # ap_isolation gw_mode orig_interval # bonding gw_sel_class routing_algo -# bridge_loop_avoidance hop_penalty vis_mode -# fragmentation +# bridge_loop_avoidance hop_penalty fragmentation There is a special folder for debugging information: @@ -78,7 +77,7 @@ There is a special folder for debugging information: # ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ # bla_backbone_table log transtable_global # bla_claim_table originators transtable_local -# gateways socket vis_data +# gateways socket Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- ing the mesh network. For example, you can view the table of @@ -127,51 +126,6 @@ ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g. # ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0 -VISUALIZATION -------------- - -If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh node must -be configured as VIS-server: - -# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode - -Each node is either configured as "server" or as "client" (de- -fault: "client"). Clients send their topology data to the server -next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there -is no server configured (default) within the mesh, no topology -information will be transmitted. With these "synchronizing -servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or -at least very similar) data. - -When configured as server, you can get a topology snapshot of -your mesh: - -# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data - -This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable -with other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a -vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those out- -puts could then be visualised in an image. - -The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where -each entry is giving information about a certain source inter- -face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: --> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface - (each line begins with it) --> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address - of a neighbor originator's interface which - is being used for routing --> "TT mac" - TT announced by source mac --> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface --> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source - (requires preceding PRIMARY) - -The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. -The TT entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh -via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC -values are only applied on primary interfaces - - LOGGING/DEBUGGING ----------------- @@ -245,5 +199,5 @@ Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@open-mesh.org (optional subscription You can also contact the Authors: -Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> -Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Marek Lindner <mareklindner@neomailbox.ch> +Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 87bbcfee2e06..2cdb8b66caa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -639,6 +639,15 @@ num_unsol_na are generated by the ipv4 and ipv6 code and the numbers of repetitions cannot be set independently. +packets_per_slave + + Specify the number of packets to transmit through a slave before + moving to the next one. When set to 0 then a slave is chosen at + random. + + The valid range is 0 - 65535; the default value is 1. This option + has effect only in balance-rr mode. + primary A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the @@ -743,21 +752,16 @@ xmit_hash_policy protocol information to generate the hash. Uses XOR of hardware MAC addresses and IP addresses to - generate the hash. The IPv4 formula is - - (((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff) XOR - ( source MAC XOR destination MAC )) - modulo slave count + generate the hash. The formula is - The IPv6 formula is + hash = source MAC XOR destination MAC + hash = hash XOR source IP XOR destination IP + hash = hash XOR (hash RSHIFT 16) + hash = hash XOR (hash RSHIFT 8) + And then hash is reduced modulo slave count. - hash = (source ip quad 2 XOR dest IP quad 2) XOR - (source ip quad 3 XOR dest IP quad 3) XOR - (source ip quad 4 XOR dest IP quad 4) - - (((hash >> 24) XOR (hash >> 16) XOR (hash >> 8) XOR hash) - XOR (source MAC XOR destination MAC)) - modulo slave count + If the protocol is IPv6 then the source and destination + addresses are first hashed using ipv6_addr_hash. This algorithm will place all traffic to a particular network peer on the same slave. For non-IP traffic, @@ -779,21 +783,16 @@ xmit_hash_policy slaves, although a single connection will not span multiple slaves. - The formula for unfragmented IPv4 TCP and UDP packets is - - ((source port XOR dest port) XOR - ((source IP XOR dest IP) AND 0xffff) - modulo slave count - - The formula for unfragmented IPv6 TCP and UDP packets is + The formula for unfragmented TCP and UDP packets is - hash = (source port XOR dest port) XOR - ((source ip quad 2 XOR dest IP quad 2) XOR - (source ip quad 3 XOR dest IP quad 3) XOR - (source ip quad 4 XOR dest IP quad 4)) + hash = source port, destination port (as in the header) + hash = hash XOR source IP XOR destination IP + hash = hash XOR (hash RSHIFT 16) + hash = hash XOR (hash RSHIFT 8) + And then hash is reduced modulo slave count. - ((hash >> 24) XOR (hash >> 16) XOR (hash >> 8) XOR hash) - modulo slave count + If the protocol is IPv6 then the source and destination + addresses are first hashed using ipv6_addr_hash. For fragmented TCP or UDP packets and all other IPv4 and IPv6 protocol traffic, the source and destination port @@ -801,10 +800,6 @@ xmit_hash_policy formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit hash policy. - The IPv4 policy is intended to mimic the behavior of - certain switches, notably Cisco switches with PFC2 as - well as some Foundry and IBM products. - This algorithm is not fully 802.3ad compliant. A single TCP or UDP conversation containing both fragmented and unfragmented packets will see packets @@ -815,6 +810,26 @@ xmit_hash_policy conversations. Other implementations of 802.3ad may or may not tolerate this noncompliance. + encap2+3 + + This policy uses the same formula as layer2+3 but it + relies on skb_flow_dissect to obtain the header fields + which might result in the use of inner headers if an + encapsulation protocol is used. For example this will + improve the performance for tunnel users because the + packets will be distributed according to the encapsulated + flows. + + encap3+4 + + This policy uses the same formula as layer3+4 but it + relies on skb_flow_dissect to obtain the header fields + which might result in the use of inner headers if an + encapsulation protocol is used. For example this will + improve the performance for tunnel users because the + packets will be distributed according to the encapsulated + flows. + The default value is layer2. This option was added in bonding version 2.6.3. In earlier versions of bonding, this parameter does not exist, and the layer2 policy is the only policy. The @@ -1362,6 +1377,12 @@ To add ARP targets: To remove an ARP target: # echo -192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target +To configure the interval between learning packet transmits: +# echo 12 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/lp_interval + NOTE: the lp_inteval is the number of seconds between instances where +the bonding driver sends learning packets to each slaves peer switch. The +default interval is 1 second. + Example Configuration --------------------- We begin with the same example that is shown in section 3.3, diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 820f55344edc..4c072414eadb 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -25,6 +25,12 @@ This file contains 4.1.5 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_FD_FRAMES 4.1.6 RAW socket returned message flags 4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM) + 4.2.1 Broadcast Manager operations + 4.2.2 Broadcast Manager message flags + 4.2.3 Broadcast Manager transmission timers + 4.2.4 Broadcast Manager message sequence transmission + 4.2.5 Broadcast Manager receive filter timers + 4.2.6 Broadcast Manager multiplex message receive filter 4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET) 4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM) @@ -593,6 +599,217 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: In order to receive such messages, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS must be set. 4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM) + + The Broadcast Manager protocol provides a command based configuration + interface to filter and send (e.g. cyclic) CAN messages in kernel space. + + Receive filters can be used to down sample frequent messages; detect events + such as message contents changes, packet length changes, and do time-out + monitoring of received messages. + + Periodic transmission tasks of CAN frames or a sequence of CAN frames can be + created and modified at runtime; both the message content and the two + possible transmit intervals can be altered. + + A BCM socket is not intended for sending individual CAN frames using the + struct can_frame as known from the CAN_RAW socket. Instead a special BCM + configuration message is defined. The basic BCM configuration message used + to communicate with the broadcast manager and the available operations are + defined in the linux/can/bcm.h include. The BCM message consists of a + message header with a command ('opcode') followed by zero or more CAN frames. + The broadcast manager sends responses to user space in the same form: + + struct bcm_msg_head { + __u32 opcode; /* command */ + __u32 flags; /* special flags */ + __u32 count; /* run 'count' times with ival1 */ + struct timeval ival1, ival2; /* count and subsequent interval */ + canid_t can_id; /* unique can_id for task */ + __u32 nframes; /* number of can_frames following */ + struct can_frame frames[0]; + }; + + The aligned payload 'frames' uses the same basic CAN frame structure defined + at the beginning of section 4 and in the include/linux/can.h include. All + messages to the broadcast manager from user space have this structure. + + Note a CAN_BCM socket must be connected instead of bound after socket + creation (example without error checking): + + int s; + struct sockaddr_can addr; + struct ifreq ifr; + + s = socket(PF_CAN, SOCK_DGRAM, CAN_BCM); + + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "can0"); + ioctl(s, SIOCGIFINDEX, &ifr); + + addr.can_family = AF_CAN; + addr.can_ifindex = ifr.ifr_ifindex; + + connect(s, (struct sockaddr *)&addr, sizeof(addr)) + + (..) + + The broadcast manager socket is able to handle any number of in flight + transmissions or receive filters concurrently. The different RX/TX jobs are + distinguished by the unique can_id in each BCM message. However additional + CAN_BCM sockets are recommended to communicate on multiple CAN interfaces. + When the broadcast manager socket is bound to 'any' CAN interface (=> the + interface index is set to zero) the configured receive filters apply to any + CAN interface unless the sendto() syscall is used to overrule the 'any' CAN + interface index. When using recvfrom() instead of read() to retrieve BCM + socket messages the originating CAN interface is provided in can_ifindex. + + 4.2.1 Broadcast Manager operations + + The opcode defines the operation for the broadcast manager to carry out, + or details the broadcast managers response to several events, including + user requests. + + Transmit Operations (user space to broadcast manager): + + TX_SETUP: Create (cyclic) transmission task. + + TX_DELETE: Remove (cyclic) transmission task, requires only can_id. + + TX_READ: Read properties of (cyclic) transmission task for can_id. + + TX_SEND: Send one CAN frame. + + Transmit Responses (broadcast manager to user space): + + TX_STATUS: Reply to TX_READ request (transmission task configuration). + + TX_EXPIRED: Notification when counter finishes sending at initial interval + 'ival1'. Requires the TX_COUNTEVT flag to be set at TX_SETUP. + + Receive Operations (user space to broadcast manager): + + RX_SETUP: Create RX content filter subscription. + + RX_DELETE: Remove RX content filter subscription, requires only can_id. + + RX_READ: Read properties of RX content filter subscription for can_id. + + Receive Responses (broadcast manager to user space): + + RX_STATUS: Reply to RX_READ request (filter task configuration). + + RX_TIMEOUT: Cyclic message is detected to be absent (timer ival1 expired). + + RX_CHANGED: BCM message with updated CAN frame (detected content change). + Sent on first message received or on receipt of revised CAN messages. + + 4.2.2 Broadcast Manager message flags + + When sending a message to the broadcast manager the 'flags' element may + contain the following flag definitions which influence the behaviour: + + SETTIMER: Set the values of ival1, ival2 and count + + STARTTIMER: Start the timer with the actual values of ival1, ival2 + and count. Starting the timer leads simultaneously to emit a CAN frame. + + TX_COUNTEVT: Create the message TX_EXPIRED when count expires + + TX_ANNOUNCE: A change of data by the process is emitted immediately. + + TX_CP_CAN_ID: Copies the can_id from the message header to each + subsequent frame in frames. This is intended as usage simplification. For + TX tasks the unique can_id from the message header may differ from the + can_id(s) stored for transmission in the subsequent struct can_frame(s). + + RX_FILTER_ID: Filter by can_id alone, no frames required (nframes=0). + + RX_CHECK_DLC: A change of the DLC leads to an RX_CHANGED. + + RX_NO_AUTOTIMER: Prevent automatically starting the timeout monitor. + + RX_ANNOUNCE_RESUME: If passed at RX_SETUP and a receive timeout occured, a + RX_CHANGED message will be generated when the (cyclic) receive restarts. + + TX_RESET_MULTI_IDX: Reset the index for the multiple frame transmission. + + RX_RTR_FRAME: Send reply for RTR-request (placed in op->frames[0]). + + 4.2.3 Broadcast Manager transmission timers + + Periodic transmission configurations may use up to two interval timers. + In this case the BCM sends a number of messages ('count') at an interval + 'ival1', then continuing to send at another given interval 'ival2'. When + only one timer is needed 'count' is set to zero and only 'ival2' is used. + When SET_TIMER and START_TIMER flag were set the timers are activated. + The timer values can be altered at runtime when only SET_TIMER is set. + + 4.2.4 Broadcast Manager message sequence transmission + + Up to 256 CAN frames can be transmitted in a sequence in the case of a cyclic + TX task configuration. The number of CAN frames is provided in the 'nframes' + element of the BCM message head. The defined number of CAN frames are added + as array to the TX_SETUP BCM configuration message. + + /* create a struct to set up a sequence of four CAN frames */ + struct { + struct bcm_msg_head msg_head; + struct can_frame frame[4]; + } mytxmsg; + + (..) + mytxmsg.nframes = 4; + (..) + + write(s, &mytxmsg, sizeof(mytxmsg)); + + With every transmission the index in the array of CAN frames is increased + and set to zero at index overflow. + + 4.2.5 Broadcast Manager receive filter timers + + The timer values ival1 or ival2 may be set to non-zero values at RX_SETUP. + When the SET_TIMER flag is set the timers are enabled: + + ival1: Send RX_TIMEOUT when a received message is not received again within + the given time. When START_TIMER is set at RX_SETUP the timeout detection + is activated directly - even without a former CAN frame reception. + + ival2: Throttle the received message rate down to the value of ival2. This + is useful to reduce messages for the application when the signal inside the + CAN frame is stateless as state changes within the ival2 periode may get + lost. + + 4.2.6 Broadcast Manager multiplex message receive filter + + To filter for content changes in multiplex message sequences an array of more + than one CAN frames can be passed in a RX_SETUP configuration message. The + data bytes of the first CAN frame contain the mask of relevant bits that + have to match in the subsequent CAN frames with the received CAN frame. + If one of the subsequent CAN frames is matching the bits in that frame data + mark the relevant content to be compared with the previous received content. + Up to 257 CAN frames (multiplex filter bit mask CAN frame plus 256 CAN + filters) can be added as array to the TX_SETUP BCM configuration message. + + /* usually used to clear CAN frame data[] - beware of endian problems! */ + #define U64_DATA(p) (*(unsigned long long*)(p)->data) + + struct { + struct bcm_msg_head msg_head; + struct can_frame frame[5]; + } msg; + + msg.msg_head.opcode = RX_SETUP; + msg.msg_head.can_id = 0x42; + msg.msg_head.flags = 0; + msg.msg_head.nframes = 5; + U64_DATA(&msg.frame[0]) = 0xFF00000000000000ULL; /* MUX mask */ + U64_DATA(&msg.frame[1]) = 0x01000000000000FFULL; /* data mask (MUX 0x01) */ + U64_DATA(&msg.frame[2]) = 0x0200FFFF000000FFULL; /* data mask (MUX 0x02) */ + U64_DATA(&msg.frame[3]) = 0x330000FFFFFF0003ULL; /* data mask (MUX 0x33) */ + U64_DATA(&msg.frame[4]) = 0x4F07FC0FF0000000ULL; /* data mask (MUX 0x4F) */ + + write(s, &msg, sizeof(msg)); + 4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET) 4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index d718bc2ff1cf..bf5dbe3ab8c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ Introduction Datagram Congestion Control Protocol (DCCP) is an unreliable, connection oriented protocol designed to solve issues present in UDP and TCP, particularly for real-time and multimedia (streaming) traffic. -It divides into a base protocol (RFC 4340) and plugable congestion control -modules called CCIDs. Like plugable TCP congestion control, at least one CCID +It divides into a base protocol (RFC 4340) and pluggable congestion control +modules called CCIDs. Like pluggable TCP congestion control, at least one CCID needs to be enabled in order for the protocol to function properly. In the Linux implementation, this is the TCP-like CCID2 (RFC 4341). Additional CCIDs, such as the TCP-friendly CCID3 (RFC 4342), are optional. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt index 13a32124bca0..f862cf3aff34 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Additional Configurations PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100. As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters - (eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuraton file in /etc/modprobe.d/ + (eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ alias eth0 e100 alias eth1 e100 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt b/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f737273c6dc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/i40e.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 Family +=================================================================== + +Intel i40e Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 2013 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Additional Configurations +- Performance Tuning +- Known Issues +- Support + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +The driver in this release is compatible with the Intel Ethernet +Controller XL710 Family. + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm + + +Enabling the driver +=================== + +The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system, +using the make command: + + Make oldconfig/silentoldconfig/menuconfig/etc. + +The driver is located in the menu structure at: + + -> Device Drivers + -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) + -> Ethernet driver support + -> Intel devices + -> Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 Family + +Additional Configurations +========================= + + Generic Receive Offload (GRO) + ----------------------------- + The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has + shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU + utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is + an evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce + other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that + are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. + + Ethtool + ------- + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + ethtool version is required for this functionality. + + The latest release of ethtool can be found from + https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool + + Data Center Bridging (DCB) + -------------------------- + DCB configuration is not currently supported. + + FCoE + ---- + Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) hardware offload is not currently + supported. + + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + + +Performance Tuning +================== + +An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at: + +http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf + + +Known Issues +============ + + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + + http://e1000.sourceforge.net + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related +to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net and copy +netdev@vger.kernel.org. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt index 09eb57329f11..22bbc7225f8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Introduction ============ -The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standartization of bottom +The IEEE 802.15.4 working group focuses on standardization of bottom two layers: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical (PHY). And there are mainly two options available for upper layers: - ZigBee - proprietary protocol from ZigBee Alliance @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ net_device, with .type = ARPHRD_IEEE802154. Data is exchanged with socket family code via plain sk_buffs. On skb reception skb->cb must contain additional info as described in the struct ieee802154_mac_cb. During packet transmission the skb->cb is used to provide additional data to device's header_ops->create -function. Be aware, that this data can be overriden later (when socket code +function. Be aware that this data can be overridden later (when socket code submits skb to qdisc), so if you need something from that cb later, you should store info in the skb->data on your own. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index a46d78583ae1..3c12d9a7ed00 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -267,17 +267,6 @@ tcp_max_orphans - INTEGER more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats up to ~64K of unswappable memory. -tcp_max_ssthresh - INTEGER - Limited Slow-Start for TCP with large congestion windows (cwnd) defined in - RFC3742. Limited slow-start is a mechanism to limit growth of the cwnd - on the region where cwnd is larger than tcp_max_ssthresh. TCP increases cwnd - by at most tcp_max_ssthresh segments, and by at least tcp_max_ssthresh/2 - segments per RTT when the cwnd is above tcp_max_ssthresh. - If TCP connection increased cwnd to thousands (or tens of thousands) segments, - and thousands of packets were being dropped during slow-start, you can set - tcp_max_ssthresh to improve performance for new TCP connection. - Default: 0 (off) - tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which have not received an acknowledgment from connecting client. @@ -451,7 +440,7 @@ tcp_fastopen - INTEGER connect() to perform a TCP handshake automatically. The values (bitmap) are - 1: Enables sending data in the opening SYN on the client. + 1: Enables sending data in the opening SYN on the client w/ MSG_FASTOPEN. 2: Enables TCP Fast Open on the server side, i.e., allowing data in a SYN packet to be accepted and passed to the application before 3-way hand shake finishes. @@ -464,7 +453,7 @@ tcp_fastopen - INTEGER different ways of setting max_qlen without the TCP_FASTOPEN socket option. - Default: 0 + Default: 1 Note that the client & server side Fast Open flags (1 and 2 respectively) must be also enabled before the rest of flags can take @@ -588,9 +577,6 @@ tcp_limit_output_bytes - INTEGER typical pfifo_fast qdiscs. tcp_limit_output_bytes limits the number of bytes on qdisc or device to reduce artificial RTT/cwnd and reduce bufferbloat. - Note: For GSO/TSO enabled flows, we try to have at least two - packets in flight. Reducing tcp_limit_output_bytes might also - reduce the size of individual GSO packet (64KB being the max) Default: 131072 tcp_challenge_ack_limit - INTEGER diff --git a/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt b/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt index e63fc1f7bf87..c74434de2fa5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ state information because the file format is subject to change. It is implemented to provide extra debug information to help diagnose problems.) Users should use the netlink API. -/proc/net/pppol2tp is also provided for backwards compaibility with +/proc/net/pppol2tp is also provided for backwards compatibility with the original pppol2tp driver. It lists information about L2TPv2 tunnels and sessions only. Its use is discouraged. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt index d9112f01c44a..0fe1c6e0dbcd 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt @@ -4,23 +4,23 @@ Information you need to know about netdev Q: What is netdev? -A: It is a mailing list for all network related linux stuff. This includes +A: It is a mailing list for all network-related Linux stuff. This includes anything found under net/ (i.e. core code like IPv6) and drivers/net - (i.e. hardware specific drivers) in the linux source tree. + (i.e. hardware specific drivers) in the Linux source tree. Note that some subsystems (e.g. wireless drivers) which have a high volume of traffic have their own specific mailing lists. - The netdev list is managed (like many other linux mailing lists) through + The netdev list is managed (like many other Linux mailing lists) through VGER ( http://vger.kernel.org/ ) and archives can be found below: http://marc.info/?l=linux-netdev http://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/ - Aside from subsystems like that mentioned above, all network related linux - development (i.e. RFC, review, comments, etc) takes place on netdev. + Aside from subsystems like that mentioned above, all network-related Linux + development (i.e. RFC, review, comments, etc.) takes place on netdev. -Q: How do the changes posted to netdev make their way into linux? +Q: How do the changes posted to netdev make their way into Linux? A: There are always two trees (git repositories) in play. Both are driven by David Miller, the main network maintainer. There is the "net" tree, @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ A: There are always two trees (git repositories) in play. Both are driven Q: How often do changes from these trees make it to the mainline Linus tree? A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information - on the cadence of linux development. Each new release starts off with + on the cadence of Linux development. Each new release starts off with a two week "merge window" where the main maintainers feed their new stuff to Linus for merging into the mainline tree. After the two weeks, the merge window is closed, and it is called/tagged "-rc1". No new @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information things are in a state of churn), and a week after the last vX.Y-rcN was done, the official "vX.Y" is released. - Relating that to netdev: At the beginning of the 2 week merge window, + Relating that to netdev: At the beginning of the 2-week merge window, the net-next tree will be closed - no new changes/features. The accumulated new content of the past ~10 weeks will be passed onto mainline/Linus via a pull request for vX.Y -- at the same time, @@ -59,16 +59,16 @@ A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information IMPORTANT: Do not send new net-next content to netdev during the period during which net-next tree is closed. - Shortly after the two weeks have passed, (and vX.Y-rc1 is released) the + Shortly after the two weeks have passed (and vX.Y-rc1 is released), the tree for net-next reopens to collect content for the next (vX.Y+1) release. If you aren't subscribed to netdev and/or are simply unsure if net-next has re-opened yet, simply check the net-next git repository link above for - any new networking related commits. + any new networking-related commits. The "net" tree continues to collect fixes for the vX.Y content, and is fed back to Linus at regular (~weekly) intervals. Meaning that the - focus for "net" is on stablilization and bugfixes. + focus for "net" is on stabilization and bugfixes. Finally, the vX.Y gets released, and the whole cycle starts over. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ A: Attention to detail. Re-read your own work as if you were the to why it happens, and then if necessary, explain why the fix proposed is the best way to get things done. Don't mangle whitespace, and as is common, don't mis-indent function arguments that span multiple lines. - If it is your 1st patch, mail it to yourself so you can test apply + If it is your first patch, mail it to yourself so you can test apply it to an unpatched tree to confirm infrastructure didn't mangle it. Finally, go back and read Documentation/SubmittingPatches to be diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt index c7ecc7080494..0b1cf6b2a592 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt @@ -10,12 +10,12 @@ network devices. struct net_device allocation rules ================================== Network device structures need to persist even after module is unloaded and -must be allocated with kmalloc. If device has registered successfully, -it will be freed on last use by free_netdev. This is required to handle the -pathologic case cleanly (example: rmmod mydriver </sys/class/net/myeth/mtu ) +must be allocated with alloc_netdev_mqs() and friends. +If device has registered successfully, it will be freed on last use +by free_netdev(). This is required to handle the pathologic case cleanly +(example: rmmod mydriver </sys/class/net/myeth/mtu ) -There are routines in net_init.c to handle the common cases of -alloc_etherdev, alloc_netdev. These reserve extra space for driver +alloc_netdev_mqs()/alloc_netdev() reserve extra space for driver private data which gets freed when the network device is freed. If separately allocated data is attached to the network device (netdev_priv(dev)) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt index 533378839546..b26122973525 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netlink_mmap.txt @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ processing. Conversion of the reception path involves calling poll() on the file descriptor, once the socket is readable the frames from the ring are -processsed in order until no more messages are available, as indicated by +processed in order until no more messages are available, as indicated by a status word in the frame header. On kernel side, in order to make use of memory mapped I/O on receive, the @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Dumps of kernel databases automatically support memory mapped I/O. Conversion of the transmit path involves changing message construction to use memory from the TX ring instead of (usually) a buffer declared on the -stack and setting up the frame header approriately. Optionally poll() can +stack and setting up the frame header appropriately. Optionally poll() can be used to wait for free frames in the TX ring. Structured and definitions for using memory mapped I/O are contained in @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Ring setup: if (setsockopt(fd, NETLINK_TX_RING, &req, sizeof(req)) < 0) exit(1) - /* Calculate size of each invididual ring */ + /* Calculate size of each individual ring */ ring_size = req.nm_block_nr * req.nm_block_size; /* Map RX/TX rings. The TX ring is located after the RX ring */ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt index 97694572338b..355c6d8ef8ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/operstates.txt @@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ packets. The name 'carrier' and the inversion are historical, think of it as lower layer. Note that for certain kind of soft-devices, which are not managing any -real hardware, there is possible to set this bit from userpsace. -One should use TVL IFLA_CARRIER to do so. +real hardware, it is possible to set this bit from userspace. One +should use TVL IFLA_CARRIER to do so. netif_carrier_ok() can be used to query that bit. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index c01223628a87..8e48e3b14227 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -123,6 +123,16 @@ Transmission process is similar to capture as shown below. [shutdown] close() --------> destruction of the transmission socket and deallocation of all associated resources. +Socket creation and destruction is also straight forward, and is done +the same way as in capturing described in the previous paragraph: + + int fd = socket(PF_PACKET, mode, 0); + +The protocol can optionally be 0 in case we only want to transmit +via this socket, which avoids an expensive call to packet_rcv(). +In this case, you also need to bind(2) the TX_RING with sll_protocol = 0 +set. Otherwise, htons(ETH_P_ALL) or any other protocol, for example. + Binding the socket to your network interface is mandatory (with zero copy) to know the header size of frames used in the circular buffer. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt index 60d05eb77c64..b89bc82eed46 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ An overview of the RxRPC protocol: (*) Calls use ACK packets to handle reliability. Data packets are also explicitly sequenced per call. - (*) There are two types of positive acknowledgement: hard-ACKs and soft-ACKs. + (*) There are two types of positive acknowledgment: hard-ACKs and soft-ACKs. A hard-ACK indicates to the far side that all the data received to a point has been received and processed; a soft-ACK indicates that the data has been received but may yet be discarded and re-requested. The sender may diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 457b8bbafb08..cdd916da838d 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Where: o pmt: core has the embedded power module (optional). o force_sf_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode instead of the Threshold. - o force_thresh_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Shreshold mode other than + o force_thresh_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Threshold mode other than the Store and Forward mode. o riwt_off: force to disable the RX watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode. o fix_mac_speed: this callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Where: registers. o custom_cfg/custom_data: this is a custom configuration that can be passed while initializing the resources. - o bsp_priv: another private poiter. + o bsp_priv: another private pointer. For MDIO bus The we have: @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ reset procedure etc). o dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC; o dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code; - o dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip; + o dwmac100_dma.c: dma functions for the MAC chip; o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips; o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors; @@ -364,4 +364,4 @@ Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability. 10) TODO: o XGMAC is not supported. o Complete the TBI & RTBI support. - o extened VLAN support for 3.70a SYNP GMAC. + o extend VLAN support for 3.70a SYNP GMAC. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt index 9a8041dcbb53..97282da82b75 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Module parameters There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when its module is loaded. These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf -configuretion files. Example: +configuration files. Example: options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300 @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ max_interrupt_work=N The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop. - The value of max_interrupt_work governs how mnay times the interrupt + The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt". diff --git a/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt b/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt index 78f662ee0622..7f213b556e85 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ reduced by the following measures or a combination thereof: later. The lapb module interface was modified to support this. Its data_indication() method should now transparently pass the - netif_rx() return value to the (lapb mopdule) caller. + netif_rx() return value to the (lapb module) caller. (2) Drivers for kernel versions 2.2.x should always check the global variable netdev_dropping when a new frame is received. The driver should only call netif_rx() if netdev_dropping is zero. Otherwise diff --git a/Documentation/phy.txt b/Documentation/phy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0103e4b15b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/phy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + PHY SUBSYSTEM + Kishon Vijay Abraham I <kishon@ti.com> + +This document explains the Generic PHY Framework along with the APIs provided, +and how-to-use. + +1. Introduction + +*PHY* is the abbreviation for physical layer. It is used to connect a device +to the physical medium e.g., the USB controller has a PHY to provide functions +such as serialization, de-serialization, encoding, decoding and is responsible +for obtaining the required data transmission rate. Note that some USB +controllers have PHY functionality embedded into it and others use an external +PHY. Other peripherals that use PHY include Wireless LAN, Ethernet, +SATA etc. + +The intention of creating this framework is to bring the PHY drivers spread +all over the Linux kernel to drivers/phy to increase code re-use and for +better code maintainability. + +This framework will be of use only to devices that use external PHY (PHY +functionality is not embedded within the controller). + +2. Registering/Unregistering the PHY provider + +PHY provider refers to an entity that implements one or more PHY instances. +For the simple case where the PHY provider implements only a single instance of +the PHY, the framework provides its own implementation of of_xlate in +of_phy_simple_xlate. If the PHY provider implements multiple instances, it +should provide its own implementation of of_xlate. of_xlate is used only for +dt boot case. + +#define of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \ + __of_phy_provider_register((dev), THIS_MODULE, (xlate)) + +#define devm_of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \ + __devm_of_phy_provider_register((dev), THIS_MODULE, (xlate)) + +of_phy_provider_register and devm_of_phy_provider_register macros can be used to +register the phy_provider and it takes device and of_xlate as +arguments. For the dt boot case, all PHY providers should use one of the above +2 macros to register the PHY provider. + +void devm_of_phy_provider_unregister(struct device *dev, + struct phy_provider *phy_provider); +void of_phy_provider_unregister(struct phy_provider *phy_provider); + +devm_of_phy_provider_unregister and of_phy_provider_unregister can be used to +unregister the PHY. + +3. Creating the PHY + +The PHY driver should create the PHY in order for other peripheral controllers +to make use of it. The PHY framework provides 2 APIs to create the PHY. + +struct phy *phy_create(struct device *dev, const struct phy_ops *ops, + struct phy_init_data *init_data); +struct phy *devm_phy_create(struct device *dev, const struct phy_ops *ops, + struct phy_init_data *init_data); + +The PHY drivers can use one of the above 2 APIs to create the PHY by passing +the device pointer, phy ops and init_data. +phy_ops is a set of function pointers for performing PHY operations such as +init, exit, power_on and power_off. *init_data* is mandatory to get a reference +to the PHY in the case of non-dt boot. See section *Board File Initialization* +on how init_data should be used. + +Inorder to dereference the private data (in phy_ops), the phy provider driver +can use phy_set_drvdata() after creating the PHY and use phy_get_drvdata() in +phy_ops to get back the private data. + +4. Getting a reference to the PHY + +Before the controller can make use of the PHY, it has to get a reference to +it. This framework provides the following APIs to get a reference to the PHY. + +struct phy *phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string); +struct phy *devm_phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string); + +phy_get and devm_phy_get can be used to get the PHY. In the case of dt boot, +the string arguments should contain the phy name as given in the dt data and +in the case of non-dt boot, it should contain the label of the PHY. +The only difference between the two APIs is that devm_phy_get associates the +device with the PHY using devres on successful PHY get. On driver detach, +release function is invoked on the the devres data and devres data is freed. + +5. Releasing a reference to the PHY + +When the controller no longer needs the PHY, it has to release the reference +to the PHY it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section. The +PHY framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the PHY. + +void phy_put(struct phy *phy); +void devm_phy_put(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy); + +Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the PHY and devm_phy_put +destroys the devres associated with this PHY. + +6. Destroying the PHY + +When the driver that created the PHY is unloaded, it should destroy the PHY it +created using one of the following 2 APIs. + +void phy_destroy(struct phy *phy); +void devm_phy_destroy(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy); + +Both these APIs destroy the PHY and devm_phy_destroy destroys the devres +associated with this PHY. + +7. PM Runtime + +This subsystem is pm runtime enabled. So while creating the PHY, +pm_runtime_enable of the phy device created by this subsystem is called and +while destroying the PHY, pm_runtime_disable is called. Note that the phy +device created by this subsystem will be a child of the device that calls +phy_create (PHY provider device). + +So pm_runtime_get_sync of the phy_device created by this subsystem will invoke +pm_runtime_get_sync of PHY provider device because of parent-child relationship. +It should also be noted that phy_power_on and phy_power_off performs +phy_pm_runtime_get_sync and phy_pm_runtime_put respectively. +There are exported APIs like phy_pm_runtime_get, phy_pm_runtime_get_sync, +phy_pm_runtime_put, phy_pm_runtime_put_sync, phy_pm_runtime_allow and +phy_pm_runtime_forbid for performing PM operations. + +8. Board File Initialization + +Certain board file initialization is necessary in order to get a reference +to the PHY in the case of non-dt boot. +Say we have a single device that implements 3 PHYs that of USB, SATA and PCIe, +then in the board file the following initialization should be done. + +struct phy_consumer consumers[] = { + PHY_CONSUMER("dwc3.0", "usb"), + PHY_CONSUMER("pcie.0", "pcie"), + PHY_CONSUMER("sata.0", "sata"), +}; +PHY_CONSUMER takes 2 parameters, first is the device name of the controller +(PHY consumer) and second is the port name. + +struct phy_init_data init_data = { + .consumers = consumers, + .num_consumers = ARRAY_SIZE(consumers), +}; + +static const struct platform_device pipe3_phy_dev = { + .name = "pipe3-phy", + .id = -1, + .dev = { + .platform_data = { + .init_data = &init_data, + }, + }, +}; + +then, while doing phy_create, the PHY driver should pass this init_data + phy_create(dev, ops, pdata->init_data); + +and the controller driver (phy consumer) should pass the port name along with +the device to get a reference to the PHY + phy_get(dev, "pcie"); + +9. DeviceTree Binding + +The documentation for PHY dt binding can be found @ +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt diff --git a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt index c0ffd30eb55e..a7929cb47e7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt @@ -358,7 +358,12 @@ static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range = { .gc = &chip; }; -In this case the pin_base property will be ignored. +In this case the pin_base property will be ignored. If the name of a pin +group is known, the pins and npins elements of the above structure can be +initialised using the function pinctrl_get_group_pins(), e.g. for pin +group "foo": + +pinctrl_get_group_pins(pctl, "foo", &gpio_range.pins, &gpio_range.npins); When GPIO-specific functions in the pin control subsystem are called, these ranges will be used to look up the appropriate pin controller by inspecting diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt index 425c51d56aef..b8a907dc0169 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ We can represent these as three OPPs as the following {Hz, uV} tuples: OPP library provides a set of helper functions to organize and query the OPP information. The library is located in drivers/base/power/opp.c and the header -is located in include/linux/opp.h. OPP library can be enabled by enabling +is located in include/linux/pm_opp.h. OPP library can be enabled by enabling CONFIG_PM_OPP from power management menuconfig menu. OPP library depends on CONFIG_PM as certain SoCs such as Texas Instrument's OMAP framework allows to optionally boot at a certain OPP without needing cpufreq. @@ -71,14 +71,14 @@ operations until that OPP could be re-enabled if possible. OPP library facilitates this concept in it's implementation. The following operational functions operate only on available opps: -opp_find_freq_{ceil, floor}, opp_get_voltage, opp_get_freq, opp_get_opp_count -and opp_init_cpufreq_table +opp_find_freq_{ceil, floor}, dev_pm_opp_get_voltage, dev_pm_opp_get_freq, dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count +and dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table -opp_find_freq_exact is meant to be used to find the opp pointer which can then -be used for opp_enable/disable functions to make an opp available as required. +dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact is meant to be used to find the opp pointer which can then +be used for dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions to make an opp available as required. WARNING: Users of OPP library should refresh their availability count using -get_opp_count if opp_enable/disable functions are invoked for a device, the +get_opp_count if dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions are invoked for a device, the exact mechanism to trigger these or the notification mechanism to other dependent subsystems such as cpufreq are left to the discretion of the SoC specific framework which uses the OPP library. Similar care needs to be taken @@ -96,24 +96,24 @@ using RCU read locks. The opp_find_freq_{exact,ceil,floor}, opp_get_{voltage, freq, opp_count} fall into this category. opp_{add,enable,disable} are updaters which use mutex and implement it's own -RCU locking mechanisms. opp_init_cpufreq_table acts as an updater and uses +RCU locking mechanisms. dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table acts as an updater and uses mutex to implment RCU updater strategy. These functions should *NOT* be called under RCU locks and other contexts that prevent blocking functions in RCU or mutex operations from working. 2. Initial OPP List Registration ================================ -The SoC implementation calls opp_add function iteratively to add OPPs per +The SoC implementation calls dev_pm_opp_add function iteratively to add OPPs per device. It is expected that the SoC framework will register the OPP entries optimally- typical numbers range to be less than 5. The list generated by registering the OPPs is maintained by OPP library throughout the device operation. The SoC framework can subsequently control the availability of the -OPPs dynamically using the opp_enable / disable functions. +OPPs dynamically using the dev_pm_opp_enable / disable functions. -opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer. +dev_pm_opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer. The OPP is defined using the frequency and voltage. Once added, the OPP is assumed to be available and control of it's availability can be done - with the opp_enable/disable functions. OPP library internally stores + with the dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions. OPP library internally stores and manages this information in the opp struct. This function may be used by SoC framework to define a optimal list as per the demands of SoC usage environment. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer. soc_pm_init() { /* Do things */ - r = opp_add(mpu_dev, 1000000, 900000); + r = dev_pm_opp_add(mpu_dev, 1000000, 900000); if (!r) { pr_err("%s: unable to register mpu opp(%d)\n", r); goto no_cpufreq; @@ -143,44 +143,44 @@ functions return the matching pointer representing the opp if a match is found, else returns error. These errors are expected to be handled by standard error checks such as IS_ERR() and appropriate actions taken by the caller. -opp_find_freq_exact - Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and +dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact - Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and availability. This function is especially useful to enable an OPP which is not available by default. Example: In a case when SoC framework detects a situation where a higher frequency could be made available, it can use this function to - find the OPP prior to call the opp_enable to actually make it available. + find the OPP prior to call the dev_pm_opp_enable to actually make it available. rcu_read_lock(); - opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); + opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); rcu_read_unlock(); /* dont operate on the pointer.. just do a sanity check.. */ if (IS_ERR(opp)) { pr_err("frequency not disabled!\n"); /* trigger appropriate actions.. */ } else { - opp_enable(dev,1000000000); + dev_pm_opp_enable(dev,1000000000); } NOTE: This is the only search function that operates on OPPs which are not available. -opp_find_freq_floor - Search for an available OPP which is *at most* the +dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor - Search for an available OPP which is *at most* the provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a lesser match OR operating on OPP information in the order of decreasing frequency. Example: To find the highest opp for a device: freq = ULONG_MAX; rcu_read_lock(); - opp_find_freq_floor(dev, &freq); + dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor(dev, &freq); rcu_read_unlock(); -opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the +dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a higher match OR operating on OPP information in the order of increasing frequency. Example 1: To find the lowest opp for a device: freq = 0; rcu_read_lock(); - opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); rcu_read_unlock(); Example 2: A simplified implementation of a SoC cpufreq_driver->target: soc_cpufreq_target(..) @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the /* Do stuff like policy checks etc. */ /* Find the best frequency match for the req */ rcu_read_lock(); - opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); rcu_read_unlock(); if (!IS_ERR(opp)) soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq); @@ -208,34 +208,34 @@ as thermal considerations (e.g. don't use OPPx until the temperature drops). WARNING: Do not use these functions in interrupt context. -opp_enable - Make a OPP available for operation. +dev_pm_opp_enable - Make a OPP available for operation. Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be made available only if the SoC temperature is lower than a certain threshold. The SoC framework implementation might choose to do something as follows: if (cur_temp < temp_low_thresh) { /* Enable 1GHz if it was disabled */ rcu_read_lock(); - opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); + opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); rcu_read_unlock(); /* just error check */ if (!IS_ERR(opp)) - ret = opp_enable(dev, 1000000000); + ret = dev_pm_opp_enable(dev, 1000000000); else goto try_something_else; } -opp_disable - Make an OPP to be not available for operation +dev_pm_opp_disable - Make an OPP to be not available for operation Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be disabled if the temperature exceeds a threshold value. The SoC framework implementation might choose to do something as follows: if (cur_temp > temp_high_thresh) { /* Disable 1GHz if it was enabled */ rcu_read_lock(); - opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, true); + opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, true); rcu_read_unlock(); /* just error check */ if (!IS_ERR(opp)) - ret = opp_disable(dev, 1000000000); + ret = dev_pm_opp_disable(dev, 1000000000); else goto try_something_else; } @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ information from the OPP structure is necessary. Once an OPP pointer is retrieved using the search functions, the following functions can be used by SoC framework to retrieve the information represented inside the OPP layer. -opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer. +dev_pm_opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer. Example: At a cpufreq transition to a different frequency, SoC framework requires to set the voltage represented by the OPP using the regulator framework to the Power Management chip providing the @@ -256,15 +256,15 @@ opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer. { /* do things */ rcu_read_lock(); - opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); - v = opp_get_voltage(opp); + opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + v = dev_pm_opp_get_voltage(opp); rcu_read_unlock(); if (v) regulator_set_voltage(.., v); /* do other things */ } -opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer. +dev_pm_opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer. Example: Lets say the SoC framework uses a couple of helper functions we could pass opp pointers instead of doing additional parameters to handle quiet a bit of data parameters. @@ -273,8 +273,8 @@ opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer. /* do things.. */ max_freq = ULONG_MAX; rcu_read_lock(); - max_opp = opp_find_freq_floor(dev,&max_freq); - requested_opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev,&freq); + max_opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor(dev,&max_freq); + requested_opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev,&freq); if (!IS_ERR(max_opp) && !IS_ERR(requested_opp)) r = soc_test_validity(max_opp, requested_opp); rcu_read_unlock(); @@ -282,25 +282,25 @@ opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer. } soc_test_validity(..) { - if(opp_get_voltage(max_opp) < opp_get_voltage(requested_opp)) + if(dev_pm_opp_get_voltage(max_opp) < dev_pm_opp_get_voltage(requested_opp)) return -EINVAL; - if(opp_get_freq(max_opp) < opp_get_freq(requested_opp)) + if(dev_pm_opp_get_freq(max_opp) < dev_pm_opp_get_freq(requested_opp)) return -EINVAL; /* do things.. */ } -opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device +dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device Example: Lets say a co-processor in the SoC needs to know the available frequencies in a table, the main processor can notify as following: soc_notify_coproc_available_frequencies() { /* Do things */ rcu_read_lock(); - num_available = opp_get_opp_count(dev); + num_available = dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count(dev); speeds = kzalloc(sizeof(u32) * num_available, GFP_KERNEL); /* populate the table in increasing order */ freq = 0; - while (!IS_ERR(opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq))) { + while (!IS_ERR(opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq))) { speeds[i] = freq; freq++; i++; @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device 6. Cpufreq Table Generation =========================== -opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with +dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo which is provided with the list of frequencies that are available for operation. This function provides a ready to use conversion routine to translate the OPP layer's internal @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with soc_pm_init() { /* Do things */ - r = opp_init_cpufreq_table(dev, &freq_table); + r = dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table(dev, &freq_table); if (!r) cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo(policy, freq_table); /* Do other things */ @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with addition to CONFIG_PM as power management feature is required to dynamically scale voltage and frequency in a system. -opp_free_cpufreq_table - Free up the table allocated by opp_init_cpufreq_table +dev_pm_opp_free_cpufreq_table - Free up the table allocated by dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table 7. Data Structures ================== @@ -358,16 +358,16 @@ accessed by various functions as described above. However, the structures representing the actual OPPs and domains are internal to the OPP library itself to allow for suitable abstraction reusable across systems. -struct opp - The internal data structure of OPP library which is used to +struct dev_pm_opp - The internal data structure of OPP library which is used to represent an OPP. In addition to the freq, voltage, availability information, it also contains internal book keeping information required for the OPP library to operate on. Pointer to this structure is provided back to the users such as SoC framework to be used as a identifier for OPP in the interactions with OPP layer. - WARNING: The struct opp pointer should not be parsed or modified by the - users. The defaults of for an instance is populated by opp_add, but the - availability of the OPP can be modified by opp_enable/disable functions. + WARNING: The struct dev_pm_opp pointer should not be parsed or modified by the + users. The defaults of for an instance is populated by dev_pm_opp_add, but the + availability of the OPP can be modified by dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions. struct device - This is used to identify a domain to the OPP layer. The nature of the device and it's implementation is left to the user of @@ -377,19 +377,19 @@ Overall, in a simplistic view, the data structure operations is represented as following: Initialization / modification: - +-----+ /- opp_enable -opp_add --> | opp | <------- - | +-----+ \- opp_disable + +-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_enable +dev_pm_opp_add --> | opp | <------- + | +-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_disable \-------> domain_info(device) Search functions: - /-- opp_find_freq_ceil ---\ +-----+ -domain_info<---- opp_find_freq_exact -----> | opp | - \-- opp_find_freq_floor ---/ +-----+ + /-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil ---\ +-----+ +domain_info<---- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact -----> | opp | + \-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor ---/ +-----+ Retrieval functions: -+-----+ /- opp_get_voltage ++-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_get_voltage | opp | <--- -+-----+ \- opp_get_freq ++-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_get_freq -domain_info <- opp_get_opp_count +domain_info <- dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt index 3f10b39b0346..89a8816990ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt @@ -135,11 +135,11 @@ CAPACITY_LEVEL - capacity level. This corresponds to POWER_SUPPLY_CAPACITY_LEVEL_*. TEMP - temperature of the power supply. -TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade. -TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert value in milli centigrade. +TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert. +TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert. TEMP_AMBIENT - ambient temperature. -TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade. -TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert value in milli centigrade. +TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert. +TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert. TIME_TO_EMPTY - seconds left for battery to be considered empty (i.e. while battery powers a load) diff --git a/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt b/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e6ef164e07a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,236 @@ +Power Capping Framework +================================== + +The power capping framework provides a consistent interface between the kernel +and the user space that allows power capping drivers to expose the settings to +user space in a uniform way. + +Terminology +========================= +The framework exposes power capping devices to user space via sysfs in the +form of a tree of objects. The objects at the root level of the tree represent +'control types', which correspond to different methods of power capping. For +example, the intel-rapl control type represents the Intel "Running Average +Power Limit" (RAPL) technology, whereas the 'idle-injection' control type +corresponds to the use of idle injection for controlling power. + +Power zones represent different parts of the system, which can be controlled and +monitored using the power capping method determined by the control type the +given zone belongs to. They each contain attributes for monitoring power, as +well as controls represented in the form of power constraints. If the parts of +the system represented by different power zones are hierarchical (that is, one +bigger part consists of multiple smaller parts that each have their own power +controls), those power zones may also be organized in a hierarchy with one +parent power zone containing multiple subzones and so on to reflect the power +control topology of the system. In that case, it is possible to apply power +capping to a set of devices together using the parent power zone and if more +fine grained control is required, it can be applied through the subzones. + + +Example sysfs interface tree: + +/sys/devices/virtual/powercap +??? intel-rapl + ??? intel-rapl:0 + ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl + ? ??? energy_uj + ? ??? intel-rapl:0:0 + ? ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:0 + ? ? ??? energy_uj + ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ? ??? name + ? ? ??? enabled + ? ? ??? power + ? ? ? ??? async + ? ? ? [] + ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ? ??? uevent + ? ??? intel-rapl:0:1 + ? ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:0 + ? ? ??? energy_uj + ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ? ??? name + ? ? ??? enabled + ? ? ??? power + ? ? ? ??? async + ? ? ? [] + ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ? ??? uevent + ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ??? max_power_range_uw + ? ??? name + ? ??? enabled + ? ??? power + ? ? ??? async + ? ? [] + ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ??? enabled + ? ??? uevent + ??? intel-rapl:1 + ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl + ? ??? energy_uj + ? ??? intel-rapl:1:0 + ? ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:1 + ? ? ??? energy_uj + ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ? ??? name + ? ? ??? enabled + ? ? ??? power + ? ? ? ??? async + ? ? ? [] + ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ? ??? uevent + ? ??? intel-rapl:1:1 + ? ? ??? constraint_0_name + ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us + ? ? ??? constraint_1_name + ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw + ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us + ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:1 + ? ? ??? energy_uj + ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ? ??? name + ? ? ??? enabled + ? ? ??? power + ? ? ? ??? async + ? ? ? [] + ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ? ??? uevent + ? ??? max_energy_range_uj + ? ??? max_power_range_uw + ? ??? name + ? ??? enabled + ? ??? power + ? ? ??? async + ? ? [] + ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap + ? ??? uevent + ??? power + ? ??? async + ? [] + ??? subsystem -> ../../../../class/power_cap + ??? enabled + ??? uevent + +The above example illustrates a case in which the Intel RAPL technology, +available in Intel® IA-64 and IA-32 Processor Architectures, is used. There is one +control type called intel-rapl which contains two power zones, intel-rapl:0 and +intel-rapl:1, representing CPU packages. Each of these power zones contains +two subzones, intel-rapl:j:0 and intel-rapl:j:1 (j = 0, 1), representing the +"core" and the "uncore" parts of the given CPU package, respectively. All of +the zones and subzones contain energy monitoring attributes (energy_uj, +max_energy_range_uj) and constraint attributes (constraint_*) allowing controls +to be applied (the constraints in the 'package' power zones apply to the whole +CPU packages and the subzone constraints only apply to the respective parts of +the given package individually). Since Intel RAPL doesn't provide instantaneous +power value, there is no power_uw attribute. + +In addition to that, each power zone contains a name attribute, allowing the +part of the system represented by that zone to be identified. +For example: + +cat /sys/class/power_cap/intel-rapl/intel-rapl:0/name +package-0 + +The Intel RAPL technology allows two constraints, short term and long term, +with two different time windows to be applied to each power zone. Thus for +each zone there are 2 attributes representing the constraint names, 2 power +limits and 2 attributes representing the sizes of the time windows. Such that, +constraint_j_* attributes correspond to the jth constraint (j = 0,1). + +For example: + constraint_0_name + constraint_0_power_limit_uw + constraint_0_time_window_us + constraint_1_name + constraint_1_power_limit_uw + constraint_1_time_window_us + +Power Zone Attributes +================================= +Monitoring attributes +---------------------- + +energy_uj (rw): Current energy counter in micro joules. Write "0" to reset. +If the counter can not be reset, then this attribute is read only. + +max_energy_range_uj (ro): Range of the above energy counter in micro-joules. + +power_uw (ro): Current power in micro watts. + +max_power_range_uw (ro): Range of the above power value in micro-watts. + +name (ro): Name of this power zone. + +It is possible that some domains have both power ranges and energy counter ranges; +however, only one is mandatory. + +Constraints +---------------- +constraint_X_power_limit_uw (rw): Power limit in micro watts, which should be +applicable for the time window specified by "constraint_X_time_window_us". + +constraint_X_time_window_us (rw): Time window in micro seconds. + +constraint_X_name (ro): An optional name of the constraint + +constraint_X_max_power_uw(ro): Maximum allowed power in micro watts. + +constraint_X_min_power_uw(ro): Minimum allowed power in micro watts. + +constraint_X_max_time_window_us(ro): Maximum allowed time window in micro seconds. + +constraint_X_min_time_window_us(ro): Minimum allowed time window in micro seconds. + +Except power_limit_uw and time_window_us other fields are optional. + +Common zone and control type attributes +---------------------------------------- +enabled (rw): Enable/Disable controls at zone level or for all zones using +a control type. + +Power Cap Client Driver Interface +================================== +The API summary: + +Call powercap_register_control_type() to register control type object. +Call powercap_register_zone() to register a power zone (under a given +control type), either as a top-level power zone or as a subzone of another +power zone registered earlier. +The number of constraints in a power zone and the corresponding callbacks have +to be defined prior to calling powercap_register_zone() to register that zone. + +To Free a power zone call powercap_unregister_zone(). +To free a control type object call powercap_unregister_control_type(). +Detailed API can be generated using kernel-doc on include/linux/powercap.h. diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 71d8fe4e75d3..b6ce00b2be9a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -145,11 +145,13 @@ The action performed by the idle callback is totally dependent on the subsystem if the device can be suspended (i.e. if all of the conditions necessary for suspending the device are satisfied) and to queue up a suspend request for the device in that case. If there is no idle callback, or if the callback returns -0, then the PM core will attempt to carry out a runtime suspend of the device; -in essence, it will call pm_runtime_suspend() directly. To prevent this (for -example, if the callback routine has started a delayed suspend), the routine -should return a non-zero value. Negative error return codes are ignored by the -PM core. +0, then the PM core will attempt to carry out a runtime suspend of the device, +also respecting devices configured for autosuspend. In essence this means a +call to pm_runtime_autosuspend() (do note that drivers needs to update the +device last busy mark, pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(), to control the delay under +this circumstance). To prevent this (for example, if the callback routine has +started a delayed suspend), the routine must return a non-zero value. Negative +error return codes are ignored by the PM core. The helper functions provided by the PM core, described in Section 4, guarantee that the following constraints are met with respect to runtime PM callbacks for @@ -308,7 +310,7 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: - execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device; returns an error code on failure, where -EINPROGRESS means that ->runtime_idle() is already being executed; if there is no callback or the callback returns 0 - then run pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result + then run pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result int pm_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev); - execute the subsystem-level suspend callback for the device; returns 0 on @@ -545,13 +547,11 @@ helper functions described in Section 4. In that case, pm_runtime_resume() should be used. Of course, for this purpose the device's runtime PM has to be enabled earlier by calling pm_runtime_enable(). -If the device bus type's or driver's ->probe() callback runs -pm_runtime_suspend() or pm_runtime_idle() or their asynchronous counterparts, -they will fail returning -EAGAIN, because the device's usage counter is -incremented by the driver core before executing ->probe(). Still, it may be -desirable to suspend the device as soon as ->probe() has finished, so the driver -core uses pm_runtime_put_sync() to invoke the subsystem-level idle callback for -the device at that time. +It may be desirable to suspend the device once ->probe() has finished. +Therefore the driver core uses the asyncronous pm_request_idle() to submit a +request to execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device at that +time. A driver that makes use of the runtime autosuspend feature, may want to +update the last busy mark before returning from ->probe(). Moreover, the driver core prevents runtime PM callbacks from racing with the bus notifier callback in __device_release_driver(), which is necessary, because the @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ out the following operations: __pm_runtime_disable() with 'false' as the second argument for every device right before executing the subsystem-level .suspend_late() callback for it. - * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put_sync() + * During system resume it calls pm_runtime_enable() and pm_runtime_put() for every device right after executing the subsystem-level .resume_early() callback and right after executing the subsystem-level .resume() callback for it, respectively. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index 05026ce1875e..6db73df04278 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -5,13 +5,20 @@ please mail me. 00-INDEX - this file +bootwrapper.txt + - Information on how the powerpc kernel is wrapped for boot on various + different platforms. cpu_features.txt - info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time options. eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt - info on PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery +firmware-assisted-dump.txt + - Documentation on the firmware assisted dump mechanism "fadump". hvcs.txt - IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide +kvm_440.txt + - Various notes on the implementation of KVM for PowerPC 440. mpc52xx.txt - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family pmu-ebb.txt @@ -19,3 +26,7 @@ pmu-ebb.txt qe_firmware.txt - describes the layout of firmware binaries for the Freescale QUICC Engine and the code that parses and uploads the microcode therein. +ptrace.txt + - Information on the ptrace interfaces for hardware debug registers. +transactional_memory.txt + - Overview of the Power8 transactional memory support. diff --git a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt index d35dcdd82ff6..c03b1be5eb15 100644 --- a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt +++ b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt @@ -66,6 +66,21 @@ In LinuxPPS the PPS sources are simply char devices usually mapped into files /dev/pps0, /dev/pps1, etc.. +PPS with USB to serial devices +------------------------------ + +It is possible to grab the PPS from an USB to serial device. However, +you should take into account the latencies and jitter introduced by +the USB stack. Users has reported clock instability around +-1ms when +synchronized with PPS through USB. This isn't suited for time server +synchronization. + +If your device doesn't report PPS, you can check that the feature is +supported by its driver. Most of the time, you only need to add a call +to usb_serial_handle_dcd_change after checking the DCD status (see +ch341 and pl2303 examples). + + Coding example -------------- diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c index f59ded066108..a74d0a84d329 100644 --- a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c +++ b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c @@ -100,6 +100,11 @@ static long ppb_to_scaled_ppm(int ppb) return (long) (ppb * 65.536); } +static int64_t pctns(struct ptp_clock_time *t) +{ + return t->sec * 1000000000LL + t->nsec; +} + static void usage(char *progname) { fprintf(stderr, @@ -112,6 +117,8 @@ static void usage(char *progname) " -f val adjust the ptp clock frequency by 'val' ppb\n" " -g get the ptp clock time\n" " -h prints this message\n" + " -k val measure the time offset between system and phc clock\n" + " for 'val' times (Maximum 25)\n" " -p val enable output with a period of 'val' nanoseconds\n" " -P val enable or disable (val=1|0) the system clock PPS\n" " -s set the ptp clock time from the system time\n" @@ -133,8 +140,12 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) struct itimerspec timeout; struct sigevent sigevent; + struct ptp_clock_time *pct; + struct ptp_sys_offset *sysoff; + + char *progname; - int c, cnt, fd; + int i, c, cnt, fd; char *device = DEVICE; clockid_t clkid; @@ -144,14 +155,19 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) int extts = 0; int gettime = 0; int oneshot = 0; + int pct_offset = 0; + int n_samples = 0; int periodic = 0; int perout = -1; int pps = -1; int settime = 0; + int64_t t1, t2, tp; + int64_t interval, offset; + progname = strrchr(argv[0], '/'); progname = progname ? 1+progname : argv[0]; - while (EOF != (c = getopt(argc, argv, "a:A:cd:e:f:ghp:P:sSt:v"))) { + while (EOF != (c = getopt(argc, argv, "a:A:cd:e:f:ghk:p:P:sSt:v"))) { switch (c) { case 'a': oneshot = atoi(optarg); @@ -174,6 +190,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) case 'g': gettime = 1; break; + case 'k': + pct_offset = 1; + n_samples = atoi(optarg); + break; case 'p': perout = atoi(optarg); break; @@ -376,6 +396,47 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) } } + if (pct_offset) { + if (n_samples <= 0 || n_samples > 25) { + puts("n_samples should be between 1 and 25"); + usage(progname); + return -1; + } + + sysoff = calloc(1, sizeof(*sysoff)); + if (!sysoff) { + perror("calloc"); + return -1; + } + sysoff->n_samples = n_samples; + + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_SYS_OFFSET, sysoff)) + perror("PTP_SYS_OFFSET"); + else + puts("system and phc clock time offset request okay"); + + pct = &sysoff->ts[0]; + for (i = 0; i < sysoff->n_samples; i++) { + t1 = pctns(pct+2*i); + tp = pctns(pct+2*i+1); + t2 = pctns(pct+2*i+2); + interval = t2 - t1; + offset = (t2 + t1) / 2 - tp; + + printf("system time: %ld.%ld\n", + (pct+2*i)->sec, (pct+2*i)->nsec); + printf("phc time: %ld.%ld\n", + (pct+2*i+1)->sec, (pct+2*i+1)->nsec); + printf("system time: %ld.%ld\n", + (pct+2*i+2)->sec, (pct+2*i+2)->nsec); + printf("system/phc clock time offset is %ld ns\n" + "system clock time delay is %ld ns\n", + offset, interval); + } + + free(sysoff); + } + close(fd); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/pwm.txt b/Documentation/pwm.txt index 1039b68fe9c6..93cb97974986 100644 --- a/Documentation/pwm.txt +++ b/Documentation/pwm.txt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist. -After being requested a PWM has to be configured using: +After being requested, a PWM has to be configured using: int pwm_config(struct pwm_device *pwm, int duty_ns, int period_ns); @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ for new drivers to use the generic PWM framework. A new PWM controller/chip can be added using pwmchip_add() and removed again with pwmchip_remove(). pwmchip_add() takes a filled in struct pwm_chip as argument which provides a description of the PWM chip, the -number of PWM devices provider by the chip and the chip-specific +number of PWM devices provided by the chip and the chip-specific implementation of the supported PWM operations to the framework. Locking diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt index fcaf0b4efba2..3da163383c93 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt @@ -158,6 +158,16 @@ Return Value: none Description: Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid. --------------------------------------------------------------------------- +bool debug_level_enabled (debug_info_t * id, int level); + +Parameter: id: handle for debug log + level: debug level + +Return Value: True if level is less or equal to the current debug level. + +Description: Returns true if debug events for the specified level would be + logged. Otherwise returns false. +--------------------------------------------------------------------------- void debug_stop_all(void); Parameter: none diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt index b1b8587b86f0..9290de703450 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt @@ -65,11 +65,6 @@ Possible arch/ problems Possible arch problems I found (and either tried to fix or didn't): -h8300 - Is such sleeping racy vs interrupts? (See #4a). - The H8/300 manual I found indicates yes, however disabling IRQs - over the sleep mean only NMIs can wake it up, so can't fix easily - without doing spin waiting. - ia64 - is safe_halt call racy vs interrupts? (does it sleep?) (See #4a) sh64 - Is sleeping racy vs interrupts? (See #4a) diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index d529e02d928d..f14f49304222 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -66,9 +66,7 @@ rq->cfs.load value, which is the sum of the weights of the tasks queued on the runqueue. CFS maintains a time-ordered rbtree, where all runnable tasks are sorted by the -p->se.vruntime key (there is a subtraction using rq->cfs.min_vruntime to -account for possible wraparounds). CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this -tree and sticks to it. +p->se.vruntime key. CFS picks the "leftmost" task from this tree and sticks to it. As the system progresses forwards, the executed tasks are put into the tree more and more to the right --- slowly but surely giving a chance for every task to become the "leftmost task" and thus get on the CPU within a deterministic diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index cc92ca8c8963..6edaa65b0818 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,13 @@ +Release Date : Sat. Aug 31, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford + Kashyap Desai + Sumit Saxena +Current Version : 06.700.06.00-rc1 +Old Version : 06.600.18.00-rc1 + 1. Add High Availability clustering support using shared Logical Disks. + 2. Version and Changelog update. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Release Date : Wed. May 15, 2013 17:00:00 PST 2013 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Adam Radford diff --git a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX index 414235c1fcfc..45c82fd3e9d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX @@ -22,3 +22,5 @@ keys.txt - description of the kernel key retention service. tomoyo.txt - documentation on the TOMOYO Linux Security Module. +IMA-templates.txt + - documentation on the template management mechanism for IMA. diff --git a/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt b/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a777e5f1df5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/security/IMA-templates.txt @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + IMA Template Management Mechanism + + +==== INTRODUCTION ==== + +The original 'ima' template is fixed length, containing the filedata hash +and pathname. The filedata hash is limited to 20 bytes (md5/sha1). +The pathname is a null terminated string, limited to 255 characters. +To overcome these limitations and to add additional file metadata, it is +necessary to extend the current version of IMA by defining additional +templates. For example, information that could be possibly reported are +the inode UID/GID or the LSM labels either of the inode and of the process +that is accessing it. + +However, the main problem to introduce this feature is that, each time +a new template is defined, the functions that generate and display +the measurements list would include the code for handling a new format +and, thus, would significantly grow over the time. + +The proposed solution solves this problem by separating the template +management from the remaining IMA code. The core of this solution is the +definition of two new data structures: a template descriptor, to determine +which information should be included in the measurement list; a template +field, to generate and display data of a given type. + +Managing templates with these structures is very simple. To support +a new data type, developers define the field identifier and implement +two functions, init() and show(), respectively to generate and display +measurement entries. Defining a new template descriptor requires +specifying the template format, a string of field identifiers separated +by the '|' character. While in the current implementation it is possible +to define new template descriptors only by adding their definition in the +template specific code (ima_template.c), in a future version it will be +possible to register a new template on a running kernel by supplying to IMA +the desired format string. In this version, IMA initializes at boot time +all defined template descriptors by translating the format into an array +of template fields structures taken from the set of the supported ones. + +After the initialization step, IMA will call ima_alloc_init_template() +(new function defined within the patches for the new template management +mechanism) to generate a new measurement entry by using the template +descriptor chosen through the kernel configuration or through the newly +introduced 'ima_template=' kernel command line parameter. It is during this +phase that the advantages of the new architecture are clearly shown: +the latter function will not contain specific code to handle a given template +but, instead, it simply calls the init() method of the template fields +associated to the chosen template descriptor and store the result (pointer +to allocated data and data length) in the measurement entry structure. + +The same mechanism is employed to display measurements entries. +The functions ima[_ascii]_measurements_show() retrieve, for each entry, +the template descriptor used to produce that entry and call the show() +method for each item of the array of template fields structures. + + + +==== SUPPORTED TEMPLATE FIELDS AND DESCRIPTORS ==== + +In the following, there is the list of supported template fields +('<identifier>': description), that can be used to define new template +descriptors by adding their identifier to the format string +(support for more data types will be added later): + + - 'd': the digest of the event (i.e. the digest of a measured file), + calculated with the SHA1 or MD5 hash algorithm; + - 'n': the name of the event (i.e. the file name), with size up to 255 bytes; + - 'd-ng': the digest of the event, calculated with an arbitrary hash + algorithm (field format: [<hash algo>:]digest, where the digest + prefix is shown only if the hash algorithm is not SHA1 or MD5); + - 'n-ng': the name of the event, without size limitations. + + +Below, there is the list of defined template descriptors: + - "ima": its format is 'd|n'; + - "ima-ng" (default): its format is 'd-ng|n-ng'. + + + +==== USE ==== + +To specify the template descriptor to be used to generate measurement entries, +currently the following methods are supported: + + - select a template descriptor among those supported in the kernel + configuration ('ima-ng' is the default choice); + - specify a template descriptor name from the kernel command line through + the 'ima_template=' parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys.txt b/Documentation/security/keys.txt index 7b4145d00452..a4c33f1a7c6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys.txt @@ -865,15 +865,14 @@ encountered: calling processes has a searchable link to the key from one of its keyrings. There are three functions for dealing with these: - key_ref_t make_key_ref(const struct key *key, - unsigned long possession); + key_ref_t make_key_ref(const struct key *key, bool possession); struct key *key_ref_to_ptr(const key_ref_t key_ref); - unsigned long is_key_possessed(const key_ref_t key_ref); + bool is_key_possessed(const key_ref_t key_ref); The first function constructs a key reference from a key pointer and - possession information (which must be 0 or 1 and not any other value). + possession information (which must be true or false). The second function retrieves the key pointer from a reference and the third retrieves the possession flag. @@ -961,14 +960,17 @@ payload contents" for more information. the argument will not be parsed. -(*) Extra references can be made to a key by calling the following function: +(*) Extra references can be made to a key by calling one of the following + functions: + struct key *__key_get(struct key *key); struct key *key_get(struct key *key); - These need to be disposed of by calling key_put() when they've been - finished with. The key pointer passed in will be returned. If the pointer - is NULL or CONFIG_KEYS is not set then the key will not be dereferenced and - no increment will take place. + Keys so references will need to be disposed of by calling key_put() when + they've been finished with. The key pointer passed in will be returned. + + In the case of key_get(), if the pointer is NULL or CONFIG_KEYS is not set + then the key will not be dereferenced and no increment will take place. (*) A key's serial number can be obtained by calling: diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver index 067c47d46917..c3a7689a90e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/driver +++ b/Documentation/serial/driver @@ -264,10 +264,6 @@ hardware. Locking: none. Interrupts: caller dependent. - set_wake(port,state) - Enable/disable power management wakeup on serial activity. Not - currently implemented. - type(port) Return a pointer to a string constant describing the specified port, or return NULL, in which case the string 'unknown' is diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 95731a08f257..b8dd0df76952 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. As default, snd-dummy drivers doesn't allocate the real buffers but either ignores read/write or mmap a single dummy page to all - buffer pages, in order to save the resouces. If your apps need + buffer pages, in order to save the resources. If your apps need the read/ written buffer data to be consistent, pass fake_buffer=0 option. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt index 654dd3b694a8..e7a5ed4dcae8 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ The parameter can be given: # modprobe snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09 * Or while configuring the modules options in your modules configuration file - (tipically a .conf file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory: + (typically a .conf file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory: alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt index 16935c8561f7..4e36e6e809ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ with 4 channels, and use the interleaved 4 channel data. -There are some control switchs affecting to the speaker connections: +There are some control switches affecting to the speaker connections: "Line-In Mode" - an enum control to change the behavior of line-in jack. Either "Line-In", "Rear Output" or "Bass Output" can diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index a46ddb85e83a..85c362d8ea34 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ ALC269/270/275/276/28x/29x alc269-dmic Enable ALC269(VA) digital mic workaround alc271-dmic Enable ALC271X digital mic workaround inv-dmic Inverted internal mic workaround + headset-mic Indicates a combined headset (headphone+mic) jack lenovo-dock Enables docking station I/O for some Lenovos dell-headset-multi Headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in dell-headset-dock Headset jack (without mic-in), and also dock I/O @@ -296,6 +297,12 @@ Cirrus Logic CS4206/4207 imac27 IMac 27 Inch auto BIOS setup (default) +Cirrus Logic CS4208 +=================== + mba6 MacBook Air 6,1 and 6,2 + gpio0 Enable GPIO 0 amp + auto BIOS setup (default) + VIA VT17xx/VT18xx/VT20xx ======================== auto BIOS setup (default) diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt index fd74ff26376e..630c492c3dc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/compress_offload.txt @@ -217,12 +217,12 @@ Not supported: would be enabled with ALSA kcontrols. - Audio policy/resource management. This API does not provide any - hooks to query the utilization of the audio DSP, nor any premption + hooks to query the utilization of the audio DSP, nor any preemption mechanisms. -- No notion of underun/overrun. Since the bytes written are compressed +- No notion of underrun/overrun. Since the bytes written are compressed in nature and data written/read doesn't translate directly to - rendered output in time, this does not deal with underrun/overun and + rendered output in time, this does not deal with underrun/overrun and maybe dealt in user-library Credits: diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/DPCM.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/DPCM.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0110180b7ac6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/DPCM.txt @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +Dynamic PCM +=========== + +1. Description +============== + +Dynamic PCM allows an ALSA PCM device to digitally route its PCM audio to +various digital endpoints during the PCM stream runtime. e.g. PCM0 can route +digital audio to I2S DAI0, I2S DAI1 or PDM DAI2. This is useful for on SoC DSP +drivers that expose several ALSA PCMs and can route to multiple DAIs. + +The DPCM runtime routing is determined by the ALSA mixer settings in the same +way as the analog signal is routed in an ASoC codec driver. DPCM uses a DAPM +graph representing the DSP internal audio paths and uses the mixer settings to +determine the patch used by each ALSA PCM. + +DPCM re-uses all the existing component codec, platform and DAI drivers without +any modifications. + + +Phone Audio System with SoC based DSP +------------------------------------- + +Consider the following phone audio subsystem. This will be used in this +document for all examples :- + +| Front End PCMs | SoC DSP | Back End DAIs | Audio devices | + + ************* +PCM0 <------------> * * <----DAI0-----> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <----DAI1-----> Codec Speakers + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <----DAI2-----> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <----DAI3-----> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +This diagram shows a simple smart phone audio subsystem. It supports Bluetooth, +FM digital radio, Speakers, Headset Jack, digital microphones and cellular +modem. This sound card exposes 4 DSP front end (FE) ALSA PCM devices and +supports 6 back end (BE) DAIs. Each FE PCM can digitally route audio data to any +of the BE DAIs. The FE PCM devices can also route audio to more than 1 BE DAI. + + + +Example - DPCM Switching playback from DAI0 to DAI1 +--------------------------------------------------- + +Audio is being played to the Headset. After a while the user removes the headset +and audio continues playing on the speakers. + +Playback on PCM0 to Headset would look like :- + + ************* +PCM0 <============> * * <====DAI0=====> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <----DAI1-----> Codec Speakers + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <----DAI2-----> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <----DAI3-----> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +The headset is removed from the jack by user so the speakers must now be used :- + + ************* +PCM0 <============> * * <----DAI0-----> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <====DAI1=====> Codec Speakers + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <----DAI2-----> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <----DAI3-----> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +The audio driver processes this as follows :- + + 1) Machine driver receives Jack removal event. + + 2) Machine driver OR audio HAL disables the Headset path. + + 3) DPCM runs the PCM trigger(stop), hw_free(), shutdown() operations on DAI0 + for headset since the path is now disabled. + + 4) Machine driver or audio HAL enables the speaker path. + + 5) DPCM runs the PCM ops for startup(), hw_params(), prepapre() and + trigger(start) for DAI1 Speakers since the path is enabled. + +In this example, the machine driver or userspace audio HAL can alter the routing +and then DPCM will take care of managing the DAI PCM operations to either bring +the link up or down. Audio playback does not stop during this transition. + + + +DPCM machine driver +=================== + +The DPCM enabled ASoC machine driver is similar to normal machine drivers +except that we also have to :- + + 1) Define the FE and BE DAI links. + + 2) Define any FE/BE PCM operations. + + 3) Define widget graph connections. + + +1 FE and BE DAI links +--------------------- + +| Front End PCMs | SoC DSP | Back End DAIs | Audio devices | + + ************* +PCM0 <------------> * * <----DAI0-----> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <----DAI1-----> Codec Speakers + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <----DAI2-----> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <----DAI3-----> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +For the example above we have to define 4 FE DAI links and 6 BE DAI links. The +FE DAI links are defined as follows :- + +static struct snd_soc_dai_link machine_dais[] = { + { + .name = "PCM0 System", + .stream_name = "System Playback", + .cpu_dai_name = "System Pin", + .platform_name = "dsp-audio", + .codec_name = "snd-soc-dummy", + .codec_dai_name = "snd-soc-dummy-dai", + .dynamic = 1, + .trigger = {SND_SOC_DPCM_TRIGGER_POST, SND_SOC_DPCM_TRIGGER_POST}, + .dpcm_playback = 1, + }, + .....< other FE and BE DAI links here > +}; + +This FE DAI link is pretty similar to a regular DAI link except that we also +set the DAI link to a DPCM FE with the "dynamic = 1". The supported FE stream +directions should also be set with the "dpcm_playback" and "dpcm_capture" +flags. There is also an option to specify the ordering of the trigger call for +each FE. This allows the ASoC core to trigger the DSP before or after the other +components (as some DSPs have strong requirements for the ordering DAI/DSP +start and stop sequences). + +The FE DAI above sets the codec and code DAIs to dummy devices since the BE is +dynamic and will change depending on runtime config. + +The BE DAIs are configured as follows :- + +static struct snd_soc_dai_link machine_dais[] = { + .....< FE DAI links here > + { + .name = "Codec Headset", + .cpu_dai_name = "ssp-dai.0", + .platform_name = "snd-soc-dummy", + .no_pcm = 1, + .codec_name = "rt5640.0-001c", + .codec_dai_name = "rt5640-aif1", + .ignore_suspend = 1, + .ignore_pmdown_time = 1, + .be_hw_params_fixup = hswult_ssp0_fixup, + .ops = &haswell_ops, + .dpcm_playback = 1, + .dpcm_capture = 1, + }, + .....< other BE DAI links here > +}; + +This BE DAI link connects DAI0 to the codec (in this case RT5460 AIF1). It sets +the "no_pcm" flag to mark it has a BE and sets flags for supported stream +directions using "dpcm_playback" and "dpcm_capture" above. + +The BE has also flags set for ignoring suspend and PM down time. This allows +the BE to work in a hostless mode where the host CPU is not transferring data +like a BT phone call :- + + ************* +PCM0 <------------> * * <----DAI0-----> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <----DAI1-----> Codec Speakers + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <====DAI2=====> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <====DAI3=====> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +This allows the host CPU to sleep whilst the DSP, MODEM DAI and the BT DAI are +still in operation. + +A BE DAI link can also set the codec to a dummy device if the code is a device +that is managed externally. + +Likewise a BE DAI can also set a dummy cpu DAI if the CPU DAI is managed by the +DSP firmware. + + +2 FE/BE PCM operations +---------------------- + +The BE above also exports some PCM operations and a "fixup" callback. The fixup +callback is used by the machine driver to (re)configure the DAI based upon the +FE hw params. i.e. the DSP may perform SRC or ASRC from the FE to BE. + +e.g. DSP converts all FE hw params to run at fixed rate of 48k, 16bit, stereo for +DAI0. This means all FE hw_params have to be fixed in the machine driver for +DAI0 so that the DAI is running at desired configuration regardless of the FE +configuration. + +static int dai0_fixup(struct snd_soc_pcm_runtime *rtd, + struct snd_pcm_hw_params *params) +{ + struct snd_interval *rate = hw_param_interval(params, + SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_RATE); + struct snd_interval *channels = hw_param_interval(params, + SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_CHANNELS); + + /* The DSP will covert the FE rate to 48k, stereo */ + rate->min = rate->max = 48000; + channels->min = channels->max = 2; + + /* set DAI0 to 16 bit */ + snd_mask_set(¶ms->masks[SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT - + SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FIRST_MASK], + SNDRV_PCM_FORMAT_S16_LE); + return 0; +} + +The other PCM operation are the same as for regular DAI links. Use as necessary. + + +3 Widget graph connections +-------------------------- + +The BE DAI links will normally be connected to the graph at initialisation time +by the ASoC DAPM core. However, if the BE codec or BE DAI is a dummy then this +has to be set explicitly in the driver :- + +/* BE for codec Headset - DAI0 is dummy and managed by DSP FW */ +{"DAI0 CODEC IN", NULL, "AIF1 Capture"}, +{"AIF1 Playback", NULL, "DAI0 CODEC OUT"}, + + +Writing a DPCM DSP driver +========================= + +The DPCM DSP driver looks much like a standard platform class ASoC driver +combined with elements from a codec class driver. A DSP platform driver must +implement :- + + 1) Front End PCM DAIs - i.e. struct snd_soc_dai_driver. + + 2) DAPM graph showing DSP audio routing from FE DAIs to BEs. + + 3) DAPM widgets from DSP graph. + + 4) Mixers for gains, routing, etc. + + 5) DMA configuration. + + 6) BE AIF widgets. + +Items 6 is important for routing the audio outside of the DSP. AIF need to be +defined for each BE and each stream direction. e.g for BE DAI0 above we would +have :- + +SND_SOC_DAPM_AIF_IN("DAI0 RX", NULL, 0, SND_SOC_NOPM, 0, 0), +SND_SOC_DAPM_AIF_OUT("DAI0 TX", NULL, 0, SND_SOC_NOPM, 0, 0), + +The BE AIF are used to connect the DSP graph to the graphs for the other +component drivers (e.g. codec graph). + + +Hostless PCM streams +==================== + +A hostless PCM stream is a stream that is not routed through the host CPU. An +example of this would be a phone call from handset to modem. + + + ************* +PCM0 <------------> * * <----DAI0-----> Codec Headset + * * +PCM1 <------------> * * <====DAI1=====> Codec Speakers/Mic + * DSP * +PCM2 <------------> * * <====DAI2=====> MODEM + * * +PCM3 <------------> * * <----DAI3-----> BT + * * + * * <----DAI4-----> DMIC + * * + * * <----DAI5-----> FM + ************* + +In this case the PCM data is routed via the DSP. The host CPU in this use case +is only used for control and can sleep during the runtime of the stream. + +The host can control the hostless link either by :- + + 1) Configuring the link as a CODEC <-> CODEC style link. In this case the link + is enabled or disabled by the state of the DAPM graph. This usually means + there is a mixer control that can be used to connect or disconnect the path + between both DAIs. + + 2) Hostless FE. This FE has a virtual connection to the BE DAI links on the DAPM + graph. Control is then carried out by the FE as regular PCM operations. + This method gives more control over the DAI links, but requires much more + userspace code to control the link. Its recommended to use CODEC<->CODEC + unless your HW needs more fine grained sequencing of the PCM ops. + + +CODEC <-> CODEC link +-------------------- + +This DAI link is enabled when DAPM detects a valid path within the DAPM graph. +The machine driver sets some additional parameters to the DAI link i.e. + +static const struct snd_soc_pcm_stream dai_params = { + .formats = SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S32_LE, + .rate_min = 8000, + .rate_max = 8000, + .channels_min = 2, + .channels_max = 2, +}; + +static struct snd_soc_dai_link dais[] = { + < ... more DAI links above ... > + { + .name = "MODEM", + .stream_name = "MODEM", + .cpu_dai_name = "dai2", + .codec_dai_name = "modem-aif1", + .codec_name = "modem", + .dai_fmt = SND_SOC_DAIFMT_I2S | SND_SOC_DAIFMT_NB_NF + | SND_SOC_DAIFMT_CBM_CFM, + .params = &dai_params, + } + < ... more DAI links here ... > + +These parameters are used to configure the DAI hw_params() when DAPM detects a +valid path and then calls the PCM operations to start the link. DAPM will also +call the appropriate PCM operations to disable the DAI when the path is no +longer valid. + + +Hostless FE +----------- + +The DAI link(s) are enabled by a FE that does not read or write any PCM data. +This means creating a new FE that is connected with a virtual path to both +DAI links. The DAI links will be started when the FE PCM is started and stopped +when the FE PCM is stopped. Note that the FE PCM cannot read or write data in +this configuration. + + diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt index bce23a4a7875..db5f9c9ae149 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt @@ -1,22 +1,23 @@ -ASoC Codec Driver -================= +ASoC Codec Class Driver +======================= -The codec driver is generic and hardware independent code that configures the -codec to provide audio capture and playback. It should contain no code that is -specific to the target platform or machine. All platform and machine specific -code should be added to the platform and machine drivers respectively. +The codec class driver is generic and hardware independent code that configures +the codec, FM, MODEM, BT or external DSP to provide audio capture and playback. +It should contain no code that is specific to the target platform or machine. +All platform and machine specific code should be added to the platform and +machine drivers respectively. -Each codec driver *must* provide the following features:- +Each codec class driver *must* provide the following features:- 1) Codec DAI and PCM configuration - 2) Codec control IO - using I2C, 3 Wire(SPI) or both APIs + 2) Codec control IO - using RegMap API 3) Mixers and audio controls 4) Codec audio operations + 5) DAPM description. + 6) DAPM event handler. Optionally, codec drivers can also provide:- - 5) DAPM description. - 6) DAPM event handler. 7) DAC Digital mute control. Its probably best to use this guide in conjunction with the existing codec @@ -64,26 +65,9 @@ struct snd_soc_dai_driver wm8731_dai = { 2 - Codec control IO -------------------- The codec can usually be controlled via an I2C or SPI style interface -(AC97 combines control with data in the DAI). The codec drivers provide -functions to read and write the codec registers along with supplying a -register cache:- - - /* IO control data and register cache */ - void *control_data; /* codec control (i2c/3wire) data */ - void *reg_cache; - -Codec read/write should do any data formatting and call the hardware -read write below to perform the IO. These functions are called by the -core and ALSA when performing DAPM or changing the mixer:- - - unsigned int (*read)(struct snd_soc_codec *, unsigned int); - int (*write)(struct snd_soc_codec *, unsigned int, unsigned int); - -Codec hardware IO functions - usually points to either the I2C, SPI or AC97 -read/write:- - - hw_write_t hw_write; - hw_read_t hw_read; +(AC97 combines control with data in the DAI). The codec driver should use the +Regmap API for all codec IO. Please see include/linux/regmap.h and existing +codec drivers for example regmap usage. 3 - Mixers and audio controls @@ -127,7 +111,7 @@ Defines a stereo enumerated control 4 - Codec Audio Operations -------------------------- -The codec driver also supports the following ALSA operations:- +The codec driver also supports the following ALSA PCM operations:- /* SoC audio ops */ struct snd_soc_ops { diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt index 05bf5a0eee41..6faab4880006 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ level power systems. There are 4 power domains within DAPM - 1. Codec domain - VREF, VMID (core codec and audio power) + 1. Codec bias domain - VREF, VMID (core codec and audio power) Usually controlled at codec probe/remove and suspend/resume, although can be set at stream time if power is not needed for sidetone, etc. @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ There are 4 power domains within DAPM machine driver and responds to asynchronous events e.g when HP are inserted - 3. Path domain - audio susbsystem signal paths + 3. Path domain - audio subsystem signal paths Automatically set when mixer and mux settings are changed by the user. e.g. alsamixer, amixer. @@ -63,14 +63,22 @@ Audio DAPM widgets fall into a number of types:- o Line - Line Input/Output (and optional Jack) o Speaker - Speaker o Supply - Power or clock supply widget used by other widgets. + o Regulator - External regulator that supplies power to audio components. + o Clock - External clock that supplies clock to audio components. + o AIF IN - Audio Interface Input (with TDM slot mask). + o AIF OUT - Audio Interface Output (with TDM slot mask). + o Siggen - Signal Generator. + o DAI IN - Digital Audio Interface Input. + o DAI OUT - Digital Audio Interface Output. + o DAI Link - DAI Link between two DAI structures */ o Pre - Special PRE widget (exec before all others) o Post - Special POST widget (exec after all others) (Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h) -Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are -convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a -list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets. +Widgets can be added to the sound card by any of the component driver types. +There are convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly +build a list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets. Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra parameters for stream name and kcontrols. @@ -80,11 +88,13 @@ parameters for stream name and kcontrols. ------------------------- Stream Widgets relate to the stream power domain and only consist of ADCs -(analog to digital converters) and DACs (digital to analog converters). +(analog to digital converters), DACs (digital to analog converters), +AIF IN and AIF OUT. Stream widgets have the following format:- SND_SOC_DAPM_DAC(name, stream name, reg, shift, invert), +SND_SOC_DAPM_AIF_IN(name, stream, slot, reg, shift, invert) NOTE: the stream name must match the corresponding stream name in your codec snd_soc_codec_dai. @@ -94,6 +104,11 @@ e.g. stream widgets for HiFi playback and capture SND_SOC_DAPM_DAC("HiFi DAC", "HiFi Playback", REG, 3, 1), SND_SOC_DAPM_ADC("HiFi ADC", "HiFi Capture", REG, 2, 1), +e.g. stream widgets for AIF + +SND_SOC_DAPM_AIF_IN("AIF1RX", "AIF1 Playback", 0, SND_SOC_NOPM, 0, 0), +SND_SOC_DAPM_AIF_OUT("AIF1TX", "AIF1 Capture", 0, SND_SOC_NOPM, 0, 0), + 2.2 Path Domain Widgets ----------------------- @@ -121,12 +136,14 @@ If you dont want the mixer elements prefixed with the name of the mixer widget, you can use SND_SOC_DAPM_MIXER_NAMED_CTL instead. the parameters are the same as for SND_SOC_DAPM_MIXER. -2.3 Platform/Machine domain Widgets ------------------------------------ + +2.3 Machine domain Widgets +-------------------------- Machine widgets are different from codec widgets in that they don't have a codec register bit associated with them. A machine widget is assigned to each -machine audio component (non codec) that can be independently powered. e.g. +machine audio component (non codec or DSP) that can be independently +powered. e.g. o Speaker Amp o Microphone Bias @@ -146,12 +163,12 @@ static int spitz_mic_bias(struct snd_soc_dapm_widget* w, int event) SND_SOC_DAPM_MIC("Mic Jack", spitz_mic_bias), -2.4 Codec Domain ----------------- +2.4 Codec (BIAS) Domain +----------------------- -The codec power domain has no widgets and is handled by the codecs DAPM event -handler. This handler is called when the codec powerstate is changed wrt to any -stream event or by kernel PM events. +The codec bias power domain has no widgets and is handled by the codecs DAPM +event handler. This handler is called when the codec powerstate is changed wrt +to any stream event or by kernel PM events. 2.5 Virtual Widgets @@ -169,15 +186,16 @@ After all the widgets have been defined, they can then be added to the DAPM subsystem individually with a call to snd_soc_dapm_new_control(). -3. Codec Widget Interconnections -================================ +3. Codec/DSP Widget Interconnections +==================================== -Widgets are connected to each other within the codec and machine by audio paths -(called interconnections). Each interconnection must be defined in order to -create a map of all audio paths between widgets. +Widgets are connected to each other within the codec, platform and machine by +audio paths (called interconnections). Each interconnection must be defined in +order to create a map of all audio paths between widgets. -This is easiest with a diagram of the codec (and schematic of the machine audio -system), as it requires joining widgets together via their audio signal paths. +This is easiest with a diagram of the codec or DSP (and schematic of the machine +audio system), as it requires joining widgets together via their audio signal +paths. e.g., from the WM8731 output mixer (wm8731.c) @@ -247,16 +265,9 @@ machine and includes the codec. e.g. o Mic Jack o Codec Pins -When a codec pin is NC it can be marked as not used with a call to - -snd_soc_dapm_set_endpoint(codec, "Widget Name", 0); - -The last argument is 0 for inactive and 1 for active. This way the pin and its -input widget will never be powered up and consume power. - -This also applies to machine widgets. e.g. if a headphone is connected to a -jack then the jack can be marked active. If the headphone is removed, then -the headphone jack can be marked inactive. +Endpoints are added to the DAPM graph so that their usage can be determined in +order to save power. e.g. NC codecs pins will be switched OFF, unconnected +jacks can also be switched OFF. 5 DAPM Widget Events diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt index d50c14df3411..74056dba52be 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt @@ -1,8 +1,10 @@ ASoC Machine Driver =================== -The ASoC machine (or board) driver is the code that glues together the platform -and codec drivers. +The ASoC machine (or board) driver is the code that glues together all the +component drivers (e.g. codecs, platforms and DAIs). It also describes the +relationships between each componnent which include audio paths, GPIOs, +interrupts, clocking, jacks and voltage regulators. The machine driver can contain codec and platform specific code. It registers the audio subsystem with the kernel as a platform device and is represented by diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt index d57efad37e0a..3a08a2c9150c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ ASoC Platform Driver ==================== -An ASoC platform driver can be divided into audio DMA and SoC DAI configuration -and control. The platform drivers only target the SoC CPU and must have no board -specific code. +An ASoC platform driver class can be divided into audio DMA drivers, SoC DAI +drivers and DSP drivers. The platform drivers only target the SoC CPU and must +have no board specific code. Audio DMA ========= @@ -64,3 +64,16 @@ Each SoC DAI driver must provide the following features:- 5) Suspend and resume (optional) Please see codec.txt for a description of items 1 - 4. + + +SoC DSP Drivers +=============== + +Each SoC DSP driver usually supplies the following features :- + + 1) DAPM graph + 2) Mixer controls + 3) DMA IO to/from DSP buffers (if applicable) + 4) Definition of DSP front end (FE) PCM devices. + +Please see DPCM.txt for a description of item 4. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index ab7d16efa96b..26b7ee491df8 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -182,6 +182,7 @@ core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. %<NUL> '%' is dropped %% output one '%' %p pid + %P global pid (init PID namespace) %u uid %g gid %d dump mode, matches PR_SET_DUMPABLE and @@ -289,13 +290,24 @@ Default value is "/sbin/hotplug". kptr_restrict: This toggle indicates whether restrictions are placed on -exposing kernel addresses via /proc and other interfaces. When -kptr_restrict is set to (0), there are no restrictions. When -kptr_restrict is set to (1), the default, kernel pointers -printed using the %pK format specifier will be replaced with 0's -unless the user has CAP_SYSLOG. When kptr_restrict is set to -(2), kernel pointers printed using %pK will be replaced with 0's -regardless of privileges. +exposing kernel addresses via /proc and other interfaces. + +When kptr_restrict is set to (0), the default, there are no restrictions. + +When kptr_restrict is set to (1), kernel pointers printed using the %pK +format specifier will be replaced with 0's unless the user has CAP_SYSLOG +and effective user and group ids are equal to the real ids. This is +because %pK checks are done at read() time rather than open() time, so +if permissions are elevated between the open() and the read() (e.g via +a setuid binary) then %pK will not leak kernel pointers to unprivileged +users. Note, this is a temporary solution only. The correct long-term +solution is to do the permission checks at open() time. Consider removing +world read permissions from files that use %pK, and using dmesg_restrict +to protect against uses of %pK in dmesg(8) if leaking kernel pointer +values to unprivileged users is a concern. + +When kptr_restrict is set to (2), kernel pointers printed using +%pK will be replaced with 0's regardless of privileges. ============================================================== @@ -354,6 +366,82 @@ utilize. ============================================================== +numa_balancing + +Enables/disables automatic page fault based NUMA memory +balancing. Memory is moved automatically to nodes +that access it often. + +Enables/disables automatic NUMA memory balancing. On NUMA machines, there +is a performance penalty if remote memory is accessed by a CPU. When this +feature is enabled the kernel samples what task thread is accessing memory +by periodically unmapping pages and later trapping a page fault. At the +time of the page fault, it is determined if the data being accessed should +be migrated to a local memory node. + +The unmapping of pages and trapping faults incur additional overhead that +ideally is offset by improved memory locality but there is no universal +guarantee. If the target workload is already bound to NUMA nodes then this +feature should be disabled. Otherwise, if the system overhead from the +feature is too high then the rate the kernel samples for NUMA hinting +faults may be controlled by the numa_balancing_scan_period_min_ms, +numa_balancing_scan_delay_ms, numa_balancing_scan_period_max_ms, +numa_balancing_scan_size_mb, numa_balancing_settle_count sysctls and +numa_balancing_migrate_deferred. + +============================================================== + +numa_balancing_scan_period_min_ms, numa_balancing_scan_delay_ms, +numa_balancing_scan_period_max_ms, numa_balancing_scan_size_mb + +Automatic NUMA balancing scans tasks address space and unmaps pages to +detect if pages are properly placed or if the data should be migrated to a +memory node local to where the task is running. Every "scan delay" the task +scans the next "scan size" number of pages in its address space. When the +end of the address space is reached the scanner restarts from the beginning. + +In combination, the "scan delay" and "scan size" determine the scan rate. +When "scan delay" decreases, the scan rate increases. The scan delay and +hence the scan rate of every task is adaptive and depends on historical +behaviour. If pages are properly placed then the scan delay increases, +otherwise the scan delay decreases. The "scan size" is not adaptive but +the higher the "scan size", the higher the scan rate. + +Higher scan rates incur higher system overhead as page faults must be +trapped and potentially data must be migrated. However, the higher the scan +rate, the more quickly a tasks memory is migrated to a local node if the +workload pattern changes and minimises performance impact due to remote +memory accesses. These sysctls control the thresholds for scan delays and +the number of pages scanned. + +numa_balancing_scan_period_min_ms is the minimum time in milliseconds to +scan a tasks virtual memory. It effectively controls the maximum scanning +rate for each task. + +numa_balancing_scan_delay_ms is the starting "scan delay" used for a task +when it initially forks. + +numa_balancing_scan_period_max_ms is the maximum time in milliseconds to +scan a tasks virtual memory. It effectively controls the minimum scanning +rate for each task. + +numa_balancing_scan_size_mb is how many megabytes worth of pages are +scanned for a given scan. + +numa_balancing_settle_count is how many scan periods must complete before +the schedule balancer stops pushing the task towards a preferred node. This +gives the scheduler a chance to place the task on an alternative node if the +preferred node is overloaded. + +numa_balancing_migrate_deferred is how many page migrations get skipped +unconditionally, after a page migration is skipped because a page is shared +with other tasks. This reduces page migration overhead, and determines +how much stronger the "move task near its memory" policy scheduler becomes, +versus the "move memory near its task" memory management policy, for workloads +with shared memory. + +============================================================== + osrelease, ostype & version: # cat osrelease diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 36ecc26c7433..1fbd4eb7b64a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -119,8 +119,11 @@ other appears as 0 when read. dirty_background_ratio -Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which -the background kernel flusher threads will start writing out dirty data. +Contains, as a percentage of total available memory that contains free pages +and reclaimable pages, the number of pages at which the background kernel +flusher threads will start writing out dirty data. + +The total avaiable memory is not equal to total system memory. ============================================================== @@ -151,9 +154,11 @@ interval will be written out next time a flusher thread wakes up. dirty_ratio -Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which -a process which is generating disk writes will itself start writing out dirty -data. +Contains, as a percentage of total available memory that contains free pages +and reclaimable pages, the number of pages at which a process which is +generating disk writes will itself start writing out dirty data. + +The total avaiable memory is not equal to total system memory. ============================================================== @@ -200,17 +205,25 @@ fragmentation index is <= extfrag_threshold. The default value is 500. hugepages_treat_as_movable -This parameter is only useful when kernelcore= is specified at boot time to -create ZONE_MOVABLE for pages that may be reclaimed or migrated. Huge pages -are not movable so are not normally allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. A non-zero -value written to hugepages_treat_as_movable allows huge pages to be allocated -from ZONE_MOVABLE. - -Once enabled, the ZONE_MOVABLE is treated as an area of memory the huge -pages pool can easily grow or shrink within. Assuming that applications are -not running that mlock() a lot of memory, it is likely the huge pages pool -can grow to the size of ZONE_MOVABLE by repeatedly entering the desired value -into nr_hugepages and triggering page reclaim. +This parameter controls whether we can allocate hugepages from ZONE_MOVABLE +or not. If set to non-zero, hugepages can be allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. +ZONE_MOVABLE is created when kernel boot parameter kernelcore= is specified, +so this parameter has no effect if used without kernelcore=. + +Hugepage migration is now available in some situations which depend on the +architecture and/or the hugepage size. If a hugepage supports migration, +allocation from ZONE_MOVABLE is always enabled for the hugepage regardless +of the value of this parameter. +IOW, this parameter affects only non-migratable hugepages. + +Assuming that hugepages are not migratable in your system, one usecase of +this parameter is that users can make hugepage pool more extensible by +enabling the allocation from ZONE_MOVABLE. This is because on ZONE_MOVABLE +page reclaim/migration/compaction work more and you can get contiguous +memory more likely. Note that using ZONE_MOVABLE for non-migratable +hugepages can do harm to other features like memory hotremove (because +memory hotremove expects that memory blocks on ZONE_MOVABLE are always +removable,) so it's a trade-off responsible for the users. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt index 8cb4d7842a5f..0e307c94809a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt @@ -11,27 +11,29 @@ regardless of whatever else it is doing, unless it is completely locked up. You need to say "yes" to 'Magic SysRq key (CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ)' when configuring the kernel. When running a kernel with SysRq compiled in, /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq controls the functions allowed to be invoked via -the SysRq key. By default the file contains 1 which means that every -possible SysRq request is allowed (in older versions SysRq was disabled -by default, and you were required to specifically enable it at run-time -but this is not the case any more). Here is the list of possible values -in /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq: +the SysRq key. The default value in this file is set by the +CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ_DEFAULT_ENABLE config symbol, which itself defaults +to 1. Here is the list of possible values in /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq: 0 - disable sysrq completely 1 - enable all functions of sysrq >1 - bitmask of allowed sysrq functions (see below for detailed function description): - 2 - enable control of console logging level - 4 - enable control of keyboard (SAK, unraw) - 8 - enable debugging dumps of processes etc. - 16 - enable sync command - 32 - enable remount read-only - 64 - enable signalling of processes (term, kill, oom-kill) - 128 - allow reboot/poweroff - 256 - allow nicing of all RT tasks + 2 = 0x2 - enable control of console logging level + 4 = 0x4 - enable control of keyboard (SAK, unraw) + 8 = 0x8 - enable debugging dumps of processes etc. + 16 = 0x10 - enable sync command + 32 = 0x20 - enable remount read-only + 64 = 0x40 - enable signalling of processes (term, kill, oom-kill) + 128 = 0x80 - allow reboot/poweroff + 256 = 0x100 - allow nicing of all RT tasks You can set the value in the file by the following command: echo "number" >/proc/sys/kernel/sysrq +The number may be written here either as decimal or as hexadecimal +with the 0x prefix. CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ_DEFAULT_ENABLE must always be +written in hexadecimal. + Note that the value of /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq influences only the invocation via a keyboard. Invocation of any operation via /proc/sysrq-trigger is always allowed (by a user with admin privileges). diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py index 54d29c1320ed..230ce71f4d75 100755 --- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py @@ -440,15 +440,15 @@ def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): buf += " /*\n" buf += " * Setup default attribute lists for various fabric->tf_cit_tmpl\n" buf += " */\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_wwn_cit.ct_attrs = " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_np_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_auth_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" - buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_wwn_cit.ct_attrs = " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_np_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_auth_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_cit_tmpl.tfc_tpg_nacl_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" buf += " /*\n" buf += " * Register the fabric for use within TCM\n" buf += " */\n" diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal index 2b46f67b1ccb..9010c4416967 100644 --- a/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal +++ b/Documentation/thermal/exynos_thermal @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -Kernel driver exynos4_tmu +Kernel driver exynos_tmu ================= Supported chips: -* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC - Prefix: 'exynos4-tmu' +* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4, EXYNOS5 series of SoC Datasheet: Not publicly available Authors: Donggeun Kim <dg77.kim@samsung.com> +Authors: Amit Daniel <amit.daniel@samsung.com> -Description ------------ +TMU controller Description: +--------------------------- -This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC. +This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4/5 series of SoC. The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value through a register. @@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ The three equations are: TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged -TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4 generates interrupt +TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4/5 generates interrupt when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels. -The maximum number of configurable threshold is four. +The maximum number of configurable threshold is five. The threshold levels are defined as follows: Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold @@ -47,6 +47,31 @@ The threshold levels are defined as follows: through the corresponding registers. When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify kernel thermal framework -with the function exynos4_report_trigger. +with the function exynos_report_trigger. Although an interrupt condition for level_0 can be set, it can be used to synchronize the cooling action. + +TMU driver description: +----------------------- + +The exynos thermal driver is structured as, + + Kernel Core thermal framework + (thermal_core.c, step_wise.c, cpu_cooling.c) + ^ + | + | +TMU configuration data -------> TMU Driver <------> Exynos Core thermal wrapper +(exynos_tmu_data.c) (exynos_tmu.c) (exynos_thermal_common.c) +(exynos_tmu_data.h) (exynos_tmu.h) (exynos_thermal_common.h) + +a) TMU configuration data: This consist of TMU register offsets/bitfields + described through structure exynos_tmu_registers. Also several + other platform data (struct exynos_tmu_platform_data) members + are used to configure the TMU. +b) TMU driver: This component initialises the TMU controller and sets different + thresholds. It invokes core thermal implementation with the call + exynos_report_trigger. +c) Exynos Core thermal wrapper: This provides 3 wrapper function to use the + Kernel core thermal framework. They are exynos_unregister_thermal, + exynos_register_thermal and exynos_report_trigger. diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt index a71bd5b90fe8..87519cb379ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt @@ -134,6 +134,13 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices. this thermal zone and cdev, for a particular trip point. If nth bit is set, then the cdev and thermal zone are bound for trip point n. + .limits: This is an array of cooling state limits. Must have exactly + 2 * thermal_zone.number_of_trip_points. It is an array consisting + of tuples <lower-state upper-state> of state limits. Each trip + will be associated with one state limit tuple when binding. + A NULL pointer means <THERMAL_NO_LIMITS THERMAL_NO_LIMITS> + on all trips. These limits are used when binding a cdev to a + trip point. .match: This call back returns success(0) if the 'tz and cdev' need to be bound, as per platform data. 1.4.2 struct thermal_zone_params @@ -142,6 +149,11 @@ temperature) and throttle appropriate devices. This is an optional feature where some platforms can choose not to provide this data. .governor_name: Name of the thermal governor used for this zone + .no_hwmon: a boolean to indicate if the thermal to hwmon sysfs interface + is required. when no_hwmon == false, a hwmon sysfs interface + will be created. when no_hwmon == true, nothing will be done. + In case the thermal_zone_params is NULL, the hwmon interface + will be created (for backward compatibility). .num_tbps: Number of thermal_bind_params entries for this zone .tbp: thermal_bind_params entries diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt index ea2d35d64d26..bd365988e8d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt @@ -655,7 +655,11 @@ explains which is which. read the irq flags variable, an 'X' will always be printed here. - need-resched: 'N' task need_resched is set, '.' otherwise. + need-resched: + 'N' both TIF_NEED_RESCHED and PREEMPT_NEED_RESCHED is set, + 'n' only TIF_NEED_RESCHED is set, + 'p' only PREEMPT_NEED_RESCHED is set, + '.' otherwise. hardirq/softirq: 'H' - hard irq occurred inside a softirq. diff --git a/Documentation/vfio.txt b/Documentation/vfio.txt index d7993dcf8537..b9ca02370d46 100644 --- a/Documentation/vfio.txt +++ b/Documentation/vfio.txt @@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ group and can access them as follows: int container, group, device, i; struct vfio_group_status group_status = { .argsz = sizeof(group_status) }; - struct vfio_iommu_x86_info iommu_info = { .argsz = sizeof(iommu_info) }; - struct vfio_iommu_x86_dma_map dma_map = { .argsz = sizeof(dma_map) }; + struct vfio_iommu_type1_info iommu_info = { .argsz = sizeof(iommu_info) }; + struct vfio_iommu_type1_dma_map dma_map = { .argsz = sizeof(dma_map) }; struct vfio_device_info device_info = { .argsz = sizeof(device_info) }; /* Create a new container */ @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ group and can access them as follows: ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER, &container); /* Enable the IOMMU model we want */ - ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU) + ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU); /* Get addition IOMMU info */ ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_GET_INFO, &iommu_info); @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ group and can access them as follows: irq.index = i; - ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_IRQ_INFO, ®); + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_IRQ_INFO, &irq); /* Setup IRQs... eventfds, VFIO_DEVICE_SET_IRQS */ } diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..641ec9220179 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file. +api.txt + - KVM userspace API. +cpuid.txt + - KVM-specific cpuid leaves (x86). +devices/ + - KVM_CAP_DEVICE_CTRL userspace API. +hypercalls.txt + - KVM hypercalls. +locking.txt + - notes on KVM locks. +mmu.txt + - the x86 kvm shadow mmu. +msr.txt + - KVM-specific MSRs (x86). +nested-vmx.txt + - notes on nested virtualization for Intel x86 processors. +ppc-pv.txt + - the paravirtualization interface on PowerPC. +review-checklist.txt + - review checklist for KVM patches. +timekeeping.txt + - timekeeping virtualization for x86-based architectures. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 858aecf21db2..a30035dd4c26 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -1122,9 +1122,9 @@ struct kvm_cpuid2 { struct kvm_cpuid_entry2 entries[0]; }; -#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_SIGNIFCANT_INDEX 1 -#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATEFUL_FUNC 2 -#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATE_READ_NEXT 4 +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_SIGNIFCANT_INDEX BIT(0) +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATEFUL_FUNC BIT(1) +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATE_READ_NEXT BIT(2) struct kvm_cpuid_entry2 { __u32 function; @@ -1810,6 +1810,50 @@ registers, find a list below: PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TLB3PS | 32 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_EPTCFG | 32 PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_ICP_STATE | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TB_OFFSET | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_SPMC1 | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_SPMC2 | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_IAMR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TFHAR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TFIAR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TEXASR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_FSCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PSPB | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_EBBHR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_EBBRR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_BESCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TAR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_DPDES | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_DAWR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_DAWRX | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_CIABR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_IC | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_VTB | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_CSIGR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TACR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TCSCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PID | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_ACOP | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_VRSAVE | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_LPCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_PPR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_ARCH_COMPAT 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_GPR0 | 64 + ... + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_GPR31 | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_VSR0 | 128 + ... + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_VSR63 | 128 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_CR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_LR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_CTR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_FPSCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_AMR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_PPR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_VRSAVE | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_VSCR | 32 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_DSCR | 64 + PPC | KVM_REG_PPC_TM_TAR | 64 ARM registers are mapped using the lower 32 bits. The upper 16 of that is the register group type, or coprocessor number: @@ -2304,7 +2348,31 @@ Possible features: Depends on KVM_CAP_ARM_EL1_32BIT (arm64 only). -4.83 KVM_GET_REG_LIST +4.83 KVM_ARM_PREFERRED_TARGET + +Capability: basic +Architectures: arm, arm64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct struct kvm_vcpu_init (out) +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error +Errors: + ENODEV: no preferred target available for the host + +This queries KVM for preferred CPU target type which can be emulated +by KVM on underlying host. + +The ioctl returns struct kvm_vcpu_init instance containing information +about preferred CPU target type and recommended features for it. The +kvm_vcpu_init->features bitmap returned will have feature bits set if +the preferred target recommends setting these features, but this is +not mandatory. + +The information returned by this ioctl can be used to prepare an instance +of struct kvm_vcpu_init for KVM_ARM_VCPU_INIT ioctl which will result in +in VCPU matching underlying host. + + +4.84 KVM_GET_REG_LIST Capability: basic Architectures: arm, arm64 @@ -2323,8 +2391,7 @@ struct kvm_reg_list { This ioctl returns the guest registers that are supported for the KVM_GET_ONE_REG/KVM_SET_ONE_REG calls. - -4.84 KVM_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR +4.85 KVM_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR Capability: KVM_CAP_ARM_SET_DEVICE_ADDR Architectures: arm, arm64 @@ -2362,7 +2429,7 @@ must be called after calling KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP, but before calling KVM_RUN on any of the VCPUs. Calling this ioctl twice for any of the base addresses will return -EEXIST. -4.85 KVM_PPC_RTAS_DEFINE_TOKEN +4.86 KVM_PPC_RTAS_DEFINE_TOKEN Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_RTAS Architectures: ppc @@ -2661,6 +2728,77 @@ and usually define the validity of a groups of registers. (e.g. one bit }; +4.81 KVM_GET_EMULATED_CPUID + +Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_EMUL_CPUID +Architectures: x86 +Type: system ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_cpuid2 (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +struct kvm_cpuid2 { + __u32 nent; + __u32 flags; + struct kvm_cpuid_entry2 entries[0]; +}; + +The member 'flags' is used for passing flags from userspace. + +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_SIGNIFCANT_INDEX BIT(0) +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATEFUL_FUNC BIT(1) +#define KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATE_READ_NEXT BIT(2) + +struct kvm_cpuid_entry2 { + __u32 function; + __u32 index; + __u32 flags; + __u32 eax; + __u32 ebx; + __u32 ecx; + __u32 edx; + __u32 padding[3]; +}; + +This ioctl returns x86 cpuid features which are emulated by +kvm.Userspace can use the information returned by this ioctl to query +which features are emulated by kvm instead of being present natively. + +Userspace invokes KVM_GET_EMULATED_CPUID by passing a kvm_cpuid2 +structure with the 'nent' field indicating the number of entries in +the variable-size array 'entries'. If the number of entries is too low +to describe the cpu capabilities, an error (E2BIG) is returned. If the +number is too high, the 'nent' field is adjusted and an error (ENOMEM) +is returned. If the number is just right, the 'nent' field is adjusted +to the number of valid entries in the 'entries' array, which is then +filled. + +The entries returned are the set CPUID bits of the respective features +which kvm emulates, as returned by the CPUID instruction, with unknown +or unsupported feature bits cleared. + +Features like x2apic, for example, may not be present in the host cpu +but are exposed by kvm in KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID because they can be +emulated efficiently and thus not included here. + +The fields in each entry are defined as follows: + + function: the eax value used to obtain the entry + index: the ecx value used to obtain the entry (for entries that are + affected by ecx) + flags: an OR of zero or more of the following: + KVM_CPUID_FLAG_SIGNIFCANT_INDEX: + if the index field is valid + KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATEFUL_FUNC: + if cpuid for this function returns different values for successive + invocations; there will be several entries with the same function, + all with this flag set + KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATE_READ_NEXT: + for KVM_CPUID_FLAG_STATEFUL_FUNC entries, set if this entry is + the first entry to be read by a cpu + eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for + this function/index combination + + 6. Capabilities that can be enabled ----------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vfio.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vfio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ef51740c67ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/vfio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +VFIO virtual device +=================== + +Device types supported: + KVM_DEV_TYPE_VFIO + +Only one VFIO instance may be created per VM. The created device +tracks VFIO groups in use by the VM and features of those groups +important to the correctness and acceleration of the VM. As groups +are enabled and disabled for use by the VM, KVM should be updated +about their presence. When registered with KVM, a reference to the +VFIO-group is held by KVM. + +Groups: + KVM_DEV_VFIO_GROUP + +KVM_DEV_VFIO_GROUP attributes: + KVM_DEV_VFIO_GROUP_ADD: Add a VFIO group to VFIO-KVM device tracking + KVM_DEV_VFIO_GROUP_DEL: Remove a VFIO group from VFIO-KVM device tracking + +For each, kvm_device_attr.addr points to an int32_t file descriptor +for the VFIO group. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt index 41b7ac9884b5..f8869410d40c 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt @@ -132,10 +132,14 @@ See the comments in spte_has_volatile_bits() and mmu_spte_update(). ------------ Name: kvm_lock -Type: raw_spinlock +Type: spinlock_t Arch: any Protects: - vm_list - - hardware virtualization enable/disable + +Name: kvm_count_lock +Type: raw_spinlock_t +Arch: any +Protects: - hardware virtualization enable/disable Comment: 'raw' because hardware enabling/disabling must be atomic /wrt migration. @@ -151,3 +155,14 @@ Type: spinlock_t Arch: any Protects: -shadow page/shadow tlb entry Comment: it is a spinlock since it is used in mmu notifier. + +Name: kvm->srcu +Type: srcu lock +Arch: any +Protects: - kvm->memslots + - kvm->buses +Comment: The srcu read lock must be held while accessing memslots (e.g. + when using gfn_to_* functions) and while accessing in-kernel + MMIO/PIO address->device structure mapping (kvm->buses). + The srcu index can be stored in kvm_vcpu->srcu_idx per vcpu + if it is needed by multiple functions. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index 4ac359b7aa17..bdd4bb97fff7 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -165,6 +165,7 @@ which function as described above for the default huge page-sized case. Interaction of Task Memory Policy with Huge Page Allocation/Freeing +=================================================================== Whether huge pages are allocated and freed via the /proc interface or the /sysfs interface using the nr_hugepages_mempolicy attribute, the NUMA @@ -229,6 +230,7 @@ resulting effect on persistent huge page allocation is as follows: of huge pages over all on-lines nodes with memory. Per Node Hugepages Attributes +============================= A subset of the contents of the root huge page control directory in sysfs, described above, will be replicated under each the system device of each @@ -258,6 +260,7 @@ applied, from which node the huge page allocation will be attempted. Using Huge Pages +================ If the user applications are going to request huge pages using mmap system call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of @@ -296,20 +299,16 @@ calls, though the mount of filesystem will be required for using mmap calls without MAP_HUGETLB. For an example of how to use mmap with MAP_HUGETLB see map_hugetlb.c. -******************************************************************* +Examples +======== -/* - * map_hugetlb: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/map_hugetlb.c - */ +1) map_hugetlb: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/map_hugetlb.c -******************************************************************* +2) hugepage-shm: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-shm.c -/* - * hugepage-shm: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-shm.c - */ +3) hugepage-mmap: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-mmap.c -******************************************************************* - -/* - * hugepage-mmap: see tools/testing/selftests/vm/hugepage-mmap.c - */ +4) The libhugetlbfs (http://libhugetlbfs.sourceforge.net) library provides a + wide range of userspace tools to help with huge page usability, environment + setup, and control. Furthermore it provides useful test cases that should be + used when modifying code to ensure no regressions are introduced. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt b/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt index 9a12a5956bc0..55684d11a1e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/soft-dirty.txt @@ -28,6 +28,13 @@ This is so, since the pages are still mapped to physical memory, and thus all the kernel does is finds this fact out and puts both writable and soft-dirty bits on the PTE. + While in most cases tracking memory changes by #PF-s is more than enough +there is still a scenario when we can lose soft dirty bits -- a task +unmaps a previously mapped memory region and then maps a new one at exactly +the same place. When unmap is called, the kernel internally clears PTE values +including soft dirty bits. To notify user space application about such +memory region renewal the kernel always marks new memory regions (and +expanded regions) as soft dirty. This feature is actively used by the checkpoint-restore project. You can find more details about it on http://criu.org diff --git a/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock b/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6dea4fd5c961 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/split_page_table_lock @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +Split page table lock +===================== + +Originally, mm->page_table_lock spinlock protected all page tables of the +mm_struct. But this approach leads to poor page fault scalability of +multi-threaded applications due high contention on the lock. To improve +scalability, split page table lock was introduced. + +With split page table lock we have separate per-table lock to serialize +access to the table. At the moment we use split lock for PTE and PMD +tables. Access to higher level tables protected by mm->page_table_lock. + +There are helpers to lock/unlock a table and other accessor functions: + - pte_offset_map_lock() + maps pte and takes PTE table lock, returns pointer to the taken + lock; + - pte_unmap_unlock() + unlocks and unmaps PTE table; + - pte_alloc_map_lock() + allocates PTE table if needed and take the lock, returns pointer + to taken lock or NULL if allocation failed; + - pte_lockptr() + returns pointer to PTE table lock; + - pmd_lock() + takes PMD table lock, returns pointer to taken lock; + - pmd_lockptr() + returns pointer to PMD table lock; + +Split page table lock for PTE tables is enabled compile-time if +CONFIG_SPLIT_PTLOCK_CPUS (usually 4) is less or equal to NR_CPUS. +If split lock is disabled, all tables guaded by mm->page_table_lock. + +Split page table lock for PMD tables is enabled, if it's enabled for PTE +tables and the architecture supports it (see below). + +Hugetlb and split page table lock +--------------------------------- + +Hugetlb can support several page sizes. We use split lock only for PMD +level, but not for PUD. + +Hugetlb-specific helpers: + - huge_pte_lock() + takes pmd split lock for PMD_SIZE page, mm->page_table_lock + otherwise; + - huge_pte_lockptr() + returns pointer to table lock; + +Support of split page table lock by an architecture +--------------------------------------------------- + +There's no need in special enabling of PTE split page table lock: +everything required is done by pgtable_page_ctor() and pgtable_page_dtor(), +which must be called on PTE table allocation / freeing. + +Make sure the architecture doesn't use slab allocator for page table +allocation: slab uses page->slab_cache and page->first_page for its pages. +These fields share storage with page->ptl. + +PMD split lock only makes sense if you have more than two page table +levels. + +PMD split lock enabling requires pgtable_pmd_page_ctor() call on PMD table +allocation and pgtable_pmd_page_dtor() on freeing. + +Allocation usually happens in pmd_alloc_one(), freeing in pmd_free() and +pmd_free_tlb(), but make sure you cover all PMD table allocation / freeing +paths: i.e X86_PAE preallocate few PMDs on pgd_alloc(). + +With everything in place you can set CONFIG_ARCH_ENABLE_SPLIT_PMD_PTLOCK. + +NOTE: pgtable_page_ctor() and pgtable_pmd_page_ctor() can fail -- it must +be handled properly. + +page->ptl +--------- + +page->ptl is used to access split page table lock, where 'page' is struct +page of page containing the table. It shares storage with page->private +(and few other fields in union). + +To avoid increasing size of struct page and have best performance, we use a +trick: + - if spinlock_t fits into long, we use page->ptr as spinlock, so we + can avoid indirect access and save a cache line. + - if size of spinlock_t is bigger then size of long, we use page->ptl as + pointer to spinlock_t and allocate it dynamically. This allows to use + split lock with enabled DEBUG_SPINLOCK or DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC, but costs + one more cache line for indirect access; + +The spinlock_t allocated in pgtable_page_ctor() for PTE table and in +pgtable_pmd_page_ctor() for PMD table. + +Please, never access page->ptl directly -- use appropriate helper. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt b/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt index 7e492d8aaeaf..00c3d31e7971 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/zswap.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ significant performance improvement if reads from the compressed cache are faster than reads from a swap device. NOTE: Zswap is a new feature as of v3.11 and interacts heavily with memory -reclaim. This interaction has not be fully explored on the large set of +reclaim. This interaction has not been fully explored on the large set of potential configurations and workloads that exist. For this reason, zswap is a work in progress and should be considered experimental. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Some potential benefits: drastically reducing life-shortening writes. Zswap evicts pages from compressed cache on an LRU basis to the backing swap -device when the compressed pool reaches it size limit. This requirement had +device when the compressed pool reaches its size limit. This requirement had been identified in prior community discussions. To enabled zswap, the "enabled" attribute must be set to 1 at boot time. e.g. @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ the backing swap device in the case that the compressed pool is full. Zswap makes use of zbud for the managing the compressed memory pool. Each allocation in zbud is not directly accessible by address. Rather, a handle is -return by the allocation routine and that handle must be mapped before being +returned by the allocation routine and that handle must be mapped before being accessed. The compressed memory pool grows on demand and shrinks as compressed pages are freed. The pool is not preallocated. @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ in the swap_map goes to 0) the swap code calls the zswap invalidate function, via frontswap, to free the compressed entry. Zswap seeks to be simple in its policies. Sysfs attributes allow for one user -controlled policies: +controlled policy: * max_pool_percent - The maximum percentage of memory that the compressed pool can occupy. |